ACM Administration Manual

ACM Administration Manual
MAXCS Release 7.0
Update 1
Enterprise and
MaxCS Private Cloud
June 10, 2014
WARNING! Toll fraud is committed when individuals unlawfully gain access to customer
telecommunication systems. This is a criminal offense. Currently, we do not know of any
telecommunications system that is immune to this type of criminal activity. AltiGen Communications, Inc.
will not accept liability for any damages, including long distance charges, which result from unauthorized
and/or unlawful use. Although AltiGen Communications, Inc. has designed security features into its
products, it is your sole responsibility to use the security features and to establish security practices
within your company, including training, security awareness, and call auditing.
NOTICE: While every effort has been made to ensure accuracy, AltiGen Communications, Inc., will not
be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained within the documentation. The
information contained in this documentation is subject to change without notice.
This documentation may be used only in accordance with the terms of the AltiGen Communications, Inc.,
License Agreement.
MAX Communication Server, MaxAdministrator, MaxCommunicator, MaxAgent, MaxSupervisor,
MaxOutlook, MaxInSight, MaxCall, AltiServ, AltiLink, AltiConsole, VRPlayer, Zoomerang, IPTalk, AltiMobile Extension, InTouch Dialer, and AltiReport are trademarks or registered trademarks of AltiGen
Communications, Inc. All other brand names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective manufacturers.
AltiGen's products are protected under one or more of the following U.S. patents, with other U.S. patents
pending: 6532230; 6192344; 6292549; 6493439; 6909780; 6738465; 6754202; 6766006; 6928078;
6909709; 6956848; 7058047; 7013007; 7027578; 7280649; 7308092.
AltiGen Communications, Inc.
410 East Plumeria Dr.
San Jose, CA 95134
Telephone: 888-AltiGen (258-4436)
Fax: 408-597-9020
E-mail: info@altigen.com
Web site:
www.altigen.com
Copyright © AltiGen Communications, Inc. 2014. All rights reserved.
Contents
ABOUT THIS DOCUMENTATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CHAPTER 1
New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
CHAPTER 2
System Requirements and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Minimum System Requirements . . . . . . .
Virtual Server Requirements: . . . . . . . .
MAXCS 7.0 Update 1 Client Applications
Boards Supported by ACC and ACM . . .
MAXCS Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation for Installation . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing MAX Communication Server . . .
Softswitch System Installation . . . . . . .
Installing MaxAdmin on a Network Client .
Uninstalling MAXCS 7.0 Update 1 . . . . . .
Troubleshooting (Error Messages) . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5
6
6
9
10
12
13
13
15
15
15
CHAPTER 3
Getting Around MaxAdministrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Logging In and Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Access Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The View Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boards View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Log View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Workgroup View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Resource Statistics Window . . . . . . . .
Assigning Seat-Based Client Licenses . . . . . . . .
Stopping the AltiGen Switching Service . . . . . . .
Programs Available from the Windows Start Menu
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
17
18
18
19
20
20
20
20
21
22
22
23
24
25
25
CHAPTER 4
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Setting General Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Setting a System Number Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Setting Business Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
i
Routing Calls on Holidays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Holiday Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Call Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating the Dates of Annual Holidays . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring System Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining System Call Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blocking Calls to Area Codes from All Extensions . . . . . .
Setting Unrestricted Area Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking Attacked Extensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blocking All Outgoing Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling Hop Off for Tie Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting 10-Digit Dialing Area Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding and Deleting Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up Call Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Database Configuration (Internal Log Service) . .
External (Remote) Logging of Call Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting Through a Local Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Country-Relevant Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Toll Call Prefixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Emergency Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialing Plan Rules for Non-North American Country. . . . .
Audio Peripheral Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Music On Hold and Recorded Announcements
RTP Resource Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Greeting and Update Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Overhead Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feature Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Feature Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limitation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
35
36
36
36
36
38
38
38
39
39
39
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
43
44
45
46
46
46
46
47
49
49
CHAPTER 5
Media Server and Gateway Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Managing Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding and Attaching a Gateway . . .
Detaching and Deleting a Gateway .
Changing Gateway ID and Password
Gateway Configuration Tool . . . . . .
Configuring the Applications Server .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
52
53
54
55
55
55
56
CHAPTER 6
Voice Mail Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Managing
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
ii
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Notification Retries . .
Message Management Options.
Message Recording Options . . .
Exchange Integration Options .
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
59
60
61
61
61
Setting E-mail Messaging Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Creating Distribution Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Defining a Distribution List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
CHAPTER 7
Auto Attendant Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Planning Is Essential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example: AA Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Auto Attendants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Auto Attendants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Auto Attendant Assignments . . . . . . . . . . .
Phrase Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Pre-Recorded Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording Custom Phrases from the AltiGen Phone .
Using Professionally Recorded Phrases . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
65
66
66
67
68
71
71
71
72
72
CHAPTER 8
Multilingual Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Configuration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Language Phrase Packages . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Language Phrase Packages . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring for a Multilingual System . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling Multilingual Support in the Auto Attendant
Configuring the Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension User Can Change Language Setting . . .
Using DNIS to Set the Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Which Language Will Be Used? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
75
76
76
76
77
78
79
80
81
CHAPTER 9
Call Recording Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Description of the Recorded File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Configuring Call Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Using a Remote Shared Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
CHAPTER 10
Application Extension Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Application Extension Setup
Application Failover Plan .
Application Information . .
Readying the Application .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
89
90
91
91
CHAPTER 11
Board Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Configuring Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Board Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Using the Triton Resource Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
iii
Using the Triton MeetMe Conference Board . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Triton Analog Station Board . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Triton Analog Trunk LS/GS and LS Boards
Configuring the Triton VoIP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Triton T1/E1 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up Channels on the Triton T1/E1 Board. . . . . . .
Installing a Channel Service Unit (CSU) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting T1/E1 Common Symptoms . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Virtual Boards SIPSP and H323SP . . . . . . . .
Configuring the SIPSP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the H323SP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Virtual Board HMCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assign HMCP Resources to IP Extensions . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the MAX1000/2000 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Virtual MobileExtSP Board . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
95
96
96
97
97
97
101
108
109
109
110
111
112
114
117
119
CHAPTER 12
Trunk Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Trunks Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Trunk Configuration Window . . . . . .
Selecting Trunks to Set Attributes . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring One or Multiple Trunks . . . . . . . . . .
Setting General Trunk Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . .
H323 Tie Trunk Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIP Tie Trunk Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIP Trunk Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring SIP Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Triton T1/E1 Trunk Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caller ID and DID Incoming Sequence Example
Triton Analog Trunk GS/LS Properties . . . . . . . .
Performing Impedance Match on Your Own . . .
Using the Match Impedance Button . . . . . . . . .
Measuring the Rx Level of a Trunk Channel . . .
If You Need to Improve the Rx Level . . . . . . . .
If You Don’t Have the Milli-Watt Test Number . .
Incoming Call Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regular Trunk Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Web IP Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outgoing Call Blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
121
121
122
123
123
123
126
126
127
128
131
133
134
136
136
138
138
138
140
141
141
142
CHAPTER 13
In Call Routing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Caller ID Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding and Deleting Caller ID Route Entries .
Defining Caller ID Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DNIS Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
143
144
144
145
Adding and Deleting DNIS Route Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining DNIS Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
146
CHAPTER 14
Out Call Routing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Configuring Out Call Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Route Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Default Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Dialing Patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Example – Solving 10-digit Dialing . .
Resolving Dialing Delay: Non-USA/Canada Countries
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
149
150
152
153
154
156
CHAPTER 15
Extension Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
About the Apply To Button . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Personal Information . . . . . . . . . .
Account Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Recording Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Location and Type . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Line Properties. . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Extension Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Group Options for an Extension .
Adding or Removing Group Assignments . . .
Setting up Station Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . .
Editing Speed Dial Entries . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Mailbox Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting an Information-Only Mailbox . . . . .
Disabling a Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assign Exchange Integration License. . . . .
SMTP/POP3 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mail Forwarding Options . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Message Playback Options . . . . . .
Press Zero Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Mailbox Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Message Notification Options . . . . . .
Setting the Message Types for Notification.
Emergency Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unusual VM Activity Notification . . . . . . . .
Setting the Type of Notification . . . . . . . .
Setting Notification Timing. . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Notification Business Hours . . . . . .
Enabling Message Notification . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Calling Restrictions . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Call Restriction Options . . . . . . . .
Setting Other Call Restrictions . . . . . . . . .
Setting Answering Options . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forwarding All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
160
160
161
163
163
165
165
167
167
168
169
170
171
171
172
172
172
172
173
173
173
173
174
174
175
175
176
176
177
177
177
178
178
179
180
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
v
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling Busy Calls . . . . . . . . .
Setting Call Waiting Options . . .
Handling Unanswered Calls . . .
Configuring One Number Access .
One Number Access Options. . .
Call Screening . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Caller ID Verification . .
Specifying Forwarding Numbers
Setting Up Monitor Lists . . . . . . .
Restrictions and Defaults . . . . .
Configuring a Monitor List . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
181
181
181
181
182
183
183
184
184
184
184
185
CHAPTER 16
Setting Up IP Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Signaling Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting an IP Extension . . . . . . . . . .
Setting VoIP Codec for IP Extension
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
188
189
191
192
CHAPTER 17
AltiGen IP Phone Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Configuring the AltiGen IP Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Phone Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Programmable Keys and Workgroup Status. . .
Configuring Auto-Discovery of Server IP Address . . . . . . . .
Setting Up DHCP Option 120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On the AltiGen IP Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Possible scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabling Auto-Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When You Have Two AltiGen Servers in the Same Network
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
195
197
199
201
201
203
203
203
204
CHAPTER 18
Mobile Extension Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
MobileExtSP Board Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the MobileExtSP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring an Extension as a Mobile Extension . . . . . .
Additional Configuration for MaxMobile Communicator .
Voice Mail for Mobile Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile Extension Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
205
206
209
211
212
212
CHAPTER 19
Hunt Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Overview of Huntgroup Configuration Window
Setting Up Huntgroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing Basic Hunt Group Attributes . .
Setting Call Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing Hunt Group Membership . . . . . .
vi
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
214
215
215
216
216
Adding Extensions to a Hunt Group. . . . . . .
Removing Extensions from a Hunt Group: . .
Setting Login Status for System Restart . . .
Setting Hunt Group Mail Management . . . . . .
Disabling a Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting E-mail Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Mailbox Playback Options . . . . . . . .
Setting Mailbox Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Message Notification Options . . . . . . .
Setting the Message Types for Notification. .
Setting the Type of Notification . . . . . . . . .
Setting Notification Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Notification Business Hours . . . . . . .
Setting Call Handling Options . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling Busy Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forwarding All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling Unanswered Calls . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting a Hunt Group’s Call Distribution Rule
Setting Queue Management Options . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
216
217
217
217
218
218
219
219
219
220
220
221
222
222
223
223
223
224
224
CHAPTER 20
Paging Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Setting Up a Paging Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Members to a Paging Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing Members from a Paging Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
228
228
229
CHAPTER 21
Line Park Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Implementation notes . . . . . . .
Configuring Line Park . . . . . . .
Setting Up a Line Park Group .
Deleting a Line Park Group . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
231
232
232
234
CHAPTER 22
Workgroup Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Creating and Configuring Workgroups . . . . . .
Overview of Workgroup Configuration Window
Setting Up Workgroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing Basic Workgroup Attributes . . .
Setting Call Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Level Threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Workgroup Recording Options . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing Workgroup Membership . . . . . . .
Log In/Out a Group Member . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Login Status for System Restart . . .
Setting Business Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Skill Based Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Skills for a Workgroup . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
236
236
237
237
237
238
239
240
241
241
241
243
244
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
vii
Setting Rules for Skill Based Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Skill Based Routing Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Workgroup Mail Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabling a Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting E-mail Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Mailbox Playback Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Mailbox Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Press Zero Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Mail Access Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Message Notification Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Message Types for Notification . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Type of Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Notification Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Notification Business Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Call Handling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling Busy Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forwarding All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling Unanswered Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of Rings Before Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting IntraGroup Call Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable Single Call Handling for Agents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling Calls when Group Members Are RNA/Logged Out.
Announce Agent Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter Workgroup Call Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Queue Management – Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Queue Phrase Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Queue Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expected Wait Time Sampling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Queue Overflow Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quit Queue Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Priority Promotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supervisor Queue Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Queue Management – Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Queue Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Extension Queue Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agent Logout Reason Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MaxCall Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Transmitted CID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a Transmitted CID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Transmitted CID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
244
245
246
247
247
248
248
248
248
249
249
249
250
251
251
251
252
252
253
253
254
254
254
254
255
256
256
257
257
257
258
258
258
259
259
260
261
262
262
263
264
264
CHAPTER 23
Using MeetMe Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
MeetMe Conference Features . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the MeetMe Conference Extension .
MeetMe Conference Window . . . . . . . . . . .
Working in the MeetMe Conference Window
viii
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
265
266
266
267
Creating a Meeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-mailing a Meeting Invitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying the E-mail Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and Stopping a Meeting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuing a Meeting Beyond Its Duration Time .
What the MeetMe Conference Host Can Do . . . . . .
Joining a MeetMe Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
267
270
271
271
271
272
272
CHAPTER 24
Location-Based E911 (for Roaming Users) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
About E911 Location IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Designing E911 Location IDs for Your Organization . . . . . . . . . . . .
AltiGen IP Phones Supporting E911 Location IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E911 Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E911 Location ID Configuration Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the E911 Location
Requiring a Password to Change E911 Location ID . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning E911 Locations on AltiGen IP Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning E911 Location IDs to FXS Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
......
......
......
......
......
ID Table
......
......
......
273
274
274
275
275
275
277
278
279
CHAPTER 25
Network Configuration Guidelines for VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
ISP/Intranet Quality of Service (QoS) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual LANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet II Framing Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WAN Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WAN Router Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firewall Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Using NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Configuration Guidelines for AltiGen IP Phones
Configuration Guidelines for NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Private Network Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . .
VPN Network Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
281
281
282
284
284
285
285
285
285
286
286
288
CHAPTER 26
Enterprise VoIP Network Management
Understanding VoIP Bandwidth Requirements
Opening Enterprise Manager . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Enterprise Manager . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Enterprise Manager Password .
Setting VoIP Codec Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning Codec Profiles to IP Addresses . . . .
Defining IP Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Your Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring a Public or Intranet Pipe . . . . . .
Configuring MAXCS Behind NAT . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
292
292
293
295
295
298
300
300
301
302
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
ix
Defining the IP Dialing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Multi-site VoIP Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Multi-site VoIP Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Declaring Additional Servers for the VoIP Domain . . . .
Working with Servers in the Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Server to a VoIP Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rejoining a Server to the VoIP Domain . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting an Alternate Server for AltiGen IP Phones . . . .
Managing Domain Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSTN Failover When the TCP/IP Network is Down . . . .
The Scope of an Extension in the VoIP Domain . . . . . .
Changing an Extension’s Scope from Local to Global . .
Changing an Extension’s Scope from Global to Local . .
Relocating a Global Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redirecting AltiGen IP Phones When a Server Is Down
Configuring Departments in a Multi-site VoIP Domain . .
Configuring Global Least Cost Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When Information May Be Out of Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
303
306
306
308
309
309
310
311
313
314
314
316
316
317
319
320
322
323
CHAPTER 27
System Report Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
System Summary Report . . . . . .
IP Cumulative Traffic Statistics . .
Resetting Cumulative Statistics .
Using SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNMP Management Console . . .
Configuring MAXCS for SNMP . .
List of Traps Sent . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
325
326
327
327
327
327
328
CHAPTER 28
Microsoft Exchange Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
MaxCS Private Cloud Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When You Install MAXCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exchange Integration Configuration Steps . . . . . . . . . . .
Extra Steps for Bridged Access and Native VM Integration
Configuring UM Settings for Each User. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring for Out Calling from UM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring MaxAdministrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When You Create a New Mailbox User . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing for Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
331
331
332
333
336
339
341
345
346
347
347
348
CHAPTER 29
TAPI Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Installing the TAPI Proxy Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Setting Up the Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
x
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Installing the AltiGen TAPI Service Provider on the Client
Setting Up Phone and Modem Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up Phone Dialer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing TAPI Service Provider on the Client System . . . .
Making a Call in Microsoft Outlook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing TAPI Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
352
352
354
354
355
356
CHAPTER 30
Tools and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
AltiGen Board Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CT-Bus Test Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup and Restore Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backing Up Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduling Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restoring Backed up Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAXCS Admin & Extension Security Checker . . .
Checking Extension Security . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start & Stop All AltiGen Services . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters for Trace Collector . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice File Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work/Hunt Group Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting and Importing Extensions . . . . . . . . .
Importing Extensions from a .csv File . . . . . . .
Importing Extensions from the Active Directory
Exporting the Extensions in a MAXCS System .
AltiGen Custom Phrase Manager . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a New Phrase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing a Phrase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a Phrase Name or Description . . . . . . .
Deleting Phrases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re-recording Phrases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
357
358
358
358
359
360
360
361
362
363
363
365
365
366
367
368
369
369
371
372
373
374
375
375
375
376
APPENDIX A
E1-R2 and E1 ISDN PRI Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Signaling Values, By Country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 ISDN PRI Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protocol/B Channel Maintenance Message Settings, By Country . . . . . . . .
380
387
389
APPENDIX B
Required Service Parameters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Service Parameters/Request Information for T1
Technical Information for T1 with Voice . . . . .
Type of Registered Services Provided . . . . . .
Service Order Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
391
391
392
392
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
xi
T1 Channel Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSU/DSU Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Parameters/Request Information for
Technical Information for PRI with Voice .
PRI Channel Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Parameters/Request Information for
Technical Information for E1 with Voice . .
E1 Channel Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSU/DSU Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...
...
PRI
...
...
E1
...
...
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
392
392
392
393
393
393
394
394
394
APPENDIX C
Network Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Remote IP Phones Behind NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
APPENDIX D
Technical Support & Product Repair Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Technical Support Eligibility . . . . . . . . . . .
How To Reach AltiGen Technical Support .
Product Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Training for Administrators . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
399
399
400
400
APPENDIX E
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Poor Voice Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Cannot Make a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
IP Resource Does Not Appear in Current Resource Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
xii
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
About This Documentation
This manual is designed for AltiGen Partners, administrators, and technicians who are
responsible for configuration and administration of a MaxCS 7.0 system.
Related Publications
Related MaxCS 7.0 documentation:
• MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 All Software Solution Deployment Guide
• MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Upgrade Guidelines
• MaxCommunicator Manual
• MaxOutlook Manual
• MaxAgent Manual
• MaxSupervisor Manual
• MaxInsight Manual
• MaxMobile iPhone User Guide and Quick Reference
• MaxMobile Android User Guide and Quick Reference
• AltiConsole Manual
• CDR Manual
• Advanced Call Router Manual
• AltiGen IP Phone User Manuals
• ActiveX Manual
• AlitReport Manual
• VRManager Manual
Additional Release Notes:
• Sightmax Application Notes
• Salesforce Connector Configuration Guide
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
1
2
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
1
New Features
The MAXCS 7.0 Update 1 release includes enhancements in the following areas (refer to the MaxCS 7.0
Update 1 New Features Guide or the appropriate chapter or manual for full details):
• Operating System Support - Because Microsoft is ending support for Windows XP effective in April,
2014, MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 does not support that operating system. MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 also supports
Windows 2012 R2.
• Location-Based E911 Configuration (For Relocation) - E911 Caller ID (CID) information is sent to
PSAPs (Public Safety Answering Point) when a user calls 911 from an IP phone. A new feature has been
added to MaxCS that allows administrators to configure an E911 Location ID for each geographic location.
Each AltiGen IP phone can then be assigned an appropriate E911 Location ID.
This feature is not designed for use with stationery phones, only for phones that are moved from one
physical location to another.
Configuring E911 Location IDs ensures that emergency calls placed from these IP phones:
• Will call the appropriate local PSAP, based upon the phone's physical location.
• Will transmit Caller ID details that will help emergency response teams find the right location.
Refer to the chapter Location-Based E911 (for Roaming Users) on page 273 for full details.
• Salesforce Integration - Salesforce.com provides a CTI toolkit to telephony-enable its cloud-based CRM
application. When enabled, a softphone control panel appears in the web browser, for agent call control.
AltiGen encapsulates the CTI toolkit into a connector for MaxCS Release 7.0 Update 1, to integrate an
AltiGen IP PBX system with Salesforce.com.
A Salesforce Integration Seat license has been added to the License Information and Client Seat License
Management pages.
Refer to the MaxCS Connector for Salesforce.com Application Notes for full details.
• AltiReport Enhancements - AltiReport uses an email server to send scheduled reports. In MaxCS 7.0
Update 1, AltiReport can now communicate with encrypted email servers such as the Google mail server
(Gmail) or the Hotmail server.
AltiReport detects the requirements of the specified email server automatically; no configuration is
needed to indicate whether the email server requires encryption.
When using an encrypted email server, for authentication purposes the Sender Email Address entry
must be the same as the SMTP Account Name entry. The remote email server does not allow users to
use a different sender email address than the real email account.
Refer to the AltiReport Manual for full details.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
3
Chapter 1: New Features
• Client Enhancements - The following client enhancements are introduced in MaxCS 7.0 Update 1:
• The MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 clients now support Windows 8.1 (64-bit).
• MaxSupervisor - Support for up to 50 concurrent MaxSupervisor connections, improved data receiving
and display performance. In addition, there is a new automatic re-sort interval for Agent View and Agent
Status. Refer to the MaxSupervisor Manual for full details.
• MaxCommunicator, MaxAgent, and MaxSupervisor - Users can now choose to display either the local
time or the server time for voicemail messages. Also, the application icon now stays on the Windows
task bar and in the Windows system tray when you minimize these applications.
• MaxOutlook Support for Outlook 2013 - The MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 release of MaxOutlook supports
Microsoft Outlook 2007, 2010, and 2013.
Note: Only the 32-bit version of Microsoft Outlook is supported.
Users who upgrade their Microsoft Outlook application from version 2007/2010 to Outlook 2013 will need
to reinstall MaxOutlook.
• Move IP Address between Trusted and Malicious Device List - In some rare scenarios, the MaxCS
server can capture regular IP address and add them to the Malicious SIP Device list.
You can now more easily and directly move IP addresses from the Trusted list to the Malicious list. Within
MaxCS Administrator, select SIPSP > Board Configuration > Advanced Configuration. Two buttons
have been added to this page, to move an IP address from one list directly to the other. See Configuring
the SIPSP Board on page 110 for details.
• Advanced Call Router Enhancements - Advanced Call Router (ACR) allows verification of incoming call
information against the database. In earlier releases, ACR only confirmed that the specified information
existed; it left the transfer target to be configured in the rule settings. This design mandated that every
transfer target needed a unique routing rule, which meant that customers had to create numerous rules
to handle calls.
In MaxCS 7.0 Update 1, the routing target information can be retrieved from the database record. This
means that customers need to create (and maintain) far fewer rules to process calls.
To accomplish this, rules now have an additional Target action, Route by Query Result. Refer to the
Advanced Call Router Manual for full details and examples.
• Block Unauthorized SIP Invite Requests - MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 includes a filter to block unauthorized
SIP Invite requests. When the MaxCS server receives a SIP Invite request, if the IP address or the caller
source is NOT in one of the following lists, the call will be ignored (dropped):
–
–
–
–
–
–
IP address is in the MaxCS registered IP extension list
IP address is in the configured SIP Trunk list
IP address is in the IP dialing table list
IP address is in the SIP Allow IP list
The caller is from another AltiGen system
The caller is from an AltiGen IP phone
The filter is disabled by default. To enable the filter, add the following registry entry and press VM&SP
Log Dump under the Diagnostics > Trace menu (or just restart the system).
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\AltiGen Communications,
Inc.\AltiWare\Service Providers\SIPSP
"BlockSIPUnauthorizedCall"=dword:00000001
4
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER 2
2
System Requirements and Installation
• System requirements
• MAXCS licenses
• Preparation for installation
• Installing MAX Communication Server
• Installing MaxAdministrator on a network client
• Uninstalling MAX Communication Server
• Troubleshooting
Minimum System Requirements
This section lists the operating systems supported by each MAXCS component, as well as system
requirements.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Requirements
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Softswitch
(Software only)
• Windows 7 (64-bit)
• Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 with 2GB RAM
• Windows Server 2012 R2
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 All-In-One
(Max1000)
• Windows 7 (32-bit) with 1GB RAM
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 All-In-One
(Max2000 & Office 3)
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Max4000 All-InOne
MaxAdministrator
• Windows Server 2008 SP2 (32-bit) with 2GB RAM
Note: The 64-bit version of Windows will not work on Max2000/
Office series chassis.
• Windows Server 2008 64-bit with SP2, with 2GB RAM
Operating Systems:
• Windows Server 2003 with SP3 (32-bit)
• Windows Server 2008 R2 with SP1 (64-bit)
• Windows Server 2008 with SP2 (32-bit)
• Windows Server 2012 R2
• Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit)
• Windows 8.1 (64-bit)
System Requirements:
• Monitor with at least 1024x768 resolution
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
5
Chapter 2: System Requirements and Installation
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Requirements
Operating Systems:
Note: Windows XP is no longer supported.
• Windows Server 2008 R2 with SP1
• Windows Server 2008 with SP2
• Windows Server 2003 with SP2 or later
• Windows 7
Enterprise Manager
System Requirements:
• 1 GB RAM
• 20 GB available hard drive disk space
Note: The installation program will install JAVA JRE 1.6
automatically
Operating Systems:
• Windows 7 64-bit
• Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 (64-bit)
• Windows Server 2012 R2
HMCP
System Requirements:
•
Intel based 3 GHz Hyper-Thread or faster
CDR Database Support:
• Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express
• Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2
• Microsoft SQL Server 2012 SP1
Integration
Note: Running SQL Server in a MAXCS machine is not
supported.
Email Server Integration:
• Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 , 2010, or 2013
Note:
To read online Help pages, the system must be running Internet Explorer 6.0 or later.
Virtual Server Requirements:
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 supports the following virtual server environments:
• VMware ESX 4.1 and 5.1; allocate 4 Intel cores @ 2GHz each, 4GB memory, and 160GB hard drive
•
Hyper-V version 6.2.9200.16384
MAXCS 7.0 Update 1 Client Applications
This section describes the operating systems supported by each individual client, and lists each client’s
minimum system requirements.
VRM Server Requirements
6
Operating Systems
•
•
•
•
System/Processor
• IBM/PC AT compatible system
• Intel 2 GHz Pentium 4 or equivalent
Disk Space
40GB
Windows Server 2012 R2
Windows Server 2008 R2 with SP1 (64-bit)
Windows Server 2008 with SP2 (32-bit)
Windows Server 2003 with SP 3
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Minimum System Requirements
VRM Server Requirements
RAM
1GB RAM
• The installation program will install JAVA JRE 1.6 automatically.
• Installation requires 1 GB available hard drive disk space.
Notes
However, more space is required for CDR storage.
• Runs on stand-alone system
• Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)
• Windows 8.1 (64-bit)
VRM client
Advanced Call Router Requirements
Operating Systems
•
•
•
•
•
System/Processor
• IBM/PC AT compatible system
• Intel 2GHz Pentium 4 or equivalent
Disk Space
40 GB
ODBC
ACR requires a 32-bit ODBC
RAM
1 GB RAM
Windows Server 2012 R2
Windows Server 2008 R2 with SP1 (64-bit)
Windows Server 2008 with SP2 (32-bit)
Windows Server 2003 with SP 3
Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)
AltiReport Requirements
Operating Systems
•
•
•
•
Applications
• JRE 1.6
• Database with ODBC/JDBC Driver SQL Server
• Client system: Internet Explorer 8.0, 9.0, or 10.0
System/Processor
• IBM/PC AT compatible system
• Intel 2GHz Pentium 4 or equivalent
Disk Space
60GB
RAM
1GB RAM (2GB RAM required if it runs with SQL Server)
Notes
• Tomcat 6.0 will be installed automatically
• Runs on stand-alone system
Windows Server 2012 R2
Windows Server 2008 R2 with SP1 with IIS (64-bit)
Windows Server 2008 with SP2 with IIS (32-bit)
Windows Server 2003 with SP3
Note: Do not install AltiReport with AltiServe.
MaxAgent, MaxCommunicator, MaxSupervisor Requirements
Note: Windows XP is no longer supported.
Operating Systems
3rd Party Integration Software
(MaxCommunicator and
AltiGen Clients)
• Windows 8.1 (64-bit)
• Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit)
• Windows 2008 (32-bit or 64-bit)
• Outlook 2007, 2010, or 2013
• Goldmine 6.5, 6.7, 7.0
• ACT! 2007, 2009, and 2010
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
7
Chapter 2: System Requirements and Installation
MaxAgent, MaxCommunicator, MaxSupervisor Requirements
System/Processor
• IBM/PC AT compatible system
• 2GHz CPU or faster
.NET Framework
Microsoft .NET 2.0 framework or higher
Disk Space
1GB
RAM
1GB RAM
Notes
SVGA monitor (1024x768) with 256-color display or better;
Keyboard and mouse
MaxSupervisor
MaxCS supports up to 50 concurrent MaxSupervisor users
MaxOutlook Requirements
Operating Systems
Note: Windows XP is no longer supported.
• Windows 8.1 (64-bit)
• Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit)
3rd Party Software
• Outlook 2007, 2010, or 2013 (32-bit only)
System/Processor
• IBM/PC AT compatible system
• 2 GHz CPU or faster
.NET Framework
Microsoft .NET 2.0 framework or higher
Disk Space
1GB
RAM
1GB RAM
Notes
• SVGA monitor (1024x768) with 256-color display or better
• Keyboard and mouse
AltiConsole Requirements
Note: Windows XP is no longer supported.
Operating Systems
• Windows 8.1 (64-bit)
• Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit)
System/Processor
• IBM/PC AT compatible system
• 1GHz CPU or faster
Disk Space
1GB
RAM
1GB RAM
Notes
• SVGA monitor (1024x768) with 256-color display or better
• Keyboard and mouse
AltiGen SDK Requirements
ActiveX Control for
MaxCommunicator
and AltiAgent
AltiAPI (Alticomlib.dll)
8
Note: Windows XP is no longer supported.
• Windows 8.1 (64-bit)
• Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit)
Note: Windows XP is no longer supported.
• Windows 8.1 (64-bit)
• Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit)
• Windows Server 2012 R2
• Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 (64-bit)
• Windows Server 2008 SP2 (32-bit)
• Windows Server 2003 SP3
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Minimum System Requirements
MaxInsight Requirements
Note: Windows XP is no longer supported.
• Windows 8.1 (64-bit)
• Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit)
Operating Systems
System/Processor
• IBM/PC AT compatible system
• 1 GHz CPU or faster
Disk Space
1GB
RAM
1GB RAM
Notes
• SVGA monitor (1024x768) with 256-color display or better
• Keyboard and mouse
TAPI Requirements
• Windows 7 (32-bit and 64 bit)
• Windows 2008 (32-bit)
• Windows 2003 SP3
TAPI Server
Note: Windows XP is no longer supported.
TAPI Client (all 32-bit)
• Windows 7 (32-bit)
MaxMobile Requirements
iPhone
• iOS6 or iOS7
Android
• Android Jelly Bean 4.1 and 4.2
• Android Gingerbread 2.3
SightMax Integration Requirements
Operating Systems
•
•
•
•
Supported SightMax Version
• Version 1.1.13.358
Windows 2012 R2
Windows 2008 R2
Windows 2008 (32-bit)
Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)
Salesforce Integration Requirements
• Windows 7 (64-bit) - The Salesforce CTI library does not support
Operating Systems
the 32-bit version of Internet Explorer.
• Windows 8.1 (64-bit)
Boards Supported by ACC and ACM
The following types of boards are supported in ACC and ACM:
• Triton T1/E1/PRI Board (2.048M Hz) all revisions
• Triton IP Boards revision A3 or above, which includes
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
9
Chapter 2: System Requirements and Installation
• IP12-Port Board (G.711/G.723.1/G.729A+B)
• IP 30-Port Board (G.711 Only) (same hardware as 12-Port IP Board)
• Triton Analog 12-Extension Board Rev A3 or above
• Triton Analog 12-Trunk LS/GS Board Rev A3 or above
• Triton Analog 12-Trunk LS Board Rev A3 or above
• Triton Analog 8 port trunk all revisions
• Triton Resource Board Rev A3 or above
• Triton MeetMe Conference board all revisions
• Triton 0x12 Rev. B all revisions
• Proton Analog 8-Trunk Board all revisions
MAX 1000 and MAX 2000 Hardware Boards
• 0x12 analog extension board
• 4x8 analog board
• 8x4 analog board
• T1/PRI 4x4 combo board
• T1/PRI board
MAX 4000iG
• Dual T1/E1/PRI with 60 IP (G.711 only) resources
MAX 4000 All-in-One
• Dual T1/E1/PRI with 60 combo (G.711/G.723/G.729) resources
• Analog 4 trunks by 4 extension with 20 combo (G.711/G.723/G.729) resources
• Resource Board:
• 120 Station Conference/10 Supervisor/30 participant MeetMe (10 bridges)/10 G.711
• 60 Station Conference/30 Supervisor/30 participant MeetMe (10 bridges)/10 G.711
MAXCS Licenses
In MAXCS, most client licenses are available in both concurrent session mode and seat-based mode. Both
types can be mixed in a MAXCS system.
The following licenses are available for MaxCS Update 1:
Licenses for Update 1
10
MAXCS ACM
Per system
MAXCS ACC
Per system
MaxCommunicator
Per seat or per session
AltiConsole
Per session
MaxAgent
Per seat
MaxAgent Concurrent License
Per session
MaxSupervisor
Per seat
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
MAXCS Licenses
Licenses for Update 1
MaxSupervisor Concurrent License
Per session
IPTalk
Per seat or per session
MaxCall
Per seat or per session
TAPI
Per extension configuration
SIP Trunk
Per activated SIP trunk
3rd Party SIP Device
Per seat registering as an IP extension (non-concurrent)
Enterprise Manager
Per server license
Dedicated Recording Seat License
Per seat assigned to record to a centralized folder, and per trunk port
with recording enabled
Concurrent Recording Session
License
Per session
MaxMobile
Per seat
Multilingual
Per system
Advanced Call Router
Per system
AltiReport
Per system
VRManager
Per system
MaxInSight
Per session
SDK Connection Session
Per session
Trunk Control APC SDK
Per session
Exchange Integration
Per user
Salesforce Integration
Per seat
SightMax
Per seat
The following licenses are available for all-in-one (stand alone) systems only:
Licenses for Update 1 Stand Alone Systems
Station License
Per activated extension
ACM Agent Seat
Per concurrent login
(Single agent logged into multiple WGs will only take one license)
ACC Agent Seat
Per concurrent login
(Single agent logged into multiple WGs will only take one license)
The following licenses are available for Softswitch/HMCP Media Server/Gateway systems only:
Licenses for Update 1 Softswitch/HMCP Media Server/Gateway Systems
HMCP Media Server License
Available resources in the system
HMCP G.711/G.723/G.729 Voice Processing
Resources
Available resources in the system
HMCP MeetMe Conference
Available resources in the system
HMCP Supervision
Available resources in the system
Softswitch Station License
Per extension configuration
Softswitch ACC Agent Session License
Per session
Softswitch ACM Agent Session License
Per session
Softswitch ACM Agent Migration License
Per ACC agent session
Gateway
Per gateway
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
11
Chapter 2: System Requirements and Installation
The following Combo licenses are available:
Combo Licenses for MAXCS Update 1
Each Combo Station License includes:
Non-Call Center Station
Combo Licenses
Base Call Center Combo Licenses
•
•
•
•
•
1 station license
1 MaxCommunicator license
1 MaxMobile license
1 IPTalk license
1 Exchange Integration license
Each Base Call Center License includes:
• 5 MaxAgent licenses
• 1 MaxSupervisor license
• 1 MaxInsight license
• 1 AltiReport license
• 1 Advanced Call Router license
Each Combo Agent Seat License includes:
Combo Agent Licenses
Combo Supervisor Licenses
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1 station license
1 ACM seat license
1 MaxAgent license
1 MaxMobile license
1 IPTalk license
1 MaxCall license
1 Exchange Integration license
Each Combo Supervisor License includes:
• 1 station license
• 1 MaxSupervisor license
• 1 ACM seat license
• 1 MaxAgent license
• 1 MaxMobile license
• 1 IPTalk license
• 1 MaxCall license
• 1 Exchange Integration license
Preparation for Installation
Before you start installing MAXCS, you need the following:
• Windows Update – Make sure your server has the recommended Windows Service Pack or Update.
• MAXCS ACM Update 1 DVD – The MAXCS installation DVD that contains the MAXCS Update 1 programs.
• MAXCS latest update – Check to see if there is an update available to the MAXCS Update 1 Release.
• System Key – The system key can be either a USB hardware security device that must be attached to
the server MaxCS is running on, or it can be a soft system key.
• You cannot use both a hardware device and the soft system key at the same time.
• When using a soft system key, the MaxCS system must be a member of an Active Directory domain.
• Software license key – A 20-digit key located on the front of the End User License Agreement.
12
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Installing MAX Communication Server
Installing MAX Communication Server
Important: If you are upgrading from a previous release of MaxCS, review the instructions in the MaxCS 7.0
Update 1 Upgrade Guidelines before you begin any installation steps.
For full details, please review the readme file, which is located on the installation DVD.
The installation program will check whether Microsoft Outlook has been installed on the server. If it detects
Outlook, you must uninstall Outlook before you can install MaxCS Update 1.
To install MAXCS, insert the DVD and follow the instructions on the install screens. At the third screen, select
a setup type:
• All-in-one Hardware System Installation – Select this option if you have a hardware system that
includes AltiGen boards, such as Max1000, Max2000, 3G, and Max4000.
• Softswitch System Installation – Select this option if you have a softswitch system. On the next screen
you can select which components to install.
Softswitch System Installation
If you chose to install the Softswitch System installation, you can install the following components.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
13
Chapter 2: System Requirements and Installation
• Softswitch (including VM and Enterprise Manager) – Select this option to install Softswitch to the
server. You need a dongle for the Softswitch server. Softswitch provides the following functions:
– Devices Control
• IP Phone
• HMCP Media Server
• IP Gateway
– Call Control
• Call Signal Processing (SIP and H.323 tie trunk)
• PBX Switching, Routing, and Call Handling
– System Management
• Configuration and Directory
• Phrases and Prompts (System, Custom, Personal)
– Feature Server
• Voice Mail Server
• Multi-Site Enterprise Manager
• Call Center Feature Server
• CTI Server
• Exchange Integration Server
• CDR Server
• HMCP Media Server – If you have a small to medium scale system (no more than about 200 extensions),
you can choose to install Softswitch and HMCP Media Server in the same machine. You can also install
them in different machines, especially if you plan to grow your system. (If you are using a virtual system,
you can expand by increasing the CPU power and memory.)
If your system is larger, install HMCP Media Server and Softswitch on different servers.
The HMCP Media Server check box is not available if the operating system is not Windows 2003 or
Windows 2008. AltiGen supports HMCP Media Server only on servers provided by AltiGen.
• Gateway – Select this option to install gateway service to an AltiGen IP gateway. The supported gateway
platforms are:
14
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Installing MaxAdmin on a Network Client
– OFFICE3G server
– MAX2000iG (gateway-only MAX server with redundant power supply and RAID hard drive)
Note: Do not install gateway service to MAX1000 or MAX1000R server. When installing Gateway service
to an OFFICE3G server, remove Triton Resource and MeetMe Conference boards. Softswitch
server will not use these boards as conference/barge-in resources.
If you select Gateway, the next screen requires you to assign an ID to the gateway.
For detailed instructions on installing and upgrading MAXCS, AltiGen Partners should refer to the Knowledge
Base, available from the AltiGen Partner Web Site at https://partner.altigen.com.
Installing MaxAdmin on a Network Client
MaxAdministrator can be installed on a client workstation, providing the ability to manage the MAXCS server
remotely. The system running MaxAdministrator and the MAXCS server must be on the same Windows
domain.
When you install MaxAdmin on a machine that is not a MAXCS server, it does not contain the switching, SMTP/
POP3 server, messaging agent, AltiBackup, and Exchange integration services that are included in the full
MAXCS installation. Remote MaxAdmin does not utilize the System Data Management or Shutdown Switching
Service functions on the MAXCS system.
To install MaxAdministrator on a client workstation,
1.
Insert the MAXCS DVD into the drive.
2.
Run SETUP.EXE from the MaxAdministrator folder.
3.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Uninstalling MAXCS 7.0 Update 1
To uninstall MAXCS 7.0 Update 1, be sure to stop all MAXCS-related services before uninstallation. To do this,
run MaxAdmin, log in, and select Services > Shutdown Switching from the menu.
In the event that the auxiliary services were not stopped, stop them one at a time in Windows, using the Start
> Programs > Administrative Tools > Services tool.
Then go to Start > Programs > Control Panel > Add/Remove Programs, and select MAX Communication
Server ACM 7.0 Update 1, and click Remove.
Troubleshooting (Error Messages)
Use this table for troubleshooting error messages encountered during software installation.
Error Message
Solution
MAXCS does not support Triton T1 Rev A2 or
VoIP Rev A2, boards. Please unplug these
boards, then run setup again.
Unplug Triton T1 Rev A2 or VoIP Rev A2, then run setup
again.
Copy activation file failed.
Activation file (exctl) is not in the specified folder, is missing,
or is corrupted. Make sure you select the correct file folder
where the activation file is located and try again. If problem
persists, you can manually copy the activation file to
c:\AltiServ\db directory (if MAXCS is installed on the c: drive)
and run the installation program again.
An error occurred during the move data
process.
Make sure all AltiGen applications and services are stopped/
closed before installing MAXCS.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
15
Chapter 2: System Requirements and Installation
16
Error Message
Solution
Setup has not detected your system key. If you
proceed the installation WITHOUT the system
key, only 8 physical ports will be available for
use after the MAXCS installation.
Make sure your system key is fully inserted into your parallel
or USB port prior to installing MAXCS.
Setup cannot append the AltiServ path
because your existing system environment is
too long. You must manually append the
AltiServ path to your system environment path
after finishing the MAXCS installation but
before restarting your system.
Manually append c:\AltiServ\exe (if MAXCS is installed on c:
drive) to your system environment path (through Control
Panel > System > Advanced tab > Environment Variables
> System Variables) after finishing the MAXCS installation
but before restarting your system.
Unable to add AltiServ path to the system.
Manually append c:\AltiServ\exe (if MAXCS is installed on c:
drive) to your system environment path (through Control
Panel > System > Advanced tab > Environment Variables
> System Variables) after finishing the MAXCS installation
but before restarting your system
Failed to upgrade AltiServ databases.
The previous database may be corrupted. Restore the last,
known working database and try again. If error persists,
contact your Authorized AltiGen Partner.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
3
Getting Around MaxAdministrator
This section gives a brief overview of MaxAdministrator (MaxAdmin), the program used to configure and
administer MaxCS 7.0 and its client applications.
MaxAdmin has a graphical user interface with tabbed windows that makes it easy to use.
Note:
The commands Services > Utilities > Backup and Restore, and Services > Shut Down All
Services cannot be performed remotely.
Logging In and Out
To log into MaxAdmin,
1.
From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Max Communication Server ACM >
MaxAdministrator 7.0 Update 1.
Figure 1.
2.
Log into MaxAdministrator
Enter your username and password.
Important: The first time you log in, use the system default password, 22222. To ensure system security,
change the system password as soon as possible.
To log out, click the Logout button, or select Services > Logout.
Changing the Password
Select Services > Change Password to change to a new password.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
17
Chapter 3: Getting Around MaxAdministrator
The Main Window
When you run MaxAdmin, you’ll see something like this:
Menu bar
Status
bar
Figure 2.
MaxAdministrator main window
The main menu bar is at the top. Below that are buttons for quick access to more commonly used configuration
screens. A status bar at the bottom contains information on the current runtime status.
The Main Menu
These are the menus and the functions found under each menu:
• Services – Log in and log out, change password, access utilities (backup and restore, convert work/hunt
group, import and export an extension list), shut down all services, and exit.
• System – Opens windows where you can configure system settings, gateways and media servers, voice
mail, auto attendants, multilingual support, call recording, and application extensions.
• PBX – Opens windows where you can configure trunks, in call routing, out call routing, extensions, AltiGen
IP phones, hunt groups, line park, and MeetMe conference. You can also manage MeetMe conferences
from this menu.
• Call Center – Opens windows where you can configure workgroups, agent logout reasons, and MaxCall.
• VoIP – Opens windows where you can configure the enterprise network, the multi-site domain, and the
refresh enterprise settings.
• Report – Opens windows where you can view the system summary and IP traffic statistics and configure
SNMP (simple network management protocol).
• Diagnostic – Opens windows where you can view the trace, view the system log, and view the AltiGen
network log.
• View – Lets you show, hide, and set default alignment of the view windows, the toolbar, and the status bar.
• Help – Opens the Help window and offers a link to the AltiGen Technical Support site.
18
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
The Main Window
Quick Access Toolbar
Toolbar buttons give you quick access to frequently used functions.
Figure 3.
MaxAdmin quick access toolbar
From left to right, the toolbar buttons serve the following purposes:
Login. Opens the Password dialog box to log in to the system.
Logout. Logs out of the system.
System. Opens the System Configuration window, or the System menu.
Shortcut for System > System Configuration.
Trunk. Opens the Trunk Configuration window.
Shortcut for PBX > Trunk Configuration.
Extension. Opens the Extension Configuration window.
Shortcut for PBX > Extension Configuration.
Workgroup. Opens the Workgroup Configuration window.
Shortcut for CallCenter > Workgroup Configuration.
IP Phone. Opens the IP Phone Configuration window.
Shortcut for PBX > AltiGen IP Phone Configuration.
AA. Opens the AA Configuration window.
Shortcut for System > AA Configuration.
Recording. Opens the Recording Configuration window.
Shortcut for System > Recording Configuration.
MeetMe. Opens the MeetMe Conference window.
Shortcut for PBX > MeetMe Conference.
Summary. Opens the System Summary window.
Shortcut for Report > System Summary.
About. Opens a window that displays version and file information. Gives information
about the AltiGen Technical Support Web Site. This is a shortcut for Help > About
MaxAdmin.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
19
Chapter 3: Getting Around MaxAdministrator
Status Bar
The Status Bar at the bottom of the main window displays disk usage, the status of SMDR, the status of the
call detail reporting log, the status of the operator, and current date and time.
The View Windows
The MaxAdmin main window hosts a number of child windows that provide various views into the internal
system real-time status.
Boards View Window
The Boards window displays the hardware board types and their logical and physical IDs. For each installed
board, it displays:
• The board’s logical ID (the sequential ID of the board assigned by the system).
• Board type (for example, TritonIP12PT is a Triton board with 12 IP ports).
• The physical ID (including the ID on the faceplate of the board and the gateway ID). If it is an all-in-one
system, the gateway ID is the system itself, and the ID is 0.
Double-click a
board to open a
configuration
window for that
board.
Figure 4.
Boards window
Click on any column heading to sort by that column. Click again to reverse the sort order.
Extension View Window
The Extension View window displays the name, location, and status of all assigned extensions.
20
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
The View Windows
Right-click an extension
to display its physical
location...
...or to open a line properties
window specific to the selected
extension.
Figure 5.
Extension View window
Click on any column heading to sort by that column. Click again to reverse the sort order.
Double-click any extension number to open the Extension Configuration window for the selected extension.
The radio button to the left of each extension number is green when the extension is idle, and red when the
extension is not ready or in use. The Location number (for example, 01:0005) identifies the card logical ID and
port (channel) number on the board. For example, in location 01:0005, the card logical ID is 1 and the port
number is 5. If an IP Extension is logged on, the location will show the IP address.
The Reset button resets the selected extension to the idle status. You’ll be asked to confirm the reset.
You can click the Reset button without selecting an extension, and then type in the extension number for the
extension to reset.
Trunk View Window
The Trunk View window displays the status of all assigned trunks.
Right-click a trunk to display
its physical location or to
open a trunk line properties
window specific to the
selected trunk.
Figure 6.
Trunk View window
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
21
Chapter 3: Getting Around MaxAdministrator
The radio button to the left of each trunk location is green when the trunk is idle, and red when the extension
is not ready or in use. The location format is logical board ID:channel – for example, channel 3 on the board in
logical board ID 9 is location 09:03. The Type, Status and Duration of trunk use is also displayed.
Note:
The Duration field displays the duration of the trunk only if the call is connected after MaxAdmin is
started. The field will be empty if the trunk is idle, not ready, out of service, or the call was connected
prior to MaxAdmin being launched.
You can double-click any trunk location to open the Trunk Configuration window for the selected trunk.
The Reset button resets the selected trunks to the idle status if the trunk is connected to a carrier. You’ll be
asked to confirm the reset, and a status message will tell you if the reset was successful.
Call Log View Window
The Call Log View window displays the line and trunk traffic history.
Prints selected
log entries.
Clears the
window of all
data.
Figure 7.
Call Log View window
The window displays, for the last 30 calls, the caller line or number, the callee, the starting time in 24-hour
format and the length of the call. When the call is from another AltiGen system, the call is displayed as “Caller
System IP Address-Extension Number.”
Workgroup View Window
The Workgroup View window displays data and statistics for workgroups:
Figure 8.
Workgroup View window
This window displays the following data:
• Extension – The workgroup pilot extension number
• Name – The workgroup name
• Agents – The number of agents assigned to the workgroup
• Login – The number of agents logged into the workgroup
• Available – The number of logged in agents who are available to receive workgroup calls
• DND – The number of logged in agents who are unavailable with the Do Not Disturb status
• Wrapup – The number of agents who are in wrapup mode
22
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
The View Windows
• Not Ready – The number of logged in agents who are in Not Ready state
• Busy – The number of logged in agents who are currently on the phone
• Error – The number of logged in agents with extensions that are left off-hook or other user error
• Logout – The number of agents who are logged out from the workgroup
• Unstaff – The number of agents who are logged out from the system and have become a virtual extension
• Queue – The number of calls waiting in queue
• Waiting Time – The longest wait time of callers in queue
• Service Level – The percentage of calls in queue with queue time less than or equal to the defined
service level threshold
Current Resource Statistics Window
The Current Resource Statistics window displays the total VoIP channels, available channels, and in-use
channels.
The window allows administrators to monitor VoIP channel usage and MeetMe conference resource use.
Figure 9.
Current Resource Statistics window
Top part of the window
Contains a summary of codec usage. The first G711 only codec section is displaying 30-port G711 VoIP board
codec use.
Middle part of the window
Displays the following data:
• Gateway ID – The ID of the VoIP channel’s home gateway
• IP Resource – The Triton VoIP logical board ID:internal DSP channel ID
• Codecs Capability – The codecs the IP channel can use
• Active Codec – The codec currently being used
• Used By – The extension, trunk, SIP channel or H.323 channel that is using this channel
• Connect To – The extension, trunk, or channel the channel is connected to
• Packets Sent/Received – The number of voice packets sent and received
• Bytes Sent/Received – The total size (in bytes) of all voice packets sent and received
• Network Packet Loss – The number of voice packets that have been lost due to prolonged delays,
network congestion, or routing failure
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
23
Chapter 3: Getting Around MaxAdministrator
• JB Packet Loss – The number of voice packets that have been discarded due to jitter buffer overflow
• Total Packet Loss Rate – The ratio of total number of lost packets versus total received packets
• Max Packet Loss Rate – The maximum packet loss rate observed over a period of time during a whole
session
• Jitter – Displays the average length of delay per voice packet in milliseconds. This number can be used
to measure the quality of service on the network that connects the source and destination sites. Under 100
milliseconds is good, while a higher figure indicates a longer than average delay. (See “Setting VoIP
Codec Profiles” on page 295 for more detailed information on jitter.)
• Local Ports – Displays the local RTP/RTCP port for the voice stream
• Remote IP Address:Port – Displays the remote RTP port for the voice stream
Bottom part of the window
Shows information about the MeetMe 30-party conference bridge:
• Gateway ID of the 30-party conference board (for example, 00)
• MeetMe Conference Bridge ID (from 00:00 to 00:09)
• Number of members currently participating in a conference using each bridge
Note:
Each system can have only one 30-party MeetMe conference board.
Setting the Refresh Interval
The Current Resource Statistics window is updated according to the Refresh Interval configuration. By
default, the Refresh Interval is set to refresh the data in the window every 5 seconds. To change the refresh
interval, click the Refresh Interval button at the top of the window, and set the refresh interval to a number of
seconds up to one minute. To set the time to 0 is to turn off the refresh interval.
Assigning Seat-Based Client Licenses
Most MAXCS client products require either session- or seat-based licenses. You may have purchased both
types. A session license allows a certain number of extensions to use a client product. If you have purchased
seat licenses so that particular extensions always have access to the client product, those extensions must be
assigned to the client product in MaxAdmin. If an extension is not assigned to a product, that extension may
not be able to use the client product. You may have seat-based licenses for the following client products:
• MaxCommunicator
• AltiConsole
• MaxOutlook (uses MaxCommunicator license)
• IP Talk
• MaxAgent
• Integration Connector
• MaxSupervisor
• MaxCall
• MaxMobile Communicator
• Salesforce Integration
Assign extensions to seat-based licenses in the Client SEAT License Management configuration screen
(License > Client SEAT License Management). Licenses are sorted in alphabetical order.
24
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Stopping the AltiGen Switching Service
Figure 10. The Client SEAT License window
Select a license type and then select extensions to add to the list of “members” who can always use the
selected product. Make multiple selections by using Shift+click and Ctrl+click. The screen shows the total
number of licenses you have for a client product and the number of licenses assigned.
Stopping the AltiGen Switching Service
Normally, when you exit MaxAdmin, the AltiGen services that provide the various telephony and data services
remain active. If you need to shut down the phone system, do one of the following:
• From MaxAdmin, select Services > Shut Down All Services.
• From Windows, select Start > All Programs > MAX Communication Server ACM > Utilities > Start
and Stop All AltiGen Services, and click the Shutdown All AltiGen Services button.
This stops the MAXCS system services, including the MaxAdministrator application itself. When you re-open
MaxAdmin, the switching services are reactivated.
These options are available when you are logged in at the MAXCS system computer; they are not available
from a remote MAXCS client.
Note:
Stopping the AltiGen services from the Windows Services tool is not recommended, because it requires you to know what all the services are and is time-consuming.
Programs Available from the Windows Start Menu
Several MAXCS programs are available from the Windows Start menu.
Figure 11. The programs on the Start > MAX Communication Server ACM menu
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
25
Chapter 3: Getting Around MaxAdministrator
Available under MAX Communication Server ACC/ACM:
• MaxAdministrator – Lets you configure and administer your MAXCS system.
• Readme – Readme file for MAXCS.
Available under Gateway Tools:
• AltiGen Board Test – A hardware test tool used to debug system hang and other hardware problems.
See “AltiGen Board Test” on page 357.
• CT-Bus Test Tool – Analyzes TDM bus connection among telephony boards. See “CT-Bus Test Tool” on
page 358.
• Gateway Configuration – Lets you view some gateway settings and board information and change the
ID and password of a gateway. See “Gateway Configuration Tool” on page 55.
Available under Utilities:
• Backup and Restore – Backs up your configurations and extension voice mail. See “Backup and Restore
Utility” on page 358.
• MAXCS Admin and Extension Security Checker – Checks the security status of every extension in your
MAXCS system. See “MAXCS Admin & Extension Security Checker” on page 360.
• Read Config – Creates a subdirectory of HTML files that shows details of your MAXCS configuration. See
“Read Config” on page 367.
• Start and Stop All AltiGen Services – Opens a dialog box that gives you the option to start or stop all
AltiGen services by clicking a button.
• Trace Collector – Collects the trace in selected MAXCS categories, within a time range specified, for
debugging purposes. See “Trace Collector” on page 363.
• Voice File Converter – A voice phrase conversion tool that converts WAV files to ADPCM, WAV to PCM,
or ADPCM/PCM to WAV format. See “Voice File Converter” on page 366.
26
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
4
System Configuration
The System Configuration window is where you can configure the MaxCS 7.0 system-wide settings.
To open this window, select System > System Configuration.
The System
Configuration button
You can then work with the following settings, each of which is accessed by a tab in the System Configuration
window.
• General setup – System ID, area code and number, operator and manager extensions, country,
distinctive ring, conference call, and system call park options
• Number Plan – How the system responds to each first digit dialed
• Business Hours – Used by system functions
• Holiday – How calls are routed on designated holidays
• System Speed – Speed dial numbers that can be used by all extension users
• Call Restriction – Prefixes to block, toll call prefixes, and call control
• Account Code – Tables for creating and removing account codes
• Call Reports – CDR logging and data export
• Country Relevant – Settings for toll call prefixes and emergency numbers
• Audio Peripheral – Settings for music on hold and system default prompts
• Activity – Settings for pre-defined or customized activity codes
• Feature Profiles – Settings for extension feature profiles
Setting General Parameters
Use the General tab in the System Configuration window to set the system ID, area code, main number, and
country; extensions for the manager, the operator, the MeetMe conference administrator; and options for distinctive ring, conference bridge, and system call park.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
27
Chapter 4: System Configuration
Figure 12. System Configuration, General tab
You can set the following parameters and options:
Parameter
Description
System ID
Assign a number (1-100) to the system. This ID will be used to
differentiate call records if multiple systems are writing call records to a
same external database.
In a multi-site VoIP domain, each System ID/Server ID must be unique
and must be the same length. Once a server is part of a VoIP domain,
you cannot change the System ID.
Country
Select a country for the system. This configuration ties to a tone table
matched to the country's telecom interface specification.
Select the system manager’s extension number.
The system manager has access to the following system administrator
functions:
Manager Extension
• Record custom phrases
• Turn on trunk blocking (#38)
• Manage voice mail’s System Distribution List from phone
• Run CDR search as administrator login account
Enables users to distinguish between internal, external, and operator
calls by the way the phone rings:
• Enable Distinctive Ring – establishes a short double ring cadence
Distinctive Ring
for internal calls and a normal, single ring for external calls. When
disabled, both rings are normal.
• Enable Operator Priority Ringing – produces a long single ring
between short pauses on calls to the operator.
• Enable Workgroup Priority Ringing – produces a short single
ring between short pauses on calls to the workgroup.
28
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting a System Number Plan
Parameter
Description
System Home Area Code
Area code for the system location.
Note: This field cannot be blank in the U.S. and Canada.
Conference Bridge Option
Selected, conference calls will end when all internal lines have
disconnected from the conference bridge.
Not selected, the conference connection can continue between outside
parties, even after all internal parties have disconnected.
System Main Number
The main system telephone number, which is sent to the pager’s display when a user’s messaging options are configured to call a pager.
This number will be used by a PRI trunk as the outbound caller ID in
the event that no number is assigned in the trunk Phone Number, 10digit DID, or extension Transmitted CID field.
Note: This field cannot be blank.
PRI Calling Number
Check the check box to send a caller’s caller ID when the call is going
through one-number access (ONA) or when the call is being forwarded.
System Call Park
• Timeout, Ring Back in ...
Minutes
• Play Greeting Phrase
Operator Extension and Group
Members
System Call Park (#41) allows the extension user to park a call, then
pick up the call from another extension. If the call is forgotten, the
Timeout sets the number of minutes a call remains parked before the
user’s extension rings again. To the caller, the call park sounds like
being put on hold. Valid entry: 1 – 60 minutes.
Select a greeting that the caller will hear before being placed on hold.
Select the extension to be used by the system operator. If the
extension number you select is a workgroup or a hunt group, member
extensions will show up in the Group Members box.
This extension is used in the following applications:
• Trunk incall routing
• DNIS incall routing
• Auto Attendant
Check the box to allow supervisors to monitor, barge in on, coach, and
record an agent’s non-workgroup calls.
Notes:
• If this check box is checked, the supervisor can listen, barge-in on,
coach, and record an agent's conversation regardless of the
agent's login status.
Call Supervision
• Supervisor extension does not have to be a workgroup member to
listen to, barge-in on, coach, or record an agent's conversation.
• For the coaching feature, the agent’s extension can be either an IP
extension or a Triton analog extension.
WARNING! Listening in to or recording a conversation without the consent of one or both parties may be a violation of local, state and federal
privacy laws. It is the responsibility of the users of this feature to assure
they are in compliance with all applicable laws.
Setting a System Number Plan
The system number plan defines the extension digit length. You can use from 3 - 6 digits for extensions. You
also use the system number plan to set a DID number length to use, and to define the system response to the
first digit dialed — for example, pressing 9 to get a trunk line.
The numbering scheme requires some thoughtful planning.
To set the number plan, select System > System Configuration, then click the Number Plan tab.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
29
Chapter 4: System Configuration
Figure 13. System Configuration, Number Plan tab
Use the Number Plan tab to specify the following parameters:
Parameter
Description
The number of digits for your extension numbering system. Valid entries are from
3 - 6. For example, extension 2001 and 4020 are
4-digit extension numbers.
Extension Number
Length
Default Password
30
Note: Once the first extension is configured, the extension number length cannot
be changed without totally reconfiguring the system or deleting all the
extensions already configured.
Further, if a first digit dialed is assigned to extensions and you have set up
extensions beginning with that digit, you cannot change the digit
assignment without first deleting all affected extensions. For example, if 7
is assigned to Extension and you’re using extensions 7010, 7113, and so
on, you cannot reassign 7 to IP trunk access, without first deleting all the
7nnn extensions.
The default password for newly created extensions is randomly generated by the
system. (When the password is changed, it must be four to eight digits in length.)
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting a System Number Plan
Parameter
DID Number Length
Dialed Digit Translator
Description
The number of digits needed to match a DID (Direct Inward Dialing) number. The
range is from 2 – 16.
Each extension can be assigned a DID number. A DID number does not have a
fixed length. For example, suppose the DID number length is 4 and the extension
DID number is 2522999. Depending on the service contract with the Central Office
(CO), the DID trunk can send all 7 digits (2522999) or just the last 4 digits (2999).
If the DID Number Length option is set to 4, the system always tries to match the
last 4 digits received to the last 4 digits of a DID number, regardless of what is
received.
Note: To accommodate future growth and minimize disturbance, it is
recommended that the length of the DID numbers assigned to an extension be
greater than or equal to this DID Number Length.
This feature is capable of intercepting and manipulating a dialed digit string before
it is sent out for outbound call processing.
To set up a dialed digit translator entry, check the Enable checkbox and click the
Setup key. This opens a dialog box where you can select First Digit Translator
or Extension Dialed Digit Translator.
This feature supersedes the first digit assignment of the system number plan.
When configured, any extension user can dial a single DTMF digit that will be
translated to any internal or external number. After digit manipulation, the
translated digits go through the system number plan to find the internal or external
target. For example, you can configure “*” to call an internal workgroup to report an
urgent situation.
Typical applications are:
• One-digit emergency dialing
• One-digit dialing to branch or headquarters over PSTN or VoIP
• One-digit dialing to activate a feature code
First Digit Translator Configuration
Figure 14.
Single Digit Routing
To set up a First Digit Translator entry, select the check box (to the left of 1-9, *
or #), then enter the desired digits. When a box is checked, the digit preprocessor
will replace the first digit 1-9, * or # that user dials with the digits indicated in the
corresponding field. In the above example, if a user dials “*”, the system replaces
this with “911”.
Note: This feature is for internal extension users only. It does not support dialing
out from voice mail. Improper configuration may cause conflict with the
system numbering plan. Be sure to fully test any configuration change in
this area before going “live.”
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
31
Chapter 4: System Configuration
Parameter
Description
Extension Dialed Digit Translator
Note: This feature is intended for, but not limited to, allowing a remote IP
extension to make an emergency call (911) through MaxCS 7.0 . If MaxCS
7.0 is in a different location than the IP extension, the emergency call can
be routed to the emergency center where the IP extension is located.
Figure 15.
Extension Call Routing
To set up an Extension Dialed Digit Translator entry:
1. Select Extension Dialed Digit Translator from the Select Digit Translator
list.
2. In the Extensions Group field, use the Add button to create and select an
extension group that the Extension Dialed Digit Translator will apply to.
3. (optional) From the Non members list, you may select an IP extension that the
Extension Dialed Digit Translator will apply to. You can apply the same
Members to multiple locations. You may also enable the Bypass Account
Code option if Account Codes are required.
4. Enter digits in the Dialed Number field and Translate To field. In (see
Figure 15), assuming the system is located in area code 510, when an IP extension user in LA dials “911,” MaxCS 7.0 will translate the digits into
“919495550911.” (9 = IP trunk access code, 19495550911 = the emergency
center in LA that covers the remote IP phone user’s area.)
5. The Manipulation option allows you to remove or add digits to a number dialed
by the IP extension.
The most common situation requiring this option is to hop-off a VoIP call from
a remote system to a remote CO line.
32
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Business Hours
Parameter
Description
These define how the system responds to the first digit dialed by the user. The list
options for each digit are:
• Extension
• Trunk Access
• Feature Access
• Operator
First Digit Assignment
• Invalid (no action)
• IP Trunk Access
• Route Access
Trunk Access – Defines how to get a PSTN trunk line to dial an outside number.
“9” is the default trunk access code.
If you have a more complicated dialing number and routing plan, change “9” to
the Route Access code and configure the Outcall Routing table.
Feature Access – By default, # is set to Feature Access, which is used as part of
feature access codes. In addition, you may also set 1- 9 or * to Feature Access.
For example, if 7 is set to Feature Access, Station Login (#27) can also be
accessed using 727.
IP Trunk Access – Only one IP trunk access option is allowed per system. To use
Voice over IP, you must set up this access and, in addition, configure the IP Dialing
Table as discussed in “Defining the IP Dialing Table” on page 303 and set the VoIP
codecs as discussed in “Setting VoIP Codec Profiles” on page 295.
Note: After setting the IP Trunk Access code here, you should set the Trunk Access Codes of any 30-port VoIP boards to “None” on the General tab of
the Trunk Configuration window (see “Setting General Trunk Attributes” on
page 123). This will prevent users from directly accessing the 30-port
boards – which use the G.711 codec only – for calls to MaxCS 7.0 servers
or other gateways that may require the G.723 codec. If you still want users
to have access to this trunk for outgoing calls, you can set it up through out
call routing (see Chapter 14, Out Call Routing Configuration).
Route Access – The Route Access option can be assigned to one or more digits,
to route the call per the out call routing table. Out call routing, which is sometimes
called ARS (Automatic Route Selection) or LCR (Least Cost Routing without
carrier rate table), is described in Chapter 14, Out Call Routing Configuration.
Out call routing is designed to help 10-digit dialing, Zoomerang dialing, digit
manipulation, and tie trunk hop-off dialing.
Setting Business Hours
The Business Hours tab contains group boxes for setting the business hours and days of the week for which
the business or organization is in operation. The business hours schedules are used to set other system
settings such as trunk, and DNIS and caller ID in-call routing.
Note:
Because the business hours are used throughout the system, you or the appropriate administrator
must make sure the system time has been set correctly. The system time can be changed using
the Date and Time options in the Windows Control Panel.
To access the Business Hours settings, select System > System Configuration, then click the Business
Hours tab.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
33
Chapter 4: System Configuration
Figure 16. System Configuration, Business Hours tab
Multiple Business Hours profiles can be configured in a system. A default “System” Business Hours profile is
already configured. Multiple Business Hours profiles can also be assigned to DNIS Routing and Trunk In Call
Routing entries.
To add a Business Hours profile, click Add. Enter a name for the profile, then click OK.
34
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Routing Calls on Holidays
For each business hour profile, set the business schedule parameters.
Parameter
Description
Select the days of the week on which the company does business. For
example, if the company does business Monday – Friday, check the
check boxes for those days.
Day
For each day of the week, select the time periods during which the
company is available for business. The time between the AM and PM
times can be used to indicate a lunch break or time between shifts.
If you don’t want to set a break between AM and PM schedules, set the
PM starting time to be the same as the AM ending time.
Or if you want to specify 24 hours as standard business hours, select the
following hours:
AM and PM Schedules
AM Schedules:
From 08:00 AM
To 12:00 PM
PM Schedules:
From 12:00 PM
To 08:00 AM
Routing Calls on Holidays
You can create special routes for incoming DNIS and trunk calls that come in on designated holidays. For
holidays that your organization treats as half-days, you can create separate profiles for business and nonbusiness hours.
Note:
Incoming DID and tie trunk calls will not follow holiday routes, but go to the dialed extensions directly.
To configure Holiday routing rules, select System > System Configuration, and then click the Holiday tab.
Figure 17. System Configuration, Holiday tab
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
35
Chapter 4: System Configuration
Multiple Holiday Profiles can be configured in a system. Each Holiday Profile can include multiple holidays. A
default “System” Holiday profile is already configured. Multiple Holiday Profiles can also be assigned to DNIS
Routing and Trunk In Call Routing entries.
Creating a Holiday Profile
1.
Click the Add button beside Profile. Enter a name for the profile, then click OK.
2.
To each profile, add holidays that will be included in that profile: Click the Add button below the Holiday
list to create a new holiday.
3.
In the dialog box, select a date from the calendar and enter a description. Click OK.
The holiday you added appears in the Holiday list. Additional holidays you create appear in the list and
together make up the Holiday Profile.
Setting Call Routing
1.
Select a Holiday Profile from the Profile list, and then select a holiday in that profile from the Holiday list.
2.
Set call routing for “normal” holiday hours using the field group in the Normal section of the Holiday tab.
This will be the default route for calls coming in on that holiday.
3.
If you have special work hours during holidays, check the Special hours option and configure special hour
routing.
This route will override the route for normal holiday hours, for the hours you specify. Use this option, for
example, to route calls for the working portion of a holiday that your organization treats as a half-day.
4.
To apply these hours to more than one holiday, click the Apply To button and in the Apply To dialog box,
select all the holidays to which you want the hours to apply. You can select multiple holidays by using Ctrlclick or Shift-click. Click OK.
5.
When you are finished with the dialog box, click OK.
When a new year begins, the dates on which holidays fall usually change. You can edit the dates for annual
holidays, making them accurate for the new year.
Updating the Dates of Annual Holidays
1.
Select a Holiday Profile, and then the holiday from the Holiday list. Its date and description appear in the
Normal section.
2.
Click the drop-down arrow beside the date to open a calendar and assign a new date. Click Apply.
Configuring System Speed Dialing
You can set up to 60 system speed dial numbers. The IDs available are from 00 – 59. Users press #88, and
follow that with one of the system speed dial access codes you set here.
36
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring System Speed Dialing
Speed dial settings for individual extensions are set in Extension Configuration. (See “Setting up Station Speed
Dialing” on page 170.)
To configure Speed Dialing, select System > System Configuration, and then click the System Speed tab.
Figure 18. System Configuration, System Speed tab
Adding Speed Dial Entries
To add a speed dial entry,
1.
Click Add.
2.
The next available ID is filled in for you, or you can select the ID number using the drop-down arrow.
3.
Type a name for the Speed Dial entry, then enter the full number as you would dial it, with a maximum of
20 digits per entry. For example, the phone number 914085551212 comprises 9 (trunk access code), 1
(long distance prefix), followed by 408 (area code), and then the seven-digit telephone number.
Valid digits include 0 through 9, #, *, and (,) comma. The comma represents a one-second pause, when
IP trunks are not used.
Editing Speed Dial Entries
To edit an entry, double-click the number you want to work with, or select the number and click Edit. In the
dialog box that opens, edit the entry and click OK.
Figure 19. Speed Dial Configuration
To delete a system speed dial entry, select it in the System Speed tab and click Delete.
Note:
System speed dial is read-only from MaxCS 7.0 and MaxAgent.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
37
Chapter 4: System Configuration
Defining System Call Restrictions
The Call Restriction tab contains settings for the following functions:
• Block calls to area codes from all extensions
• Define local/toll-free (unrestricted) area codes
• Lock an attacked extension
• Block all outgoing trunk calls
• Restrict other system users from hopping-off to make an outbound call via a tie trunk
• Set 10-digit dialing area codes for using trunk access code
To set up call restrictions, select System > System Configuration, then click the Call Restriction tab.
Figure 20. System Configuration, Call Restriction tab
Blocking Calls to Area Codes from All Extensions
To add or edit system-prohibited area codes:
1.
Double-click an index entry in System Prohibited Prefixes list, or select the index entry and click Edit.
This opens a dialog box that allows you to enter a prefix number.
2.
Enter a 1 and the dialing prefix to block (for example, 900, 976). You can enter up to 20 digits maximum
for each prefix. For example, to block calls from all extensions to 976 numbers, type 1976. Click Apply.
Note:
A maximum of 20 prefixes can be defined.
Setting Unrestricted Area Codes
To add or remove “local” call definitions (including calls that begin with 1 but are free: 800, 888), use the Add
or Delete button in the Unrestricted Area Code panel, and click Apply. The Extension Configuration’s
Restriction tab references these area codes (as local and unrestricted) in its Outcall Restrictions panel.
38
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Creating Account Codes
Locking Attacked Extensions
If a user enters eight consecutive invalid passwords when logging on to voice mail or to activate an extension,
MaxCS 7.0 considers this an attack. To protect your company from theft of services, you can lock an attacked
extension for the period of time you specify (10 minutes – 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds) in the
Password Check field group.
To unlock an extension, use the Extension Checker tool that is installed with MaxCS 7.0 . See “MAXCS Admin
& Extension Security Checker” on page 360.
Blocking All Outgoing Calls
To block all outgoing calls – for example, during the night when no employee is in the office – check the Block
All Outgoing Calls check box. If you block all outgoing calls, then calls between two systems will not go
through. This is because #38 blocks all trunks, including remote SIP-tie trunks
Enabling Hop Off for Tie Trunks
When selected, this function allows users from another system to borrow a PSTN trunk in this system to make
an outbound call over a T1 or VoIP tie trunk.
Outgoing
call on
PSTN Trunk
Tie Trunk:
T1/PRI or
VoIP
System A
System B
The call originating on System B hops off over the T1/PRI or VoIP trunk to use the PSTN
trunk in System A. System A must be set up to allow System B to borrow its PSTN trunk.
Figure 21. Hop Off for Tie Trunks
Restricting Tie Trunk Calls
You can set call restrictions on hop-off calls by telling the system to use the same restrictions as the ones set
up for an extension. Using the Call restriction follows extension list, you can select the extension with the
restrictions to use for the hop-off calls.
Setting 10-Digit Dialing Area Codes
The 10-Digit Dialing Area Code field lets you define area codes that do not require dialing a “1” before the
area code. To enter an area code, click the Add button.
Note:
Applies only to calls that use a trunk access code. For calls using a route access code, 10-digit dialing
area codes must be configured in the Out Call Routing Configuration window, Dialing Pattern tab. See
“About Dialing Patterns” on page 153.
Creating Account Codes
Account Codes let you enable or force users to assign incoming and outgoing calls to particular account
codes for billing, tracking, or forecasting purposes. Up to 10,000 account codes can be created.
To access the Account Code tab, select System > System Configuration, then click the Account Code tab.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
39
Chapter 4: System Configuration
Figure 22. System Configuration, Account Code tab
Adding and Deleting Account Codes
To create an account/code association, click Add. Enter an Account Name and Account Code in the dialog
box. The Account Code may contain 1-10 digits.
To delete an account and its code, select it and click Delete. You can select multiple items for deletion by using
Ctrl-click or Shift-click. Click Apply to save your changes and OK to save and close the window.
You can now set options for each extension that determine whether account codes must be entered or can be
bypassed. You can also block display of the Account Code table (in which case, you would want to supply
users with the account codes they need). See “Setting Personal Information” on page 161.
Setting up Call Reports
You can set up the call report logging option only if MaxCS 7.0 and MaxAdmin are installed on the same
server.
On the Call Reports tab, specify the following:
• Where to log the call detail records (CDR). The location can be an internal database, an external
database, or both.
• How you want the system to manage an internal CDR database.
• If CDR needs to be output through a COM port to another computer, which COM port and which baud rate
to use.
To learn more about internal and external CDR databases and schema, refer to the CDR Search Manual.
To set up Call Reports, select System > System Configuration, then click the Call Reports tab.
40
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting up Call Reports
Figure 23. System Configuration, Call Reports tab
Internal Database Configuration (Internal Log Service)
The Internal Log Service (shown in the Log Service display table) is created by default. You can enable or
disable the service, but you cannot remove this database or add another Internal Log Service.
To manage the internal CDR database:
1.
Make sure the Internal Log Service check box is checked.
2.
In the Internal Database Configuration field, use the up/down arrows to select the Active database
retaining period in months. This determines how long the data will be kept in the database. Valid entry
is 1-12 months.
3.
(Optional) In the Archive purged record(s) field, use the up/down arrows to select the number of months
per archive file. This determines the number of months that the system will archive an existing CDR
database before creating a new database.
4.
Press OK or Apply.
External (Remote) Logging of Call Data
MaxCS 7.0 allows you to output CDR records to a Microsoft SQL Server database (“Minimum System Requirements” on page 5 lists the versions of SQL Server that are supported). Before you enable external logging, you
need to set up and configure the SQL database and external logger application. Please refer to the CDR
Search Manual to learn how to set up an external logger service.
Some considerations:
• The SQL database cannot be on the same server as the MaxCS 7.0 system. A system integrator or
database developer will need to write a custom query to extract data from the SQL database.
• You can send reports from a number of different systems to the same database.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
41
Chapter 4: System Configuration
• AltiGen does not provide any SQL backup and restore utility. We strongly recommend that you use SQL
Backup and Maintenance utility to perform daily backup and maintenance jobs, and use a restore utility to
restore the database. If you need to reconstruct the SQL server, run the External Logger Setup to create
an empty calldb database before restore.
• There is no AltiGen license required for external logging.
To set up and enable external CDR login service to the local or network drive, click Add.
Figure 24. Add External Log Service
Fill in the fields, and click OK.
Parameter
Description
Name
The name of the external log service machine (optional)
Address
The IP address of the external log service machine
Port
The TCP port of the machine
Password
The password to connect to the external service machine
Exporting Through a Local Port
You can send the CDR to a COMM Port to export to, for example, a call accounting data processing system.
To do this, select the Enable Data Output box in the Accounting Data Processing field group. Then select
an Available Port and the Baud Rate.
Country-Relevant Settings
The Country Relevant tab in the System Configuration window contains group boxes for setting toll call
prefixes and emergency numbers.
The Country field displays the country selected on the System Configuration, General tab.
42
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Country-Relevant Settings
If your system is not
in North America,
The Automatic
Dialing Plan Rules
button is available.
Figure 25. System Configuration, Country Relevant tab
Setting Toll Call Prefixes
MaxCS 7.0 uses Toll Call Prefixes to determine the type of outside call and imposes restrictions when necessary. For example, if the international toll call prefix is 011 and a user attempts to make an international call
from an extension without international call privileges, the call will be terminated as soon as the user dials 011
after the trunk or route access number. The caller hears an error tone.
The toll prefixes set here should match the dialing plan prefixes for the country set in the General tab (see “Setting General Parameters” on page 27). You can set the following toll call prefixes.
• Domestic. The dialing plan for your country’s domestic long distance prefix. For example, type in a 1 for
1-plus dialing within the U.S. dialing plan (also known as the North American Numbering Plan).
• International. The prefix used for international calls. For example, this is 011 for international calls made
in the U.S.
Setting Emergency Numbers
The number in the Emergency Number field will have the system automatically find a trunk to process the call
without the extension user dialing a trunk access code first. You may enter up to three emergency numbers in
the appropriate fields.
Note:
This feature works with both trunk access code and route access code.
Dialing Plan Rules for Non-North American Country
If your MaxCS 7.0 system is in a country other than the U.S.A. or Canada, you can configure a call return rule
based on the country, which will greatly improve the call return feature from Caller ID, Zoomerang, and making
a call from Microsoft Outlook.
Click the Automatic Dialing Plan Rules button. The following dialog box opens:
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
43
Chapter 4: System Configuration
Figure 26. Automatic Dialing Plan Rules dialog box
Define the Local Plan, Domestic Plan, and International Plan. A character of the pattern can be a digit from 0
to 9. It can also be a range of digits, for example, [0-3]. If it is a question mark, '?', it is equivalent to [0-9].
When return calls are made, these rules are followed:
• When the number matches Local Plan, the system will send the number out to the trunk directly.
• When the number matches the Domestic Plan, the system will send the number out with the domestic toll
call prefix.
• When the number matches the International Plan, the system will send the number out with the
international toll call prefix.
When a number matches multiple entries, the match with the most digits has priority.
Audio Peripheral Configuration
You can configure audio peripheral settings:
• Music on hold
• System default beginning and update prompts for callers in queue
• Overhead paging
To access the Audio Peripheral configuration window, select System > System Configuration, then click
the Audio Peripheral tab.
44
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Audio Peripheral Configuration
Figure 27. System Configuration, Audio Peripheral tab
Configuring Music On Hold and Recorded Announcements
Callers will hear the music or recorded announcement configured on this tab only if the user places the caller
on hold.
To configure music on hold when using audio equipment,
1.
Check Enable Callers on Hold or in Queue to Listen to Music or Recorded Announcement.
2.
Select the Triton Analog Station board number to which the audio equipment is attached.
To configure music on hold to play a file,
1.
Make sure a VoIP board is installed (required for playing a file).
2.
Check Enable Callers on Hold or in Queue to Listen to Music or Recorded Announcement.
3.
Use the list to select the logical board ID of the VoIP board.
The system will play the default music-on-hold file when the user places the caller on hold.
The default music-on-hold file is a .wav file called “MusicOnWaiting.wav”. The file is located in the
C:\PostOffice\phrases\Music folder. You can replace the file with a .wav file (or an AltiGen PCM file). The .wav
file must be in 8 kHz/ 8 bit/ Mono/ u-Law format. Any optional music-on-hold files included with MaxCS 7.0 are
in that format.
Note:
You may need to reduce the music volume level 70-80% to avoid distortion.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
45
Chapter 4: System Configuration
To replace the default music-on-hold file,
1.
Back up the default file.
2.
On the Audio Peripheral tab, uncheck the Enable Callers on Hold or in Queue to Listen to Music or
Recorded Announcement check box.
3.
Rename the desired .wav file to “MusicOnWaiting.wav” and put it in the C:\PostOffice\phrases\Music
folder.
4.
On the Audio Peripheral tab, check the Enable Callers on Hold or in Queue to Listen to Music or
Recorded Announcement check box.
Note:
If you have two files named MusicOnWaiting in the MusicOnWaiting folder, one a .wav file and one a
PCM file, the .wav file takes precedence.
RTP Resource Usage
In the event that MaxCS 7.0 is controlling multiple gateway systems, the music source can come from the
primary system or another gateway system. When a music source is in one gateway and listeners are in
another gateway, one VoIP resource channel in each gateway is used to convey the music stream.
Setting Greeting and Update Prompts
To play a prompt before placing the caller into a hold queue,
1.
Select the Play Prompt Before Placing the Caller in Queue check box.
2.
Use the list to select the prompt number you want to use for the greeting message. (Creating prompts is
discussed in “Phrase Management” on page 71.)
To play an update prompt every 60 seconds,
1.
Check the Play Update Prompt Every 60 Seconds check box.
2.
Use the list to select the prompt number you want to use for the greeting message.
Note:
These settings will be used by all hunt groups and workgroups as the default system queue phrase.
However, these settings will be overridden by the workgroup’s queue management phrase setting.
Configuring Overhead Paging
Note:
This feature is not supported in the MaxCS Private Cloud service.
1.
Connect overhead paging equipment to the audio out jack on a Triton telephony board.
2.
On the System Configuration > Audio Peripheral tab, select Enable Overhead Paging.
Use the list to select the board to which the overhead paging is attached.
Activity
The Activity configuration tab is used to configure activity codes that can be displayed at AltiConsole when
the extension user is absent. MaxCommunicator users, MaxAgent users and AltiGen IP phone users can
select from these activity codes to let others know where they are when they are away from their desks
(meeting, business travel, and so on).
A greeting associated with the activity can be recorded and played to the caller. When the user changes the
Activity, the extension’s greeting is also automatically changed to the greeting associated with this activity.
To access Activity configuration, select System > System Configuration, then click the Activity tab.
46
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Feature Profiles
There are a total of nine activity codes; the first six are pre-configured as follows:
1 – System Default, 2 – Personal, 3 – Meeting, 4 – Away From Desk,
5 – Business Travel, 6 – Personal Time Off
The remaining three activity codes (7, 8, 9) are not assigned and can be customized by the administrator. To
customize an activity code, click on the activity code and click Edit.
In the Edit Activity dialog box, enter name of the Activity and click OK.
Feature Profiles
Select System > System Configuration, then click the Feature Profiles tab to configure feature profiles.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
47
Chapter 4: System Configuration
Figure 28. System Configuration, Feature Profiles tab
The Feature Profiles configuration tab allows the system administrator to create an extension feature profile
that includes enabling or disabling of the following extension features:
AltiGen Voice Mail:
## <pwd> – Login to VM
#14 – Personal Options
Making Calls:
#34 – Dial by Name
#35 – Station Privilege Override
#93 – Intercom
Answering Calls:
#29
#30
#31
#41
#51
#81
#82
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Individual Call Pickup
System Call Pickup
Personal Call Park
System Call Park
Line Park Pickup
Hands Free Mode
Dial Tone Disabled
Call Management:
#26
#27
#32
#33
#36
#37
–
–
–
–
–
–
Station Logout
Station Login
Enter Account Code
Do Not Disturb
Call Forwarding
Remote Call Forwarding
Other Features:
#12 – Language Setting
#38 – Outside Call Blocking
48
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Feature Profiles
#39
#44
#45
#46
#53
#54
#56
#59
#66
#73
#90
#91
Note:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Operator Offline
Overhead Paging
Overhead Paging by Trunk
Group Paging
Outgoing Workgroup
Login Workgroup
Logout Workgroup
Workgroup Call Monitor
Trace Collection
Silent System Call Park
READY to Receive Workgroup Call
NOT READY to Receive Workgroup Call
If the extension is an IP extension, #26 / #27 is still available when the phone is in the onhook position,
even if it is disabled in the extension’s feature profile.
Adding Feature Profiles
By default, a System feature profile is assigned as 0. To add a new Feature Profile, click the Add button and
type a name for the feature profile.
Note:
When adding a feature profile, the system will automatically assign the lowest available number.
Select the check boxes for the MaxCS 7.0 feature codes that you want to be associated with this feature
profile, then click Apply.
After the System Administrator creates a Feature Profile, the Feature Profile can be assigned to a specific
extension from the General page of Extension Configuration. (See “Setting Personal Information” on page
161 for more information on assigning a feature profile to an extension.)
Important: If you assign a feature profile (for example: 2 – Sales Group) to an extension in Extension
Configuration, and that feature profile is subsequently deleted and a new feature profile is
created that uses the same number (for example: 2 – Marketing Group), the extension will
automatically be assigned to the new feature profile. So, it is important to note which extensions
are assigned to certain feature profiles, especially when adding new profiles or deleting old ones.
Limitation
You should include #26 (Station Logout) in a feature profile assigned to an IP phone. If #26 is disabled in that
phone’s feature profile, phone registration issues arise.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
49
Chapter 4: System Configuration
50
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
5
Media Server and Gateway Management
This section is for enterprise deployment using Multi-Gateway Softswitch architecture with the Softswitch,
media server, and gateway(s) running in different chassis. In a single chassis all-in-one installation, gateway
management configuration is not required. With Multi-Gateway Softswitch architecture, MaxCS 7.0 can control
telephony boards that reside in different chassis (gateways) and make them function as a unified system.
Multiple AltiGen servers can be configured as gateways. Each gateway is controlled by the MAXCS software.
The following diagrams show several Multi-Gateway Softswitch deployment scenarios:
Figure 29. Fewer than 200 users deployment (left); up to 1,000 users deployment (right)
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
51
Chapter 5: Media Server and Gateway Management
Figure 30. Multi-Gateway Softswitch deployment using OFFICE3G server
Some considerations:
• MAXCS and gateway servers must be on the same LAN. Connecting a gateway from a remote site to the
MAXCS site through a WAN connection is not supported. The WAN network delay and latency may cause
synchronization signal failure between MAXCS and the gateway.
• An AltiGen Gateway license is required to set up a gateway.
Managing Gateways
Whether you are using multiple gateways or one gateway, you will perform gateway management functions in
the Softswitch Component Configuration window.
The Softswitch Component Configuration window lists each gateway in your system, its ID, name, and type
(media server or gateway), status, IP address, password, country, and how many IP phones are assigned to
the gateway as a home gateway. Use this window to:
• Add and delete a gateway
• Attach and detach a gateway
• Change a gateway name, IP address, password, country
• Enable Media Server on the Softswitch
• Set TDM Bus mode for a gateway
• Set CT-Bus clock for a gateway
To open the Softswitch Component Configuration window, select System > Softswitch Component
Management.
52
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Parameters
Figure 31. Softswitch Component Configuration window, Media Server/Gateway tab
Setting Parameters
To read or set parameters for a specific gateway, first select the gateway in the list on the left. After making
changes to a gateway, click Apply before selecting another gateway. When you are finished with the window,
click OK.
Parameter
Description
ID/Name/Type
Lists all gateways that have been added using the Add button in this window.
Status
Shows the status of the selected gateway: active, disconnected, initializing,
resetting, failed. (Read-only field.)
Name
The name you gave the selected gateway for easy identification.
Type
Shows whether this is a media server or gateway. If the ID is other than 00, you
cannot change the type in this configuration screen. If you want to change the
type, you need to delete the entry and recreate it. You need to have sufficient
Gateway or Media Server Licenses in order to add an entry.
Address
The IP address of the selected gateway.
Password
The password assigned to the selected gateway. (Each gateway has its own
password.)
Country
The country where the gateway resides. This configuration determines what tone
table will be used for the gateway. Extension users assigned to this gateway will
hear different off-hook and busy tones, for example, if this parameter is set differently from the MAXCS system setting.
Home IP Exts
The number of IP extensions that have been assigned to the selected gateway in
the Extension Configuration window. (Read-only field.) This information will help
you configure sufficient resources for IP phones on each gateway.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
53
Chapter 5: Media Server and Gateway Management
Parameter
Description
Enable Media Server on
Softswitch
On an AltiGen-certified server, you can run the Softswitch and Media Server in the
same machine. (You must have a Media Server license.)
This option is available to gateway ID 00 if MaxAdmin is running on the MAXCS
machine.
After the box is checked or cleared, reboot the Softswitch machine. The Type will
change to Gateway or Media Server as appropriate.
Note: This option is appropriate to a small- to medium-scale system.
CT-Bus Mode
The CT bus is the telephony switching bus that connects all telephony boards inside each gateway. It can be set as Mu-Law or A-Law. The default is Mu-Law for
North America. For European countries and regions that are using E1 digital trunk,
this setting needs to be changed to A-Law.
Set CT-Bus Clock
This parameter determines which telephony board will provide the clock signal for
the TDM bus. If you don't have multiple T1 or E1 boards in a gateway, the default
Auto setting is recommended. The system will find the appropriate board to supply the clock. If you have multiple T1 or E1 boards in a gateway, the system will
automatically select the one with the lowest logical board ID as the clock source.
However, in some circumstances, you may need to manually change to other
boards. For example:
-If multiple T1/E1 boards are in the gateway and the T1/E1 board that has been
selected automatically is not active.
-If the T1/E1 board that has been selected automatically is set up as a tie trunk to
another system, and the T1/E1 connecting to the CO is on the other board.
Board button
[Not used at this time]
Refresh button
Refreshes the selected gateway’s (read-only) status display
Config button
Opens the AltiGateway Configuration Tool, where you can see information on the
selected gateway and change the gateway ID and password for this gateway.
Adding and Attaching a Gateway
CAUTION!Always try to attach a gateway when call activity in the system is low. If resources are being used
in one of the gateways, ongoing calls may be dropped.
To attach a gateway to the MAXCS system, you must first add it to the list in the Softswitch Component
Configuration window.
To add a gateway to the list,
1.
Click the Add button.
2.
Set this gateway’s unique number. Each gateway in the system must have a unique identifying number.
3.
Specify a name for the gateway that identifies it to you.
4.
Select the type: Media Server or Gateway.
5.
Enter the IP address of the gateway.
54
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Detaching and Deleting a Gateway
6.
Create a password for this gateway. The password is used for access to the Gateway Configuration Tool
for the gateway.
After you add a gateway to the list, you can attach it to the MAXCS system. Also, you may have disconnected
a gateway that has already been attached. In either case, you can attach it in the Softswitch Component
Configuration window.
To attach a gateway to the MAXCS system,
1.
Select the gateway you want to attach.
2.
Click the Attach button.
It takes 2-5 minutes to attach a gateway, depending on how many boards are in the gateway. If a “Failed”
message appears, you may have entered an incorrect IP address or password, or the gateway may
already be attached.
Detaching and Deleting a Gateway
You can detach a gateway without shutting down the MAXCS system.
CAUTION!Always try to detach a gateway when call activity in the system is low. If resources are being
used in one of the gateways, ongoing calls may be dropped.
To detach a gateway from the MAXCS system:
1.
Select the gateway you want to detach.
2.
Click Detach. You are asked for confirmation.
3.
Click Yes to confirm. A message confirms that the detachment was successful, and the Status field of the
gateway reads Disconnected.
To delete a gateway from the Softswitch Component Configuration window,
First detach the gateway. Then select the gateway you want to delete, and click the Delete button. The
gateway disappears from the window. You can add it back again, if you want, by using the Add button.
Changing Gateway ID and Password
You can change the selected gateway’s unique number (01, 02) and the password by clicking the Config
button in the Softswitch Component Configuration window. This opens the Gateway Configuration Tool. Make
your changes, and click Apply.
Gateway Configuration Tool
The configuration tool that opens when you click the Config button in the Softswitch Component Configuration
window can also be opened from the Start > All Programs > MAX Communication Server ACC/ACM >
Gateway menu. When you open it from the Start menu, you’ll see this dialog box:
Figure 32. Gateway Configuration Tool log-in dialog box
Enter the IP address and password of the gateway you want to check on, and click OK.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
55
Chapter 5: Media Server and Gateway Management
Figure 33. Gateway Configuration Tool
The window displays gateway settings, product version, and a board view for the gateway, showing each
board’s name and serial number.
The settings:
Parameter
Description
Gateway IP Address
The IP address of the gateway identified in the title bar.
Gateway ID Setting
Shows the unique numeric ID of the gateway identified in the title bar.
(Editable field.)
Password Setting
The password of the gateway identified in the title bar. (Editable field.)
Status
The status of the gateway: active, disconnected, initializing, resetting,
failed.
Current Softswitch IP Address
The IP address of the machine running MAXCS.
Product Version
The software version of the gateway service.
Configuring the Applications Server
In the Softswitch Component Configuration window, Applications Server tab, configure the IP address of the
Voice Message server and the Enterprise server.
56
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring the Applications Server
Figure 34. Softswitch Component Configuration window, Applications Server tab
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
57
Chapter 5: Media Server and Gateway Management
58
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
6
Voice Mail Configuration
Use the Voice Mail Configuration window to control the following:
• How the system processes voice mail notification
• How the system processes voice mail deletion and expired messages
• How the system records voice mail, system phrases, custom phrases, personal greetings, directory name
recording, and queue phrases
• Enable or disable SMTP/POP3 service to deliver voice mail to an e-mail address as an attachment
• Enable or disable Microsoft Exchange synchronization service, or select Exchange’s bridged access or
native VM integration with Exchange’s Automated Attendant or Unified Messaging Server
Note:
A built-in throttle checks the amount of available disk space before allowing users to record a call. If
the available space on the hard disk is less than 10% of the total space, the system will warn the caller
that there is not enough room to record the call, and the call will not be recorded. This default
threshold, 90%, can be adjusted (between 50% to 95%) by modifying a registry entry:
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\AltiGen Communications, Inc.\AltiWare\DiskSpace; the default
value is DWORD 90..
To open the Voice Mail Configuration window, select System > Voice Mail Configuration
Managing Messages
The Messaging tab in the Voice Mail Configuration window provides for setting basic parameters and options
for messaging, including message notification retry attempts, message management options, recording
options, and e-mail activation and usage.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
59
Chapter 6: Voice Mail Configuration
Figure 35. Voice Mail Configuration, Messaging tab
Setting Message Notification Retries
When a message is sent to a user’s voice mailbox and outcall notification is configured, the system will try to
call a phone number, pager, or an extension to deliver notification. You can set the retry setting for the
notification as follows:
Parameter
60
Description
Maximum Retry Count
Can be between 0 and 16. This is the number of times the system will try to
deliver a voice message notification after the original attempt. For example, 5
retries means five tries after the original, or 6 total attempts.
Retry Interval in Minutes
The number of minutes between retry attempts. Five minutes is the minimum
and 60 minutes is the maximum interval allowed. Choices are in 5-minute
increments. The default is 5 minutes.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Managing Messages
Setting Message Management Options
Set voice mail message confirmation and warning parameters:
Parameter
Confirm Message
Deletion
Warn Expiration of Saved
Messages
Description
If checked, the system plays a voice message instructing the user to confirm request for deletion by pressing the # key. This prevents users from accidentally
deleting messages with a single key entry.
If checked, the system warns the user that saved messages will be deleted due
to their retention time expiring. The message is given the day before the
messages are automatically deleted, and the user then has the option to either
keep or delete the messages. By default, this feature is enabled.
Note: If this feature is disabled, saved messages are deleted automatically
without warning when they expire.
Setting Message Recording Options
Set voice mail message recording parameters:
Parameter
Description
Minimum Recording Length
Sets the minimum length in seconds for any recording (incoming voice mail
message, personal greeting, system prompts, introductions to forwarded
voice mails). This can be from 1 - 5 seconds, or 0, which means no minimum.
All recordings that are shorter than the designated Minimum Recording
length are deleted. This feature is recommended when users receive many
short, empty voice mail messages on a regular basis and would like them
automatically deleted.
Pause Detect Length
Selected, this feature causes the deletion of pauses in messages. The default pause detect length is 500 ms. The pause detect can be disabled by
deselecting the check box, or the length can be set to a value between 200–
2000 ms (.2–2 seconds).
Setting Exchange Integration Options
Set Exchange integration options. Access to these options requires an AltiGen Exchange Integration License.
To assign this license to an extension, see “Assign Exchange Integration License” on page 172.
If you are opting to use Exchange’s Speech Enabled Voice Mail features or Unified Messaging, Exchange
Server and MaxCS 7.0 need to be installed on the same domain with a network throughput rate of no less
than 100 Mbps.
Full configuration details are given in “Microsoft Exchange Integration” on page 331.
You may choose an option when you install MaxCS 7.0 , and you may change the option later. If you change
the option later, you need to restart services.
Parameter
Description
Disabled
Disables Exchange integration.
Synchronize with Exchange
Allows a two-way synchronization between a user's MaxCS 7.0 voice mail
and the user’s Outlook-readable mail messages with their attached .wav
files in the user's Inbox. When e-mails or voice mails are deleted from one
server, they are automatically deleted from the other server as well. (This is
what AltiGen’s previous releases have offered.)
If you select this option, enter the DNS name of the Exchange server in the
Exchange Client Access Server field (do not enter the IP address).
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
61
Chapter 6: Voice Mail Configuration
Parameter
Bridged Access to Exchange
Enable
Synchronization
Native VM Integration with
Exchange
Description
Through bridged access integration, via a SIP connection, AltiGen’s Voice
Mail System provides an option to the user to directly access Exchange Unified Messaging (by pressing 7 in extension voice mail after entering the
password). Once connected, users can check and reply to e-mail, manage
calendars, and send messages.
Note: If Exchange server is offline or down, the user pressing 7 will hear an
error message, “This voice mailbox is not accepting new messages at this
time.” All other VM features still function, as they are provided by the MaxCS
7.0 system and not Exchange server.
If you select this option, enter the DNS name of the Exchange server in the
Exchange Unified Messaging Server field (do not enter the IP address).
If you want to synchronize voice mail between the AltiGen mail box and the
Exchange server, check the Enable Synchronization check box. If you
don’t check this, voice mail is not synchronized between the two message
stores.
Uses Exchange as a native voice mail box to store voicemail files, providing
a unified mailbox for all message types. Callers are forwarded to the
Exchange mailbox when an extension is ring-no-answer, busy, or in DND.
Accessing voice mail is done through the Exchange system.
When this option is activated, all physical/virtual/WG mail boxes with
associated Exchange mailboxes are switched to Exchange. Extensions that
do not have an Exchange mail box are treated as mailbox disabled.
Users with an Exchange account press ## to log into the Exchange
voicemail box. The system establishes a voice stream to the Exchange
mailbox through a SIP connection.
To turn on the message waiting light on the desktop phone and allow AltiGen CTI client applications to manage voice mails, the voicemail files are
replicated back to MAX Communication Server. When a voicemail file is
heard, marked save, or deleted from an AltiGen client application, the voicemail attribute is changed in the Exchange server accordingly.
Limitations:
• Personal options usually invoked by pressing 4 on the AltiGen Voice Mail
System menu must be invoked by pressing #14.
• The following AltiGen voice mail functions are not supported: activity
greeting, voice mail distribution list, voice mail out call.
• One Number Access is not available.
If you select this option, enter the DNS name of the Exchange server in the
Exchange Unified Messaging Server field (do not enter the IP address).
62
Exchange Client Access
Server
Enter the DNS name of the Exchange Client Access Server.
Exchange Unified Messaging
Server
Enter the DNS name of the Exchange Unified Messaging Server.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Creating Distribution Lists
Setting E-mail Messaging Options
To use the MaxCS 7.0 e-mail services, configure the following settings.
Parameter
Enable SMTP/POP3 E-Mail
Service
Description
Selected, this enables incoming and outgoing mail services on MaxCS
7.0 —Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) and Post Office Protocol
(POP3).
This field defines the extension that will be assigned as a Postmaster Extension. When the e-mail system receives an e-mail with an invalid e-mail
account, the automatic reply to the sender (informing of the invalid e-mail
account used) is sent from the defined extension.
Postmaster Ext
Note: The system always requires an extension to be specified as the
Postmaster Extension. By default, the first extension in the system is used. If an extension is selected as the Postmaster Extension, it cannot be deleted until the Postmaster Extension is re-assigned to another extension.
Creating Distribution Lists
The System Distribution Lists provide for forwarding voice mail messages to multiple recipients defined as list
members. To forward a voice mail to all list members, a user needs to enter only the two-digit ID instead of
entering numerous individual extensions.
You can create up to 100 distribution lists, each composed of up to 64 extensions. The extension list member
can represent another distribution list.
Note:
The system distribution lists discussed here are different from the extension distribution lists, which
are configured through the phone sets or the MaxCommunicator or MaxAgent user applications.
To configure distribution lists, select System > Voice Mail Configuration, then click the Voice Mail
Distribution List tab.
Figure 36. Voice Mail Configuration, Voice Mail Distribution List tab
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
63
Chapter 6: Voice Mail Configuration
Defining a Distribution List
1.
On the Voice Mail Distribution List tab, select an ID (00 – 99) in the System Distribution List ID list.
The list name, if any, now appears in the Name box; the members of the list are now displayed in the
Member box, and other available extensions are displayed in the Non-Member box.
2.
To give the list a name or change the existing name, type a descriptive name into the Name box.
3.
To add a member, select the name(s) in the Non-Member list and click the Add button to move it to the
Member list.
To remove a member, select the name(s) in the Member list and click the Remove button to move it to
the Non-Member list.
You can select multiple names by using Shift-click or Ctrl-click.
4.
Click Apply to save your changes, or click OK to save and close the Voice Mail Configuration window.
64
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
7
Auto Attendant Configuration
The auto attendant (AA) feature provides quick and courteous processing of all incoming calls. An AA can be
configured to serve as a primary attendant or as a backup to a receptionist. In a call-heavy environment the
AA can greatly reduce the number of calls that need to be handled by the operator.
You can set up to 255 different AAs. AA features include:
• Multiple levels of tree structure.
• Repeat current level or jump to a specific level.
• Transfer call to extension, workgroup, hunt group, or operator.
• Dial by Name – allows a caller who does not know the extension number to spell the name using the
telephone key pad. The system will search the Directory and make a match on the name to connect the
caller to the intended party's extension.
• Name Directory Service – allows callers to hear a list of employees and their extension numbers.
• Records a voice mail message to a specific mail box.
• Allows employees to call into the system and access voice from an external location.
• Collects caller input data, for example, account code, ID, and so on.
• Data-Directed Routing – Allows the routing of calls directed by the caller's input (digit or text).
• Sets call priority and skill level requirement for workgroup call processing.
• Other advanced features include System Call Back and routing calls to SDK-based add-on applications.
Planning Is Essential
Follow the steps below before you set up an AA.
1.
Before you configure tasks for one or more AAs, plan the entire setup. Decide how many options you will
provide at each menu and how many menu levels you will use. Based on the choices in each menu, write
down the appropriate prompts or phrases to play at each menu level.
2.
Record phrases for each menu level or use the pre-recorded phrases that are available to you. See
“Phrase Management” on page 71 for more details on how to record custom phrases, use pre-recorded
phrases and use professionally recorded phrases.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
65
Chapter 7: Auto Attendant Configuration
Example: AA Planning
Auto Attendant ID: 100, Phrase 10
Auto Attendant ID: 110, Phrase 20
Main Menu for XYZ Office
Digit
Meaning
1
Reserved
for
Extensions
2
(no
prompts)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Action
Collect
Extension
Collect
Extension
Collect
Extension
Express
Expand Tree
Support
(No. 110)
Sales
Expand Tree
(No. 120)
Technical
Expand Tree
Support
(No. 130)
Phone FAQs Expand Tree
(No. 140)
Operator
To Operator
Planning is essential in organizing
an AA menu structure that makes
sense. Planning also helps you to
identify needs for custom prompts.
This simple example, using sample
work forms for each menu, shows a
beginning structure: a main menu
and two of the four expansions.
When callers are routed to
workgroup extensions, the
workgroups have their own call
handling settings for greetings,
update phrases, rules for sending to
voice mail, and so on.
Timeout (not shown on forms): after
7 seconds on first level, call the
operator; on any other level, go to
top level by default.
Express Support
Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
Meaning
Installation
Action
Call Extension
(Workgroup 350)
Board Support Call Extension
(Workgroup 360)
Version 5
Call Extension
Support
(Workgroup 370)
Version 6
Call Extension
Support
(Workgroup 380)
Operator
Repeat Menu
Main Menu
To Operator
Repeat Level
GoTo Top Level
Auto Attendant ID: 120, Phrase 30
Sales
Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
Meaning
Hardware
Action
Call Extension
(Workgroup 310)
Applications Call Extension
(Workgroup 320)
Check Order GoTo Item 127
Status
(Collect Order #)
Other:
Call Extension
Questions, etc. (Workgroup 311)
Repeat Menu
Main Menu
Repeat Level
GoTo Top Level
Adding Auto Attendants
The first 16 AAs are provided with the menus blank. You can edit these as described in “Configuring Auto
Attendants” on page 67. You don’t need to add a new AA if you’re going to use 16 or fewer.
To add an AA beyond the first 16,
Click the AA Configuration button, or select System > AA Configuration.
66
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring Auto Attendants
Copies an AA to a selected
ID.
Exports all your AA settings to
an HTML file
Figure 37. The AA Select window
• Edit – Opens the AA window, where you can edit the selected AA.
• Add – Opens the Add AA dialog box.
Select an ID in the list and type in a descriptive Name for the AA, then click OK.
• Clear – Clears all edits to the selected AA, restoring system defaults.
• Copy From – Lets you make a copy of an AA (and then modify it, as you like).
1.
Select your target ID from the AA Select window.
2.
Click the Copy From button.
3.
From the list, choose the AA you want to copy to your selected ID.
4.
In the pop-up box, click Yes to complete the copy.
• Close – Closes the AA Select dialog box.
• Help – Opens the help file for AA.
• Export – Exports all AA settings to an HTML file.
Configuring Auto Attendants
To configure an AA, click the AA Configuration button, or select System > AA Configuration. When the AA
Select window opens, select an AA in the list and click the Edit button.
This opens the AA window, showing the AA you selected in the title bar.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
67
Chapter 7: Auto Attendant Configuration
Figure 38. The AA window
Note:
You can check the Hide ‘No Action’ Items check box to hide items that are set to “no action.” This
will give you a cleaner view of your various action items.
Configuring Menu Items
The AA is a tree-based structure with unlimited tree levels. The following rules guide the basic AA
configuration:
•
Each item is an action point with its ID number and name.
•
The top of the tree is a "O" (for Origin).
•
A timeout is indicated by a "T".
•
Any action item can have a "Prompt". The list displays phrase files located at
C:\Postoffice\Phrases\LangCustom directory. A phrase file can be any file name. (Note: Prior to the 5.1
Release, the "Phrase" directory was under C:AltiServ, and custom phrases had to use a phrase number
from 0001 to 0999.)
•
If one action item has multiple choices, you need to select "Expand Tree" instead of using "Go to next
menu" to create a new level.
•
You can jump to any action item within the same AA.
Every item will execute steps according to the following rules:
•
First step – Play prompt if the box is checked. If the prompt box is not checked, the AA will go to the second
step without delay.
•
Second step – Push URL/Web-Page forces a web page to a Web caller's screen when the call reaches
the AA using AtliWeb's Webcall button over the Internet. If this box is not checked, go to the next step
without delay.
68
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring Auto Attendants
•
Third step – Set Call Priority for MaxCS 7.0 ACM priority queuing. You can assign a priority number from
1-9 to the caller who selects this menu item. The highest priority is 1, the lowest priority is 9. If this box is
not checked, go to the next step without delay.
•
Fourth step – Set Call SKLR (Skill Level Requirement) for MaxCS 7.0 ACM skill-based routing. You can
assign an SKLR from 1-9 to the caller who selects this menu item. If this box is not checked, go to the next
step without delay.
•
Fifth step – Execute the action selected from the drop down list. The following table describes each action.
Auto Attendant Actions
Action
Description
No Action
An “invalid” message plays and the menu is repeated.
Level – Expand Tree
Expand menu item to create additional level.
Level – Repeat Current
Level
Repeats the level that contains the “Repeat Current Level” menu item.
Level – Go to Top Level
Go to the top level and repeat action items on the top level.
Level – Go to
Specified Item
Goes to selected menu item at any level. A list opens from which you select the
item.
Call – To Ext./Group
Transfers call to an extension or group number you select in the list.
Call – To Operator
Routes the call to the operator (the operator is defined in the System
Configuration window).
Call – Dial By Name
Prompts the caller to enter the name (first, or last, or both in any order) of the
person they want to speak with and dials the extension that matches the name.
Callers may not have to enter the entire first or last name before a match is
found.
Call – Collect Extension
The top level of each AA collects the extension number automatically. The
system has a timing delay to differentiate if the first digit the caller entered is a
menu option or the first digit of an extension number. Once past the top level, the
system will not have the timing delay to differentiate digits. If you would like to
provide the option for a caller to enter an extension number, you need to map
this action item to one of the menu options.
Call – Directory Service
Lists the system users and their extensions to the caller. For this to work
properly, users need to record their directory names.
Call – Disconnect
Disconnects the call.
VM – Record Message
Leaves a voice mail message in the specified voice mail box. If you want the
caller to hear the extension’s greeting before hearing the start-recording beep,
check Play Extension Greeting.
VM – Mailbox Access
Allows the caller to log in to the voice mail system to retrieve voice mail or change
personal options from the outside. This option is assigned to the "#" key at the
top level of each AA by default.
Adv. – System Call Back
Allows outside caller to dial into the system, enter a call back number, hang up,
and wait for the system to call back. The system will request the caller to enter
an extension and password for authentication. The call back number needs to
include the toll call prefix and area code for long distance and international calls.
The trunk or route access code is not required when entering a call back number.
Adv. – Collect Digits
See the discussion on “Collecting Digits.
Adv. – Advanced Call
Router
When selected, the system will hand over the call to the Advanced Call Router
application through the SDK API interface. The ACR application needs to log in
to a virtual extension with the correct password. If the ACR application fails to
connect, the system will execute the sub-level "&" as a fail action.
Adv. – Application
Process Control
When selected, the system will hand over the call to the APC (Application
Process Control) SDK through an application extension as a control extension.
An SDK APC based application needs to log in to the application extension to
receive the call. If the APC application fails to connect, the system will execute
the sub-level "&" as a fail action.
Note: The APC SDK license is not supported in the MaxCS Private Cloud
service.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
69
Chapter 7: Auto Attendant Configuration
Collecting Digits
When a caller selects the "Collect Digits" action item, a custom phrase is required to advise the caller how
many digits are required. The system will look at "Min Length" and "Max Length" to determine if the collect digit
action was successful or failed.
• If successful, the system executes the sub-level "&" action item.
• If failed, the system executes the menu item you define as a fail over action.
To use the Collect Digits action, select the Adv. – Collect Digits action, then set additional parameters.
Figure 39. Collect digits
•
Text Tag – A tag name, which is critical for the following operations:
• For CDR logging, the IVRData field will log the collected digits as "Tag=xxxxx". For example, if tag is
configured as "Account" and collected digits is "67663", the CDR database will log
"Account=67663" in the IVRData field.
• For MaxAgent client display, the above example is displayed as "Account=67663" on the View >
IVRData section.
• For CDR Search, the above example is displayed as "Account=67663" on the IVRData column.
• To display collected digits on the IP phone, you need to set the tag as "DISP" (stands for "Display" and
is case-sensitive. The Phone Display/Name Line of the extension configuration needs to be
configured as IVR Data (Display). This feature supports inbound trunk calls only.
•
Min. Length – The minimum length of digits to be collected.
•
Max. Length – The maximum length of digits to be collected.
•
PSTN Call Inter-Digit Timeout – The length of time the system will wait between collecting of digits before
timing out.
•
Inter-Digit Timeout after Max Length – The length of time the system will wait after the maximum length
of digits is collected.
•
Web Call Response Timeout – The length of time the system will wait for digits after responding to a
Web call before timeout.
70
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Phrase Management
Making Auto Attendant Assignments
Once the AAs are set up, you can use them in various in-call routing situations – trunk, DNIS, caller ID, in-call
routing, and an answering option for an extension or workgroup.
For example, for trunk /AA assignments, see “Incoming Call Routing” on page 140. For extension or group
assignments, see “Setting Answering Options” on page 179.
Phrase Management
You might want to record unique phrases to customize an AA or a group. When the system is configured to
have the AA answer incoming calls, callers hear a customized greeting. For example:
“Thank you for calling ABC Company.
Enter the extension number of the person you wish to speak with.
Press 1 for sales.
Press 2 for technical support.
Press 3 for accounts payable.
Press 0 to reach the operator.
To repeat this menu, press star (*).”
An example of a group greeting phrase:
“Please hold; someone will be with you shortly.”
You might also want to give callers the option of hearing prompts in another language. For information on
configuring for a multilingual AA, see “Multilingual Configuration” on page 75.
This section covers information on how to use pre-recorded phrases, record custom phrases, and use
professionally recorded phrases.
Using Pre-Recorded Prompts
MaxCS 7.0 provides ready-to-use pre-recorded phrases. Phrase 0001 is the default AA greeting at the root
menu level. Phrases 0291 through 0297 are phrases used for group queue prompts. Select the phrase you
want to use in the Prompt field. To hear the pre-recorded phrases:
1.
Use any phone to dial “###”, and log in with the system manager’s extension and password.
2.
Press 6 for the Phrase Management option.
3.
Press 1 to review a phrase.
4.
Enter the 4-digit phrase number from the list below to hear the phrase.
Phrase #
Phrase
0001
(default)
Thank you for calling. If you know the extension of the person you wish to speak with, please enter
it now. To reach the operator, press 0 or simply stay on the line.
0291
(default)
Please hold; someone will be with you shortly. For your convenience, you may leave a message if
you wish by pressing the # key on your telephone and we will get right back to you.
0292
Please hold; someone will be with you shortly.
0293
We appreciate your call and will be with you as quickly as possible.
0294
Thank you for your patience. We should be with you soon.
0295
Thank you for your patience. We should be with you soon. For your convenience, you may leave a
message if you wish by pressing the # key on your telephone and we will get right back to you.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
71
Chapter 7: Auto Attendant Configuration
Phrase #
Phrase
0296
We apologize for the extended delay, but our current call load is abnormally high. Remember, you
may leave a message by pressing the # key on your telephone and we will get right back to you.
0297
You may still wait if you prefer, but we suggest you leave a message by pressing the # key on your
telephone and we will get right back to you.
Recording Custom Phrases from the AltiGen Phone
Note:
If you have an AltiGen SDK license, you can use the AltiGen Custom Phrase Manager discussed in
“AltiGen Custom Phrase Manager” on page 373. This application has a graphical user interface that
makes recording phrases easier.
When you create custom phrases from the AltiGen phone, keep a record of phrase numbers and the
corresponding phrases so that if a phrase needs to be changed, the correct phrase number is readily available.
To record a custom phrase,
1.
Log in from any phone on the system by dialing “###”, and entering the system manager’s extension and
password. This brings you to the AltiGen Voice Mail System Main Menu.
2.
Press 6 for the Phrase Management option.
3.
Press 2 to record a phrase.
4.
Enter a four-digit phrase number between 0001 and 0999.
5.
Record the phrase after the tone. Press # at the end of the recording.
6.
The system will replay the recorded phrase. Press # if the recording is acceptable.
7.
At the Phrase Management menu, press 2 to record additional prompts or star (*) to exit Phrase
Management.
Phrases are stored in the C:\PostOffice\Phrases\LangCustom directory. You can modify the phrase file to any
meaningful name if you want.
Using Professionally Recorded Phrases
Recording studios such as Worldly Voices provide professionally recorded prompts as electronic files that can
be installed and used on the MaxCS 7.0 system. (See the AltiGen web site, at www.altigen.com, for more
information. Click Customer at the top of the page, and then click Resources for Creating Professional
Voice Prompts.)
AltiGen provides the Voice File Converter utility to convert these files into the proper MaxCS 7.0 format (use
the Windows Start > Programs > MAX Communication Server ACM > Utilities menu). Some recording
studios provide the conversion service for an additional fee. The converted file can then be used for an AA or
for a workgroup or huntgroup group setup.
To install professionally recorded phrases or prompts,
1.
Assign a prompt number to each prompt you would like recorded. Or give the prompt a unique identifying
name. AltiGen-supplied phrases are numbered, but phrases don’t have to be numbered.
2.
Submit your prompt script and prompt name to the recording studio.
3.
Instruct the recording studio to record prompts in either 8KHz or 11.025KHz mono in the WAV format.
4.
Ask the studio to convert the WAV file(s) into the proper MaxCS 7.0 format.
• If using Worldly Voices, this conversion is done for you.
• If you are using a studio other than Worldly Voices, use the Voice File Conversion utility. This utility
converts an audio file recorded at either 8KHz or 11.025KHz in the WAV format to an MaxCS 7.0
playable audio file.
72
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Phrase Management
5.
Once you receive the prompts in the MaxCS 7.0 format, place them in the
C:\PostOffice\phrases\LangCustom directory on the gateway that is running MAXCS.
Your prompts are now ready to be used.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
73
Chapter 7: Auto Attendant Configuration
74
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
8
Multilingual Configuration
MaxCS 7.0 ACM supports multiple language prompts (8 languages maximum) for trunk calls and extension
users, letting you configure your system to handle the following types of scenarios in a multilingual environment:
• An auto attendant (AA) may serve callers who speak different languages. MaxCS 7.0 can be configured
to let the caller select a preferred language in which to hear prompts. Once a language is selected, the
whole call session will use the selected language.
• An internal user may use a feature code to execute a certain action, including logging into voice mail.
Normally the user hears system prompts first. If the user is not fluent in the default system language,
another language can be assigned to his extension. Whenever that extension user encounters prompts,
the system will use the assigned language to play the prompts.
• DNIS may also be used to select a language for the caller. If your company has multiple phone numbers,
you can configure MaxCS 7.0 to direct a caller to a language based on the phone number the caller has
dialed. For example, if you give out different 800 numbers to different countries, and a call comes in from
the 800 number you give out to customers in Mexico, you can configure MaxCS 7.0 to direct that 800
number to the “Mexico Spanish” language prompts or to an extension that uses the corresponding language in its prompts. This eliminates the caller having to select a language.
Note:
The MaxCS 7.0 multilingual feature requires the purchase of an AltiGen Multilingual License.
Configuration Overview
Configuring multilingual features involves most or all of the following actions, which are discussed in
subsequent sections:
• Have the appropriate system and custom phrases recorded in each language that your company wants
to use (in addition to the default language).
• Store the custom phrases in new directories under the C:\PostOffice\Phrases directory, using the
prescribed naming convention.
• Add the new languages to the Multilingual Configuration screen.
• Enable auto attendant support in the Multilingual Configuration screen, AA tab.
• In the Extension Configuration screen, choose an available language for the internal user, if desired.
• Enable the extension user to change the preferred language for the extension by using a feature code
#12, if desired.
• Configure the Language Setting in DNIS, if desired.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
75
Chapter 8: Multilingual Configuration
Creating Language Phrase Packages
For each set of phrases you want in a different language, you need to have phrases recorded in that language.
See “Using Professionally Recorded Phrases” on page 72 for details. Each language’s phrase package must
contain phrase files, and two text files: one text file that lists syntax rules for numbers, and one that lists syntax
rules for sentence structure, since these vary from language to language.
The phrase files will have the exact same name/number as in the default language directory and will be part
of the same AA, but they will be stored in a different directory.
Note:
AltiGen authorized distributors in each country will perform localization procedures to create language
packages, including syntax rules for numbers and sentence structure for their local market. For international customers, please contact the authorized AltiGen distributor in your country to obtain localized language phrases.
Storing Language Phrase Packages
Additional language phrases (system and custom) and syntax styles need to be copied to the correct directory
before system startup, so that the system can recognize them. If they are added after system startup, MaxCS
7.0 needs to be shut down and restarted, before the directories are recognized.
(see Figure 40) illustrates the directory storage structure for language phrases.
Figure 40. Storage structure for multilingual phrases
The directories Lang1 and LangCustom contain the phrases of the system default language.
Phrases for language X should be saved in a pair of directories: Lang_X and LangCustom_X. Lang_X stores
the phrases required by the system, and LangCustom_X stores your custom phrases.
For example, to add a language for Mexico, you need to create two directories:
• Lang_Mexico
• LangCustom_Mexico
Configuring for a Multilingual System
To configure MaxCS 7.0 as a multilingual system, select System > Multilingual Configuration. The
configuration screen opens to the Language tab. Here, you will add references to the language directories you
created. These are the directories that contain phrases in other languages.
76
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Enabling Multilingual Support in the Auto Attendant
Figure 41. Multilingual Configuration, Language tab
When you first run MaxCS 7.0 , only the default language is listed in the Multilingual Configuration screen, and
the description of the default language is displayed as Default Language. Each language added to the table
will have a formal name, a description, a system phrase directory (LangDir_X), and a custom phrase directory
(LangCustomDir_X), as shown in (see Figure 41).
To add a language,
1.
Click the Add button.
2.
Choose a language from the list. The list shows the language directories you have added to the
C:\PostOffice\Phrases directory.
3.
Enter a description for the language. This description will appear elsewhere in the graphical user interface,
for example in the Extension Configuration window and the AA tab in this screen. Click OK.
4.
Repeat these steps for each language you want to add.
The contents of the fields System phrase directory and Custom phrase directory are fetched from the
location where the language phrases are stored. They are not editable.
Only the description of the language is editable here. To edit it, click the Edit button or double-click the row.
The default language cannot be deleted. After you add languages, any language used by DNIS, an extension,
or an AA cannot be deleted.
Enabling Multilingual Support in the Auto Attendant
After you have recorded phrases and added a reference to their directories in the Multilingual Configuration
> Language tab, as described above, you are ready to enable multilingual support in the auto attendant.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
77
Chapter 8: Multilingual Configuration
1.
Select System > Multilingual Configuration > AA tab.
2.
From the list at the left, select the AA you want to configure with multilingual support.
3.
Check the Enable Multilingual Support check box. The Multilingual Enabled column changes to
TRUE.
4.
In the Language Setting group of fields, check the Language Selection Prompt check box.
5.
Choose the prompt that lets the caller select a language.
6.
Beside each appropriate number, select a language from the list that corresponds to the phone key the
user would press to hear that language. (For example, “For English, press 1; for Spanish, press 2...”)
7.
Click Apply if you have more work to do in the configuration screen, or click OK to accept the changes
and close the screen.
Note:
This configuration is on top of the regular AA configuration. The system will execute the regular AA
action items after a language preference is selected by the caller.
Configuring the Extension
Extension users have a default language configured, and that language is always used for them whenever they
hear a prompt on their extension. The default language is assigned in Extension Configuration > General
tab.
78
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring the Extension
Figure 42. Selecting a language for an extension user
In the Language list, select the desired language, and click OK.
Extension User Can Change Language Setting
Extension users can change the extension’s language setting by using feature code #12, if feature code #12
is configured on the System > Multilingual Configuration > Feature Code tab.
Figure 43. Configuring feature code #12 to allow a user to change an extension’s selection
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
79
Chapter 8: Multilingual Configuration
Configuring Feature Code #12 for Language Selection
1.
Check the Language Selection Prompt check box.
2.
Select the prompt the extension user will hear after pressing #12. You must know the text of this prompt,
so you can match the languages to the correct numbers in the next step.
For example, the prompt the extension user might hear after pressing #12 might be “To change the
preferred language for this extension, press 1 for English, press 2 for Spanish, press 3 for Chinese.”
3.
Beside each number, select a language from the list that corresponds to the prompt. The languages listed
are those that you have added to MaxCS 7.0 on the Language tab of this window.
For example, if you were working from the example prompt in step 2, you would select English beside the
number 1, Spanish beside the number 2, and Chinese beside the number 3. The remaining fields would
be left as None.
Feature code #12 must also be enabled in System Configuration > Feature Profiles tab.
To enable feature code #12,
1.
In System > System Configuration > Feature Profiles tab, check the #12 -language setting check box.
2.
Click OK.
Allows extension user
to specify his
extension’s language
setting using #12
All feature codes are enabled, by default. The default feature profile name is “0-System.”
Lastly, the extension user must have a feature profile assigned to him that includes #12. This is done on the
Extension Configuration > General tab.
To assign feature code #12 to an extension,
1.
On the PBX > Extension Configuration > General tab, select the extension.
2.
In the “Personal Information” panel of the General tab, assign a Feature Profile that includes #12.
Using DNIS to Set the Language
If your company has multiple phone numbers, you can configure MaxCS 7.0 to direct a caller to prompts in a
selected language based on the phone number the caller has dialed.
80
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Which Language Will Be Used?
To direct specified DNIS calls to a selected-language AA or extension,
1.
Select PBX > In Call Routing Configuration > DNIS Routing tab .
2.
Click the Add button to add a number.
3.
Select where you want to route callers who have dialed that number.
4.
Select the appropriate language from the Language Setting list.
5.
Click Apply.
Figure 44. Configuring the language setting in DNIS
See “DNIS Routing” on page 145 for rules and restrictions on routing using DNIS.
Which Language Will Be Used?
MaxCS 7.0 follows these rules to determine which language to use:
1.
The extension user hears the prompts in the language configured or selected via the #12 feature code.
2.
If the external caller selects a language in the auto attendant, MaxCS 7.0 uses the selected language. If
a language selection is invalid or times out (7 seconds) three times in a row, the default language is selected.
3.
If an extension is set for ONA (one number access), the caller will hear the prompt in the language selected previously, but when the callee picks up the ONA notification call, the callee will hear the prompt in the
language according to the extension's language setting.
4.
When the user logs in to the voice mail of an extension, the extension's language is used.
5.
If DNIS is configured for language setting, the external caller hears the prompts in the language specified
by the number he dialed.
6.
In any other case, the system default language is used.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
81
Chapter 8: Multilingual Configuration
82
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
9
Call Recording Configuration
To use the centralized call recording function, make sure the following requirements are met:
• You need a recording seat license for each extension that will be recording: either Dedicated Recording
Seat licenses assigned to particular extensions or a Concurrent Recording Session license that is shared
by a fixed number of extensions.
• It is recommended that you have a separate storage server to store recorded files.
• Recorded files (64Kbps PCM format) can be managed by the VRManager (licensed) application or can
simply be saved and played with VRPlayer (free).
• If your system has a multi-chassis configuration and the gateway needs to transmit recorded files to a
storage server, you need to set up an FTP server to facilitate the file transfer. You do not need to set up
an FTP server for a single chassis (all-in-one) installation.
• If an agent is using an IP phone and recording is turned on, the system will use a recording channel on a
VoIP board to process the recording session. The IP phone will occupy a codec channel on the VoIP board
to allow the recording channel to tap into the conversation. You need to make sure that the MaxCS 7.0
that agents belong to (and the gateway for a multi-chassis installation) have adequate VoIP codec
channels to record conversations. The basic guideline is to have one codec channel per agent.
• Because recording files requires a large amount of disk storage space, NAS (Network Attached Storage)
system is recommended, unless VRManager is used.
Note:
A built-in throttle checks the amount of available disk space before allowing users to record a call. If
the available space on the hard disk is less than 10% of the total space, the system will warn the caller
that there is not enough room to record the call, and the call will not be recorded. This default
threshold, 90%, can be adjusted (between 50% to 95%) by modifying a registry entry:
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\AltiGen Communications, Inc.\AltiWare\DiskSpace; the default
value is DWORD 90.
Description of the Recorded File Name
The recorded file name contains the following information:
• R!mmddyyyy_hhmmss!callerID!calleeID!workgroupID!DNIS!sessionID!R
• mmddyyyy_hhmmss is the time stamp when the recording starts
• callerID is the caller ID or extension number. It could also be:
•
bgn for barge-in call
•
sm for a silent monitor call
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
83
Chapter 9: Call Recording Configuration
•
trk(bbcc) for an inbound trunk call without caller ID. bb is the board logical ID and cc is the channel ID
• calleeID is the target number or trk(bbcc)
• workgroupID is the workgroup number for a workgroup call, or ext for extension call
• DNIS is the DNIS number or NA for no DNIS number
• sessionID is the CDR session ID
Configuring Call Recording
Note:
During recording, any communication from a barge-in or coach supervisor's extension becomes part
of that call recording.
To configure system-wide call recording, including centralized recording for multiple gateways, do one of the
following:
• Click the Recording button on the toolbar.
• Select System > Call Recording Configuration.
The Recording Configuration window opens:
Figure 45. Recording Configuration window
Note:
Call recording options for specific extensions/workgroups can be set up on the General tab of
Extension Configuration and Workgroup Configuration, respectively.
To enable centralized recording,
1.
Check the Enable Centralized Recording check box.
2.
Select a Recording Type from the drop-down list.
3.
In the Central Location field, browse for the directory you want to set as the destination folder and path
for saving the call recordings.
Important:
Note:
84
If you are using FTP protocol, the FTP server must be installed and configured properly on the
same machine as the Central Location directory. An FTP folder must be created for the Central
Location, so that it can be fully accessible through FTP. The FTP Path must be pointed to the
Central Location.
Windows Server users using a remote shared directory should refer to the steps described in “Using
a Remote Shared Directory” on page 85.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring Call Recording
4.
If you are using multiple gateways, and you are not using network attached storage, check Gateways Use
FTP Protocol to Transmit Recorded Files to Central Location.
a.
FTP Server – Enter the IP address of the FTP server.
b.
FTP Access Account – An FTP server account name that gateways can log in to.
c.
FTP Path – Enter the directory that the files will be transmitted to on the FTP
server.
d.
Password – FTP account password.
5.
Click the FTP Test button to verify that login to the FTP server is successful.
6.
When you are finished configuring, click OK.
Note:
To allow supervisors to record an agent’s non-workgroup call, check the appropriate check box on the
System Configuration General tab. For more information, see “Setting General Parameters” on page
27.
Using a Remote Shared Directory
It is strongly recommended that you use VRManager to manage centralized recording and that you save
recordings to a local drive or network attached storage on the gateway that is running MaxCS 7.0 . If you save
recordings to a network drive, and the network becomes unstable, you could lose any files of conversations
being recorded at that time.
However, if you need to use a remote shared directory, and you are using Windows Server, follow the steps
below:
1.
From the desktop, select Map Network Drive from the Tools menu.
Figure 46. Map Network Drive
2.
In the dialog box, click the Sign up for online storage or connect to a network server link. This starts
the Add Network Place Wizard.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
85
Chapter 9: Call Recording Configuration
Figure 47. “Sign up for online storage or connect to a network server” link
Figure 48. Add Network Place Wizard
3.
Click Next. You’ll see the screen below:
Figure 49. Add Network Place Wizard
4.
Click Choose another network location and click Next.
86
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring Call Recording
Figure 50. Add Network Place Wizard – Internet/Network Address
5.
Type the address of the Web site, FTP site, or network location in the field, for example,”\\ServerName\sharefolder”; or use the Browse button to locate the destination path. Click View some examples
for correct formatting. Then click Next.
Figure 51. Add Network Place Wizard – Shortcut Name
6.
Type in a name for the network place and click Next. A confirmation screen opens:
Figure 52. Confirmation screen
7.
Click Finish. The network place you created should appear on the desktop.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
87
Chapter 9: Call Recording Configuration
Figure 53. Network Place Created
8.
In the Recording Configuration window, use the Browse button to select the network place as the
destination folder.
Figure 54. Recording Configuration Window
88
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
10
Application Extension Configuration
The application extension is an extension pilot number that allows an SDK-based add-on application to log into
the system and establish a communication channel to control trunk channels and interact with the system core
PBX switching and voice processing service.
Typical applications that use an application extension are:
• IVR
• Outbound dialer
• Inbound call routing logic for a special business application
To connect an SDK-based add-on application, you need:
• An APC license (concurrent session)
• A separate application extension to log in to for each application
For more information about SDK, please send e-mail to sdksupport@altigen.com.
Note:
The APC SDK license is not supported in the MaxCS Private Cloud service.
Application Extension Setup
Note:
Before you begin, make sure a Trunk Control APC SDK Session license is registered and activated
for your system. You can find this information in License > License Information.
To access the Application Extension Configuration window, select System > Application Ext
Configuration. The configuration window opens:
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
89
Chapter 10: Application Extension Configuration
Figure 55. Application Extension Configuration window
To set up an application extension,
1.
In the Application Extension Configuration window, click the Add button and enter an extension number
in the dialog box. Click OK.
Figure 56. Add Application Extension dialog box
2.
The application extension appears in the AppExt List.
3.
Type a password in the Password field.
4.
Type a description of the application in the Description field, if desired.
5.
Click OK.
Application Failover Plan
The Application Failover Plan ensures that a call made to the extension will be automatically transferred if
the application is not available. Use the If application is not available, forward to list to select the forwarding
destination. The options are:
• AA – Select the auto attendant number to use in the list under the option. AA settings are configured in
System > AA Configuration.
• Extension – Select an extension from the list.
90
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Application Extension Setup
• Operator – Select an operator from the list.
• Disconnect – Disconnect the call
Important: If the failover setting for the application extension is set to an extension, and the extension is RNA
or busy, the call will follow the extension's RNA or busy call handling.
Application Information
Additional information can be described in the App Information fields. If desired, enter the appropriate
information in the fields for Application Source, Spec Doc Location, Designed by, Implemented by,
Implementation Date, Revision Number and Revision Date.
Readying the Application
If a third-party application is connecting to this extension, make sure the application is properly set to log into
the application extension. If the third-party application is logged in, the status shown in (see Figure 55)
changes to “connected.”
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
91
Chapter 10: Application Extension Configuration
92
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
11
Board Configuration
This chapter shows how to configure AltiGen telephony boards:
• Triton Resource Board: see Using the Triton Resource Board
• Triton 30-Party Conference Board: see “Using the Triton MeetMe Conference Board” on page 95
• Triton Analog Station Board: see “Configuring the Triton Analog Station Board” on page 96
• Triton Analog Trunk LS/GS and LS Boards: see “Configuring the Triton Analog Trunk LS/GS and LS
Boards” on page 96
• Triton VoIP Board: see “Configuring the Triton VoIP Board” on page 97
• Triton T1/E1 Boards: see “Configuring the Triton T1/E1 Board” on page 97
• Virtual Boards SIP and H323: see “Configuring Virtual Boards SIPSP and H323SP” on page 109
• Virtual Board HMCP: see “Configuring Virtual Board HMCP” on page 112
• MAX1000/2000 Board: see “Configuring the MAX1000/2000 Board” on page 117
• Virtual MobileExtSP Board: see “Configuring the Virtual MobileExtSP Board” on page 119
For information on how to install AltiGen boards, refer to the Quick Installation Guide provided with every
board package.
Configuring Boards
Board attributes and functions are accessible from the Boards window.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
93
Chapter 11: Board Configuration
Figure 57. Boards window
Double-click the board you want to configure, and a Board Configuration window opens, similar to the
following:
Figure 58. Board Configuration window
Board Configuration Parameters
These are the attributes and buttons in the Board Configuration window (see each board type in the sections
that follow for additional notes on each type):
Parameter
94
Description
Board Info
Board Logical ID: assigned by MAXCS.
Board Name: the type of board installed in the system and its physical
ID.
Channel Mapping List
Logical Channel, Type, and Physical Channel for the entire board.
Double-click a channel to open a line configuration dialog box or a trunk
configuration dialog box, as appropriate.
To reset the channel, select the channel to reset and click the Reset
Channel button, then click OK.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Using the Triton Resource Board
Parameter
Description
Channel Group Info
Applicable to T1/E1 and the MAX family of boards only.
Double-click a channel group to open a configuration dialog box.
To reset a channel group, select it and click the
Reset Channel Group button.
Board Configuration button
Opens a configuration dialog box.
Resets the board, after you confirm.
Reset Board button
Important! Resetting a board will disconnect all calls in progress on that
board. Be sure to inform all users before resetting a board. Additionally,
if the board is a resource board (VoIP 12 port, VoIP 30 port, Triton
resource board, 30-party conference board), resetting it will disconnect
all calls that use the resource.
Important: To implement some board configuration changes, you must shut down and restart by choosing
Services > Shut Down All Services (which also closes MAXCS) and then restarting MAXCS.
If this is necessary, a message will pop up telling you so.
Using the Triton Resource Board
The Triton resource board requires no configuration. Board resources are available when the board is installed.
The resource board has a maximum of 12 bridges for:
• 6-party conferencing. When an extension is trying to make a conference call, the system will try to use the
conference bridge on the resource board first. If conference bridges on the resource board are all busy,
the system will use the conference bridges on the extension board, analog or VoIP board.
• Workgroup supervisor silent monitoring, barge-in, and coaching.
For example, if two supervisors are coaching agents, only 10 bridges are left for 6-party conferencing.
Notes:
If a supervisor tries to perform silent monitoring, barge-in, or coaching and there is no resource board in the
system, the supervisor will hear an error tone.
If the supervisor is using an IP phone, then Connect Voice Stream to Server should be checked in the
Extension Configuration window so that the system can pull the caller and agent's voice stream to the resource
board to allow the supervisor to tap into the conversation.
This option is in the
Extension Configuration
window
Using the Triton MeetMe Conference Board
The Triton MeetMe conference board requires no configuration. Board resources are available when it is installed. You do have to assign a MeetMe Conference extension (select PBX > MeetMe Conference Configuration).
One MeetMe conference board is supported in a system.
Note:
In a multiple gateways installation, the MeetMe conference board can be in any gateway server.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
95
Chapter 11: Board Configuration
Configuring the Triton Analog Station Board
Double-click the Triton Analog Station board in the Boards window to open the Board Configuration window,
similar to (see Figure 58 on page 94). See attribute descriptions below (see Figure 58). Note the following
additional information:
• Double-clicking a channel in the Channel Mapping List opens a Triton Analog Line configuration dialog
box. See “Triton Analog Station Line Properties” on page 165.
• Clicking the Board Configuration button opens a configuration dialog box that displays the board’s serial
number, DSP clock, physical and logical IDs.
Figure 59. Board Configuration dialog box
Configuring the Triton Analog Trunk LS/GS and LS Boards
The Triton Analog Trunk board is a long form factor PCI telephony card that supports 8 or 12 trunks. The 8 port
card supports only loop start (LS). The 12 port card is available in two models; loop start/ground start (LS/GS)
and LS. Both models have the same features regarding LS. The LS/GS board is required when ground start
trunks may be required.
Double-click the board in the Boards window to open the Board Configuration window, similar to (see
Figure 58 on page 94). See attribute descriptions below (see Figure 58). Note the following additional information:
• Double-clicking a channel in the Channel Mapping List opens a channel configuration dialog box. See
“Triton Analog Station Line Properties” on page 165.
• Clicking the Board Configuration button opens the following dialog box that displays the board’s serial
number, DSP clock, physical and logical IDs.
Figure 60. Board Configuration dialog box
96
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring the Triton VoIP Board
Configuring the Triton VoIP Board
It is strongly recommended that system administrators review the “Network Configuration Guidelines for VoIP”
on page 281 before setting up VoIP features.
VoIP for MAXCS runs on both SIP and H.323 protocols that allow voice calls to be made through an IP network.
It includes an integrated VoIP gateway to convert voice calls into IP packets and transmit them through the IP
network.
MAXCS VoIP uses DSP engines residing on the Triton VoIP board to perform the voice coding/decoding
functions needed for SIP and H.323 devices.
The Triton VoIP board can be configured as a 12-port G.711/G.723.1/G.729AB or 30-port G.711 board.
For limitations on configuring Triton VoIP boards and ports see AltiGen’s Telephony Hardware Manual.
To configure the board,
Double-click the TritonIP board in the Boards window to open the Board Configuration window, similar to
(see Figure 58 on page 94). See attribute descriptions below (see Figure 58).
Note the following additional information:
• Clicking the Board Configuration button opens a window that displays the board serial number, DSP
clock, and physical and logical IDs. The list in the Configure Type field lets you select between a 12-port
G.711/G.723/G.729 configuration and a 30-port G.711 configuration.
If you change this configuration, you
must restart the switching services for
the change to take effect.
Figure 61. Board Configuration window
Configuring the Triton T1/E1 Board
Through MaxAdministrator, the Triton T1/E1 board can be configured for either digital T1 CAS (channel
associated signaling), T1 PRI (Primary Rate Interface), E1 CAS, or E1 PRI.
Both T1 CAS and T1 PRI carry 24 channels using time-division multiplexing (TDM) at an overall rate of 1.544
Mbps. Voice T1 provides 24 64K channels with robbed bit signaling. T1 PRI provides 23 64K channels, using
one 64K channel for D channel messaging.
E1 CAS and E1 PRI carry 32 channels using TDM at an overall rate of 2.048 Mbps. Both of them provide 30
64K channels for voice.
To subscribe to T1 CAS, T1 PRI, E1 CAS, or E1 PRI service, you must supply certain parameters. These
parameters are listed in Appendix B on page 391.
Configuring the Board
Double-click the Triton T1/E1 board in the Boards window to open the Board Configuration window, similar
to (see Figure 58 on page 94). See attribute descriptions below (see Figure 58). Note the following additional
information:
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
97
Chapter 11: Board Configuration
• The Board ID must be in the range 0 - 7.
• Double-click a channel in the Channel Mapping List to open a trunk configuration dialog box.
• Double-click a channel group to open a configuration window, discussed in the following section.
• Clicking the Board Configuration button opens a configuration dialog box that displays the board’s serial
number, DSP clock, physical and logical IDs.
You can configure the board type: either T1 or E1 to run T1 CAS, T1 PRI, or E1 CAS, E1 PRI. Additional
steps are needed to further configure the CAS or PRI protocol in the Protocol Configuration window,
shown in (see Figure 65) and (see Figure 66).
Figure 62. Triton T1/E1 Configuration dialog box
T1 and E1 Configuration
Double-clicking a channel group for a Triton T1 board in the Channel Group Info pane opens a T1 or E1
Configuration dialog box, as in (see Figure 63) and (see Figure 64).
Figure 63. Triton T1 configuration dialog box
98
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring the Triton T1/E1 Board
Figure 64. Triton E1 configuration dialog box
Reading the Status Messages
If the channel group is working, the Status line displays OK. This status line is updated every 3 seconds. If
there is an error, a message is displayed. The following table lists the types of error messages and the
appropriate actions.
Error Message
Meaning
HW failure: <No Answer>
Major hardware problem. Board is
not responding to commands.
Reasons could be: 1) DSP
loading failure; 2) If PRI, board
failed.
HW failure: <No Clocks>
No clock signal is detected on T1
interface drop.
Action
1. Reset board.
2. If error continues, replace board.
1. Check MVIP clock.
2. Reset board. If this does not work,
replace board.
L1 failure: <No Signal
(LOS)>
Layer 1 failure, physical layer;
LOS = Loss of Analog Signal
Check T1/PRI cable and change if
necessary. If cable is okay, CO is not
sending any signal. Contact CO.
L1 failure: <Alarm Indication
Signal (AIS)>
Layer 1 failure, CO sends all 1’s to
our T1/E1; AIS = Alarm Indicator
Signal; all ones detected
To locate the AIS alarm, have the
carrier check the T1 network element
connected to the T1 interface and trace
the problem.
L1 failure: <Remote Alarm
Indication (RAI)>
Layer 1 failure, CO notifies that
the configuration is wrong; RAI =
Remote Alarm Indicator
Correct the settings.
L1 failure: <No Sync Frames
Layer 1 failure, physical layer; no
valid framing is detected.
Possible span mis-configuration (ESF
is selected but the actual framing is SF,
or vice versa). Check span
configuration.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
99
Chapter 11: Board Configuration
Error Message
Meaning
Action
L1 failure: <Red Alarm>
Layer 1 failure, physical layer; BiPolar Violations (BPV), Line Code
Violations (LCV), or Out Of Frame
detected
Location condition, equipment
problem.
- For excessive BPV/LCV, check AMI/
B8ZS setting.
- For OOF, check the MVIP bus master
setting.
OR
Have CO perform a line test to check
for a faulty cable or line.
[PRI only]
L2 Failure: <No Sync Flag>
Layer 2 failure, data link layer; no
sync flag has been detected in
data link layer
Check if D-channel is active or not
[PRI only]
L2 Failure: <Not
established>
Layer 2 failure, data link layer; the
peer-to-peer link has not
established in data link layer
CO must activate HDLC link
Reading the Statistics
The Statistics panel displays the number of errors that have occurred since the last system reboot or statistics
clearing. There may be non-zero values when configuring the T1 span for the first time. You can clear these
fields with the Clear button.
Error
Meaning
Frame Errors
Number of framing bit errors. In T1 mode, a framing bit error is defined as
an incorrect FS-bit value. The counter is suppressed when framer loses
frame alignment
OOF Errors
The Out Of Frame counter registers every time the T1 chip is forced to reframe when receiving a frame with severe errors.
Rec Frame Slips
The Receiver Frame Slips counter shows the number of frame slips for
the receiver.
Line Code Errors
Line Code Error is defined as an occurrence of a bi-polar variation or excessive zeroes.
Bit Errors
Bit Errors are defined as a CRC-6 error in ESF, FT-bit error in SLC-96 and
F-bit or sync bit error in SF.
Xmt Frame Slips
Transmit Frame Slips counter shows the number of frame slips for the
transmitter
Clear button
Use the Clear button to reset the statistics counters.
Note:
100
For ideally synchronized systems, Transmit and Receive Frame Slips counters should be ‘0.’
Continuous update of the frame slips counters means that transmit and receive frequencies are not
equal. In this case, you should check the system and CT-Bus clock setup.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring the Triton T1/E1 Board
Setting the Configurable Options
These are the options you can set:
Option
Notes
• For T1, you can set the Frame Type to either SF or ESF. SF
Frame Type
(Superframe Format) consists of 12 consecutive frames. ESF
(Extended Superframe Format) consists of 24 consecutive frames.
• For E1, you can set the Frame Type to either No CRC or CRC4. CRC4
is embedded into 16 consecutive frames.
• For T1, you can set the Line Code to either AMI or B8ZS. AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) is the line coding format in T1 transmission systems whereby successive ones (marks) are alternately inverted and
sent with opposite polarity of the preceding mark. B8ZS (Binary 8 Zero
Substitution) sends two violations of the bipolar line encoding technique, rather than inserting a one for every seven consecutive zeros.
Line Code
• For E1, you can set the Line Code to either AMI or HDB3. HDB3 (High
Density Bipolar Order) is based on AMI, but extends this by inserting
violation codes whenever there is a run of four or more zeros.
Zero Code Suppression
You can set the Zero Code Suppression to None (default setting), Jam
Bit 8, GTE or Bell.
Zero Code Suppression inserts a “one” bit to prevent the transmission of
eight or more consecutive “zero” bits; Jam Bit 8 forces every bit 8 to a one;
GTE Zero Code Suppression replaces bit 8 of an all zero channel byte to
a one, except in signaling frames where bit 7 is forced to a one. Bell Zero
Code Suppression replaces bit 7 of an all zero channel byte with a one.
CD Bits Handling
CD Bits Handling is not editable.
System Clock Master
You can set the System Clock Master if you have a back-to-back configuration and you want this span to be the master clock to the system. (Only
one clock master should be selected in a back-to-back system.) See the
following section on T1/E1 clocking.
T1/E1 Clocking
Depending on the configuration of the T1/E1 boards and span for your MAXCS system(s), the System Clock
Master setup should be set according to the follow conditions:
• If all of the T1/E1 boards are connected to a carrier’s switch, the System Clock Master check box must
not be checked for any of the T1/E1 boards.
• If two MAXCS systems are connected back-to-back with a T1/E1 span, the System Clock Master check
box must be checked for only one of the T1/E1 boards.
• If two T1/E1 boards in the same MAXCS system are connected back-to-back with a T1/E1 span, the
System Clock Master check box must be checked for the T1/E1 board that has not been designated by
the CT-Bus setting as the system’s master clock to drive the CT-Bus.
Important: For all back-to-back cases, the CT-Bus Clock Configuration should be set to “Manual,” and the
board that is connected to the board configured as the back-to-back clock master must be
designated at the CT-Bus master.
Setting up Channels on the Triton T1/E1 Board
This section discusses setting up T1 CAS, T1 PRI, E1 CAS, or E1 PRI channels on the Triton T1/E1 board.
Click the Protocol button in the T1 or E1 configuration dialog box (see (see Figure 64)) to open the Protocol
Configuration window, shown below. The Triton T1/E1 Board can be configured to either CAS or PRI through
the configuration options in the window.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
101
Chapter 11: Board Configuration
The CH -> Type list on the left side of the window displays the channel types.
Note:
In a tie-trunk configuration, set the trunks to “Out of Service” before changing the trunk type from T1
to PRI or vice versa. Otherwise, the system will generate garbage call records to your internal or
external logger service. See “Setting General Trunk Attributes” on page 123 for details.
Figure 65. T1 PRI Protocol Configuration dialog box (top half)
Figure 66. T1 CAS Protocol Configuration dialog box (top half)
Selecting Span Types
• T1 CAS – Select this option to associate all channels on the span to T1 CAS.
• Regular ISDN PRI – Select this option to indicate 23B+D ISDN PRI span and to designate the last channel
as the D channel.
• Enable Tie Trunk – Check this box to enable a tie trunk. Tie trunks must terminate to a system also
configured as a tie trunk.
Note: This option not available when E1 CAS is selected.
102
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring the Triton T1/E1 Board
Figure 67. E1 PRI Protocol Configuration dialog box (top half)
Figure 68. E1 CAS Protocol Configuration dialog box (top half)
Selecting Span Types
• E1 CAS – Select this option to associate all channels on the span to E1 channel associated signaling.
• Regular ISDN PRI – Select this option to indicate 30B+D ISDN PRI span and to designate the 16th
channel as the D channel.
• Enable Tie Trunk – Check this box to enable a tie trunk. Tie trunks must terminate to a system also
configured as a tie trunk.
Note: This option not available when T1 CAS is selected.
Setting the ISDN PRI Switch Mode
If you select a Span Type of Regular ISDN PRI in the T1 PRI Configuration Window, use the following
guidelines to set the ISDN PRI Switch mode.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
103
Chapter 11: Board Configuration
Figure 69. T1 PRI Switch Mode
The top four settings are used for a connection to a CO switch:
• AT&T 4ESS PRI
• AT&T 5ESS PRI
• NT DMS-100 PRI
• NI-2 PRI (default)
The bottom four settings are used for a PRI tie trunk configuration where two MAXCS systems are connected
back to back. In such a configuration, one MAXCS system must be configured as Network and the other as
User. For example, set one to NI-2 PRI Network and the other to NI-2 PRI.
• AT&T 4ESS PRI Network
• AT&T 5ESS PRI Network
• NT DMS-100 PRI Network
• NI-2 PRI Network
If you select a Span Type of Regular ISDN PRI in the E1 PRI Configuration window, use the following
guidelines to set the ISDN PRI Switch mode.
104
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring the Triton T1/E1 Board
E1 PRI
Figure 70. E1 PRI Switch Mode
The top three settings are used for a connection to a CO switch:
• Austel TS014 PRI
• ETSI NET5PRI
• NT DMS-100 PRI
The bottom three settings are used for a PRI tie trunk configuration where two MAXCS systems are connected
back to back. In such a configuration, one MAXCS system must be configured as Network and the other as
User. For example, set one to NT DMS-100 PRI Network and the other to NT DMS-100 PRI.
• Austel TS014 PRI Network
• ETSI NET5PRI Network
• NT DMS-100 PRI Network
Configuring an ISDN Numbering Plan
The ISDN Numbering Plan button in the Protocol Configuration window opens the PRI ISDN Numbering
Plan dialog box. This function allows you to select how the system will identify and code the Called Number
for six different types of calls. This coding instructs the CO on how to interpret the number being sent to it.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
105
Chapter 11: Board Configuration
Figure 71. PRI ISDN Numbering Plan dialog box
The PRI ISDN Numbering Plan dialog box displays the six classes of numbers (call type) that can be sent to
a CO:
• 101CCCC Numbers – CIC (Carrier Identification Codes) dialing.
• 011 International Numbers – For placing calls outside the U.S.
• 1+10-digit Numbers – For local and long distance calls that require dialing 1 before the number.
• 10-digit Numbers – For local and long distance calls that do not require 1 before dialing.
• 7-digit Numbers – For calls placed within the local area that do not require an area code or a 1 prefix.
• All Other Numbers – For calls that do not fall into any category above, for example, 911, 311.
For each class, select the type of number/numbering plan from the list:
• Type of Number:
–
–
–
–
–
Unknown
International
National
Network Specific
Subscriber Number
• Numbering Plan:
–
–
–
–
Unknown
ISDN
National
Private
The setting Unknown is used when the user or network has no knowledge of the numbering plan. In this case,
the number digits field is organized according to the network dialing plan.
B Channel Maintenance Message:
This setting controls B channel initialization and maintenance message exchange between MAXCS and the
CO, when the system starts up. Select the maintenance message that will be delivered on the B Channel:
106
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring the Triton T1/E1 Board
• None – No maintenance message sent; puts channel in ready state automatically.
• Restart – Only sends RESTART message; puts channel in ready state when RESTART ACK
(acknowledgement) response is received from CO.
• Service – Only sends SERVICE message; puts channel in ready state when SERVICE ACK
(acknowledgement) response is received from CO.
• Restart and Service – (The default setting) sends both RESTART and SERVICE message; puts channel
in ready state when RESTART ACK and SERVICE ACK is received from CO.
Enable PRI Caller Name – Check this to enable PRI caller name
Setting the NSF
The NSF (Network-Specific Facilities) is used with PRI to instruct the CO to route a call to a specific carrier
or long distance service. Use the list to identify the type of carrier service you want to use for your ISDN PRI
lines.
The choices in the list depend on the specific switch and your long distance service provider. An example of
such service includes AT&T Megacom.
Note:
If your CO requires specific NSF features to be present in the call setup packet, please contact
AltiGen’s Technical Support department with such information from the CO and they will help you
configure it.
Setting a TEI
The TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) defines which terminal device is communicating with the CO switch
for a given message. PRI messages involve point-to-point configuration in which each side already knows the
source of any message received. ISDN messages involve point to multi-point locations in which the source can
only be identified by the TEI.
Select one of the following TEI settings:
• Default setting – This is the recommended setting.
• Manually set to – This should always be set to 0. Typically, a zero (0) is used for TEI on a PRI connection.
In some cases where a shared D channel is used, other TEI values might be required to identify which
span will be used for a call.
• Assigned by CO switch – Do not use this setting unless advised by your CO.
Setting PRI Calling Numbers
A PRI Calling Number Setting in the bottom half of the Protocol Configuration dialog box lets you set the
numbers you want your Carrier to accept.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
107
Chapter 11: Board Configuration
Figure 72. PRI Calling Number Setting
Most PRI trunks allow a MAXCS system to send calling numbers. For example, 10 different extensions in the
same PBX system have 10 different DID numbers. With the calling number feature provided by Carriers, the
callee will receive a more accurate caller ID.
PRI Calling Number can also be used in a mobile extension or IP hop-off to PRI trunk, so the callee can receive
a more accurate caller ID.
When a PRI span is subscribed, a block of DID numbers will be provided by the Carrier. The Carrier should be
able to accept Calling Numbers in the DID number block. However, if the numbers are not in the blocks or the
digit lengths are mismatched, the Carrier might "reject" the call.
The PRI Calling Number Setting addresses this issue. Choose from three options:
• Carrier can accept anything as Calling Number (default)
• Carrier can only accept Calling Number with a minimum of n digits
• Carrier can accept only assigned numbers as the Calling Number.
If you select the third option, specify “assigned numbers” by clicking the Add button and entering the numbers.
To edit or delete a number you added, select it and click the Edit or Delete button.
If MAXCS detects the Calling Number is not accepted by the Carrier, it will always send the number you enter
in the text box at the lower right side of the dialog box as the Calling Number. Enter an appropriate Calling
Number in this box.
Installing a Channel Service Unit (CSU)
This section discusses installing a CSU to the Triton T1 or T1/E1 Board. The channel service unit is a device
used to connect a digital trunk line coming in from the phone company to the PBX. A CSU can terminate signals, repeat signals, and respond to loopback commands sent from the central office. A CSU is mandatory for
connecting to AltiGen’s T1/E1 board.
108
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring Virtual Boards SIPSP and H323SP
1.
Connect the CSU (Adtran model T1 CSU ACE used as an example) to the T1/PRI or T1/E1 PRI board
using an RJ-48C or RJ-48X cable.
2.
Connect the CSU to the network termination box using an RJ-48C or RJ-48X cable.
AltiGen T1 Socket (RJ-48)
Refer to your CSU manufacturer’s
manual for the proper pinout.
Pin 1=Receive Ring (INPUT)
Pin 2=Receive Tip (INPUT)
Pin 4=Transmit Ring (OUTPUT)
Pin 5=Transmit Tip (OUTPUT)
Note:
CSUs also are used for line lengths over 75 feet, which helps to resolve attenuation issues.
Troubleshooting T1/E1 Common Symptoms
The most common problems when installing T1 CAS or T1 PRI services:
1.
The service provider misconfigures your T1 CAS/T1 PRI service or terminates your service improperly.
2.
T1 is installed but not turned on because there is no termination device for a period of time.
3.
T1 is turned on but channel is not in service.
MAXCS provides basic troubleshooting information in the T1 Span Configuration window, described in “T1 and
E1 Configuration” on page 98.
Configuring Virtual Boards SIPSP and H323SP
A VoIP connection typically consists of two parts.
• Signal Channel – Responsible for setting up and tearing down a call using protocol. For example, SIP
protocol is used in MAXCS to build a signal channel between the server and the IP phone.
• Media Path – Responsible for encoding, transmitting, and decoding voice for both parties. For example,
when an IP phone user makes a call to an outside number, the voice will be encoded at the IP phone,
transmitted to the system via the IP network, decoded by the VoIP codec, and passed to a trunk port so
that the external party will hear the voice.
The purpose of virtual boards SIPSP and H323SP is to build signal channels for different connection types, IP
extensions, SIP Tie Trunks, SIP Trunking from ITSP, and H323 Tie Trunks. Each channel will have its channel
ID similar to channels on a Triton extension or trunk board. When an IP phone registers to the system, a channel ID will be assigned to the IP extension. However, these channels are only responsible for processing protocol and call control signals. They require a media path from a VoIP board or from the IP phone to establish
a voice steam so that both sides can hear.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
109
Chapter 11: Board Configuration
Notes:
• Make sure you have enough VoIP resource boards.
• The more signal channels, the more system memory and CPU power required. Proper planning is
essential.
• Changing the number of signal channels requires that you stop and restart the switching and gateway
services.
• SIP Trunking Channel requires a license to activate.
Configuring the SIPSP Board
Double-clicking a SIPSP board in Boards view and then clicking the Board Configuration button opens the
SIP Signaling Channel Configuration dialog box, which shows the number of configured channels and licensed
channels.
Figure 73. The SIP Signalling Channel Configuration panel
MAXCS is set by default to support 60 SIP extension channels. You can change the number of SIP extension
channels and tie-trunk channels. The maximum number possible depends of the system CPU performance,
call volume, and usage. If a high performance machine is used as the Softswitch server, the number of channels can be more than 1000. If you change the numbers in this dialog box, you must shut down and restart the
switching and gateway services for this change to take effect. When the services restart, the new configuration
appears in the Currently Configured Channels fields.
Note:
If you change the number of SIP extension or tie trunk channels, you must stop and restart the
switching and gateway services.
The SIP Trunking Configuration button opens the SIP Trunking Configuration dialog box. (See “SIP Trunk
Properties” on page 127.)
110
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring Virtual Boards SIPSP and H323SP
Click Advanced Configuration to manage the Trusted SIP Device list.
To move an IP address from one list to the other, select the IP address and click either the right or left arrow
button.
Configuring the H323SP Board
Double-clicking an H323SP board in Boards view and then clicking the Board Configuration button opens
this dialog box:
If you change the maximum
number of trunk channels,
you need to reboot the
MAXCS system.
Figure 74. H323 Configuration
You can change the following parameters:
• FastStart Enabled – The FastStart Enabled option reduces the number of H.323 messages to be sent
between two H.323 devices when initiating a call, thus reducing the time needed to establish a call. There
may be a compatibility issue with firewall or NAT devices, if you select this option.
• Max Tie-Trunk Channel – Sets the maximum number of trunk channels for this board in increments of 4,
from 4 to 96. You need to reboot the MAXCS system after the maximum trunk channel number is changed.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
111
Chapter 11: Board Configuration
Configuring Virtual Board HMCP
This section is for a multi-gateway Softswitch with an HMCP media server installation only. A single all-in-one
system does not require configuration of this board.
Host Media Control Processing (HMCP) is a virtual board that uses an Intel CPU to provide the following
functions:
1.
Process VoIP Media Stream
•
Encode, decode, and transcode voice stream
•
Detect and generate tone for IP devices
•
Play music when device is on hold
2.
Play and Record Voice Files
•
Announce system and queue phrases
•
Process auto attendant
•
Process voice mail
•
Call recording for IP extensions
3.
Provide Conferencing Resources
•
Station conference
•
Meet-Me conference
•
Barge-in/silent monitor/coaching
From a deployment point of view, an HMCP media server can be installed in the same Softswitch system
sharing the same CPU or can be in a stand-alone server with a dedicated CPU.
Notes:
• Do not install HMCP service in a system with AltiGen's Triton telephony board. It will cause resource
conflict.
• Remove the Triton Resource board and MeetMe conference board from OFFICE systems running as a
gateway. Station conference, MeetMe conference, and barge-in/silent monitor/coaching will use HMCP
voice processing resources when deploying Multi-Gateway Softswitch.
• An HMCP Media Server license is required to activate an HMCP virtual board.
112
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring Virtual Board HMCP
By default the system grants 60 conference members in a maximum of 40 bridges.
You can change the number to as many as 120 members in a maximum of 40 bridges, and you can activate
other HMCP resources, by double-clicking an HMCP board in Boards view and then clicking the Board
Configuration button to open this dialog box:
If you decrease the number
of HMCP resources, the
system must be rebooted
for the configuration to take
effect.
If you increase the number
of resources, the system
does not have to be
rebooted.
You may change the assigned number by entering a different number (up to the number your system is
licensed for and not to exceed the maximum limit for each HMCP board) in the Assigned to this board fields
and clicking Apply.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
113
Chapter 11: Board Configuration
HMCP Resources – Shows the total number licensed (if applicable), total currently assigned, and the number
assigned to this HMCP board for the following resource types:
1.
Voice Processing Resources (VPR)
2.
Station Conference Members
3.
MeetMe Conference Members
4.
Agent Supervision Bridges
The maximum number of resources that can be assigned to each HMCP virtual board is as follows:
• G.711 VPR — 1,000
• G.711/G.723/G.729 VPR — 200
• Station Conference Members — 120
• MeetMe Conference Members — 120
• Agent Supervision Bridges — 20
Notes:
• 1,000 G.711 voice processing resources will be licensed to the system when one HMCP Media Server
license is registered.
• The more VPR assigned, the slower the system will be when it starts up. To calculate the optimized
number of VPR you need, use the following formula:
Total G.711 VPR = Total number of extensions X 2
Total G.711/723/729 VPR = Total number of remote IP phone users + Total Tie Trunk Channels that will
use compressed codec
• Adding HMCP licenses or changing assigned numbers does not require restarting the AltiGen switching
service.
• In the event that you need to decrease the assigned numbers of HMCP resources (reassigned to the
second HMCP server, for example), the system must be rebooted for the configuration to take effect.
Parameters in IP Header—QoS and TTL assignments.
QoS assignment – IP TOS/DiffServ Byte Value. The default TOS/DiffServ byte hex value "A0"
(10100000) signals the network switch and router that RTP packets are "Critical". To set the value for
Diffserv Code Expedited Forwarding (DSCP EF), you can enter hex value "B8" (10111000).
TTL assignment – For IP paging multicasting only. The purpose of the TTL (Time To Live) is to regulate
how many hosts the IP paging packets can pass through. The TTL value is reduced by one on every hop.
You may need to adjust this value if there are remote IP phones at different locations that register to
MAXCS through WAN and require the IP paging feature. The value will be the number of routers from
MAXCS to remote IP phone plus one.
Assign HMCP Resources to IP Extensions
After you configure the HMCP board, you need to configure extensions to use the HMCP voice processing,
conferencing, and recording resources.
In Extension Configuration > General > IP Extension panel, change the Home Media Server ID to the
HMCP Media Server ID if necessary. Please refer to the following scenarios.
Scenario 1 – HMCP Media Server inside Softswitch Server
For fewer than 200 users, you may consolidate the Softswitch and HMCP into one server as shown in the next
figure.
114
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring Virtual Board HMCP
The IP extension Home Media Server ID should be assigned to "00" by default. You do not need to change
this number since both Softswitch and HMCP Media server are in the ID "00".
Scenario 2: Single Standalone HMCP Media Server
For 200 to 1,000 users without an extensive amount of recording resources, fewer than 200 concurrent
recording sessions, you may deploy a stand-alone HMCP Media server as shown below.
The Home Media Server ID should be changed to "01" for all IP extensions, assuming HMCP Media server is
using ID 01.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
115
Chapter 11: Board Configuration
Scenario 3: Multiple HMCP Media Servers
For 500+ PBX users or 200+ call center agent installations that require more than 200 recording sessions, you
may deploy multiple HMCP Media servers to achieve load balancing and failover protection. The following example shows two HMCP media servers to provide up to 2,000 G.711 VPR, 400 compressed codec, and 240
members of Station or MeetMe conferencing.
To achieve load balancing, you need to divide and assign IP extensions to different Home Media Server IDs.
The following guidelines may help you make decisions when assigning IP extensions to different Home Media
Server IDs.
• Equally divide the IP extensions that require centralized recording and assign them to different HMCP
Media servers.
• Equally divide the remote works who connects to system using G.723/G.729 and assign them to different
HMCP Media servers.
• For the remaining IP extensions, assign extensions in a department in the same Media server.
116
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring the MAX1000/2000 Board
If you have two or more HMCP Media servers, the system will provide failover in the event that one Media server is off-line. When the Home Media server for an IP extension is not available, the media manager in the system will search available resources from other Media servers when that extension requests media service. This
will happen automatically (no configuration required) and dynamically (the resource may come from a different
Media server each time that extension requests a media resource).
Configuring the MAX1000/2000 Board
The MAX1000/2000 Server is a telecom appliance that consists of an embedded DSP board and two access
board slots. MAXCS treats the entire MAX system as one board with two access board options. The Boards
window displays the name of the MAX board, followed by [xxyy(-T1),xxyy]:
Figure 75. Boards View showing MAX board
xx refers to the number of analog trunks, and yy refers to the number of analog extensions. If an access board
has a T1/E1 port, -T1 is added to the end.
In the Boards window, double-click the MAX 1000/2000 board to open the main Board Configuration window.
The Channel Group Info panel shows the channel groups (groups of channels that belong to the same type).
For example, if one 4x4xT1 access board and one 4x8 access board are installed in the MAX 1000/2000 main
board, there will be three channel groups for the 4x4xT1 card, and two channel groups for the 4x8. When one
of the channel groups is selected, the Channel Mapping List reflects the selection.
• Double-clicking a T1/E1 channel group opens the channel group configuration dialog box. For information
on configuring in this dialog box, see “T1 and E1 Configuration” on page 98. This is available on T1 or E1
channel groups only.
• In the channel group configuration dialog box, click the Protocol button to open the Protocol
Configuration dialog box. For information on configuring protocol, see “Setting up Channels on the Triton
T1/E1 Board” on page 101.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
117
Chapter 11: Board Configuration
Figure 76. Board Configuration window
Double-clicking a channel in the Channel Mapping List opens the appropriate configuration dialog box for that
channel.
• For details on configuring the T1/E1 trunk, see “Triton T1/E1 Trunk Properties” on page 131.
• For details on configuring the Triton Analog Trunk, see “Triton Analog Trunk GS/LS Properties” on page
134.
• For details on configuring a Triton Analog Line, see “Triton Analog Station Line Properties” on page 165.
In the main Board Configuration dialog box for the MAX 1000/2000 board (see Figure 76 on page 118) clicking
the Board Configuration button opens a dialog box.
Figure 77. MAX 1000/2000 Board Configuration window
This dialog box displays the board serial number, top access card serial number, bottom access card serial
number, DSP clock, board ID, physical ID, and logical ID. You can choose to configure the board as either T1
or E1, then click OK. Additional steps are needed to further configure the CAS or PRI protocol in the Protocol
Configuration window, shown in (see Figure 65) and (see Figure 66).
118
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring the Virtual MobileExtSP Board
Configuring the Virtual MobileExtSP Board
A simulated physical board—MobileExtSP board—is created in the Softswitch server when you install the
MAXCS system. This single MobileExtSP board handles all mobile extensions, including those located in other
gateways in a multi-gateway system.
Configuring the virtual MobileExtSP board is discussed on page 206 in the chapter “Mobile Extension
Configuration.”
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
119
Chapter 11: Board Configuration
120
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
12
Trunk Configuration
Trunk attributes and parameters are set using the Trunk Configuration window. The attributes and options
available depend on the type of board and trunk. This chapter discusses general configuration options applicable to all trunks, followed by specific configuration options for the following trunk types:
• H.323 tie trunk, page 126
• SIP tie trunk, page 126
• SIP trunk for ITSP, page 127
• Triton T1/PRI trunk, page 131
• Triton analog trunk, page 134
This chapter also discusses incoming call routing (page 140) and outgoing call blocking (page 142), both
configurable on tabs in the Trunk Configuration window.
Trunks Out of Service
If none of the trunks are available when an outside call is placed, the caller will hear the system prompt: “All
outside lines are busy. Please try again later.”
Channel Identification
To find out channel information, right-click a trunk in the Trunk View window (shown in (see Figure 79), below),
and select Channel Physical Location. The Channel Information box opens, displaying logical board ID,
board name, channel group type, and channel ID:
Figure 78. Channel Information box
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
121
Chapter 12: Trunk Configuration
Opening the Trunk Configuration Window
To open the general Trunk Configuration window, do one of the following:
• Click the Trunk Configuration button
in the toolbar.
• Select PBX > Trunk Configuration.
• Double-click a trunk in the Trunk View window.
Selecting Channel
Properties from the
right-click menu in
Trunk View bypasses
the general Trunk
Configuration window
to open a trunk
properties window
specific to the selected
trunk.
Figure 79.
Trunk View window
The Trunk Configuration window opens.
Figure 80. Trunk Configuration, General tab
122
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Selecting Trunks to Set Attributes
Selecting Trunks to Set Attributes
The title bar of the Trunk Configuration window displays the card and the channel of the selected trunk.
The list on the left shows all the configured trunks. The Location format is the same as in the Trunk View
window, that is, Logical Board ID : Channel Number. The logical board ID is assigned by the system. This ID
may change when a telephony board is added into or removed from the system.
When you select a trunk in this list, the options and parameters for the trunk appear in the settings in the right
side of the window.
Configuring One or Multiple Trunks
To customize trunk characteristics, you work on one trunk at a time. To apply the same configuration to multiple
trunks, use the Apply To button. This opens a list of all trunks, with all of the trunks selected by default. Select
the trunks you want to apply changes to, then click OK. (Use Ctrl+click and Shift+click to select several
trunks.) This applies changes to multiple trunks for only the attribute or option that you changed.
Setting General Trunk Attributes
Select a channel to view its current attributes. You can then set or change the following attributes. If an option
is grayed out, it is not available for that type of trunk:
• Access Code – Assign a trunk access code to the selected trunk. If you need to use a trunk access code
other than 9, you must first set this up on the Number Plan tab of System Configuration (see “Setting a
System Number Plan” on page 29).
Note:
There are two types of access code: Trunk Access Code (TAC) and Route Access Code
(RAC). TAC is a quick and easy way to select which trunk(s) you would like to dial out
from, especially when you want to reserve trunks for a special dialing purpose. For
example, you can set up TAC "7" and assign that to trunk(s). These trunks will be
reserved exclusively for users who know the TAC "7".
Although TAC is easy to use, it does have limitations especially when you are located in an
area with a complicated dialing pattern or you need to set up VoIP hop-off dialing.
RAC uses the Out Call Routing table, which has the flexibility to group trunks into a route, assign routes to a specific dialing pattern, and add/delete digits from the dialing pattern. It can
solve most of the complicated dialing problems. If your system is using RAC, you can set this
TAC field to "None".
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
123
Chapter 12: Trunk Configuration
• Area Code – The local area code for each trunk. Enter a three-digit area code. If left blank, the trunk
assumes the home area code defined in the General tab of the System Configuration window. This
configuration is for each trunk in the system and will negatively affect features such as Zoomerang if the
area code is not configured properly.
• Direction – The trunk direction can be Outgoing only, Incoming only, Both Outgoing and Incoming,
Paging, or E911. The Both option is the system default.
Note:
If a trunk is in the hunt group of your company main number and you configure this trunk
as an "Outgoing" trunk, the incoming call will be rejected by the system. To avoid this
mistake, make sure you check with your carrier to verify the hunting number before you
configure a trunk to Outgoing.
Paging – This configuration is for an overhead paging equipment and requires a Loop Start trunk port.
The paging equipment will provide loop current to the trunk port.
When this option is selected, you can assign an ID in the list. The range of paging IDs are from 00 to
99, which allows MAXCS to be connected to up to 100 paging systems through trunks for multi-zone
paging applications.
To activate a trunk paging port, dial #45 and the ID number. For example, a user dials #4508 to
connect to a paging system through the trunk with paging ID of 08.
The Trunk Paging option and the Overhead Paging option (in “Audio Peripheral Configuration” on
page 44) are different and independent of one another. The Overhead Paging option is to set up the
Audio Out port on the telephony board and uses #44 to activate.
The E911 option is exclusively for an analog Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunk
connecting to a Triton analog trunk board. CAMA trunk is a special type of trunk from your carrier for
E911 service. When an analog trunk port is assigned as an E911 CAMA trunk, the system will send
the station identification number, defined in the extension configuration E911 CID field, to the PSAP
via multi-frequency signaling. The E911 CID is needed to:
• Allow PSAP to identify the caller's information and exact location by matching the Automatic Location
Identifier database in PSAP.
• Have the callback number in case the call is disconnected.
Note:
Do not select the E911 option for a T1-CAS or PRI trunk. T1-CAS cannot transmit the
ID. PRI trunk will transmit calling party's ID automatically. When the E911 option is
checked, this trunk will no longer receive inbound calls, and only 911 calls will go out
through this trunk. Each state may have different E911 regulations and requirements.
Please check with the local authority to understand what is required by law.
• Phone Number – If this trunk is an analog or T1-CAS trunk, this field is used for labeling purposes only.
Enter the number without area code in this field. If this trunk is a PRI trunk, the system will output this
number to the carrier as the calling party CallerID.
PRI trunk transmitting caller ID rules:
1.
If extension has Transmitted CID configured, this number will be transmitted first. If not
configured, go to next.
2.
If extension has DID Number configured, the 10-digit DID number will be transmitted. If not
configured, go to next.
3.
If PRI trunk channel has area code and caller ID configured, this number will be transmitted.
If not configured, go to next.
4.
PRI will transmit the system home area code and main number defined in System
Configuration, General tab.
• Description – Descriptive information such as the company name for the assigned Phone Number, or
appropriate agency if this trunk provides 911 access.
• Trunk Dialing Scheme – Overlap or En-bloc dialing.
124
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting General Trunk Attributes
• Overlap – Transmitting dialed DTMF digits to the CO without buffering digits in the system first. Use
Overlap dialing for analog and T1-CAS trunks for best results. Calls will be completed faster.
• En-bloc – The system will buffer all dialed digits and send it to the CO at once. Typically is used in
ISDN-PRI trunk and SIP trunk.
Note:
For IP tie trunks, use the IP Dialing Table in Enterprise Manager to set the dialing
scheme (Enterprise Manager is available by selecting VoIP > Enterprise Network
Management, or from the Windows Start menu).
• Trunk Call Predial String – To have the system automatically insert the configured digits whenever the
selected trunk is used for outgoing calls. This feature is used to prevent having to dial “9” twice for trunk
access when the system is used behind another PBX system or this trunk is a Centrex line, which requires
dialing “9” to make a call. If you select this option, type the predial digit(s) into the text box.
• Enable Centrex Transfer – When checked, the system is able to transfer an incoming call to another outside number through the same trunk and release the incoming trunk. Before you configure this option for
the trunk, please make sure your trunk is a Centrex line or supports the Release Line Transfer (RLT) feature. Depending on the type of trunk, your configuration may be different:
• If this is an analog Centrex line, you only need to check the Enable Centrex Transfer check box. A
FLASH signal will be transmitted to the CO if the incoming trunk call needs to be transferred to an outside number.
• If this is a T1-CAS trunk, you may need to add “transfer predial string.” From the CO point of view, it is
their feature code to initiate RLT. Please check with your carrier to get the specification.
• If this is a PRI trunk, you need to ask your carrier if they support RLT through DTMF. Some carriers
accept *8 to signal RLT. AltiGen PRI trunks currently do not support 2-B channel transfer feature.
How to signal MAXCS that it is a Centrex transfer:
• If a call is connected to an extension, the extension user needs to dial
FLASH * plus trunk access code and the outside number.
• If a virtual extension forwarding or speed dialing number is configured to an outside number and the
extension user transfers a call to the virtual extension or speed dialing number, the system will add the
Centrex FLASH automatically. You don’t need to add the “*” in the forwarding or speed dialing digit
stream.
• Attribute – In Service makes the trunk available for use. Out of Service prevents the trunk from being
used (for example, while performing maintenance).
• Enable Tie Trunk – This configuration field is meaningful only if you use T1 or PRI to connect two MAXCS
systems back-to-back. Do not check this box if you connect a MAXCS to a third-party PBX via T1 or PRI
trunk.
When this configuration is checked, the system software will interpret the incoming [ANI] [DNIS] digit
sequence as [Caller’s Extension Number] and [Target Extension Number]. An incoming tie trunk call will
be routed to the target extension and all the Incall Routing rules will be bypassed. If you do not check this
box for system-to-system tie trunk, the system will check the Ext. DID/DNIS Routing/Caller ID Routing
table first. If there is no match, the trunk incall routing rule will apply.
Note:
The Enable Tie Trunk field under Board Configuration > Protocol needs to be
enabled for T1/PRI tie trunks as well. It will tell the system to transmit [Caller’s Extension
Number] and [Target’s Extension Number] as [ANI] [DNIS] to the other system. In case
this is a T1-CAS, which typically cannot transmit any data to the CO, the system will use
DTMF as a way to transmit [Caller’s Extension Number] and [Target’s Extension
Number] to the other side of the tie trunk. Because the format is AltiGen proprietary, you
may have a problem if you enable this configuration when connecting to a non-AltiGen
PBX.
• Holiday Profile – A holiday profile can be assigned to a trunk. The list selection is based on settings
configured in the Holiday tab of System Configuration (see “Routing Calls on Holidays” on page 35).
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
125
Chapter 12: Trunk Configuration
• Business Hour Profile – A business hour profile can be assigned to a trunk. The list selection is based
on settings configured in the Business Hours tab of System Configuration.
• Recording Option – Recording for incoming and outgoing calls is supported for Triton Analog, T1/E1, and
IP trunks; use the list to select Disable or Enable. If you select Enable, choose the license you want to
assign (Concurrent Session or Dedicated Seat), and make sure that in System > Recording
Configuration one of the trunk-based recording options is selected.
Note:
When you use trunk-based recording, inbound or outbound calls are recorded as long
as the trunk is in use. For example, an inbound call that is answered by an AA, routed to
an operator, and transferred to an extension will begin recording when the AA answers
the call and end recording when the trunk is released.
With extension recording, recording starts only when the extension user answers the call.
• Trunk Properties – Opens a dialog box that allows you to configure low-level, hardware-specific
properties for each trunk. The options vary depending on the type of board and trunk; this is discussed in
subsequent sections.
H323 Tie Trunk Properties
To open a trunk configuration dialog box for an H323 tie trunk, do one of the following:
• In the Trunk Configuration window, select an H323 trunk type, then click the Trunk Properties button.
• In the Board View window, double-click an H323 board type, then click the Board Configuration button.
Board configuration is discussed in “Configuring the H323SP Board” on page 111.
Max Trunk Channel sets the maximum number of trunk channels for this board in increments of 4, from 4 to
96. You need to stop and restart the system after the maximum trunk channel number is changed.
Note:
This is signal only trunks. Make sure you have enough IP resource boards to cover your needs.
SIP Tie Trunk Properties
To open a configuration dialog box for a SIP tie-trunk channel, do one of the following:
• If you’re in the Trunk Configuration window, select a Triton VoIP channel from the trunk channels list,
then click the Trunk Properties button, or just double-click the channel in the list.
• If you’re in the Trunk View window, right-click the channel and select Channel Properties.
126
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
SIP Trunk Properties
Figure 81. Configuration dialog box for a Triton VoIP channel
See “Configuring the SIPSP Board” on page 110 for board configuration information.
Note:
This is signal only trunks. Make sure you have enough IP resource boards to cover your needs.
SIP Trunk Properties
Traditionally, telecom trunks are from your local carrier’s PSTN switch and the dial tone is provided via either
analog trunks or T1/PRI digital trunks. A new type of service called “IP Dial Tone,” which allows you to dial a
long distance call at a lower rate, is available. IP Dial Tone is delivered through your IP data network, and the
service provider can be anywhere in the world, as long as the VoIP data packets can be routed properly.
If you have SIP-based IP dial tone service from an Internet Telephony Service Provider (ITSP), you need to
configure SIP trunk channels to connect to the service. Before you start, note the following:
• An AltiGen SIP Trunking channel is licensed. You need to buy and register a license to be able to configure
this option.
• AltiGen does not guarantee the voice quality of the SIP dial tone coming from your service provider. You
need to work with your data service and SIP trunking service provider to make sure adequate QoS is
provisioned for your WAN service.
• AltiGen does not guarantee SIP trunk implementation will work with all SIP dial tone service providers.
AltiGen dealers are notified of AltiGen-tested and certified SIP-Trunk service providers. Configuration
guidelines for each AltiGen-certified SIP-Trunk service provider can be found in the AltiGen authorized
Partner Knowledge Base, available from the AltiGen Partner Web Site. SIP dial tone service providers
need to support the following:
•
•
•
•
G.711, G.723.1, G.729 codec
RFC 2833 for DTMF tone delivery
SIP MD5 authentication with SIP registration
If MAXCS is behind NAT, verify that your SIP SP can support this configuration.
When subscribing to a SIP dial tone service, typically your service provider will provide you with the information
required in the configuration dialog box shown in (see Figure 82 on page 128). Enter these service parameters
to each SIP trunk channel configuration individually.
Note:
This is signal only trunks. Make sure you have enough IP resource boards to cover your needs.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
127
Chapter 12: Trunk Configuration
Important: You must add the SIP Trunk service provider’s IP address to the IP Device Range in Enterprise
Manager and select the proper codec profile for this service. See “Assigning Codec Profiles to
IP Addresses” on page 298. Failure to do this step may cause no voice path, even if the SIP
Trunk channel shows the call is connected.
Configuring SIP Trunks
To open a trunk configuration dialog box for a SIP trunk, do one of the following:
• In the Trunk Configuration window, select a SIP trunk type, click the Trunk Properties button, then click
the SIP Trunk Configuration button.
• In the Board View window, double-click a SIPSP board type, click the Board Configuration button, then
click the SIP Trunk Configuration button.
Figure 82. SIP Trunk Configuration dialog box and Edit box
To edit a line, click the Edit button, fill in the blanks, and click OK.
• SIP Server IP Address – The SIP Trunk service provider’s server IP address
• User Name – Assigned by the SIP Trunk service provider
• Password – Assigned by the SIP Trunk service provider
• Domain – The Domain Name of the SIP Trunk service provider, if required
• SIP Register Period – How frequently the AltiGen system needs to send SIP registration packets to the
service provider. This can detect if the service provider is up or not. Some service providers do not accept
SIP Register messages. In these cases, you can disable sending SIP Register messages from MAXCS
by setting the SIP Register Period to 0.
• SIP Trunk Profile – Select the appropriate SIP trunk profile. (See “Creating a SIP Trunk Profile” on page
130.)
• SIP Source Port – For SIP UDP, select the source port from 5060 or 10060. For TCP or TLS, you cannot
change ports. Using a port other than 5060 will prevent SIP-ALG firewall/router from changing the SIP
packets.
• SIP Destination Port – A SIP Trunk can have different source port and destination port.
• Automatic NAT Traversal – Leave this box unchecked.
128
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
SIP Trunk Properties
• Enable Channel – After all above parameters are entered correctly, check this box to activate the
channel. The AltiGen system will send authentication to the service provider to verify the setting.
To copy the information in one row to other rows, select the row and click Copy To. Then select the rows you
want to copy the information to, using CTRL+click and Shift+click to select several rows. Click OK.
To delete a row, select it and click Delete.
SIP Trunk Group Configuration
You can configure trunk groups so that SIP devices can exchange their status. By sending a “keepalive”
message and checking for a valid response, SIP devices will know whether remote peers are ready to receive
a new request.
Once the MaxCS server has been set up, SIP trunks will try to register to the SIP servers first. If the registration
is successful and if the SIP Options feature is enabled, MaxCS will send the “keepalive” message to SIP
providers according the interval setting. Only one “keepalive” message will be sent for each group of trunks.
1.
In the SIP Trunk Configuration dialog box, click Trunk Group Configuration.
Figure 83. The Trunk Group Configuration button
2.
In the SIP Trunk Group Configuration window, select a SIP Server on the left, and then configure SIP
Options for that SIP Trunk group as appropriate.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
129
Chapter 12: Trunk Configuration
Figure 84. SIP Options
The window includes SIP provider IP address, SIP trunk List, and SIP Options settings. SIP trunks are grouped
by SIP provider IP address; SIP trunks with the same SIP Server IP address are treated as a group.
SIP Options can be enabled or disabled for each SIP Server. By default, SIP Options is disabled.
• SIP Server Name – A name for this SIP Server.
• Enable SIP OPTIONS – Enable or disable this feature for the selected SIP Trunk group.
• SIP Options Interval – How often, in seconds, the server sends a “keepalive” message to this enabled
SIP trunk group. The default interval is 30 seconds.
• Number of Retries – If MaxCS receives no 200 (OK) response, the number of times a “keepalive’
message should be sent. After these retries, if there still has been no valid response, then MaxCS marks
all SIP trunks in the group as Not Ready. The default number of attempts is 5.
• Retry Interval – While a SIP trunk group is in a Retry state and is not receiving a valid response, how
often MaxCS should send another “keepalive” message to the SIP server. The default interval is 2
seconds.
If MaxCS does not receive a SIP 200 (OK) message after the set number of retries, it then sets all SIP
trunks in that group to Not Ready.
Creating a SIP Trunk Profile
Different SIP service providers may support different ways of sending a caller ID. To provide callees with a
more accurate caller ID, you can create a SIP Trunk Profile for a particular service provider, when necessary.
Otherwise, a default profile is used. Once you have created a profile, you can select it in the SIP Trunk
Configuration Edit box (see Figure 82).
130
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Triton T1/E1 Trunk Properties
To create a SIP Trunk Profile, in the SIP Trunk Configuration dialog box, click the SIP Trunk Profile button on
the right.
The fields in this dialog box are described in the following table.
Field
Description
SIP Protocol Field
Not Sent (default) – Do not send transmitted caller ID
FROM Header – Send the caller ID using the SIP FROM header
P-Preferred Identity – Send the caller ID using the SIP
P-Preferred Identity header
P-Asserted Identity – Send the caller ID using the SIP
P-Asserted Identity header
Carrier can accept any number
This is the default.
Carrier can only accept Calling
Number with minimum x digits
Enter the number of digits, then enter a calling number in the field below the
table in case the carrier cannot accept configured numbers.
Carrier can only accept
assigned numbers as Calling
Number
If you select the this option, specify “assigned numbers” by clicking the Add
button and entering the numbers. To edit or delete a number you added,
select it and click the Edit or Del button. Enter a calling number in the field
below the table in case the carrier cannot accept configured numbers.
Send Caller Name
Check to also send the caller name to callees.
Enable Standard RecordRoute Header
Check this box if the SIP service provider uses SIP Record-Route and the
SIP trunk cannot make or receive calls. If it already works, DO NOT CHECK
or UNCHECK this box. [Service provider Bandwidth.com with Edgewater
Route require this checked]
Incoming DID Number Field
When a call comes in, the SIP trunk uses To Header or Request URI as
the DID/DNIS number
Triton T1/E1 Trunk Properties
To open a configuration dialog box for a Triton T1/E1 channel, do one of the following:
• If you’re in the Trunk Configuration window, select a Triton T1/E1 channel from the trunk channels list,
then click the Trunk Properties button, or just double-click the channel in the list.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
131
Chapter 12: Trunk Configuration
• If you’re in the Trunk View window, right-click the channel and select Channel Properties.
Figure 85.
Triton T1 Configuration dialog box
Following are the parameters for the Triton T1 Configuration dialog box.
Parameter
Description
T1 robbed-bit signaling
You can set Protocol to one of the following:
• E&M Wink Start (default)
• E&M Immediate Start
Protocol
• Ground Start
• Loop Start
For signaling from one board to another, only E&M Wink Start is supported. Loop
Start, Ground Start, and E&M Immediate Start protocols cannot be used for
interfacing between two boards.
Dialing Delay
Specifies the delay, in milliseconds, after trunk seizure and before digit dialing.
This configuration will slow down the system transmitting digits to the CO by a defined delay to avoid missing digits. Do not change this value unless advised.
Caller ID and DID Collection
You can select the maximum time-out delays, in seconds, and the appropriate sequence of symbols to be
collected for Caller ID and DID.
Max. seconds before
the first digit
Maximum wait time before time-out for the system to identify this digit after either
the first ring in ground start or loop start or the wink in wink start. The range is from
1-6 seconds, or None, with a default value of 3 seconds. Do not change this value
unless advised.
None means no Caller ID or DID information will be collected. All other options
will be grayed out. Use this option to disable Caller ID and DID collection.
Max. seconds
between digits
Maximum wait time before time-out between two digits. Default value is None. Do
not change this value unless advised.
Selecting None means the system will only wait for the sequence of digits that are
collected within the length of time specified in the Max. seconds before the first
digit field.
132
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Triton T1/E1 Trunk Properties
Parameter
Description
Select up to five incoming symbols to collect from the Caller ID or DID digits:
Incoming sequence
•
•
•
•
•
•
None
#
*
# or *
Caller ID
DID/DNIS
Selecting None in any field of the sequence will terminate the sequence and
automatically disable subsequent entries in the sequence.
The default sequence is:
“# or *” (and then) “Caller ID” (and then) “# or *” (and then) “DID/DNIS”
Or
Sets up an additional, alternative sequence. You can select another set of up to
five incoming symbols to collect.
Not checking any box is equivalent to checking None in the first field.
The default sequence is:
“DID/DNIS”
Apply to
If appropriate, you can use this button, as described in “Configuring One or
Multiple Trunks” on page 123, to apply the Caller ID Collection to multiple T1
trunks.
Note:
In order for back-to-back T1 and tie trunk T1 configurations to perform properly, it is recommended
that you use the system’s default incoming call sequences:
Caller ID and DID Incoming Sequence Example
The following is an example of a Caller ID and DID/DNIS incoming sequence window.
Figure 86. Sample Incoming Sequence window
When a call comes in, the system tries to match the incoming sequence to either the first or second Incoming
Sequence Digit String sequence. If no match is found, no Caller ID or DID digits will be collected.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
133
Chapter 12: Trunk Configuration
• The system waits 3 seconds for the first digit to arrive. If the symbol is a #, it continues with the first sequence. Otherwise, it looks for a match to the first (and only) symbol in the second sequence, the DID/
DNIS number.
• For the example, let’s say the system receives the #. It then waits 1 second between each digit for the
next digit until all digits are received. The * symbol is a delimiter between Caller ID and DID digits.
In this example, the MAXCS ACC/ACM system is expecting either the sequence #CID*DID or only DID digits
for incoming calls. If no match is found for either sequence, no Caller ID or DID digits are collected.
Triton Analog Trunk GS/LS Properties
To open a configuration dialog box for a Triton Analog Trunk GS/LS channel, do one of the following:
• If you’re in the Trunk Configuration window, select a Triton Analog Trunk GS/LS channel from the trunk
channels list, then click the Trunk Properties button, or just double-click the channel in the list.
• If you’re in the Trunk View window, right-click the channel and select Channel Properties.
Figure 87. Triton Analog Trunk GS/LS Properties window
134
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Triton Analog Trunk GS/LS Properties
Note that you can use Apply to in this dialog box to apply changes to other trunks of the same type.
Parameter
Description
Select the type of trunk that will interface with this trunk channel:
Interface Type
• Loop Start Trunk
• Ground Start Trunk
Incoming Ring
Single – Default setting for North America
Double – For countries using Ring-Ring-Silent type of ring pattern
Impedance
The resistance of electrical current to alternating current, measured in
Ohms. Impedance occurs when power or signal is transferred from one
circuit to another. When a trunk interface impedance is greatly
mismatched with the CO analog line, it may result in static noise and
echo heard by IP phone users. The system automatically selects the
impedance profile that best matches the Triton trunk interface with the
CO. In the rare case where you are not getting the best match, you can
disable this feature by checking Disable Impedance Match During
System Startup, and you can set the Impedance manually.
Match Impedance button
Changes the Impedance setting to the best match for the selected
trunk channel, and then measures noise and returned echo with this impedance setting. Results are displayed in the Diagnosis section of the
dialog box. The system automatically runs a matching test upon system
startup, unless you disable the feature. If later you connect a new analog line to an empty port or replace an existing line, you need to click
this button to best match the impedance.
Match Result button
Shows the result obtained the last time the Match Impedance button
was clicked for that trunk.
Disable Impedance Match
During System Startup
Check to disable automatic impedance matching during system
startup.
Caller ID Receiving
Select as None, FSK or DTMF for receiving caller ID digits. For North
America, the caller ID is FSK signal on analog trunk.
Centrex Flash Duration (ms)
Specifies the Flash Duration time in milliseconds, with a range from 150
ms to 1000 ms.
Out of Service With Trunk
Seizure
When checked, if the trunk is set to Out of Service, the system will busy
out the trunk. The CO will treat this trunk as a busy line and WILL NOT
place a call to this trunk. (By default, this option is unchecked.)
Enable Dial Tone Detection
(Outgoing)
When enabled, the trunk channel must detect outgoing dial tone prior
to making the call.
Enable Answer Debounce
(Incoming)
Enables a timeout period of 2 seconds (for ignoring false CO
disconnect signal), after answering an incoming call.
Loop Break Duration (ms)
Disconnects signal if CO breaks loop current. You can set the duration
from 200 to 1000 ms. 600 ms is common in North America.
Tone Disconnect
Busy tone (reorder tone, fast busy tone, error tone, and so on) or dial
tone (continuous tone, and so on). This should be used in conjunction
with drop in loop current. For COs who cannot guarantee loop break,
this may be the only option.
Receiver/Transmission Gain
Slide setting adjusts the gain from -6 dB to 6 dB for every Triton Analog
Trunk channel.
The gain is not adjustable, by default. The user needs to run the
diagnosis first to change the gain. The diagnosis process determines
the max gain based on the diagnosis results.
The default setting is 0 dB, and it is highly recommended that you not
change this setting.
Caution! Setting the volume too high will cause distortion in voice
quality and/or missed DTMF digits.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
135
Chapter 12: Trunk Configuration
Parameter
Trunk to Trunk Gain
Description
This configuration is to set Gain for calls that involve two analog trunks
(one in and one out). Because an analog trunk typically has energy loss
of 3-12 dB, a two-trunk operation, like VM out call and MobileExt, may
have low volume issues because energy loss is doubled. This configuration can compensate for the energy loss. The valid range is 0 to 6 dB.
Recommended value is 3 dB.
Caution: Setting the Gain too high may cause distortion in voice quality
and DTMF tone. Your CO may not be able to recognize the dialing
number if DTMF tones are distorted.
Last Diagnosis Time
The last time the Diagnosis button was clicked.
Diagnose button
Use this button to view the Noise Level, Echo Return Loss, and Hybrid
Echo Return Loss, measured using the current Impedance setting.
Noise Level
The noise level (displayed after you click the Diagnose button or the
Match Impedance button). Acceptable range for Noise Level is less
than -67 dBm in value. For example, Noise Level of -72 dBm is good
and -63 dBm is poor. You may experience high background noise and
low voice volume if Noise Level is poor.
Echo Return Loss
The measurement for echo return loss (displayed after you click the
Diagnose button or the Match Impedance button). Acceptable range
for Echo Return Loss is less than -12 dB. For example, Echo Return
Loss of -19 dB is good and -8dB is poor. The IP phone users may hear
their voice coming back (echo) if Echo Return Loss is poor.
Hybrid Echo Return Loss
The measurement for hybrid echo return loss (displayed after you click
the Diagnose button or the Match Impedance button). Acceptable
range for Hybrid Echo Return Loss is less than -6 dB.
Rx Level at 600 Ohms
The Rx Level measurement at 600 Ohms, obtained by clicking the Test
Rx Level button. See Test Rx Level button, below.
Test Rx Level button
Tests the receiving level of the trunk channel on a call to your local
CO’s Milli-Watt Test Number after you set the Impedance parameter
to 600 Ohms and the Rx Gain to 0dB. Results are displayed in the Rx
Level at 600 Ohms field.
Performing Impedance Match on Your Own
For each individual analog trunk that is connected to the CO when the system starts up, MAXCS automatically
selects an impedance profile to best match the Triton trunk interface with the CO. In the unlikely event that this
automatic selection does not yield the optimal voice quality, you may want to disable the feature and select the
best impedance by trial and error method.
To disable automatic impedance matching, check the Disable Impedance Match During System Startup
check box.
Using the Match Impedance Button
Whenever a new analog trunk is connected to an empty port or is replacing an existing trunk, you will need to
use the Match Impedance button to select the best impedance profile.
To do this, follow these steps:
1.
Click the Impedance Match button. While the impedance match is in process, you’ll see a “progress” box.
When the process is complete, the Match Impedance dialog box opens, with information relevant to this
trunk:
136
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Triton Analog Trunk GS/LS Properties
Figure 88. Match Impedance dialog box
The Impedance parameter setting in the main dialog box is changed to the best match selection, and the
measurement for noise and returned echo is performed with this impedance setting. The results of this
measurement are displayed in the Diagnosis section of the main dialog box. The Hybrid Echo Return
Loss field shows the measurement before adaptation of the selected Impedance profile, and the Echo
Return Loss field shows the measurement after adaptation of the selected Impedance profile.
Note:
If the Hybrid Echo Return Loss reading of a trunk is worse than -6 dB, for example, -5
db, the trunk may be subject to VoIP voice quality problems. Use this trunk to connect to
analog phones only, or configure it to be the least used trunk. (Acceptable range for
Hybrid Echo Return Loss is -6dB to -26dB.)
Noise Level should be less than -67dBm (acceptable range is -67dBm to -90dBm).
2.
Make calls from the trunks to test voice quality.
3.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all other trunk channels.
If the Hybrid Echo Return Loss and Noise Level are not within the acceptable range, take the following steps
to troubleshoot:
1.
Change the trunk to a different port on the Triton board, then diagnose again (this is to rule out a hardware
problem).
2.
Check to see if any wire taps to the trunk wire (bridge tap). If so, remove them, then test again.
3.
Request the CO to check the trunk conditions, including Line Loss, and longitudinal balance.
The Match Result Button
Clicking the Match Result button shows you the result you got the last time you clicked the Match Impedance
button for that trunk.
Figure 89. Impedance Match Result dialog box
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
137
Chapter 12: Trunk Configuration
Measuring the Rx Level of a Trunk Channel
In order to perform this test, you need to obtain the local CO’s Milli-Watt Test Number from your CO. When
dialing this number, a 0dB tone is sent. For example, if your number is 510-252-9712, the Milli-Watt Test
Number from the local CO is 510-252-0020 (the prefix 510-252 is the same).
1.
Write down the Rx Gain, then set it to 0dB and click OK.
2.
Write down the Impedance setting, then change it to 600ohm, and click OK.
3.
Call the number you got from your CO, as noted above.
4.
Click the Test Rx Level button. When the test is complete, the Test Rx Level dialog box opens.
5.
Click OK. The Rx Level measurement is displayed in the Diagnosis section of the main dialog box.
If you call your local CO’s Milli-Watt Test Number, the acceptable range for Rx Level should be between
-6dB and -3 dB, with -5dB being ideal.
6.
Restore the Impedance and Rx Gain settings, and click OK.
If You Need to Improve the Rx Level
If the Rx Level measurement is between -6 to -9 dB, and IP phones are used, take the following steps to
increase the gain for the Triton analog trunk to IP phone connection:
1.
Go to VoIP Board configuration and click the Advance button.
2.
Increase the Transmitting gain to IP Extension to 9 for the Triton Analog Trunk. (Do NOT change the gain
in the trunk property of the Triton Analog Trunk Board, since it may impact the echo canceller
performance.)
If the Rx Level measurement is worse than -9dB (for example, -10 dB) you should contact the CO to adjust the
line loss to the acceptable range.
If You Don’t Have the Milli-Watt Test Number
If you don’t have the local CO’s Milli-Watt Test Number, you can follow the steps below to measure the line
loss when calling two local trunks:
1.
Copy \C:\Post Office\Phrases\Lang1\phrase9900 to \C:\Post Office\Phrases\LangCustom folder. Rename
it an unused phrase name, for example, phrase0990 (the number must be less than 1000).
This phrase is a 1 kHz test tone.
2.
Select an unused AA and set the AA to play the prompt phrase you named in step 1 (0990 in this example).
138
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Triton Analog Trunk GS/LS Properties
Figure 90. Setting the AA to play a prompt phrase
3.
Set the Timeout to Repeat Current Level.
Figure 91. Setting Timeout to Repeat Current Level
4.
Select a trunk as a testing reference – an analog trunk with a specific phone number is best – and set the
trunk In Call Routing to the Test Line Loss AA.
Figure 92. Setting trunk In Call Routing to an AA
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
139
Chapter 12: Trunk Configuration
5.
Call from one trunk to the testing reference trunk. You should hear a 1kHz tone playing at the originating
side.
6.
While the tone is playing, measure the Rx Level at the trunk that is making the outgoing call.
If the reading is less than -6 dB, for example -3 dB, take the following steps to attenuate the gain for the
Triton Analog Trunk to IP phone connection:
a.
Go to VoIP Board configuration and click the Advance button.
b.
Set the Transmitting gain to IP Extension to 3 for the Triton Analog Trunk. (Do
NOT change the gain in the trunk property of the Triton Analog Trunk Board,
since it may impact the echo canceller performance. If the reading is -6 dB to 14 dB, for example, -12dB, no change is needed.
If the reading is -15 dB to -18dB, take the following steps to increase the gain for the Triton Analog Trunk
to IP phone connection:
a.
Go to VoIP Board configuration and click the Advance button.
b.
Set the Transmitting gain to IP Extension to 9 for the Triton Analog Trunk. (Do
NOT change the gain in the trunk property of the Triton Analog Trunk Board,
since it may impact the echo canceller performance.)
If the reading is worse than -18 dB, you should contact your CO to adjust the line loss to the acceptable
range.
Incoming Call Routing
To set incoming call routing for a trunk, select the trunk on the General tab, then click the In Call Routing tab
in the Trunk Configuration window. The trunk location shows in the title bar.
140
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Incoming Call Routing
Figure 93. Trunk Configuration, In Call Routing tab
Regular Trunk Calls
For each trunk—or using Apply to to apply the settings to multiple trunks—you can set routing for the three
time periods defined in the System Configuration window, Business Hours tab (“Setting Business Hours”
on page 33):
• During Business Hours
• Outside Business Hours
• Non Workdays
Within each of these three time slots, you have the following routing options for incoming calls:
• Route to an extension selected in the list
• Route to an auto attendant number selected in the list
• Route to a Line Park line selected in the list (see “Line Park Configuration” on page 231 for more detail)
• Route to the operator
Web IP Calls
For web IP calls, you can set routing for the three time periods defined in the System Configuration window,
Business Hours tab (“Setting Business Hours” on page 33):
• During Business Hours
• Outside Business Hours
• Non Workdays
Within each of these three time slots, you have the following routing options for incoming calls:
• Route to an extension selected in the list
• Route to an auto attendant number selected in the list
• Route to the operator
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
141
Chapter 12: Trunk Configuration
Outgoing Call Blocking
To set outgoing call blocking for a trunk, select the trunk in the General tab, then click the Out Call Blocking
tab in the Trunk Configuration window.
Figure 94. Trunk Configuration, Out Call Blocking tab
If you select Trunk allowed for Outside Calls at Any Time, call restrictions set in System Configuration,
Outcall Routing, and Extension Configuration still apply to calls made on the trunk.
If you select Outside Calls Allowed According to The Following Schedules, you can then use the Schedule
1, 2, and 3 options to set up to three different time periods during which calls are allowed. You can use Apply
to to apply the settings to multiple trunks.
142
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
13
In Call Routing Configuration
In Call Routing rules determine how the system routes incoming trunk calls to various targets. The system’s
routing steps are as follows:
Step
Routing Process
1
Match DID number configured in extension, workgroup, or hunt group. If there is no match, go
to the next step.
Match caller ID defined in the Caller ID Routing table. If there is a match and
• today is a holiday, route the call according to the Holiday Profile’s routing rules.
2
• today is not a holiday, route the call according to business hour routing rules defined in the
Caller ID Routing configuration.
If there is no caller ID match, go to the next step.
Match DNIS number defined in the DNIS Routing table. If there is a match and
• today is a holiday, route the call according to the Holiday Profile’s routing rules.
3
• today is not a holiday, route the call according to business hour routing rules defined in the
DNIS Routing configuration.
If there is no DNIS number match, go to the next step.
4
If today is a holiday, route the call according to the Holiday Profile configured for the trunk port
that the call is coming in on. If today is not a holiday, route the call according to the business
hours routing rules defined in the In Call Routing tab of the Trunk Configuration window.
The In Call Routing Configuration window lets you enter Caller ID and DNIS numbers into a routing table and
set routing rules for a matched number.
To configure In Call Routing, select PBX > In Call Routing Configuration.
Caller ID Routing
When an incoming call comes through a trunk with Caller ID, the system can route the call to the proper
extension, to the auto attendant, or to the operator, based on the Caller ID number collected.
In order to locate an entry in the Caller ID table for an incoming call, a full match is required.
To access Caller ID routing, click the Caller ID Routing tab in the In Call Routing Configuration window.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
143
Chapter 13: In Call Routing Configuration
Figure 95. In Call Routing window, Caller ID Routing tab
Adding and Deleting Caller ID Route Entries
To add entries to the Caller ID routing table, click the Add button. In the dialog box, type a Caller ID Number
and a descriptive Caller ID Name, then click OK.
The number and name entries have the following requirements:
• The Caller ID Number field allows only 0-9, “-” (hyphen), and “*” (asterisk). For example, both
5102529712 and 510-252-9712 are acceptable.
• The Caller ID Name is descriptive and optional; it can be used to remind you about the nature of the
number and routing. For example, you might give the 2529712 number the name “Tech Support.”
To delete an entry, select it in the Caller ID number list, then click Delete.
Defining Caller ID Routing
After adding an entry, you define it by first selecting it in the list. When you select an entry, its name and other
defined attributes, if any, appear in the fields of the tab. You can edit any of these attributes.
For each number, you can set routing for three distinct time periods defined in the Business Hours tab (see
“Setting Business Hours” on page 33):
• During Business Hours
• Outside Business Hours
• Non Workdays
144
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
DNIS Routing
Within each of these three time slots, you have the following routing options for incoming calls:
• Route to a particular extension selected in the list
• Route to a particular auto attendant selected in the list
• Route to the operator
• Reject call
Also, you can set additional routing attributes based on:
• Holiday Profile – Routes incoming calls based on Holiday Profiles configured in System Configuration
(see “Routing Calls on Holidays” on page 35)
• Business Hours Profile – Routes incoming calls based on Business Hours Profiles configured in System
Configuration (see “Setting Business Hours” on page 33). During Business Hours, Outside Business
Hours and Non Working Day are defined and selected by Business Hours profile.
• Set Call Priority – Lets you assign a call priority from 1-9 to the selected caller ID number. The highest
priority is 1, the lowest priority is 9.
• Set Call SKLR – For workgroup-directed calls. Lets you assign a skill level requirement from 1-9 to the
selected caller ID number. This setting tells the system to match the call to an agent’s skill level setting.
(Setting an agent’s skill level is explained in “About Skill Based Routing” on page 243.)
• Language Setting – Lets you specify that callers who dialed from the selected caller ID will hear prompts
in the language you set here. This field will have choices only if you added sets of prompts according to
the instructions in “Multilingual Configuration” on page 75.
DNIS Routing
When an incoming call comes through a trunk with DNIS or DID numbers, the system can route the call to the
proper extension, auto attendant or operator based on the DNIS or DID number collected.
In order to locate an entry in the DNIS table for an incoming call, a full match is required.
To access DNIS routing settings, click the DNIS Routing tab in the In Call Routing Configuration window.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
145
Chapter 13: In Call Routing Configuration
Figure 96. In Call Routing window, DNIS Routing tab
Adding and Deleting DNIS Route Entries
To add entries to the DNIS routing table, click the Add button. In the dialog box, type in a DNIS Number and
a descriptive DNIS Name, then click OK.
The number and name entries have the following requirements:
• The DNIS Number must be the numbers 0 - 9 (the hyphen is not accepted in this dialog box). For example,
2529876 is an acceptable entry, but 252-9876 is not.
• The DNIS Name is descriptive and optional; it can be used to remind you about the nature of the number
and routing. For example, you might give the 2529876 number the name “Tech Support.”
To delete an entry, select it in the DNIS number list, then click Delete.
Defining DNIS Routing
After adding an entry, you define it by first selecting it in the list. When you select an entry, its name and other
defined attributes, if any, appear in the fields of the tab. You can edit any of these attributes.
For each number, you can set routing for three distinct time periods defined in the Business Hours tab (see
“Setting Business Hours” on page 33):
• During Business Hours
• Outside Business Hours
• Non Workdays
146
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
DNIS Routing
Within each of these three time slots, you have the following routing options for incoming calls:
• Route to a particular extension selected in the list
• Route to a particular auto attendant selected in the list
• Route to the operator
Also, you can set additional routing attributes based on:
• Holiday Profile – Routes incoming calls based on Holiday Profiles configured in the System Configuration
window (see “Routing Calls on Holidays” on page 35)
• Business Hours Profile – Routes incoming calls based on Business Hours Profiles configured in the
System Configuration window (see “Setting Business Hours” on page 33). During Business Hours,
Outside Business Hours and Non Working Day are defined and selected by the Business Hours profile.
• Set Call Priority – Lets you assign a call priority from 1-9 to the selected DNIS number. The highest
priority is 1, the lowest priority is 9.
• Set Call SKLR – For workgroup-directed calls. Lets you assign a skill level requirement from 1-9 to the
selected DNIS number. This setting tells the system to match the call to an agent’s skill level setting. (Setting an agent’s skill level is explained in “About Skill Based Routing” on page 243.)
• Language Setting – Lets you specify that callers who dialed the selected number will hear prompts in the
language you set here. This field will have choices only if you added sets of prompts according to the
instructions in “Multilingual Configuration” on page 75.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
147
Chapter 13: In Call Routing Configuration
148
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
14
Out Call Routing Configuration
There are two ways to initiate outbound dialing in an AltiGen PBX:
• Using the trunk access code. The trunk access code is easy to configure and use. However, it does not
have the capability to resolve complicated dialing situations.
• Using the route access code. Using the route access code with the Out Call Routing table can resolve
the following complicated dialing situations:
• Multiple 10-digit dialing area codes.
• Both 10-digit and 11-digit dialing in the same area code.
• Multiple carriers providing trunks for different purposes. For example, you may have a local carrier
provide trunks for local calls only and a long distance carrier provide trunks that can accept only long
distance dialing.
•
•
•
•
Block certain dialing patterns by creating an exceptions list.
Assist VoIP hop-off dialing to another system.
Assist T1/PRI tie trunk hop-off to other system.
Assist system Zoomerang and client application dialing, for example, MaxCommunicator and
MaxAgent. For example, dialing from MaxCommunicator will carry 11 digits and require the system to
remove a digit before making a call to the carrier if it is a 10-digit dialing area.
• Divide trunks with the same characteristics into multiple routes and prioritize them when assigning
routes on the Default Routes tab or on the Dialing Pattern tab of the Out Call Routing Configuration
window.
When a user dials an outside number using the route access code, the system performs the following tasks:
• Compares the dialed number with entries in the Dialing Pattern table. If there is a match, the system uses
the route assigned to the dialing pattern to make the outbound call. The route assigned to the special
dialing pattern may have a digit manipulation rule to add or remove digits from the dialed number.
• If there is no match in the Dialing Pattern table, the system examines the digits to determine if the call is
a local, long distance, international, or emergency call. The routes defined in the Default Routes tab are
used to process the call.
Configuring Out Call Routing
To configure out call routing, select PBX > Out Call Routing Configuration.
The following configuration steps may help you configure out call routing correctly.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
149
Chapter 14: Out Call Routing Configuration
1.
Before you configure Out Call Routing, make sure a route access code is configured in the System
Configuration window, Number Plan tab. If you have a problem changing a first-digit assignment in the
Number Plan tab to a route access code, you may need to set the Access Code in the Trunk
Configuration window for all trunks to None.
2.
Create a route and assign trunks to the route. Typically, different types of trunks will be grouped to different
routes. For example, you may need to create a local route for local trunks, a long distance route for long
distance trunks, and a VoIP route for IP trunks.
3.
Assign routes as Default Routes so that regular 7-digit, 11-digit, international, and emergency calls will go
through.
4.
Solve a complicated dialing situation by adding an entry into the Dialing Pattern table and assigning a
route to the specific dialing pattern.
5.
If the dialing pattern requires adding or removing digits, you may need to edit the Digit Manipulation on
the Route Definition tab to solve the problem. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all complicated dialing patterns
are entered and configured properly.
6.
If a dialing pattern will use another system's trunk to hop-off, you may need to create a VoIP or T1/PRI tie
trunk route and configure digit manipulation to indicate which system to hop-off to and how to tell another
system that this is a hop-off dialing by adding a trunk access code or route access code in the dialing
stream.
7.
If you would like to block a specific dialing pattern, add the dialing pattern and check Disallow this dialing
pattern check box.
Warning! Make sure the default 911 route is configured to a route that can accept 911 calls (see Figure 98).
Failure to do so may cause failure of direct 911 dialing. If you do not want a user to call 911 directly
because of too many 911 dialing errors, you can leave the 911 route not configured. In this case,
you need to let all extension users know that they need to dial 9+911 to call emergency service. A
proper warning sticker on the phone to notify employees about 9+911 dialing would be a good
practice.
Some configuration examples are provided at the end of the chapter. Please use them as a reference to help
you configure your dialing pattern correctly.
About Route Definitions
A route definition consists of a route name and group of trunks, listed in the order that the system will use for
outgoing calls.
150
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring Out Call Routing
Figure 97. Out Call Routing Configuration, Route Definition tab
Parameter
Description
Route Index
For identification purposes only.
Route Name
Description of the route (maximum 30 characters).
Digit Manipulation
You can insert or delete digits from the dialed number. See configuration
samples to learn how to use digit manipulation in different situations.
Insert to Head: Insert a string of digits in front of the dialed number.
Delete from Head: Remove a string of digits from the beginning of the dialed
number.
Member Trunks
Displays the trunks assigned to the selected route. The order in which member
trunks are added determines the order in which the trunks are used by the
system when making an outbound call (the first trunk listed is used first, and
so forth).
Not Member
Displays all trunks that are not assigned to the selected route.
Creating a Route
1.
Click Add under the route definition list.
2.
Type in a name and index number, and click OK.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
151
Chapter 14: Out Call Routing Configuration
3.
To add trunks to the route, select trunks from the Not Member list and use the
selected trunks to the Member Trunks list.
button to move
4.
Use the Up and Down buttons to change the position of a trunk in the Member Trunks list. This is the
order in which trunks are accessed.
5.
Click Apply.
Deleting a Route
Select the route you want to delete, and click the Delete button.
Setting Default Routes
You can set default routes for four types of outgoing calls: local, long distance, international, and
emergency.
Warning! It is important that you set up default routes right after routes are defined. Failing to do so will
cause outbound dialing failure.
Click the Default Routes tab in the Out Call Routing Configuration window to configure default routes.
For each type of call,
the system will use
trunks specified in the
“1” field, if available,
otherwise use trunks in
the “2” field, and so on.
Figure 98. Out Call Routing Configuration, Default Routes tab
The above configuration means:
• The system has a group of analog trunks and a T1 digital trunk from a local carrier that can accept local
and emergency calls.
• The system has a T1 digital trunk from a long distance carrier that can only accept long distance calls.
• The administrator segmented local trunks into two routes, "Local Analog" and "Local T1". A "Long
Distance T1" route is created for the T1 from the long distance carrier.
• When a user makes a local call, the administrator wants the system to use local T1 trunks first. If local T1
trunks are busy, then the system uses local analog trunks.
• When a user makes an emergency call, the administrator wants the system to dial out from local analog
trunks first. If local analog trunks are busy, the system uses the local T1 trunk.
152
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring Out Call Routing
About Dialing Patterns
If your system is using a route access code, most likely you have one of the following situations:
• Your area may have multiple 10-digit dialing area codes.
• Your area may have both 10-digit and 1+10 digit dialing in a same area code.
• Your system needs to borrow another system's trunk to make an outbound call over an IP or tie trunk.
• You would like to block a dialing pattern in addition to system restriction setting.
Dialing patterns are exceptions. If you can, minimize the number of dialing pattern entries. Most companies
don’t need to create dialing patterns.
Creating Dialing Patterns
1.
Click the Dialing Pattern tab on the Out Call Routing Configuration window.
Figure 99. Out Call Routing Configuration, Dialing Pattern tab
2.
Click the Add button.
3.
Type in the prefix and pattern length, and click OK.
4.
Assign routes to this prefix by selecting routes from the lists in the Route Priority section of the Dialing
Pattern tab.
5.
If this is a restricted number or pattern, skip step 4 and check the Disallow this dialing pattern check box.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
153
Chapter 14: Out Call Routing Configuration
Deleting Dialing Patterns
Select the pattern you want to delete, and click the Delete button.
Dialing Pattern Configuration Tips
• If a dialing pattern has multiple routes assigned to it, the system will try to use the first route configured to
process the call that has this dialing pattern. If the first route is busy or not in service, the system will use
the second route, and so on.
• If a dialing pattern requires the system to add or remove digits, a route with digit manipulation configuration
needs to be set up correctly. This means that you may need to have the same group of trunks belong to
different routes. Each route may have a different digit manipulation rule.
• If you are using dialing pattern to restrict outgoing calls, you need to be aware of the following system
implementations:
• The system first checks to see if the number is blocked for this extension (a setting in the Extension
Configuration window, Restriction tab).
• The system then checks the System Configuration Call Restriction tab settings to see if this number
is blocked by the system.
• The system then checks the Dialing Pattern configuration, and if a specific number or pattern is not
blocked, the system will dial the number through a proper route.
In other words, if extension and system call restrictions are not blocking a number or pattern, you can use
Out Call Routing to build restriction rules to block numbers or patterns.
Configuration Example – Solving 10-digit Dialing
Situation: Company ABC located in Dallas, area code 214, has one PRI circuit from the local carrier. Both 214
and 972 area codes are local 10-digit dialing area codes. The carrier will reject the call if the system dials 1214
or 1972 when dialing a local call.
Configuration Steps:
1.
154
Create a route to include all the T1 channels.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuration Example – Solving 10-digit Dialing
2.
Apply the route to Default Routes.
3.
On the Dialing Pattern tab, add two dialing patterns: “1214” and “1972”, each with a pattern length of 11.
4.
Define a route called “10-digit Dialing” and add all T1 channels to the route. In the “Digit Manipulation”
section, check the first box, select Delete from Head, and delete 1 digit:
5.
Apply the “10-digit Dialing” route to dialing pattern 1214 and 1972:
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
155
Chapter 14: Out Call Routing Configuration
Resolving Dialing Delay: Non-USA/Canada Countries
When installing the AltiGen system outside of North America, you may experience dialing delay when dialing
through E1/PRI trunks that are using en-bloc (buffering digits and sending all digits at once). The system dialing
logic may cause a 7-second inter-digit dialing delay for en-bloc trunks. To reduce the dialing delay, the
following configuration is recommended:
1.
On the Number Plan tab in the System Configuration window, select a digit for route access.
2.
On the Route Definition tab of the Out Call Routing Configuration window, add a route definition entry
for en-bloc and assign the member en-bloc trunk(s).
156
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Resolving Dialing Delay: Non-USA/Canada Countries
3.
On the Dialing Pattern tab of the Out Call Routing Configuration window, add dialing pattern definition
entries for the following prefixes:
•
prefix = 0, length = 11
•
prefix = 00, length = 14
•
prefixes = 1-9, each length = 7
In the Route Priority field, use the list to select the En-Bloc route definition (assigned in step 2).
The Dialing Pattern tab should look as follows:
With this configuration, the system will see that all digits have been collected and will send digits to the CO,
instead of waiting 7 seconds for the dialing to finish.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
157
Chapter 14: Out Call Routing Configuration
158
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
15
Extension Configuration
The Extension Configuration window provides for creating extensions and setting their attributes. To open the
Extension Configuration window, either click the Extension Configuration button on the toolbar or select PBX
> Extension Configuration.
Note:
To set up an application extension, see “Application Extension Configuration” on page 89. To set up
an IP extension, see “Setting Up IP Extensions” on page 187. To set up a mobile extension, see
“Mobile Extension Configuration” on page 205.
Figure 100. Extension Configuration window
There are three types of extensions:
• Physical Extensions are associated with a physical port and device, usually a telephone set. This is what
most users think of as an extension.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
159
Chapter 15: Extension Configuration
• Virtual Extensions are not associated with a physical port. Virtual extensions can be used as message
mailboxes and in telephone sharing environments. Users of a virtual extension can log in on any available
station to access physical extension features using Feature Codes.
• IP Extensions are generally associated with an AltiGen IP phone. The option is unavailable when the
Enable IP Extension option is not checked. When Enable IP Extension is checked, it will allow the
AltiGen IP phone to log on as an IP extension.
About the Apply To Button
A change you make to an extension can often be applied to one or more other extensions by using the Apply
To button.
Clicking the Apply To button opens a list of all extensions to which the change can apply. Select the extensions
to which you want to apply the change (all are selected, by default). Use the Shift or Ctrl keys to select several
extensions.
The Apply To button is disabled unless a change you made can be applied to other extensions. When you
use the button to apply changes to multiple extensions, it works on only those changed attributes that can be
applied.
Setting up Extensions
Set up new extensions in the Extension Configuration window.
1.
Click the Add button below the Agent/Supervisor/Extension list.
2.
Type in an Extension Number.
The number must begin with a number assigned to be used for extensions, and it must be the length
assigned to extensions, both of which are set on the Number Plan tab in the System Configuration window, as described in “Setting a System Number Plan” on page 29.
3.
If you have a multi-site setup, with multiple MaxCS 7.0 systems connected over IP, a VoIP domain is
created in the Enterprise configuration. If you want to publish the extension to all MaxCS 7.0 systems
within the VoIP domain, check the Global Extension check box. “(Global)” will be displayed beside the
extension’s type in the Agent/Supervisor/Extension list. No configuration is needed on other MaxCS 7.0
systems on behalf of this extension.
These are the benefits of making an extension a Global extension in a multi-site installation:
• A user from any system only has to dial the Global Extension number, and MaxCS 7.0 will resolve the
routing through the VoIP domain setting.
• Any user within the VoIP domain can forward voice mail to this Global extension.
160
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting up Extensions
• The client applications MaxCommunicator and MaxAgent can see this Global extension number even
it is not an extension in the local system.
4.
Select the Type of extension from the two options, Physical or Virtual. Unless this is an analog extension
and you know the GatewayID/BoardID/Channel number, creating a new extension as a virtual extension
is recommended. You can activate the extension from an analog or IP phone by using #27+password to
log in. The system will determine the Gateway ID, Board ID, channel number, or IP address automatically.
5.
Depending on the type of extension you’re creating, take one of the following actions:
• If you’re setting a virtual number, you’re done. Click OK.
• If you’re setting up a physical extension, select an available physical location—gateway, board and
channel for the line—then click OK.
The board ID and the channels (the ports) are displayed and available if they have not yet been
assigned to an extension. Use the Next and Prev buttons in the Location section to select a location.
After you create an extension, you can set basic attributes on the Extension Configuration General tab. These
attributes are discussed below.
Setting Personal Information
The top section of the General tab is for Personal Information:
• First Name and Last Name of the extension user, each with a maximum of 32 characters.
Note: Only letters can be used for these fields. Inputting numbers or symbols (such as “#”, “*”, “/”, “-” are
blocked, so as not to conflict with Dial by Name (#34) and other feature codes.
• Password for the extension user. The default is the system default password set on the Number Plan
tab in the System Configuration window.
A valid password must be 4 to 8 digits (numbers or letters A-Z) in length and cannot be the same as its
extension number. Basic password patterns, such as repeated digits (1111), consecutive digits strings
(1234), or digits that match the extension (Ext. 101 using 1012, 9101, 10101, and so on) are not allowed.
The letters map to numbers as follows:
Numbers
Letters
Numbers
Letters
2
A, B, C, a, b, c
6
M, N, O, m, n, o
3
D, E, F, d, e, f
7
P, Q, R, S, p, q, r, s
4
G, H, I, g, h, i
8
T, U, V, t, u, v
5
J, K, L, j, k, l
9
W, X, Y, Z, w, x, y, z
• Department – In an Enterprise VoIP domain, departments can be defined and extensions can be assigned to a department by using Enterprise Manager. When this is done, the department is displayed here.
• Description – Optional descriptive information such as cubicle number or job title.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
161
Chapter 15: Extension Configuration
• DID Number – Each extension can be assigned a DID number. This number does not have a fixed length,
but the length must be long enough (range 2 - 16) for the system to match the DID incoming call.
If you configure a 10-digit DID number and inbound digital trunks only receive 4 digits, the last 4 digits of
the DID number configured will be matched.
• Transmitted CID – Each extension number can be assigned a caller ID number. When an outgoing call
is made by this extension through PRI or IP trunks, the caller ID number entered in this field will be
transmitted to the receiving caller.
When an extension user makes an outbound call through a PRI trunk, the system will transmit the Caller
ID based on the following rules:
• If the Transmitted CID is configured, the number will be sent.
• If the Transmitted CID is not configured, the DID number will be sent if it is a valid 10-digit number.
• If the DID number is not configured or not valid, the Area Code and Phone Number entered in the
Trunk Configuration window will be sent.
• If the Area Code and Phone Number are not configured in the Trunk Configuration window, the
System Main Number in the System Configuration window will be sent.
Note: These rules may be overridden by your PRI CID configuration or the SIP Trunk Profile you’re
using.
• E911 CID – A number entered in this field will be transmitted as the caller ID for 911 calls made by this
extension. See “Location-Based E911 (for Roaming Users)” on page 273 for instructions on setting up
E911 Location IDs for IP phones.
Note: If a number is not entered in the E911 CID field, the Transmitted CID is transmitted as the caller
ID for 911 calls made by this extension.
• Language – Sets the language the extension user will hear for voice mail and system prompts. If voice
mail and system phrases have been translated into other languages and properly added to the
C:\PostOffice\Phrases directory, the languages will be selectable from the Language list. (See
“Multilingual Configuration” on page 75 for information on adding translated prompts to the MaxCS 7.0
system).
• Feature Profile – Sets an extension feature profile that includes enabling or disabling of extension features. The feature profile must first be configured by the administrator on the Feature Profiles tab of System Configuration (see “Feature Profiles” on page 77).
• A feature profile assigned to an IP phone should have #26 enabled.
• Enable Dial-By-Name – Select this box to allow incoming callers to search the extension list by employee
name for this extension.
• Enable Intercom – Select this box to enable the intercom call feature for this extension. Pressing #93
allows the user to make an intercom call to another intercom-enabled extension.
Note: Intercom is available for extensions on Triton Analog Extension Boards and AltiGen IP Phone
Extensions.
• Agent – Allows the extension to be added as a member of one or multiple hunt groups or workgroups.
“(Agent)” will be displayed in the extension’s Type field, next to the extension type.
162
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting up Extensions
Account Code
These settings determine how callers use any account codes you have established when making outgoing
trunk calls.
For information on creating account/code associations, see “Creating Account Codes” on page 39.
• Enable Forced Account Code – Forces the user to enter an account code.
• Override Allowed – Prompts the user to enter an account code, or the user can press # to bypass the
account code.
• Account Code Validation – Forces the user to enter a valid account code.
• For Long Distance Call Only – The system determines if an outgoing call starts with a long distance or
international prefix. If it does, the call will require an account code.
• Block Account Code Display – The account code table will not be displayed when the user tries to tag
the account from MaxCommunicator and MaxAgent. This prevents the user from seeing account codes
they do not need to see.
Call Recording Options
The system administrator can specify the following non-workgroup call recording options for an agent
extension.
Warning! Listening in to or recording a conversation without the consent of one or both parties may be a violation of local, state, and federal privacy laws. It is the responsibility of the users of this feature to
assure they are in compliance with all applicable laws.
License Assignment
• Concurrent Session – When this extension is in recording state, a recording license is consumed;
otherwise, a recording license is not being consumed by this extension.
• Dedicated Seat – Assigns this extension a recording license for its exclusive use. The license is
consumed whether or not the extension is recording.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
163
Chapter 15: Extension Configuration
Recording Options for Non-Workgroup Calls
• Disable – No recording of non-workgroup calls.
• Auto record to central location – Records all non-workgroup calls, which are saved to a centralized location (defined in System > Recording Configuration – see Configuring Call Recording on page 84);
this option requires either a shared Concurrent Recording Session license or a Dedicated Recording Seat
license to be available.
• Record on demand to central location – Records non-workgroup calls on demand, which are saved to
a centralized location (defined in System > Recording Configuration – see Configuring Call Recording
on page 84); this option requires either a shared Concurrent Recording Session license or a Dedicated
Recording Seat license to be available.
• Record on demand to extension VM – Records non-workgroup calls on demand, which are saved to
the extension’s voicemail box. No license is required for this option. If the recording file size is larger than
the mailbox size set for the extension, the recording file is discarded. The administrator should assign a
large enough mailbox size to this extension. (The mailbox size setting is on the Mail Management tab.)
Note: The recorded file will not be forwarded to e-mail as an attachment even if mail forwarding is
enabled to forward voice mail to e-mail.
• Record X out of 10 calls – If recording to a central location, automatically records all incoming nonworkgroup calls at a specified interval for every 10 calls. Group calls are not recorded.
For example, if you set to record 4 out of 10 calls, the 1st-4th and 11th-14th, and so on, will be recorded.
The shaded calls will be recorded in the following example:
Recording Tone
• Disable – No tone is played during a recording.
• Insert tone before recording – Plays one recording beep to alert the parties that the conversation is
being recorded.
• Insert repeating recording tone – Plays a low-volume background beep every 15 seconds to alert the
parties that the conversation is being recorded. The tone is recorded together with the conversation. The
beep does not disrupt the conversation.
Note:
• The recording session starts when the call enters the connected state and ends when hang up or flash is
pressed, or when the call is transferred.
• Except for license assignment, the recording setting in Extension Configuration only applies to nonworkgroup calls. The recording setting in Workgroup Configuration only applies to workgroup calls. To
allow an agent to record all calls (non-workgroup and workgroup), both recording settings must be
enabled.
164
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting up Extensions
Physical Location and Type
You can change the extension’s type and location.
• Type
The type of extension—physical or virtual—is set when you create the extension. After you create the
extension, the type is displayed in brackets in the Agent/Supervisor/Extension list on the left side of the
Extension Configuration window.
You can change a Virtual extension to a Physical one, and vice versa.
If you change the type to physical, you can also set the location and configure the line as discussed in
the “Setting the Line Properties” on page 165.
For information about IP extension configuration, see “Setting Up IP Extensions” on page 187.
• Location
• Assigning a location to a physical extension – When changing a virtual extension to a physical
extension, the Location parameters are available. If you know which board and channel this extension
is wired to, you can use the Prev and Next buttons to select the correct board and channel number for
this physical extension.
• Changing the location – To change the location of a physical extension, select the extension number
in the list of extensions, then click the Prev or Next buttons to change the board and channel settings
until the location you want is displayed. Like other changes, this change isn’t finalized until you click
Apply.
Setting the Line Properties
For a physical extension, you can configure hardware options on the port used for the extensions. To do so,
select the extension number in the list of extensions, then click the Line Properties button to open a dialog
box that is specific to the board used for the extension.
Triton Analog Station Line Properties
If you select a Triton Analog Station Board extension and click the Line Properties button, you’ll see the Triton
Analog Station Line Properties dialog box.
You can also access this window by double-clicking a span in Channel Mapping List of the Triton Analog
Station Board configuration window.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
165
Chapter 15: Extension Configuration
Figure 101. Triton Analog Station Line Properties dialog box
Configure the following hardware extension-specific features:
Parameter
Description
Message format with which to send Caller ID information:
• None
• SDMF – Single Data Message Format for supporting and sending a single
data type, such as phone numbers.
Caller ID Signal Format
• MDMF – Multiple Data Message Format for supporting and sending
multiple data types, such as name and number information. (Default for
US/Canada installation.)
• DTMF – Dual Tone Multi-Frequency, composed of high and low
frequencies, for touch tone dialing.
Type of Message Waiting indicator for the phone set:
• None
Message Waiting Signal
Type
• FSK/SDMF – Frequency Shift Keying/Single Data Message Format
indicator.
• FSK/MDMF – Frequency Shift Keying/Multiple Data Message Format
indicator. (Default for US/Canada installation.)
Specifies the Flash Duration time in milliseconds:
• 85-750 (default)
• 50-600
Flash Duration
• 100-700
• 150-800
• 200-900
• 300-1000
Ringing Frequency (Hz)
Select the frequency in Hz that is necessary for the equipment attached to
this line: 28 (default) or 20.
Line Disconnect Signal
The loop current break desired for answering supervision. Range 600-1000
ms (1000 ms is default).
166
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting up Extensions
Parameter
Description
Specifies how Caller ID will be detected:
• CID between 1st and 2nd ring – Caller ID is received between first and
second ring. (Most common in US/Canada)
Caller ID Transmission
Methods
• DT-AS+CID prior to ringing – Dual Tone Alerting Signal Caller ID is
received prior to ringing.
• RP-AS+CID prior to ringing – Ring Pulse Alerting Signal Caller ID is
received prior to ringing.
Receive from phone (dB
Gain)
Range -3 ~ +3 db
You can decrease or increase the extension phone's talk volume with this
setting. Default is 0 dB.
Transmit to phone (dB Gain)
Range -3 ~ +3db
You can decrease or increase the extension phone's receiving volume with
this setting. The volume will be lower or higher for the extension user. Default
is 0 dB.
IP Extension Configuration
See “Setting Up IP Extensions” on page 187 for information on configuring this section of the Extension
Configuration General tab.
Phone Display Options
For analog and IP phones, the administrator can select what information is to be displayed.
Depending on the number of display lines on the LCD, the phone can be set up to show two lines of specific
caller information on the display.
In the Phone Display field, use the Number Line and Name Line lists to select the caller information to
display:
• Caller Number
• Caller Name
• DNIS Number
• DNIS Name
• AA Data
• User Data
Note:
For most phones, the number line can only display a number. If the Number Line is set to Caller
Name, DNIS Name, User Data or AA Data, the phone may display “Unknown” on the number line.
Alti-IP 600, IP 705, and IP 805 Phone Display Notes
For the Alti-IP 600, IP 705, and IP 805 models, the Name Line displays caller information under the following
conditions:
• If Name Line is set to Caller Name, it will display caller name. If there is no name information, the number
will be displayed.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
167
Chapter 15: Extension Configuration
• If Name Line is set to Caller Number, it will display the caller number. If there is no number information,
“Unknown” will be displayed.
• If Name Line is set to DNIS Name, it will display DNIS name. If there is no name information, the DNIS
number will be displayed.
• If Name Line is set to DNIS Number, it will display the DNIS number. If there is no number information,
“Unknown” will be displayed.
Configuring Group Options for an Extension
In the Extension Configuration window, Group tab, you can see the groups to which an extension is assigned,
and you can change those assignments. Hunt groups are created in the Huntgroup Configuration window (see
“Establishing Hunt Group Membership” on page 216). Workgroups are created in the Workgroup Configuration
window (see “Establishing Workgroup Membership” on page 240). Group members are assigned in those
configuration windows, as well.
Once a group is established, use the Extension Configuration window, Group tab, to configure hunt group and
workgroup options for an individual agent extension, such as how much wrap-up time to allow that individual
agent after a workgroup call.
You can assign an extension to and remove an extension from a group in the Extension Configuration window
too. To assign an extension to a workgroup, the extension must be designated as an Agent extension. This is
done on the General tab of Extension Configuration (check the Agent check box). A hunt group member does
not have to be designated as an Agent.
To configure group options for an individual extension,
1.
Select the extension number from the Agent/Supervisor/Extension list in the Extension Configuration
window. The extension number and type appear in the title bar of the window.
2.
Click the Group tab. You see a list of groups the extension is a member of and a list of groups the extension is not a member of. If the extension is an agent, both workgroups and hunt groups are shown. If the
extension is not an agent, only hunt groups are shown.
Figure 102. Extension Configuration window, Group tab
168
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Adding or Removing Group Assignments
Adding or Removing Group Assignments
You can assign an extension to a hunt group in the Huntgroup Configuration window and to a workgroup in the
Workgroup Configuration window. Conversely, you can assign a hunt group or a workgroup to an extension in
the Extension Configuration window.
To assign a group to the selected physical or virtual extension,
1.
On the Group tab, click the group number in the Not Member list.
2.
Click the Add button to move it to the Member list.
Note: If a hunt group or workgroup is configured to Ring All Available Members, the maximum number
of members is 20. See “Setting Call Handling Options” on page 222 for details.
To remove a group assigned to a physical or virtual extension,
1.
Click the group number in the Member list.
2.
Click the Remove button. The group moves to the Not Member list.
Note:
You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select more than one group.
Setting Wrap-up Time
You can set the Wrap-up Time for the selected physical agent extension. This option doesn’t appear for a virtual extension or a non-agent extension. Wrap-up time is a system delay between the time an agent finishes
a workgroup call and the time the next call is routed to the extension. It gives the agent time to finish up with
notes, prepare for the next call, log out of the group, or click the “Not Ready” button in MaxAgent. You can set
a wrap-up time of up to 29 minutes, 59 seconds.
To set the extension wrap-up time,
1.
Check the Allow Workgroup Wrap Up Time check box.
2.
Using the lists, select the minutes and seconds for the delay. Be sure to set at least enough time (for
example, 5 seconds) to allow an agent to click the “Not Ready” button in MaxAgent after putting the caller
on hold and going onhook.
Setting Inter Call Delay
This configuration applies only to calls waiting in queue. The Inter Call Delay can create a time delay before
the next workgroup call in queue rings the extension after the extension finishes one of the following activities:
• Makes an internal or outbound call
• Receives a direct inbound call
• Accesses voice mail
It is possible that an agent may execute one of the above activities during the wrap-up period after finishing a
workgroup call. The following rules govern which delay timer will take effect:
• If Wrap-up time is still active, the Inter call delay will be ignored.
• If Wrap-up time is expired when one of the above activities is completed, the Inter Call Delay will be
applied. The system will not pass a workgroup call to an agent until Inter Call Delay is expired.
To set the extension Inter Call Delay time,
1.
Check the Inter Call Delay check box.
2.
Using the lists, select the seconds for the delay.
Picking Up a Call from the Workgroup Queue
Check Allow pickup call from workgroup queue to allow a MaxAgent user to pick up a call from the
workgroup the agent belongs to. The agent needs to be in the log-in state to be able to pick up a call from the
queue.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
169
Chapter 15: Extension Configuration
Logging Outbound Workgroup Calls
You can assign an agent to an outgoing workgroup, which is useful for call detail reporting and workgroup statistics. All calls made by the agent while logged into the workgroup will be tracked as calls from the workgroup.
The agent’s outgoing workgroup can be assigned to any workgroup of which he is a member.
To set an agent’s outgoing workgroup,
In the Log Outbound Call to Workgroup field, use the list to choose a workgroup from among the workgroups
the agent belongs to. If the Allow agent to change check box is selected, the agent can change the outgoing
workgroup from the phone set by using feature code #53 or from MaxAgent.
When a user is first assigned to a workgroup, it is set as their default outgoing workgroup and remains so no
matter how many workgroups the user is subsequently assigned to. If an agent is unassigned from their outgoing workgroup, the outgoing workgroup is automatically set to N/A.
Setting up Station Speed Dialing
For each extension, you can set up to 20 station speed dial numbers. The numbers available are from 00–19,
and are entered by the user following the extension speed dial access code, #77.
To work with Speed Dialing settings, click the Speed Dialing tab, then select the extension you want to set
speed dialing for.
Figure 103. Extension Configuration, Speed Dialing tab
170
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Mailbox Options
Editing Speed Dial Entries
To add or edit an entry,
1.
Double-click the Station Speed ID number you want to work with, or select the number and click Edit. Or
click Add to add an entry.
2.
Select the ID number using the arrow, type in a name for the Speed Dial entry, then the full number as
you would dial it, with a maximum of 20 digits per entry. For example, the phone number 914085551212
comprises 9 (trunk access code), 1 (long distance prefix), followed by 408 (area code), and finally the
seven digit telephone number.
Valid digits include 0 through 9, #, *, and (,) comma. The comma represents a one-second pause.
Setting Mailbox Options
The Mail Management settings define how voice messages are handled for an extension: whether the mailbox
is information only or is full-featured, how messages are announced and processed, and how much capacity
is allotted to message storage.
To work with mailbox settings, select the extension number you want to work with from the Agent/Supervisor/
Extension list, then click the Mail Management tab.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
171
Chapter 15: Extension Configuration
Figure 104. Extension Configuration, Mail Management tab
Setting an Information-Only Mailbox
You can check the Information Only Mailbox check box to set virtual or physical extension mailboxes to Information Only, then click Apply to to set one or more extension mailboxes.
An Information Only mailbox allows callers to listen to customized recorded announcements. To repeat the announcement, callers are instructed to press the # key. This mailbox does not take messages from the caller.
Disabling a Mailbox
When you disable a mailbox, a special greeting is played to announce that this mailbox is not accepting new
messages.
Assign Exchange Integration License
Check this check box if the selected extension is to be integrated with Microsoft Exchange.
SMTP/POP3 Setting
• Email Name – the user’s e-mail name without the @domain. The default e-mail name is ext[extension
number], that is, the letters “ext” followed by the extension number. For example, the default e-mail name
for extension 2497 would be ext2497.
• Retrieve Voice Mail by Email Client – selected, this sends voice mail to the user’s e-mail as an
attachment.
172
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Mailbox Options
Mail Forwarding Options
• Enable Mail Forwarding – selected, the user’s e-mail will be forwarded to the e-mail address you specify
in the Forward Email Address box. The address should be a full address, including the domain (for
example, jsmith@thecompany.com).
If you enable mail forwarding, you also specify what you want done with the original messages after they
have been forwarded. In the drop down list you can choose to:
– Delete Messages after Forward
– Keep the Messages as New
– Keep Messages as Saved
Setting Message Playback Options
You can use the following check boxes to turn on or off options for listening to playback of recorded messages.
These options apply to both new messages and saved messages, and they can be applied to multiple
extensions using Apply to.
Parameter
Description
Announce Message
Sender Before Playback
Selected, the user hears the type of the message sender (internal or outside)
before listening to recorded messages.
Announce Time Stamp
Before Playback
Selected, the user hears the timestamp (time and date) of each message before
playback.
Confirm Callback
Number
Selected, the system reads back the caller’s number and asks the caller to
confirm.
Enable Distinctive Call
Waiting Tone
Selected, the extension user will hear a "beep" tone when there is a call waiting in
the extension's queue.
Play the Newest Voice
Message First
Selected, new voicemail will be retrieved first. When not selected, the system will
play voicemail based on first-in-first- out (FIFO).
Press Zero Option
This option allows a caller to press “0” while listening to this extension’s greeting. Use the list to select one of
the following forwarding destinations for the call: Voice Mail, AA, Extension, Group, Operator (default),
Outside Number, Application Extension, or Line Park. When the caller presses “0”, the call will forward to
the specified destination.
Setting Mailbox Capacities
You can set various mailbox capacities with the following options:
Parameter
Description
Max Number of
Messages
Maximum number of messages stored in the user’s mailbox. The range is 1–
999, defaulting to 100.
Mailbox Size
Mailbox size in MBs of stored messages. The range is 1–500 MB, with a default
of 50.
Max Message Length
Maximum length of voice messages in minutes. The range is 1–30 minutes,
with a default of 5 minutes.
Retention Length of
Saved Messages
Number of days saved messages are archived by the system. The range is 1–
90 days, with a default of 60.
These options can be applied to multiple extensions using Apply to.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
173
Chapter 15: Extension Configuration
Setting Message Notification Options
The Notification tab of Extension Configuration provides for setting notification options on new incoming email as well as voice messages.
To work with notification settings, select the extension number from the Agent/Supervisor/Extension list,
then click the Notification tab.
Figure 105. Extension Configuration, Notification tab
Individual users can also configure Message Notification within the AltiGen client applications
MaxCommunicator and MaxAgent.
Note:
You can use Apply to to apply notification settings to one, some, or all extensions. See “About the
Apply To Button” on page 160 for more information on using Apply to.
Setting the Message Types for Notification
Select the types of messages for which the extension user is notified:
• None – No notification. Selecting this option does not prevent the user from getting message waiting
indicators or stutter dial tone when new messages are received.
• Urgent Voice Messages Only
• All Voice Messages
The system will perform notification under the following conditions:
• Extension's message notification is set to Urgent Voice Messages Only.
• Extension's notification Schedule is set to Non-Business Hours.
• Voice mail received during business hours is marked urgent.
• Extension user does not check the urgent message.
The system will start notification as soon as it enters non-business hours.
174
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Message Notification Options
Note:
Message notification can also be set in MaxCommunicator and MaxAgent, and the settings are
reflected in MaxAdmin.
Emergency Notification
When any extension dials an emergency number, the system can make calls to specified extensions, groups,
or outside numbers. To configure this option, select the extension/group/outside number, and check the When
Emergency Number Has Been Dialed check box.
Emergency-number calls are logged to SecurityAlert.txt (see “Where Security Alerts Are Logged” on page
176.)
Unusual VM Activity Notification
When certain unusual activity is detected from an extension’s voice mail, the system can notify a designated
extension. This option is intended to help detect if a hacker has obtained control of and is making calls from
an extension’s voice mail. To alert an extension (usually the administrator) when either of the following abnormal activities are happening, select the extension and check the option When unusual call activity has been
detected:
• When calls made from voice mail are unusually long (by default, more than 120 minutes)
• When the number of calls made from voice mail is unusually high (by default, more than 20 calls in one
voice mail session)
When the designated extension is notified, the system will play "Unusual call activity has been detected from
Extension xxx. More than yy calls have been made from the extension's voice mail. Please verify with the extension user." Or "Unusual call activity has been detected from Extension xxx. The extension made more than
a yyy-minute call from the extension's voice mail. Please verify with the extension user." The security notification will be made only once within a call.
Setting Parameters for Unusual VM Activity
To change the parameters for the number of calls or length of a call, you must add the following strings and
values to the Windows registry:
• SecurityConnectionDuration (value range is from 1-1440 minutes [24 hours]). When the setting is out of
range, the default of 120 minutes will be used.
• SecurityNumberOfCalls (value range is from 1-100 calls). When the setting is out of range, the default of
20 calls will be used.
Adding security values to the registry
To add one or both of the above security values to the Windows registry:
1.
Choose Run from the Windows Start menu, type regedit, and click OK.
2.
Go to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\AltiGen Communications, Inc.\AltiWare\InitInfo.
3.
On the right side of the Registry window, right-click and choose New > DWORD Value.
4.
Type one of the security strings listed above, then double-click the entry.
5.
Choose Decimal as the Base option.
6.
Type the value you want (see the allowed range listed above) in the Value data text box, and click OK.
7.
The value you enter appears in parentheses in the Data column.
8.
For the values you entered in the registry to take effect, from the MaxAdmin menu, choose Diagnostic >
Trace. The Trace Filter dialog box opens. Click the Minute Task button in the dialog box. Alternatively,
you could restart the system for the values to take effect.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
175
Chapter 15: Extension Configuration
Where Security Alerts Are Logged
Security alerts are logged to ...\AltiServ\Log\SecurityAlert.txt. The log includes date, time, extension
number, pad number, and the alert reason. Emergency calls are also logged to this file. Following are some
examples:
2007-02-04 08:30:25 Extension 212 made more than 20 calls from voicemail(1:2)
2007-02-04 16:00:50 Extension 395 made more than a 120-minute call from voicemail(0:6).
2007-02-18 09:05:32 Extension 395(2:3) made an emergency call-###.
Note:
A SecurityAlert.txt file does not appear in the ...AltiServ\Log folder until a security alert event has
created it.
Setting the Type of Notification
There are four options for sending the notification or reminder message: phone, pager, extension or custom
application (Custom App).
• Extension – To use the Extension option, select the Extension radio button, then type the extension
number into the text box.
• Phone/Pager – For the Phone and Pager options, first specify the trunk or route access code using the
list next to the Phone radio button. The Any option means to locate any available trunk. Then type in the
number with all relevant dialing prefixes other than the trunk code, using a maximum of 63 digits.
• Custom App – When used in conjunction with a third-party notification application, the Custom App
feature enables an extension to connect to an application that can receive the notification event; use the
list to choose the log-on extension to which the third-party application is connected. Contact your local
AltiGen Partner for more information on using this feature.
Note: The Reminder Call will not work with this selection.
Note also the following considerations:
• For the Pager option, the system calls the specified pager number and then dials the system main number
(as set in System Configuration, General tab), which is then displayed on the user’s pager.
For the operator-assisted paging function, the operator phone number and the pager number must be
entered in the <phone number>*<pager number> format. For example, if the phone number to call the
pager operator is 7654321 and the pager number to page the user is 12345678, the notification outcall
number that needs to be entered is 7654321*12345678. When the pager operator answers the Message
Notification call, MaxCS 7.0 announces the pager number and the System Main Number (as configured
on the General tab of System Configuration), which will be displayed on the user’s pager. The operator
is also given the option to repeat these numbers by pressing ‘#’.
Outcall to Cellular or PCS Phone Numbers
When an outcall is made by the system (for One Number Access, Message Notification, Zoomerang, Call Forwarding, and so on) to a cellular or PCS phone, it may ring the phone once but not necessarily present the call
and make a connection. This will happen if the ringback tone played by the cellular service provider does not
conform to standard ringback tones. To work around this problem, append a few commas (,) to the outcall (cellular) number when entering it. Each comma provides a one second pause.
Setting Notification Timing
When notification is configured to an outside phone number, the system will announce, "This is the outcall
notification message for…" after call connection. However, there are situations when the system may not be
able to receive an answer supervision signal from the carrier. If the system plays the announcement phrase
before the notification call is answered, the phrase will be cut off. The following two options can be configured
based on answer supervision capability:
176
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring Calling Restrictions
• Seconds after Dialing – If the carrier of the outside phone number cannot provide an answer supervision
signal, check this option and set a delay time. (Default 5 seconds, maximum 30 seconds.)
Note: If the delay is set too long, the notified party will hear silence before the announcement is played.
• Seconds after Answered – This field is set to 0 seconds and it is not configurable for notification to a
phone number. It means the system will play the announcement immediately after answer supervision is
received.
When notification is configured to a pager, the system will transmit DTMF digits as the return phone number
(the System Main Number as set in the System Configuration General tab) after call connection. However,
there are situations when the system may not be able to receive an answer supervision signal from the pager
system. If the system sends digits before the call is connected, some digits will be cut off. The following two
options can be configured based on answer supervision capability:
• Seconds after Dialing – If the pager carrier cannot provide an answer supervision signal, check this
option and set a delay time. (Default 5 seconds, maximum 30 seconds.)
• Seconds after Answered – If the answer supervision signal is provided by the carrier, check this option
and set the delay timer to 2 to 5 seconds. In some cases, the pager carrier cannot detect DTMF right after
the call connection. (Default is 10 seconds, maximum is 30.)
Note: You may need to try a different delay setting to make sure the user return number is transmitted
properly after configuration.
Setting Notification Business Hours
You can choose one of three options for when the extension user is to be notified of new messages:
• Non-Business Hours – Notify only during non-business hours. Business hours are set in System
Configuration, Business Hours tab (see “Setting Business Hours” on page 33).
• From/To – Notify during a specified time of day. Select the hours in the From and To time scroll boxes.
• Any Time – Notify at all times (every day).
Enabling Message Notification
After configuring your message notification settings, to enable message notification, check the Allow
Extension User to Configure Forwarding, Notification and Reminder Call to an Outside Number check
box on the Restriction tab of Extension Configuration.
Configuring Calling Restrictions
To work with extension call restrictions, select the extension number you want to work with from the Agent/
Supervisor/Extension list, then click the Restriction tab.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
177
Chapter 15: Extension Configuration
Figure 106. Extension Configuration, Restriction tab
Note:
You can use Apply to to apply call restriction settings to one, some, or all extensions. See “About the
Apply To Button” on page 160 for more information on using Apply to.
Setting Call Restriction Options
You can use one of the following options in setting restrictions on an extension or on multiple extensions using
Apply to.
• No Restrictions on Outcalls
• Internal Calls Only – extension-to-extension.
• Internal, Local, and Unrestricted Area Codes – Allow extension to call internal, local, and area codes
defined in the Unrestricted Area Codes in the Call Restriction tab of the System Configuration window.
• Allow Internal/Local/Unrestricted, and Defined Prefixes – In addition to the above privilege, allow the
extension to call prefixes you specify in the Prefixes Allowed boxes. Include all relevant prefix numbers
(for example, if appropriate, you would include 1+area code before the number). This configuration will not
override System Prohibited Prefixes set in System Configuration.
• All Calls Allowed Except the Defined Prefixes – In addition to System Prohibited Prefixes, you can
block this extension from dialing the numbers defined in the Prefixes Disallowed boxes.
Setting Other Call Restrictions
Other call restriction rules can deny or allow the following:
178
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Answering Options
• Allow Calls to be Transferred or Conferenced to an Outside Number – when checked, the internal
extension user can log into voice mail, make a call to a second party, then transfer or conference to a third
party.
• Allow User to Configure Forwarding, Notification, and Reminder Call to an Outside Number – This
setting regulates extension call forwarding, voice mail notification, and reminder call configuration. If this
setting is not checked, you will see a warning message pop up when trying to set up forwarding to an outside number. International calls are not allowed if the fourth option is not checked.
• Allow Outside Caller to Make or Return Calls from within VM System – when checked, an outside
caller can dial into the system, log in to the extension’s voice mail, and make or return calls from the voice
mail (Zoomerang feature). International calls are not allowed if the fourth option is not checked.
• Allow Outside Caller to Make or Forward International Calls from within VM system – This setting
regulates making international calls from voice mail and forwarding to an international number. You need
to check the second and third options to be able to check this configuration.
Caution!
Allowing any of these options may increase the potential for toll fraud. Make sure the password is
properly configured to prevent an intruder from using this voice mail box to make an outbound call.
AltiGen recommends that you leave the fourth option unchecked for all extensions at all times.
Setting Answering Options
Answering options include forwarding, handling busy calls, handling no-answers and other options. Which
options are available depends on the type of extension. Virtual and physical extensions each use somewhat
different answering options.
You can use Apply to to apply answering settings to one, some, or all extensions. See “About the Apply To
Button” on page 160 for more information on using Apply to. However, since the available options vary with
the type of extension, you can only apply the choices to the same type of extension.
For example, If you are working with the settings for a virtual extension, you can use Apply to to apply changes
to one, some, or all virtual extensions, but not to physical extensions.
To work with extension answering options, select the extension number from the Agent/Supervisor/
Extension list, then click the Answering tab.
Figure 107. Extension Configuration, Answering tab
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
179
Chapter 15: Extension Configuration
Forwarding All Calls
Call Forwarding is available to all types of extensions.
This is the Call Forwarding feature that is also accessible by the extension user by dialing #36.
One Hop Limit to Call Forwarding for a Transferred Call
There is a one hop limit to call forwarding when the call that is being passed is a transferred call. For example,
extension 100 receives a transferred call and forwards this call to extension 101; extension 101 is set to forward all calls to extension 102; extension 102 receives the call but CANNOT forward this call to another extension.
10-Hop Limit to Call Forwarding for Direct Calls
For direct calls, there is a “10-hop” limit to call forwarding. For example, extension 100 forwards to extension
101, 101 forwards to 102, 102 forwards to 103, and so on, through extension 120. A call to extension 100 will
be forwarded to 101, which will forward to 102, which will forward to 103, and so on, until the call has been
forwarded 10 times. At this point, the call will not be forwarded again; if the last extension in the forwarding
chain does not answer, the call is sent to extension 100’s voice mail.
If there is a loop condition in the forwarding chain (for example, 100 forwards to 101, 101 to 102, and 102 back
to 100), the call is sent to the first destination’s voice mail.
To enable call forwarding, check the Enable Call Forward to check box, then, using the list, indicate the
forwarding destination. You can use Apply to to act on multiple extensions, with the restrictions discussed in
the previous section. The forwarding options are as follows:
• To Voice Mail
• To AA – Select the auto attendant number to use in the list under the option.
• To an Extension – Select an extension from the list.
• To a Group – Select a group from the list.
• To the Operator
• To an Outside Number – This option is available if it is allowed in the Other Call Restrictions option in
the Restriction tab, as discussed in “Setting Other Call Restrictions” on page 178. Also, see “Outcall to
Cellular or PCS Phone Numbers” on page 176.
If you choose Outside Number, select a trunk or route access code to use in the small list on the left, and
type in the full prefix and phone number.
• To an App Ext – When used in conjunction with an SDK-based application.
• To Line Park – If configured, select a Line Park group (configured in “Line Park Configuration” on page
231) from the list.
• To Free Format – This option is available only to virtual extensions.
Note: Using an IP extension, APC extension, or Paging Group as a forward target is not supported.
Forwarding over IP and E1 trunks is not supported.
You can enter up to 40 digits and can use 0-9, *, #, and “,”. One “,” represents one second of delay.
You can use this configuration to send out additional DTMF digits to an extension, hunt group/workgroup,
or outside number. Here is an example: Virtual extension 100 is set to forward all calls to "200,,,123".
Extension 101 makes a call to extension 100. The call is forwarded to 200. If 200 is an extension, 3
seconds after extension 200 picks up the call, extension 200 should hear DTMF tones (123). If 200 is a
hunt group or workgroup with agent 201 and 202, when the agent (either 201 or 202) picks up the call,
after 3 seconds the agent should hear DTMF tones (123).
Two other examples using Free Format: "92529712,,,,,5,,,211" means dial trunk access code 9, and an
outside number 2529712, wait 5 seconds, dial 5, and wait 3 seconds, then dial 211. Second example:
"102,,01,,,5#" means dial extension 102, wait 2 seconds, dial 01, wait 3 seconds, and then dial 5#.
180
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Answering Options
For a trunk call, the wait time starts right after the digits are dialed (even while the target phone is ringing).
For an extension call, the wait time starts after connecting to the extension (it does not start when ringing
begins).
• To Paging Trunk – This option is available only to virtual extensions. To use this option, you have to select
a paging trunk in Trunk Configuration.
Note:
Forwarding calls to a pager is possible but not recommended since callers will only hear what is
heard when calling a pager and will not know to enter a return phone number unless instructed.
Do Not Disturb
Enable Do Not Disturb – Check this option to send all calls for the selected extension(s) to the extension’s
voice mail. This feature is also accessible by the user at the user’s station by dialing #33. Note that this overrides any One Number Access settings for the extension.
Handling Busy Calls
You have several options for handling calls while the extension is busy, and again, the options vary depending
on the extension type. If you do not enable busy call handling, the caller simply hears a busy signal.
To enable the options, check the Enable Busy Call Handling check box, then select from the following
options:
• Forward to Extension – Select an extension number in the drop-down list. See “10-Hop Limit to Call
Forwarding for Direct Calls” on page 180.
• Forward to Voice Mail
• Place Caller in Queue – Places caller in the extension’s personal queue. This option is available only if
Multiple Call Waiting or Live Call Handling is turned on.
• Forward to AA – Select the auto attendant number to use in the list under the option.
• Forward to Line Park – Use the list to select a Line Park group to route the call. (See “Line Park
Configuration” on page 231.)
Setting Call Waiting Options
Call waiting options are available only if the Enable Busy Call Handling check box has been checked.
• Enable Single Call Waiting – Sets up single call waiting. This feature gives an alert tone (audio beep) to
indicate that a call is waiting. This feature must be enabled in order to conference incoming calls.
• Enable Multiple Call Waiting – Enables a “personal queue” of multiple calls waiting. This allows the user
to transfer or park the current call before picking up the next call in queue.
• Enable Live Call Handling – This feature is mainly for the system operator. It allows callers to stay in the
personal queue while the extension user is checking voice mail or operating other features. The caller will
hear a ring back tone while in queue. The call will be shown as "ringing" on AltiConsole.
Handling Unanswered Calls
The No Answer Call Handling function provides options for handling calls when no one answers the
extension within a specified number of rings.
Except for Enabling One Number Access, these options are not available to virtual extensions.
To enable these options, check the Enable No Answer Handling check box.
Use the Number of Rings Before Handling scroll box to select a number between 2 and 20 for the times the
telephone rings before the call is handled by the system.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
181
Chapter 15: Extension Configuration
Select one of the following options for no answer call handling:
• Forward to Extension – Select an extension number in the drop-down list. See “10-Hop Limit to Call
Forwarding for Direct Calls” on page 180.
• Forward to Voice Mail
• Forward to AA – Select the auto attendant number to use in the list under the option.
• Forward to Line Park – Use the list to select a Line Park group to route the call to. (See “Line Park
Configuration” on page 231.)
Enabling One Number Access
This check box option is available to all extension types, but with qualifications:
• It is available to physical extensions only when the Forward to Voice Mail option is selected.
• It is not available when Forward to AA, Forward to Extension, or Forward to Line Park is selected.
Configuring One Number Access
One Number Access (ONA) gives the caller an option to find the extension user when the extension is ring no
answer. Caller still has the option to leave a voice mail if the system is unable to find the extension user.
Note:
Options on the tab are disabled unless One Number Access has been enabled as a No Answer option
on the Answering tab of the Extension Configuration window.
Figure 108. Enable One Number Access option on the Answering tab
Also, if the Enable Do Not Disturb option is selected in the Answering tab, the call is forwarded to voice mail
regardless of ONA settings.
To configure ONA, select the extension number from the Agent/Supervisor/Extension list, then click the One
Number Access tab.
182
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring One Number Access
Figure 109. Extension Configuration, One Number Access tab
One Number Access Options
In the One Number Access tab, use the list to select an option for One Number Access:
• Disabled
• Enabled at any time
• Enabled during business hours only
• Enabled during non-business hours
• Enabled based on schedule
If you select this last option, Enabled based on schedule, you can then select and set up to four different time
periods using the From and To time lists.
After choosing any of the enabling options, you set the Verify Caller ID and Forwarding choices, and these
are discussed below.
Note:
You can also enable and set up One Number Access remotely through MaxCommunicator.
Disabling One Number Access
You can disable ONA for the extension by selecting the Disable option. Selecting Disable on this tab does not
destroy the data you might have entered. For example, if you entered a group of Caller IDs to use to identify
the caller, these will be available if you enable one number access at a future time.
Call Screening
When the Enable Call Screening option is checked, callers accessing One Number Access will be prompted
to record a name in order to continue the ONA process. The recorded name is played after the callee (ONA
target) answers the call and optionally enters a correct password. The callee will then hear the caller’s name
and can decide whether or not to accept the call.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
183
Chapter 15: Extension Configuration
Setting Caller ID Verification
You can check the Verify Caller ID based on the following check box and then type in up to 10 phone
numbers in the text boxes. Whenever the system detects a call from one of the numbers entered here during
the selected schedule, the system searches for you by dialing the numbers configured in the Forwarding
Number fields.
Caution!
If ONA is enabled and no numbers are entered for Caller ID Verification, ONA is available to all
callers.
Caller ID verification entries should be complete phone numbers.
Using a Password Verification
You can also enter a random “password” number such as “5555” so that any caller who knows this password
can use ONA to find you, regardless of where they are calling from. Once you’ve set this up, you need to
instruct the caller to dial 1 during your personal greeting, then enter the “password” to use ONA.
Specifying Forwarding Numbers
The Forwarding Numbers are used by the system to find the user when ONA is active. You can set up to four
different numbers. When ONA is active, the system dials the forwarding number(s) in the order they are
displayed on the One Number Access tab. The Forwarding Number order does not correspond to the
Schedule order.
You can forward to another extension, or to an outside number. You can use an outside number only if the
extension is set to allow for Transferred/Conferenced/Forwarded calls on the an Extension Configuration
Restriction tab under Other Call Restrictions.
When you use the outside number option, select a trunk or route access code in the list and type in the phone
number as it would be dialed after keying the access code.
Check the Check Password option to force users to enter their extension password when a call is forwarded
to them via ONA. This ensures that only the owner of the extension can answer the call.
You can set the ONA ring duration from 5 to 45 seconds using the Ring for ... seconds list. Default value is
20 seconds. The system will ring the ONA target within the specified time limit. If the ONA call is not answered
within the ring duration, the system will terminate the ONA call. This option will prevent a cell phone voice mail
from answering the ONA call and recording the ONA announcement phrase into the cell phone voice mail box.
Setting Up Monitor Lists
The Monitor List tab provides for setting up lists of extensions for which call processing events can be monitored by the extension user. Once a monitor list is established, the application logging into the extension can
receive call events for the monitored extensions. The monitor list is available in the MaxCommunicator and
MaxAgent Monitor windows, AltiConsole, and in Line Monitoring events in AltiGen SDK.
Warning! Listening in to or recording a conversation without the consent of one or both parties may be a violation of local, state, and federal privacy laws. It is the responsibility of the users of this feature to
assure they are in compliance with all applicable laws.
Restrictions and Defaults
• Monitoring is effective for physical and virtual extensions; physical and virtual extensions have monitoring
rights, and can be monitored. If you place a physical or virtual extension in a Monitor List, that extension
will show in the client application’s Monitor window.
184
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Up Monitor Lists
• If you add an extension (1001, for example) that belongs to Workgroup A to the Monitor List for a member
of Workgroup B, the Workgroup B member will only be able to pick up personal calls to 1001, not
workgroup calls.
• In MaxSupervisor, the user can monitor only the workgroup(s) he or she logs in to, regardless of the
monitoring rights assigned to his or her extension in MaxAdmin.
Configuring a Monitor List
To set up a monitor list, select the extension number to receive the monitoring rights from the Agent/
Supervisor/Extension list, then click the Monitor List tab.
To block the
extension from
seeing caller
names and
numbers,
check this box
Figure 110. Extension Configuration, Monitor List tab
To block the extension from seeing any Caller Name and Number details on the Monitor tab of MaxAgent and
MaxCommunicator, check the Block Caller Name and Number box.
To add members to the list,
1.
From the Monitor Available list, select the extensions to add to the extension user’s MaxCommunicator
Change Monitor window.
2.
Click Add to move the extensions to the Monitor List.
To remove members,
1.
Select the extensions in the Monitor List.
2.
Click Remove.
Check the Trunk Monitor Enable check box to allow monitoring of the AltiLink Plus trunk events at the
selected extension.
Click the Default button to return the settings to the default – the extension can monitor its own calls.
About Viewing Remote Extension Activity
In order for agents in MaxAgent and MaxCommunicator to see the activity for remote extensions on the
Directory tab, those agents must add the remote extensions to their Monitoring lists.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
185
Chapter 15: Extension Configuration
If they do not add the remote extensions to their Monitoring list, they will still see the remote extensions, but
they will not see any activity for them.
186
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
16
Setting Up IP Extensions
The AltiGen IP phone communicates with the system using SIP protocol to establish the signaling channel and
media channel (the voice steam, using RTP protocol). With SIP implementation, the system establishes a
signaling channel to an IP phone when the IP phone is in use.
Figure 111. Concept of signaling and media channels
The media channel (voice stream) is connected between two IP phones under normal operation. There are
some special situations that require you to configure the IP phone to connect its voice stream to the server.
Please see “Setting an IP Extension” on page 191 for information.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
187
Chapter 16: Setting Up IP Extensions
Figure 112. Signaling and media channel between two IP phones
Signaling Channels
A SIP signaling channel communicates between the system and the IP phone to perform call control, including
call setup, tear down, registration, and phone feature access.
The signaling channel implementation consists of the following elements:
• SIP Virtual Board – Establishes a logical board ID relationship with other types of physical boards in the
system (displayed on Board View window as SIPSP board).
• SIP Signaling Channel – Creates SIP signaling channels for IP Extensions (access through SIPSP
board, Channel Group configuration).
188
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Media Channels
• SIP Extension Channel – Establishes a logical channel relationship with other analog and MobileExt
ports (displayed on the SIPSP board configuration, Channel Mapping List).
• SIP Extension Channel Activation – Associates an extension with a SIP Extension channel when IP
phones register to the system (displayed in the Extension View window).
Media Channels
A media channel is an RTP channel that connects system-to-phone, or phone-to-phone, system-to-system to
carry the digitized voice stream. The codec resource on the VoIP board will be allocated dynamically based on
connection types. If both end devices are IP phones, the media channel can be connected from IP phone to
IP phone using the IP phone’s codec, except when the following is true:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
H.323 tie-trunk is used
SIP trunk is used
Codecs at two end devices are mismatched
Extension has Agent setting checked
Voice recording is enabled at the IP extension
A NAT router exists between MaxCS 7.0 and remote IP phone
SIP supports a direct connection of the voice stream between SIP phones. H.323 tie-trunks still require
the voice stream to connect to the server.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
189
Chapter 16: Setting Up IP Extensions
The media channel implementation consists of the following elements:
•
Configure Codec Profile – Creating a profile for each codec type, jitter buffer, packet length, DTMF tone
delivery, and ring back tone treatment (SIP Early Media).
•
Assign Codec to Device – Configuring codec profile to a single IP address or a range of IP addresses.
•
Monitor Codec Usage – Viewing codec usage status.
190
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting an IP Extension
Setting an IP Extension
To make an extension an IP extension:
1.
In the Extension Configuration General tab, select the extension from the list at the left and check the
Enable IP Extension check box.
2.
Select the address type.
• Using Dynamic IP Address – The system will associate the IP address to the extension when the IP
phone registers automatically, or when the user logs on using #27+Enter from the AltiGen IP phone.
This is the recommended setting.
• Using Static IP Address – You need to enter the IP address for each IP extension. This setting is
recommended only when connecting to third-party SIP devices such as a Multi-Tech MVP VoIP
gateway with FXS ports support. (Refer to “MultiTech Gateway Application Note” in the AltiGen
knowledge base on the AltiGen Partner web site, at https://partner.altigen.com.)
3.
Configure the rest of the IP Extension panel:
• Connect Voice Stream to Server – The IP phone will always connect the media channel to the server
when this box is checked. This box is checked by the system in the following situations:
– The non-workgroup call recording option is checked for this extension.
– This IP extension is a workgroup agent and the workgroup recording is checked.
– You allow a workgroup supervisor to barge-in, listen to, coach, or record this agent's
conversation.
• Home Media Server ID – This configuration is meaningful for a multi-gateway Softswitch system.
When multiple chassis are configured to be a single system, you need to assign IP extensions to the
configuration’s Home Media Server to be able to use its resources for activities such as the following:
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
191
Chapter 16: Setting Up IP Extensions
–
–
–
–
–
–
Access voice mail
Initiate a conference call
Record a conversation
Barge in, listen, and coach by workgroup supervisor
Guidelines:
If the Softswitch and HMCP Media Server are in the same server, the default ID “00” will be
the Home Media Server ID. No change is required.
– If the HMCP Media Server and Softswitch server are separated, you need to assign IP
extensions to the HMCP Media Server ID.
– If you have two or more HMCP Media Servers, you need to assign each IP extension to one
of them, based on resource usage.
• Enable 3rd Party SIP Device – If the extension is a 3rd party SIP phone or other device, check this
box. You must have a license for each 3rd party SIP device.
• SIP Registration Password – Some Polycom IP phones require a SIP Registration password to
register the phone to the MaxCS server. The password should be the same as the password that is
configured in the Polycom IP phone configuration file. This password is used only for phone registration
purposes.
• Enable Fallback to Mobile Extension – When this option is checked, and the IP phone loses its
network connection, it will automatically fall back to a Mobile Extension. The mobile extension channel
must be specified from the list. This feature is only available for an IP Extension with a dynamic IP
address.
Losing network connection can happen in the following cases:
–
–
–
–
–
The user presses #26 to log out from the IP phone
The server loses connectivity to the IP phone
The IP Extension's channel is taken over by another extension
The user exits from an IP Talk session
Once associated with a fallback mobile extension, when the network connectivity is restored,
the fallback mobile extension stays active, and the user must re-register the phone to
reconnect to the server.
Setting VoIP Codec for IP Extension
The system has a pre-configured IP range and codec settings to assist IP phone deployment.
In Enterprise Manager, click the Codec button. In the Codec list, six codec profiles are pre-configured:
• G.711 Mu-Law
• Prefer G.723.1 support G.729
• Prefer G.729 support G.723.1
• G.711 A-Law
• Prefer G.711 Mu-Law support G.711 A-Law
• Prefer G.711 A-Law support G.711 Mu-Law
In Enterprise Manager, click Servers > IP Codecs tab. Three local IP address ranges are pre-configured to
use the G.711 codec profile:
• 192.168.0.0 ~ 192.168.255.255
• 10.0.0.0 ~ 10.255.255.255
192
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting an IP Extension
• 172.16.0.0 ~ 172.31.255.255
When an IP phone registers to an IP extension, the system will check the IP address to determine which codec
to use for the IP phone.
For Local IP Phone Deployment
If your local IP address is not in the pre-configured range, you need to add the local IP address range into the
IP Codec setting. Otherwise the system will use the Default (Prefer G.723.1 support G.729) setting for your IP
extensions.
For Remote IP Phone Deployment
If you do not enter the remote IP phone's IP address into the IP Codec table, the system will use the Default
(Prefer G.723.1 support G.729) setting. You can change the Default to Prefer G.729 support G.723.1, if
desired.
To set up the VoIP codec and define IP address ranges, see “Setting VoIP Codec Profiles” on page 295 and
“Assigning Codec Profiles to IP Addresses” on page 298.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
193
Chapter 16: Setting Up IP Extensions
194
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
17
AltiGen IP Phone Configuration
AltiGen manufactures a series of IP phones. The system administrator can control and program the following
areas for each type of AltiGen IP phone:
• Specify the server IP address that the IP phone needs to register
• Protect the IP phone configuration with a password
• Prevent the user from changing the configuration from the IP phone
• Configure the Trunk Access (Route Access) code
• Configure the time zone and time format
• Specify the TFTP server for firmware updates
• Force the IP phone to reset and download new firmware
• Set SIP transport settings for SIP security
• Enable SIP telephony service for a selected third-party SIP device
• Configure programmable keys
• Allow the IP phone to receive workgroup real time status
• Allow the phone to auto-discover the server’s IP address
Configuring the AltiGen IP Phone
To configure the AltiGen IP phone, select PBX > AltiGen IP Phone Configuration.
This opens the AltiGen IP Phone Configuration window, where, after setting up an IP extension, you can set
parameters for the extension:
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
195
Chapter 17: AltiGen IP Phone Configuration
Figure 113. IP Phone Configuration General tab
The left side of the IP Phone Configuration window displays all the IP phone extensions that have been set up
in the system. The status "Inactive" means the Enable IP Extension box is checked for this extension in the
Extension Configuration window, but there is no IP phone logged in to the extension. The extension may be a
physical extension using an analog phone, a MobileExt, or a virtual extension.
After creating the IP extensions, you can set the parameters on the General tab.
Note:
196
The Apply To button works with the following parameters: General, TFTP Server field (Reset IP
Phone and Boot Download options cannot be applied to multiple extensions), Debug, and Display
Workgroup Status (IP 705, IP 805, and IP 600 phones).
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring the AltiGen IP Phone
IP Phone Parameters
Parameter
Description
Lets you specify the IP address of the MaxCS 7.0 system the IP phone is connected to.
Also see Configuring Auto-Discovery of Server IP Address on page 201. The version of
firmware associated with the IP phone is automatically displayed in the Version field.
To protect the configuration on the IP phone, check the Enable Protection on Menu
check box and assign a numerical password. When the user presses the Menu button on
the IP phone to access the phone configuration menu, the user will need to enter the
assigned password. You can use this check box for two purposes:
General
• If you publish the configuration password to the user, only the phone user would be
able to change the phone configuration.
• If you do not publish the configuration password, you can block the phone user from
changing the phone configuration.
To protect only the E911 Location ID assigned to this phone, check the Enable Protection
on E911 checkbox and enter the password that the user must type on the device in order
the change the E911 configuration. See the chapter Location-Based E911 (for Roaming
Users) on page 273 for instructions on configuration E911 for IP phones.
Default Trunk
Access Code
Lets you set the digit required to enable a user to return an outside call from the Call Log.
The default trunk access code can be the route access code, if it is set in MaxAdmin.
This is for debugging the IP phone using Telnet. You need to enter a Diagnostic password
when logging in to MaxAdmin (before you enter your Admin password) to enable this
configuration.
Debug
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
197
Chapter 17: AltiGen IP Phone Configuration
Parameter
Description
These settings secure the SIP signaling messages and the RTP. SIP signaling is secured
using transport layer security (TLS). RTP or SIP-associated media is secured using the
secure RTP (SRTP) protocol.
• Persistent TLS – Check this setting to have the selected extension communicate using TLS. The TLS protocol allows applications to communicate across a network in a
way designed to prevent eavesdropping, tampering, and message forgery. TLS provides endpoint authentication and communications privacy for VoIP systems using
cryptography.
If either side initiates SIP messaging with an alternate transport like UDP or TCP, these
are supported, as well.
Note: If Persistent TLS is checked for a third-party IP phone, you also need to configure
the phone, itself, for TLS.
If the third-party phone initiates a UDP SIP message, and Persistent TLS is
checked in MaxCS 7.0 , then the SIP connection will fail.
• SRTP – Check this setting to have the selected extension use SRTP. SRTP is a verSIP Transport
sion of RTP that provides confidentiality and message authentication. Since the SRTP
session key is sent in the SIP signaling via SDP, the key can be exposed to eavesdropping. So SRTP needs to co-exist with TLS for the communication to be fully secure.
If SRTP is checked, the voice stream always goes through the server.
If the IP phone is behind NAT, UDP will be used even if TLS and SRTP are checked, since
TLS cannot penetrate NAT.
IP Phone Configuration vs Enterprise Manager configuration:
SIP calls from one AltiGen server to another go through a SIP Tie Trunk. Configuring TLS
for this scenario is done in Enterprise Manager. See “SIP Transport” in the table on page
298.
Extension level policy has priority over the codec profile policy.
If the IP extension supports TLS and the codec profile set in Enterprise Manager does not,
then the IP extension policy holds. That way you can configure a range of IP addresses in
the IP Dialing table or IP Codec screen, and have only a few IP addresses/extensions
support TLS.
If the IP extension does not have TLS configured as its transport, but the codec profile
supports TLS for that extension, then the codec profile policy holds.
• Offset – A per phone-based configuration that allows a remote IP phone to display a
Time Display
different time, based on location. The offset is the time difference, in hours, between
the AltiGen system and the IP phone.
• Format – A per-phone-based configuration that allows the IP phone to display the time
in one of the following formats: 24 hour (example: 13:15), 12 hour AM/PM (example:
1:15 PM), or AM/PM 12 hour (example: PM 1:15).
TFTP
Lets you assign the TFTP server to which the IP phone can connect for updating firmware
when necessary. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server in the Server field.
To reset the phone and download the latest firmware image, check the Reset IP Phone
and Boot Download check boxes. If you only check the Boot Download box, the
firmware will be downloaded when the IP phone reboots (power cycles) next time.
Note: Make sure the TFTP server is running and the new firmware image is loaded to
the correct directory before you reset and download firmware.
This setting is for a remote IP phone with a private address and behind NAT. When
connecting to the AltiGen system, the system will use this information to execute the NAT
traversal for the IP phone. The NAT status and address are read-only fields.
• NAT Status – Indicates if the IP phone is behind a NAT router. Read only.
NAT Setting
• NAT Address – This is the NAT router’s public IP address, as set in the Extension
Configuration window. Read only.
Registry Keep-Alive Duration – Indicates how often a SIP registration message is
sent to the server when the IP phone is behind a NAT router. You need to enter a Diagnostic password when logging in to MaxAdmin (before you enter your Admin password) to enable this configuration. Default setting is 60 seconds.
198
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring the AltiGen IP Phone
Parameter
3rd Party SIP
Device
Description
Enable SIP Telephony Service – Enables SIP hold, SIP transfer, and SIP server-side
conference features for the selected 3rd party IP phone extension.
If the IP phone is SIP-enabled, the Flash key (which includes the Hold button in MaxAgent/
MaxCommunicator) is not supported when you check this setting.
• TOS(Hex) – Type of Service. 8 bits in the IP header are reserved for the service type.
They can be divided into 5 subfields: The 3 precedence bits have a value from 0 to 7
and are used to indicate the importance of a datagram. Default is 0 (higher is better).
Bits 3 4 5 represent the following:
D: requests low delay
Network Setting
T: requests high throughput
R: requests high reliability
• Enable VLAN – If your network administrator has configured VLAN, check this check
box to enable VLAN for the selected phone. Then enter the VLAN ID for the line port
(voice service) and the VLAN ID for the PC port (data service). (Get these IDs from
your network administrator.) See “Virtual LANs” on page 281 for information on VLANs.
Configuring Programmable Keys and Workgroup Status
After setting parameters on the General tab, go to the tab that corresponds to the phone type, and configure
the programmable keys (plus the Display Workgroup Status field on the Alti-IP 600, IP 705, and IP 805
phones). Programmable key settings are described in the next table.
Figure 114. IP Phone Configuration window, IP 710 tab
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
199
Chapter 17: AltiGen IP Phone Configuration
Note:
The Copy From button allows you to copy Programmable Key settings from one IP phone extension
to another. No other settings are carried over.
Parameter
Programmable
Keys
Description
Use the list to assign one of the following functions to the desired keys:
• N/A – When selected, the corresponding programmable key cannot be used.
• BLF (Busy Lamp Field) – When selected, enter an extension number in the field below; this will be associated with the corresponding programmable key to this extension
number; the light in this programmable key indicates that the extension number is
busy or ringing. You can select the Play Beep Tone check box to also have the IP
phone play an audible beep or one of several different ring tones when the extension
number is ringing.
Note: The BLF feature can be assigned only to internal extension numbers, not
outside numbers.
• Feature Code – When selected, enter a MaxCS 7.0 feature code in the field below;
this will be associated with the corresponding programmable key to dial this feature
code.
• Admin Defined # – When selected, this programmable key can be configured by the
Programmable
Keys
administrator only. Enter a valid number 0~9, *, #, or F (Flash) in the field below.
One use for this can be to tag a call with an account code by pressing one button. For
example, entering F#321 in programmable key 1 will cause a connected call to be
tagged with account code 1 (F is for Flash, #32 is the extension feature code, and in
this example, 1 is the account code). Account codes are set up in System Configuration, Account Code tab.
• Line Park – When selected, enter the Line Park line ID in the field below. The user
can press this programmable key to park a call or to retrieve a parked call.
• Call Record – When selected, the user can press this programmable key to start conversation call recording. This only works for extensions with Record on Demand selected in the Extension Configuration window.
• WG Status – (IP710 only) When selected, the user can press this programmable key
to see the real-time workgroup status (callers in queue, longest queue time, number
of callers who have waited longer than the service threshold, and service level).
• User Defined # – (Default) Allows the user to define the programmable key from the
IP phone.
• Headset – (Alti-IP 600, IP 705) When configured from the list for programmable key
10 (Alti-IP 600) or programmable key 5 (IP 705), the IP phone user will be able to activate a third-party headset (certified by AltiGen).
• Flash – (Alti-IP 600) Upon initial installation, the lower left programmable key is set
up as FLASH by default. This key can be re-assigned in MaxAdmin, using the AltiGen
IP Phone Configuration window. No other programmable keys can be configured to
FLASH.
Display
Workgroup
Status
(Alti-IP 600, IP 705, IP 805) When enabled, allows the IP phone to display workgroup
queue status, such as number of queued calls, the current longest queue time, agent
login/logout state by pressing the Down arrow key.
Important: The configuration in MaxAdmin will override the IP phone’s local configuration after the IP phone
is registered. If the IP phone’s local configuration is changed while in Basic mode, these changes
will be overwritten by MaxAdmin settings.
Administrators should perform any updates to the IP phone’s firmware after normal business hours or
when the IP phone is not in use. If the IP phone is in use during an update, not only will the call will be
disconnected, but if the IP phone is powered off by the user during the firmware upgrade, the IP phone
may become unusable.
200
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring Auto-Discovery of Server IP Address
Configuring Auto-Discovery of Server IP Address
You can configure option 120, in your DHCP server with your MaxCS 7.0 IP address, so that the AltiGen IP
phone automatically discovers the MaxCS 7.0 server IP address and only needs to have the extension and
password entered.
Note:
IP phone firmware 2x91 and above is needed for this feature.
In addition to making initial IP phone setup easier, this feature is also helpful when there is a need to migrate
MaxCS 7.0 to a new IP address. The administrator just needs to update the new MaxCS 7.0 IP address in
the DHCP server and then reboot all AltiGen IP phones. The phones will automatically pick up the new MaxCS
7.0 ' IP address.
Warning! In the event that there are two MaxCS 7.0 servers in a same network and all IP phones get their
IP address from a single DHCP server, some IP phones will get the wrong server IP address. You
need to disable the auto-discovery feature for those IP phones that log on to the MaxCS 7.0 server
that is not configured in the DHCP option 120.
Setting Up DHCP Option 120
Different DHCP servers have different ways to set up options. The following example uses Microsoft Windows
DHCP Server to define option 120. Since option 120 is not available by default, you must create it.
1.
Open the DHCP configuration window.
Right-click the server
and select Set
Predefined Options
2.
Right-click the server and select Set Predefined Options.
Click Add
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
201
Chapter 17: AltiGen IP Phone Configuration
3.
Click the Add button.
4.
Enter the following:
Name: AltiGen Server IP Address
Data Type: String
Code: 120
Description: AltiGen Server IP Address
5.
Click OK twice.
6.
Under the DHCP scope you created is a field labeled Scope Options. Right-click Scope Options and
select Configure Options.
Check option 120 and
enter the IP address of
your MAXCS server in
the String value field
7.
Check option 120.
8.
Enter the IP address of your MaxCS 7.0 server in the String value field.
9.
Click Apply and OK. The scope now shows option 120.
202
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring Auto-Discovery of Server IP Address
10. Right-click the scope option 120 and select Activate to activate the scope.
On the AltiGen IP Phone
The IP phone's System menu includes an item called Auto Discovery. The user can select YES or NO for
this menu item. The factory default is YES.
When you Upgrade Firmware
• When you upgrade from firmware that does not support Auto Discovery, Auto Discovery will be disabled
by default.
• When you upgrade from firmware that does support Auto Discovery, the Auto Discovery setting will carry
over.
• When the user erases the IP phone configuration by using **2 [enter] in the IP phone menu, Auto
Discovery will be enabled by default.
Possible scenarios
• During the IP phone’s start-up stage, if Enable DHCP is ON and Auto Discovery is set to YES, the IP
phone configures its IP address from DHCP, and at the same time, it gets the MaxCS 7.0 SERVER address from DHCP option 120. The user is then prompted to set his extension number and password.
• If Enable DHCP is OFF, then the phone’s IP address and the MaxCS 7.0 SERVER address must be set
manually.
• If Enable DHCP is ON and Auto Discovery is NO, the DHCP option 120 value is not sent to the IP phone.
The MaxCS 7.0 SERVER address must be set manually.
• If Enable DHCP is ON and Auto Discovery is YES and DHCP option 120 is set, the IP phone always
gets a new IP address, and DHCP option 120 refreshes the value of MaxCS 7.0 SERVER, even if MaxCS
7.0 SERVER already has a value. The screen pauses for 2 seconds while the IP phone gets the MaxCS
7.0 IP address from DHCP 120.
Disabling Auto-Discovery
To disable auto-discovery on individual AltiGen IP phones, each phone must have its Menu > System > Auto
Discovery menu item set to NO.
To disable auto-discovery on all phones, do not set DHCP option 120, or delete it if you have already set it.
When auto-discovery is disabled, the MaxCS 7.0 SERVER address must be set manually.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
203
Chapter 17: AltiGen IP Phone Configuration
When You Have Two AltiGen Servers in the Same Network
If there are two AltiGen servers in the same network, some IP phones will get the wrong server IP address and
cause log on failure. See the warning in Configuring Auto-Discovery of Server IP Address.
204
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
18
Mobile Extension Configuration
If your company has employees working at home or servicing customers in the field, you can connect their
home phones or cell phones to the AltiGen PBX, providing them with the same productivity features as if they
were working in the office.
AltiGen's ExtensionAnywhere capability allows an extension/agent to be:
• On-premise using voice or data wiring
• Mobile or remote using IP phone, cell phone, or PSTN phone
• An extension of another PBX via adjunct tie trunk or over a PSTN trunk simulated as a mobile extension
port.
MaxCS 7.0 allows up to 1000 mobile extension ports to be configured per system.
When configured, the property of the trunk interface is changed to simulate an extension. A mobile extension
user will gain most of the system routing, call control, voice mail, CTI, and call center features through the
PSTN telephone network.
A mobile extension includes the following capabilities:
• Call control – Transfer, hold, park, call pickup, conference
• Call handling – Single/multiple call waiting and queuing, RNA routing, account codes
• MaxCommunicator, MaxMobile Communicator, and MaxAgent CTI clients
• Conversation recording
• Workgroup agent with login/logout and ready/not-ready
• Pressing ** terminates a call (soft on-hook) and gets a dial tone for the next call. The second * must be
pressed within 1.5 seconds, or the system interprets it as
one *.
• #82 – Dial tone mute
• Supervisor silent monitoring, coaching, and barge-in
The extension can be dynamically logged in using #27 from an internal, mobile, or IP device.
MobileExtSP Board Overview
A simulated physical board (MobileExtSP board) is created when you install the MaxCS 7.0 Softswitch. You
can configure this board with up to 1000 mobile extension ports. It handles all system-wide mobile extensions.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
205
Chapter 18: Mobile Extension Configuration
Figure 115. MobileExtSP board diagram
T1, PRI, analog, and SIP trunks can be shared for regular incoming and outgoing calls and mobile trunk
connections.
A mobile trunk can be assigned a Group ID and mobile extensions can be assigned to the appropriate group.
An analog trunk can be dedicated to one mobile extension user. A PRI trunk and SIP trunk can only be shared
by all mobile extension users.
Configuring the MobileExtSP Board
Note:
For a Softswitch with a multi-gateway system, your Release 6.0 MobileExt configuration files are
stored in the gateway in the following directory: \altiserv\sp\triton. After upgrading to Release 7.0
Update 1, you need to manually move these files to the Softswitch machine’s \altiserv\sp\MobileSP
directory. Then reboot the Softswitch.
To configure the MobileExtSP Board
1.
In the Boards window, double-click the MobileExtSP board. In the Board Configuration window, doubleclick a channel group.
Figure 116. Opening the Mobile Extension Board Configuration dialog box
206
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring the MobileExtSP Board
The Mobile Extension Board Configuration dialog box opens:
2.
Click the Add/Remove button to add mobile trunks.
3.
Add trunks to the Mobile-trunk Member List from the Not Member List by selecting the channels and
clicking the Left Arrow button. You can use the Shift key or Ctrl key to select multiple channels.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
207
Chapter 18: Mobile Extension Configuration
You need to assign a Group ID to the channels. This Mobile Trunk Group ID allows you to differentiate
MobileExt users connecting through different trunk types, like PSTN, SIP, or cell phone gateway. You can
assign a mobile extension to use a specific trunk group. For example, if you assign SIP trunk channels
from 1-3 to Group 001, and mobile extension 237 is assigned to Group 001, then when you make a call
to extension 237, only the SIP Trunk channels from 1-3 can be seized. If all three channels are busy, the
call will fail while other mobile extensions using another mobile trunk group ID may not be impacted.
Mobile extensions are assigned to a group in the ExtensionAnywhere Configuration dialog box (see
Figure 118 on page 210).
Note: If a PRI span is used, only the whole span can be added or removed, not individual PRI channels.
T1 and analog trunks are added or removed individually.
Although a whole PRI span is added, if Mobile Trunk Allocation is selected
as Shared (see (see Figure 118 on page 210)), individual trunks, when idle,
still can be used dynamically by normal PRI trunk traffic or mobile extensions.
4.
On the left side of the Mobile Extension Board Configuration dialog box, configure the fields:
• Max Number of Extensions – If more mobile channel support is required, change this to a larger
number (1000 extensions maximum), and then reboot the system.
• Key Simulation – Check the first check box to allow the mobile phone user to use the * key to simulate
“FLASH”. Check the second check box to allow the user to use ** to disconnect the current call and
then get a dial tone without hanging up the cell phone. The user must press the second * within 1.5
seconds.
• “Transmit Caller ID to MobileExt through PRI” panel. Choose from:
• Send inbound caller ID or extension number
• Send inbound caller ID only
• Replace with following number
• DNIS Access Numbers – If a PRI trunk is used for a mobile extension, a DNIS access number must
be set, so that MaxCS 7.0 can tell if the incoming call is a regular trunk call or a mobile extension offhook request. Click the Add button in this panel to add a DNIS access number. To remove a number,
select it and click the Remove button.
• Mobile Extension Ports table – Displays fields for the channel, target phone number, caller ID, trunk
allocation (shared or dedicated), phrase 1 (Play Phrase After Answered), and phrase 2 (Play Phrase
Before Dial Tone) of each extension port.
• Mobile Trunks table – Displays fields for the board, span, channel, trunk allocation, mobile extension
and status of each mobile trunk.
5.
208
Note the logical ID of the MobileExtSP board. You will need it when you assign an extension to a mobile
port.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring an Extension as a Mobile Extension
6.
When you are finished adding channels as mobile trunks, restart MaxCS 7.0 .
Configuring an Extension as a Mobile Extension
To configure an extension as a mobile extension,
1.
Open the Extension Configuration window.
2.
To assign an extension to a mobile extension port, select a virtual extension and change it to a physical
extension.
Figure 117. Changing a virtual extension to a physical extension and setting the location
3.
By clicking the Next or Prev button in the Location panel, select the Logical Board ID of the MobileExtSP
board and Logical Channel ID for this extension, then click Apply.
The new location is displayed in the Agent/Supervisor/Extension list.
4.
Click the Line Properties button to configure the mobile PSTN number and other options for the mobile
extension. The ExtensionAnywhere Configuration – MobileExtSP dialog box opens. (Alternatively,
from the Mobile Extension Board Configuration dialog box you can double-click the mobile extension port
to open the ExtensionAnywhere Configuration.)
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
209
Chapter 18: Mobile Extension Configuration
For a mobile phone using
MaxMobile Communicator, clear
all the Phrase check boxes.
Figure 118. ExtensionAnywhere Configuration – MobileExtSP dialog box
• Name Enter the name of the person using the mobile phone.
• Target Phone Number – Enter the number of the mobile phone. This is used when MaxCS 7.0 makes
a call through PSTN to the mobile phone. Do not include the trunk access code.
• Caller ID – Enter the phone number of the mobile phone. This is for incoming caller ID verification.
MaxCS 7.0 uses it to determine whether a call is from a mobile extension. If the caller ID is matched,
the mobile extension user will hear a dial tone from the system, the same as an internal extension user
hears when the phone is off-hooked.
It's also used to find a mobile channel in the MaxMobile Communicator application, and it is used in the
MaxMobile Communicator login.
Note: When a MaxMobile user logs in to the MaxCS system, the assigned extension number, extension
password and cell phone number are used as identification. First, MaxCS 7.0 checks the
extension number and extension, then it uses the cell phone number to search the mobile channel
table. If MaxCS 7.0 finds one channel's Caller ID is the same as the cell phone number, it will
assign this channel to the extension number. The extension is allowed to log in as a mobile
extension. If no channel is found, the login fails.
• Mobile Trunk Allocation – Select either Shared or Dedicated.
Shared – When selected, this mobile extension will share mobile trunk ports with other mobile
extension users. You need to assign a mobile trunk Group ID to this extension. The system will
dynamically allocate a mobile trunk port within this Group ID when the system calls out to this
mobile extension number.
When the mobile extension user calls into the system, any mobile trunk port can answer the call,
verify caller ID, and play a dial tone to the mobile extension user.
Dedicated – Only analog trunks can be dedicated mobile trunks. When selected, you need to assign a mobile trunk port to this mobile extension. You have the option to disable caller ID verification
if a mobile trunk port is dedicated to this mobile extension. The mobile extension user will hear a
210
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring an Extension as a Mobile Extension
dial tone when calling into this specific trunk port. Use the Browse button (…) to select the desired
mobile trunk.
Figure 119. Mobile Trunks dialog box
• In the Phrase panel, you have three options: You can select either Press Any Key To Answer Call
or Play Phrase After Answered. And you can select Play Phrase Before Dial Tone. You can use the
Apply button to apply selections in this panel to other mobile extensions.
Note:
Note: For mobile extensions running MaxMobile Communicator, you should clear all three check
boxes in the Phrase panel.
– Press Any Key To Answer Call – When a call is answered by this mobile extension user, the
system will play the following phrase for the mobile extension user: “To accept this call, please
press any digit.” The user must press any key within 3 seconds to connect the call; otherwise,
it will time out and the call will be treated as an agent/extension RNA and will be routed
according to its workgroup/extension setting.
– If there is a network error or a mobile extension trunk is not available, RNA handling is applied
to the caller. Therefore, it is suggested that you don’t check the Set RNA Agent Logout option
for the group that contains the mobile extension as an agent (Workgroup Configuration, Call
Handling tab).
– Play Phrase After Answered – The system will play the given phrase when the mobile
extension user answers the call from the system. The default phrase (9037) is a special tone
to signal the mobile extension user that this call can be put on hold, parked, transferred,
conferenced.
– Play Phrase Before Dial Tone – The system will play the default phrase 9037 (a special tone)
and then the dial tone when the mobile extension user calls into the system through a
configured DNIS Access Number.
Additional Configuration for MaxMobile Communicator
For mobile phones running MaxMobile, do the following:
• If MaxCS 7.0 is behind NAT, configure the NAT router to forward TCP port 10080 and 10081 to MaxCS
7.0 's private IP address, so the data access from a 3G network can reach this server.
• Open firewall ports TCP 10080 and 10081 for both virtual public IP address and private IP address.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
211
Chapter 18: Mobile Extension Configuration
• Assign an AltiGen MaxMobile license to the extension. To do this, from the MaxAdmin main menu, select
License > Client SEAT License Management. In the Client SEAT License Management dialog box,
select MaxMobile in the License Types column, and add the appropriate extension to the Members list.
• When using a SIP trunk as MaxMobile trunk, the Early Media option must be enabled for the SIP trunk.
Voice Mail for Mobile Extensions
When the mobile extension phone is turned off or busy, messages can go to the extension’s voice mail in MaxCS 7.0 or to the mobile phone’s voice mail:
• To send a call to the mobile extension’s voice mail in MaxCS 7.0 , check the Press any key to answer
call check box. If the mobile phone is running MaxMobile Communicator, this check box should never be
checked.
• To send a call to the mobile phone’s voice mail, the Press any key to answer call check box must be
unchecked.
Mobile Extension Limitations
• Only PRI mobile trunks can deliver Caller ID information to the mobile extension.
• A mobile extension cannot support Centrex transfer.
• After adjusting the number of mobile extension ports in a mobile extension board, MaxCS 7.0 must be
restarted for the changes to take effect.
• Cannot deliver caller name to the mobile extension.
• Does not support Message Waiting Indicator on the mobile extension device. (Use Message Notification
as a work-around).
• Since the DTMF key * is used for simulating the FLASH signal, there is no way to send * to the system.
• The RNA for mobile extension may not be accurate, because the system ring count may not be in sync
with the mobile extension device ring count.
• When placing calls to mobile extensions that are cell phones, if the cell phone is out of signal range, the
caller may hear long periods of silence. You can check the Press any key to answer call option to
prevent this problem.
• Only analog trunks can be allocated as dedicated mobile trunks.
212
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
19
Hunt Group Configuration
The hunt group is a simple call distribution application for operator, call coverage group, integration with a fax
server, or a user with multiple extensions connecting to different devices. When adding a member to a hunt
group, the following rules apply:
• No agent seat license required
• Any extension can be added to a hunt group
• Each hunt group can have up to 128 members
• An extension can belong to multiple hunt groups
Although a hunt group has call queuing capability, it lacks the following functions:
• Does not generate real-time queue and agent status for the hunt group
• Does not have a real-time counter to track hunt group activities for reporting purposes
• Does not have logout reason code tracking capability
• Does not have recording capability
• Does not have service level threshold setting
• Does not have queue overflow and quick queue option
• Limited call distribution capability
• No supervisor application to manage agents and calls in queue
• No client application for agents to perform login/logout
The Huntgroup Configuration window provides for creating hunt groups, setting their attributes, and assigning
group members. To open the Huntgroup Configuration window, select PBX > Huntgroup Configuration.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
213
Chapter 19: Hunt Group Configuration
Figure 120. Huntgroup Configuration window
Overview of Huntgroup Configuration Window
These are the tabs in the Huntgroup Configuration window:
• General – Add or delete a hunt group, assign a group name, password, and DID number
• Group Member – Add or remove members from huntgroups
• Mail Management – Capacity and feature options for hunt group mailboxes
• Notification – Preferences and options for voice mail notification
• Call Handling –Call forwarding, call waiting, and call handling preferences and options
• Queue Management – Options for setting default or custom phrases used as queue announcements
Apply to Button
The Huntgroup Configuration window often allows you to apply changes to a particular hunt group or to select
many huntgroups to which to apply the changes.
The Apply to button is disabled unless there is a change that can be applied to multiple hunt groups, and when
you use it to apply changes to multiple hunt groups, it works on only those changed attributes that can be
applied.
214
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Up Huntgroups
Setting Up Huntgroups
Set up new huntgroups in the Huntgroup Configuration window.
To add a hunt group,
1.
Click the Add button under the Group List.
2.
Type in a group number for the hunt group.
3.
Check the Global group check box if you want the group to be visible to other systems within the VoIP
domain. See the sectionEnterprise VoIP Network Management for more information.
4.
Click OK.
Establishing Basic Hunt Group Attributes
After you create a hunt group, you can set basic attributes in the Huntgroup Configuration, General tab:
To set Hunt Group information, enter the following information:
• First Name and Last Name – Each with a maximum of 32 characters.
• Password – The default is the system default password set on the Number Plan tab of the System
Configuration window.
A valid password cannot be the same as its hunt group number and must be 4 - 8 digits (numbers or letters
A - Z) in length. Basic password patterns, such as repeated digits (1111), consecutive digit strings (1234),
or digits that match the extension (Ext. 101 using 1012, 9101, 10101, etc.) are not recommended. The
letters map to numbers (on a phone, for example) as follows:
Numbers
Letters
Numbers
Letters
2
A, B, C, a, b, c
6
M, N, O, m, n, o
3
D, E, F, d, e, f
7
P, Q, R, S, p, q, r, s
4
G, H, I, g, h, i
8
T, U, V, t, u, v
5
J, K, L, j, k, l
9
W, X, Y, Z, w, x, y, z
• DID Number – Each hunt group can be assigned a DID number. This number does not have a fixed
length, but the length must be long enough (range 2 - 16) for the system to match the DID incoming call.
• Enable Dial-By-Name Service – Check this box to allow callers to search the list by employee name for
this hunt group extension.
• Description – Describe the purpose of this hunt group.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
215
Chapter 19: Hunt Group Configuration
Setting Call Restrictions
The call restriction rules on the General tab apply to users making outbound calls from within voice mail and
several hunt group settings. These settings do not impact the call restriction settings configured for the hunt
group member's extension in Extension Configuration.
• Allow Calls to be Transferred or Conferenced to an Outside Number – When checked, the internal
extension user can log into this hunt group voice mail, make a call to a second party, then transfer or
conference to a third party.
• Allow User to Configure Forwarding, Notification, and Reminder Call to an Outside Number – This
setting regulates hunt group call forwarding, voice mail notification, and reminder call configuration. If this
setting is not checked, you will see a warning message pop up when trying to set up forwarding to an
outside number. International calls are not allowed if the fourth option is not checked.
• Allow Outside Caller to Make or Return Calls from within Group's VM System – When checked, an
outside caller can dial into the system, log in to hunt group voice mail, and make or return calls from the
group's voice mail (Zoomerang feature). International calls are not allowed if the fourth option is not
checked.
• Allow Outside Caller to Make or Forward International Calls from within the Group's VM system –
This setting regulates making international calls from voice mail and forwarding to an international
number.
Important: Allowing any of these options may increase the potential for toll fraud. Make sure the password
is properly configured to prevent an intruder from using this voice mail box to make an outbound
call. AltiGen recommends that you leave the fourth option unchecked for all huntgroups at all
times.
Establishing Hunt Group Membership
There are two ways to assign extensions to huntgroups.
• In the Huntgroup Configuration window select a group, then click the Group Member tab. Here you can
add extensions (group members) to the selected hunt group.
• In the Extension Configuration window select an extension, then click the Group tab. Here you can assign
a hunt group to the selected extension (and you can see what other huntgroups the extension is a member
of). For this second method, see “Adding or Removing Group Assignments” on page 169.
The order in which you add extensions to a hunt group may affect the call distribution sequence. See “Setting
Call Handling Options” on page 222 for more information. To adjust the order, select the extension you would
like to adjust and use the Up or Down button to change the order.
When you add an extension to a hunt group, the extension is in the "Logout" state. The hunt group member
must manually log in using feature code #54.
Adding Extensions to a Hunt Group
1.
In the Huntgroup Configuration window, select the hunt group number in the Group List. The hunt group
number appears in the window title bar.
2.
Click the Group Member tab.
216
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Hunt Group Mail Management
Figure 121. Huntgroup Configuration, Group Member tab
3.
Select the extension number(s) in the Not Member list. Use Ctrl+click or Shift+click to select several
extensions.
4.
Click Add to move them to the Member list.
Note: If the hunt group pilot extension is configured to Ring All Available Members, the maximum number
of members is 20. See “Setting Call Handling Options for details.
Removing Extensions from a Hunt Group:
1.
Click the extension number(s) in the Member list.
2.
Click Remove to move them to the Not Member list.
Setting Login Status for System Restart
Whenever the system is restarted, the administrator can use the list at the bottom of the Group Member tab to:
•
Keep Login Status – All group members retain their original login status for that group prior to restart
(default setting).
•
All Login – All group members are automatically logged into the assigned group after the system is
restarted.
•
All Logout – All group members are logged out of the group when the system is restarted.
Setting Hunt Group Mail Management
The Mail Management settings define how voice messages are handled for a hunt group, including how
messages are announced and processed, and how much capacity is allotted to message storage.
To work with mail management settings, click the Mail Management tab, and select the hunt group number
you want to work with from the Group List.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
217
Chapter 19: Hunt Group Configuration
Figure 122. Huntgroup Configuration, Mail Management tab
Note:
You can use the Apply to option to apply mailbox settings to one, some, or all huntgroups.
Disabling a Mailbox
When you disable a mailbox, the normal greeting is played but callers cannot leave messages.
Setting E-mail Options
On the Mail Management tab, you can set the e-mail options for the hunt group:
• E-mail Name – The hunt group’s e-mail name without the @domain. The default e-mail name is ext<hunt
group number>, that is, the letters “ext” followed by the hunt group number. For example, the default email name for hunt group 500 would be ext500.
• Retrieve Voice Mail by E-mail Client – When selected, this sends voice mail to the user’s e-mail as an
attachment. Deselected, voice mail is retrieved as voice mail.
• Enable Mail Forwarding – When selected, the hunt group’s e-mail will be forwarded to the e-mail address
you specify in the Forward E-mail Address box. The address should be a full address, including the domain (for example,
jsmith@thecompany.com).
If you enable mail forwarding, you also specify what you want done with the original messages after they
have been forwarded. In the list you can choose to:
• Delete Messages after Forward
• Keep the Messages as New
• Keep Messages as Saved
218
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Message Notification Options
Setting Mailbox Playback Options
You can use the following check boxes to turn on or off options for listening to playback of recorded messages.
These options apply to both new messages and saved messages, and they can be applied to multiple
huntgroups using Apply to:
Parameter
Description
Announce Message
Sender Before Playback
Selected, the user hears the name of the message sender
(internal sender only) before listening to recorded AltiGen
Voice Mail System messages.
Announce Time Stamp
Before Playback
Selected, the user hears the timestamp (time and date) of
each message before playback.
Confirm Callback Number
Selected, system confirms the accuracy of the caller’s
number.
Enable Distinctive Call
Waiting Tone
Selected, the user hears three different call waiting tone
cadences to distinguish between internal, external, and
operator calls (see “Distinctive Ring” on page 28).
Play the Newest Voice
Message First
Selected, new voice mail will be retrieved first. When not
selected, the system will play voice mail based on FIFO (first
in, first out).
Setting Mailbox Capacities
You can set various mailbox capacities with the following options, and you can apply the settings to multiple
hunt groups using Apply to:
Parameter
Description
Max Number of
Messages
Maximum number of messages stored in the hunt group’s
mailbox. The range is 1 – 999, defaulting to 100.
Mailbox Size
Mailbox size in MBs of stored messages. The range is 1–500
MB, with a default of 50.
Max Message Length
Maximum length of voice messages in minutes. The range is 1–
30 minutes, with a default of 5 minutes.
Retention Length of
Saved Messages
Number of days saved messages are archived by the system.
The range is 1–90 days, with a default of 60.
Setting Message Notification Options
To set notification options on new incoming e-mail and voice messages, click the Notification tab in the
Huntgroup Configuration window, and select the hunt group number from the Group List.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
219
Chapter 19: Hunt Group Configuration
Figure 123. Huntgroup Configuration, Notification tab
Individual users can also configure Message Notification within the AltiGen Voice Mail System.
Note:
You can use the Apply to option to apply mailbox settings to one, some, or all huntgroups. See “Apply
to Button” on page 214 for more information on using Apply to.
Setting the Message Types for Notification
Select the types of messages for which the hunt group user will be notified:
• None – When selected, the user is not notified with a call regarding newly received messages. Selecting
this option does not prevent the user from getting message waiting indicators or stutter dial tone when new
messages are received.
• Urgent Voice Messages Only
• All Voice Messages
Please note that the system will start notification as soon as it enters non-business hours under the following
conditions:
• Extension is set to notify Urgent Voice Message Only
• Notification is set to Non-Business Hours
• Voice mail is received during business hours and is marked urgent
• Extension user does not check the urgent message
Setting the Type of Notification
There are four options for sending the notification or reminder message: phone, pager, extension or custom
application (Custom App).
• Extension – To use the Extension option, select the Extension radio button, then type the extension
number into the text box.
220
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Message Notification Options
• Phone/Pager – For the Phone and Pager options, first specify the trunk or route access code using the
list next to the Extension radio button. The Any option means to locate any available trunk. Then type in
the number with all relevant dialing prefixes other than the trunk code, using a maximum of 63 digits.
• Custom App – When used in conjunction with a third-party notification application, the Custom App
feature enables an extension to connect to an application that can receive the notification event; use the
list to choose the log-on extension to which the third-party application is connected. Contact your local
AltiGen Partner for more information on using this feature.
Note: The Reminder Call will not work with this selection.
Note also the following considerations:
• For the Pager option, the system calls the specified pager number and then dials the system main number
(as set in System Configuration, General tab), which is then displayed on the user’s pager.
For the operator-assisted paging function, the operator phone number and the pager number must be
entered in the <phone number>*<pager number> format. For example, if the phone number to call the
pager operator is 7654321 and the pager number to page the user is 12345678, the notification outcall
number that needs to be entered is 7654321*12345678. When the pager operator answers the Message
Notification call, MAXCS announces the pager number and the System Main Number (as configured
on the General tab of System Configuration), which will be displayed on the user’s pager. The operator
is also given the option to repeat these numbers by pressing ‘#’.
Outcall to Cellular or PCS Phone Numbers
When an outcall is made by the system (for One Number Access, Message Notification, Zoomerang, Call Forwarding, and so on) to a cellular or PCS phone, it may ring the phone once but not necessarily present the call
and make a connection. This will happen if the ringback tone played by the cellular service provider does not
conform to standard ringback tones. To work around this problem, append a few commas (,) to the outcall (cellular) number when entering it. Each comma provides a one second pause.
Setting Notification Timing
When notification is configured to an outside phone number, the system will announce, "This is the outcall
notification message for…" after call connection. However, there are situations when the system may not be
able to receive an answer supervision signal from the carrier. If the system plays the announcement phrase
before the notification call is answered, the phrase will be cut off. The following two options can be configured
based on answer supervision capability:
• Seconds after Dialing – If the carrier of the outside phone number cannot provide an answer supervision
signal, check this option and set a delay time. (Default 5 seconds, maximum 30 seconds.)
Note: If the delay is set too long, the notified party will hear silence before the announcement is played.
• Seconds after Answered – This field is set to 0 seconds and it is not configurable for notification to a
phone number. It means the system will play the announcement immediately after answer supervision is
received.
When notification is configured to a pager, the system will transmit DTMF digits as the return phone number
(the System Main Number as set in the System Configuration General tab) after call connection. However,
there are situations when the system may not be able to receive an answer supervision signal from the pager
system. If the system sends digits before the call is connected, some digits will be cut off. The following two
options can be configured based on answer supervision capability:
• Seconds after Dialing – If the pager carrier cannot provide an answer supervision signal, check this
option and set a delay time. (Default 5 seconds, maximum 30 seconds.)
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
221
Chapter 19: Hunt Group Configuration
• Seconds after Answered – If the answer supervision signal is provided by the carrier, check this option
and set the delay timer to 2 to 5 seconds. In some cases, the pager carrier cannot detect DTMF right after
the call connection. (Default is 10 seconds, maximum is 30.)
Note: You may need to try a different delay setting to make sure the user return number is transmitted
properly after configuration.
Setting Notification Business Hours
You can choose one of three options for when the extension user is to be notified of new messages:
• Non-Business Hours – Notify only during non-business hours. Business hours are set in System
Configuration, Business Hours tab (see “Setting Business Hours” on page 33).
• From/To – Notify during a specified time of day. Select the hours in the From and To time scroll boxes.
• Any Time – Notify at all times (every day).
Setting Call Handling Options
Call Handling options include handling busy calls, forwarding, handling no-answers, call distribution, and
other options.
You can use the Apply to button to apply call handling settings to one, some, or all huntgroups. See “Apply to
Button” on page 214 for more information on using Apply to.
To work with hunt group call handling options, click the Call Handling tab in the Huntgroup Configuration
window, and select the hunt group number from the Group List.
Figure 124. Huntgroup Configuration, Call Handling tab
222
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Call Handling Options
Handling Busy Calls
You have several options for handling calls while the agents in a hunt group are busy. If you do not enable
busy call handling, the caller simply hears a busy signal.
To enable the options, check the Enable Busy Call Handling check box, then select from the following
forwarding options:
• Group Queue – The caller will stay in the hunt group queue waiting for any agent to become available. If
there is no agent logged in at this moment, the system will use Group Logout Handling to handle this call.
• Group Voice Mail – The caller will be forwarded to the hunt group voice mail box when all agents are busy
• AA – Forward caller to an auto attendant.
• Extension – Forward caller to an extension.
• Group – Forward caller to another group.
• Line Park – Forward caller to a Line Park group.
Forwarding All Calls
When you do not want the hunt group to handle any calls, check the Enable Forward To option in the Forward
All Calls section of the Call Handling tab, and select an option.
The forwarding options are as follows:
• To Voice Mail
• To an Extension – Select an extension number in the drop-down list.
• To AA – Select the AA to use in the list under the option.
• To a Group – Select a group from the list.
• To the Operator
• To an Outside Number – This option is available if it is allowed in the Other Call Restrictions option in
the Restriction tab, as discussed in “Setting Other Call Restrictions” on page 178. Also, see “Outcall to
Cellular or PCS Phone Numbers” on page 221.
• If you choose Outside Number, select a trunk or route access code to use in the small list on the left, and
type in the full prefix and phone number.
• To an App Ext – When used in conjunction with a third-party notification application, the App Ext feature
enables an extension to connect to an application that can receive the notification event; use the list to
choose the log-on extension to which the third-party application is connected. Contact your local AltiGen
Partner for more information on using this feature.
• To Line Park – If configured, select a Line Park group from the list.
Handling Unanswered Calls
The Enable No Answer Handling configuration provides options for handling calls when the system rings the
first available agent and the call is not answered. If all agents in the hunt group are rung and no one answers
the call, the system will use the Group RNA/Logout Handling rule. Enable No Answer Handling is not
available if Intra Group Call Distribution is set to Ring All Available Members.
To configure this option, check the Enable No Answer Handling box.
Select one of the following forwarding options for no answer call handling:
• Next Group Member – Ring the next available agent until all available agents are rung. If all agents are
busy, caller will stay in the hunt group queue.
• Extension – Take the call out of the hunt group and forward it to an extension.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
223
Chapter 19: Hunt Group Configuration
• Group – Take the call out of hunt group and forward it to another group.
• Group Voice Mail – Transfer the caller to the hunt group voice mail when the first available agent does
not answer the call.
• Member Voice Mail – Transfer the caller to the first available agent's voice mail if this agent does not
answer the call.
• AA – Take the call out of the hunt group and forward it to an auto attendant.
• Line Park – Take the call out of the hunt group and forward it to a Line Park group.
If you select Ring All Available Members in the Intra Group Call Distribution section, then specify the Number
of Rings before Handling, using the scroll box beside that option. The number of rings is the total number of
times agents are rung before the call is handled by the Group RNA/Logout Handling configuration
Setting a Hunt Group’s Call Distribution Rule
The Call Handling tab in the Huntgroup Configuration window lets you set the distribution of normal inbound
calls to group members, using one of the following three options:
• Ring First Available Member – First available extension in a hunt group. For example, if there are three
member extensions in a hunt group, the call is always sent to the first member configured in the hunt
group. If this member is busy, the call goes to the second member configured and so forth.
• Ring Next Available Member – A round-robin method that attempts to evenly distribute calls among the
group members. This method sends the call to the next member configured in a hunt group (regardless
of whether the previous member is busy or not). In other words, if the previous call was sent to #3 in the
group, the present call is sent to #4, if #4 is not busy.
• Ring All Available Members – All extensions in a hunt group.
Note: When this option is enabled, a single hunt group can have no more than 20 members.
In addition, calls to the hunt group with this option enabled have higher priority than other hunt group
calls. Therefore, if an agent belongs to multiple huntgroups, one of which has this option enabled, a call
to that hunt group will be distributed before others, regardless of its Wait Time in the queue.
In addition, if you check the Enable Single Call Handling for Agent check box, the system will not send calls
to an agent who puts a call on hold. If this option is not checked, the system will distribute calls to the agent
even if the agent has a call on hold. In other words, this configuration determines if an agent can get multiple
hunt group calls or not.
Handling Calls when Group Members Are RNA/Logged Out
You can set calls to forward to a specified destination when all group members either do not answer the call
(RNA) or are logged out. To do so, in the Group RNA/Logout Handling section of the Call Handling tab,
check the Enable Forward to check box, and select a destination from the list. The forwarding options are the
same as for “Forwarding All Calls” on page 223.
Setting Queue Management Options
In the Queue Management tab of Huntgroup Configuration, you can specify which greetings and updates to
use and you can set the update interval. For each hunt group you can either use the system default audio
peripheral configuration or you can set up a custom configuration.
224
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Queue Management Options
Figure 125. Huntgroup Configuration, Queue Management tab
The default audio peripheral setup is discussed in “Audio Peripheral Configuration” on page 44. Setting a custom configuration in the Queue Management tab involves selecting other available phrases from the lists. Depending on how long the caller is in the queue, the caller will hear phrases 1-5, in order, after which phrase 5
will be repeated. For information about creating custom phrases, see the section Auto Attendant Configuration.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
225
Chapter 19: Hunt Group Configuration
226
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
20
Paging Group Configuration
The IP paging group is a group of IP phones that can receive station paging. This feature also can be used as
IP zone paging by creating multiple paging groups.
Note:
This feature is not supported by the MaxCS Private Cloud service.
Implementation details:
• The paging signal uses AltiGen's proprietary H.323-ATPS protocol. You need to have H.323 tie-trunk
channels to be able to implement IP paging.
• Each paging session requires one G.711 codec channel. The voice stream is multicast to multiple IP
phones on the LAN.
• Any extension (analog or IP) can initiate a paging call by dialing #46 + the Paging Group number.
• When paged, an IP phone in idle state will automatically turn on the speaker, play a beep, and then play
the page.
• When receiving an incoming call during a paging session, the IP phone will automatically stop the paging
session and start ringing.
• The IP phone user can terminate a paging session by pressing the Release key on the phone.
• IP phones in DND mode will not be paged.
Some considerations:
• If an IP phone in a different network segment needs to be in a paging group, you need to configure
intermediate routers to pass through the IP multicast packets.
• IP paging to remote IP phones over WAN is not supported.
To configure paging, select PBX > Paging Group Configuration.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
227
Chapter 20: Paging Group Configuration
Figure 126. Paging Group Configuration window
Setting Up a Paging Group
1.
In the Paging Group configuration window, below the Group List, click the Add button.
2.
Enter a number for the paging group.
3.
Check the Global Group check box if you want this group to be visible to other gateways. Click OK.
4.
In the Group Information field, type in the following:
•
First Name and Last Name of the paging group, each with a maximum of 32 characters.
•
Password for the paging group. The default is the system password set on the Number Plan tab of the
System Configuration window.
•
Description for the paging group.
Adding Members to a Paging Group
1.
On the Group Member tab of the Paging Group Configuration window, select the desired extension(s) in
the Not Member list. Use Shift+click or Ctrl+click to select several extensions from the list.
2.
Click the Add button to move them to the Member list.
228
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Removing Members from a Paging Group
Figure 127. Paging Group Configuration, Group Member tab
When a member is added, its default state is Login. Paging group members can use #54 to perform group
login or #56 to log off. If a member is logged off, then it will not receive group paging.
Removing Members from a Paging Group
1.
On the Group Member tab of the Paging Group Configuration window, click the extensions that you want
to remove in the Member list.
2.
Click the Remove button to move them to the Not Member List.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
229
Chapter 20: Paging Group Configuration
230
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
21
Line Park Configuration
The Line Park feature is a kind of call park method. The main differences between Line Park and system call
park are the following:
• A Line Park ID can be assigned to a specific IP phone's programmable key; the system call park cannot.
• Line Park IDs can be grouped as a Line Park Group for call routing purposes; the system call park ID is
assigned by the system automatically.
The Line Park feature can be used for the following applications:
• Inbound call line appearance during business hours
• Operator parks a call for a group of IP phone users
• Executive/assistance call coverage
• Night hours call coverage
• Overflow new workgroup calls to a Line Park Group when the queue length or queue time is too long.
Implementation notes
• A total of 99 (01 to 99) line IDs can be grouped into different Line Park Groups. The default "System" group
cannot be removed.
• One Line Park ID can belong to only one group.
• A Line Park Group can be assigned to:
• Trunk In-Call Routing
• Extension/Workgroup Busy or RNA Handling
• Extension/Workgroup Forwarding
• Workgroup Quit Queue Option
• Extensions can be assigned as members of Line Park Groups, allowing the extension users to see and
pick up a parked call from those groups in the LinePark tab of their MaxCommunicator or MaxAgent.
• The system will put the caller in queue when calls exceed the total lines assigned to the Line Park Group.
• The park line is released when the call disconnects, is answered, or is forwarded due to time out.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
231
Chapter 21: Line Park Configuration
Configuring Line Park
To configure line park, select PBX > Line Park Configuration.
Figure 128. Line Park Configuration window
Setting Up a Line Park Group
1.
In the Line Park Configuration window, click the Add button below the Groups list.
2.
Enter a name in the dialog box, and click OK.
3.
Select line ID numbers from the Non-Member List and click the Add button to add them to the Member
List.
4.
To assign extensions to a group, select the group, and then click the Configuration button below the
Member Extensions panel.
232
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring Line Park
The name of the
selected group appears
here
Figure 129. Configuring a Line Park group’s member extensions
5.
Select members for this Line Park group from the Non-Members list, and click the Add button to move
them to the Members list.
Members of a Line Park group can use their MaxCommunicator or MaxAgent applications to see and pick
up calls parked for this group.
Any extension can park a call to any group. Any extension can pick up a call from any group using #51
followed by the line park location, if allowed by MaxAdmin configuration.
6.
Configure the following Line Park options:
Park by System:
• Play greeting phrase to caller when parked – Select this option to have the system play the greeting
phrase you select from the box, before playing music on hold. Specify whether to play the greeting once
only, or every x seconds.
• Play ring back tone to caller when parked – Select this option when you want the caller to hear a
ring back tone if the call has not been answered by any extension or voice mail. If the call is answered
and parked, the caller will hear a greeting phrase and on-hold music.
• Enable Timeout – When you check this box, a line park call will time out after the number of seconds
set in the value box. Use the Timeout forward to boxes to route the call to an AA, voice mail, or an
extension/group.
Park by Extension User:
• Play greeting phrase to caller when parked – Select this option to have the system play the greeting
phrase you select from the box, before playing music on hold. Specify whether to play the greeting once
only, or every x seconds.
• Enable Timeout – Check this box to specify, in seconds, when a line park call will time out. Use the
Timeout option boxes to forward the call to the extension that parked the call, alert the extension that
parked the call, or forward the call to an AA, voice mail, or an extension/group.
• Disable ring tone on IP phone when parked by extension – Check this box to prevent a line-parked
call from ringing again while it is parked.
Note:
The IP phone's programmable key will be blinking when a call is parked at a line ID that is configured
to the phone.
If the associated programmable key has Play Tone function turned on and a ring tone is configured,
at the IP phone (in idle state) the user will hear a ring tone when a call is parked.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
233
Chapter 21: Line Park Configuration
•
Allow #51 to pick up – when this check box is checked, it allows a user to pick up parked calls from a
phone set using #51, followed by the Park Line ID.
Deleting a Line Park Group
1.
In the Line Park Configuration window, select a Line Park Group from the Groups list.
2.
Click the Delete button below the Groups list.
234
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
22
Workgroup Configuration
The workgroup is an automatic call distribution (ACD) feature designed to enhance customer service operations with queuing, distribution, agent management, real-time status, and call logging capability. You can configure up to 64 groups, including workgroups, hunt groups, and paging groups.
When adding members to a workgroup, the following rules apply:
• Concurrent login agent seat license is required.
• One agent login to multiple workgroups requires only one license.
• Each workgroup can have up to 512 members configured.
• A maximum of 256 agents can log in to a workgroup at the same time.
• Per system, a maximum of 256 agent seat licenses can be registered.
• Per system, including all workgroups, a maximum of 1,280 logged-in agents are allowed. (Example: 128
agent seats registered in the system. 256 agents are configured in 10 workgroups but only 128 can be
logged in at the same time. Each agent belongs to 10 workgroups. The system has reached the 1,280
logged-in agents limit.)
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
235
Chapter 22: Workgroup Configuration
Creating and Configuring Workgroups
To open the Workgroup Configuration window, select Call Center > Workgroup Configuration.
Figure 130. Workgroup Configuration window, General tab
Overview of Workgroup Configuration Window
These are the tabs in the Workgroup Configuration window:
• General – Create workgroup pilot numbers, group descriptions, service level threshold and call recording
options.
• Group Member – Add or remove members from workgroups
• Business Hours – Set business hours for workgroups
• Skill Based Routing – Define skill levels and skill-based routing rules.
• Mail Management – Set capacity and features options for extension mailboxes.
• Notification – Set preferences and options for voice mail notifications.
• Call Handling – Set call forwarding, call waiting, and call handling preferences and options.
• Queue Management – Set queue phrases, overflow routing, queue announcements and queue quit
option.
Apply to Button
The Workgroup Configuration window often allows you to apply changes to a particular workgroup or to select
many workgroups to which to apply the changes.
Clicking the Apply to button opens a list of all workgroups to which the change can apply. All workgroups are
selected by default. You then de-select the ones you don’t want, or de-select all and then select the ones you
want. Note that you cannot use the mouse to drag over and select multiple items; you must use the Shift and
Ctrl keys.
The Apply to button is disabled unless there is a change that can be applied to multiple workgroups, and when
you use it to apply changes to multiple workgroups, it works on only those changed attributes that can be
applied.
236
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Up Workgroups
Setting Up Workgroups
Set up new workgroups in the Workgroup Configuration window.
To create a workgroup,
1.
Click the Add button under the Group List.
2.
Type in a group number for the workgroup.
3.
Check the Global group check box if you want the group to be visible to other gateways. Click OK.
Establishing Basic Workgroup Attributes
After you create a workgroup, you can set basic attributes on the Workgroup Configuration General tab.
• First Name and Last Name – Each with a maximum of 32 characters.
• Password – The default is the system default password set on the Number Plan tab of the System
Configuration window.
A valid password cannot be the same as its workgroup number and must be 4 - 8 digits (numbers or letters
A - Z) in length. Basic password patterns, such as repeated digits (1111), consecutive digit strings (1234),
or digits that match the extension (Ext. 101 using 1012, 9101, 10101, etc.) are not recommended. The
letters map to numbers (on a phone, for example) as follows:
Numbers
Letters
Numbers
Letters
2
A, B, C, a, b, c
6
M, N, O, m, n, o
3
D, E, F, d, e, f
7
P, Q, R, S, p, q, r, s
4
G, H, I, g, h, i
8
T, U, V, t, u, v
5
J, K, L, j, k, l
9
W, X, Y, Z, w, x, y, z
• DID Number – Each workgroup can be assigned a DID number. This number does not have a fixed
length, but the length must be long enough (range 2 - 16) for the system to match the DID incoming call.
• Enable Dial-By-Name Service – Check this box to allow callers to search the list by employee name for
this workgroup extension.
• Description – Describe the purpose of this workgroup.
Setting Call Restrictions
The call restriction rules on the General tab apply to users making outbound calls from within voice mail and
several workgroup settings. These settings do not impact the call restriction settings configured for the
workgroup member's extension in Extension Configuration.
• Allow Calls to be Transferred or Conferenced to an Outside Number – When checked, the internal
extension user can log into this workgroup voice mail, make a call to a second party, then transfer or
conference to a third party.
• Allow User to Configure Forwarding, Notification, and Reminder Call to an Outside Number – This
setting regulates workgroup call forwarding, voice mail notification, and reminder call configuration. If this
setting is not checked, you will see a warning message pop up when trying to set up forwarding to an outside number. International calls are not allowed if the fourth option is not checked.
• Allow Outside Caller to Make or Return Calls from within Group's VM System – When checked, an
outside caller can dial into the system, log in to workgroup voice mail, and make or return calls from the
group's voice mail (Zoomerang feature). International calls are not allowed if the fourth option is not
checked.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
237
Chapter 22: Workgroup Configuration
• Allow Outside Caller to Make or Forward International Calls from within the Group's VM system –
This setting regulates making international calls from voice mail and forwarding to an international
number.
Caution!
Allowing any of these options may increase the potential for toll fraud. Make sure the password is
properly configured to prevent an intruder from using this voice mail box to make an outbound call.
AltiGen recommends that you leave the fourth option unchecked for all workgroups at all times.
Service Level Threshold
The Service Level Threshold scroll box allows you to select the length of time in seconds that a call can be
in queue before the call is logged in workgroup performance statistics as having exceeded the allowable
service level limits. You can set the value to any number between 1 - 1200 seconds.
Service level is a service quality index which calculates the percentage of calls serviced within a defined
threshold for the defined period of time. The term "serviced" may not necessarily mean answered. You can
define the calculation method based on your operation requirements. The service level percentage is calculated from midnight 00:00 a.m. and is reset daily. The calculated number will be output to the MaxAgent and MaxSupervisor applications.
The Service Level Calculations Options button opens the following dialog box.
Figure 131. Service Level Calculation dialog box
In the Method Options section, select one of the following:
• TSL (Total Call Service Level) – The service level calculation is: TSL% = Total WG inbound calls within
SLT / Total WG inbound calls. This is the default option.
• ASL (Answered Service Level) – The service level calculation is: ASL% = Total WG inbound calls
answered within SLT / Total WG inbound calls.
• Customize – Use the check boxes to enable at least one of the following three options:
– Answered Calls within Service Level
– Abandoned Calls within Service Level
– Overflowed/Redirected Calls within Service level
divided by at least one of the following three options:
– Total Answered Calls
– Total Abandoned Calls
– Total Overflowed/Redirected Calls
238
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Up Workgroups
Workgroup Recording Options
The system administrator can specify the following workgroup call recording options for a workgroup:
Warning! Listening in to or recording a conversation without the consent of one or both parties may be a violation of local, state and federal privacy laws. It is the responsibility of the users of this feature to
assure they are in compliance with all applicable laws.
• Disable – No call recording.
• Auto record to central location – Records all workgroup inbound and outbound calls, which are saved
to a central location (defined in Recording Configuration on the System menu – see page 83); this option
requires that either a shared Concurrent Recording Session license is available or that a Dedicated
Recording Seat license is assigned to each workgroup member (configured in Extension Configuration).
• Record on demand to central location – Records calls on demand, which are saved to a central location
(defined in Recording Configuration on the System menu – see page 83); this option requires that either
a shared Concurrent Recording Session license is available or that a dedicated Recording Seat license is
assigned to each workgroup member (configured in Extension Configuration).
• Record on demand to extension VM – Records calls on demand, which are saved to the agent’s
voicemail box.
Note: When retrieving voice mail as an e-mail, if the voice mail file has a recorded file attached, the
recorded file is not forwarded in the e-mail.
• Insert Recording Tone – Plays a recording beep to alert the parties that the conversation is being recorded, then plays a periodic recording alert tone. The tone is recorded together with the conversation.
• Record X out of 10 calls – If recording to a central location, automatically records incoming and outgoing
workgroup calls, as specified. (The default is to record all workgroup calls.)
To see this option, click the Agent Recording Management button.
You can change these values
For each agent you can change the option Record N out of 10 calls. For example, if you set to record 4
out of 10 calls, the 1st-4th and 11th-14th, and so on, will be recorded. Using this example, in the following
table the shaded calls will be recorded:
To change Record N out of 10 calls for an agent, click the cell you want to change, and make a selection
from the list. Click Apply. When finished, click OK.
• Centralized Recording – You can also enable or disable centralized recording from the Agent
Management Recording window shown above. Click the cell you want to change, and make a selection
from the list. Click Apply. When finished, click OK.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
239
Chapter 22: Workgroup Configuration
Notes:
• The recording session starts when the call enters the connected state and ends when hang up or flash
is pressed, or when the call is transferred.
• The recording setting at Extension Configuration applies only to non-workgroup calls. The recording
setting at Workgroup Configuration applies only to workgroup calls. To allow an agent to record all
calls (non-workgroup and workgroup), both recording settings must be enabled.
• When an agent logs in to a workgroup, which is also an outbound workgroup, all outbound calls will be
considered as workgroup calls and recorded according to workgroup configuration.
• When an agent logs in to a workgroup and is in Not Ready, DND, Wrap-up, or Inter-call Delay state,
outbound calls will be recorded if workgroup recording is configured.
• When an agent does not log in to the workgroup that is configured as an outbound workgroup, all
outbound calls are non-workgroup calls.
Establishing Workgroup Membership
Add agent extensions to a workgroup on the Group Member tab in the Workgroup Configuration window.
Figure 132. Workgroup Configuration, Group Member tab
To add extension(s) to a workgroup,
1.
Select the workgroup in the Group List.
2.
On the Group Member tab, click the extension number(s) in the Not Member list. Use Shift+click and
Ctrl+click to select several extensions.
3.
Click the Add button between the columns to move them to the Member list.
Note: If the workgroup pilot extension is configured to Ring All Available Members, the maximum number
of members is 20. See “Setting Call Handling Options” on page 251 for details.
By default, a newly added member has the Skill Level set to 1.
4.
240
To change the Skill Level designation for a member, double-click the member in the Member List. The
Skill Level dialog box opens. (Skill Levels are defined in “About Skill Based Routing” on page 243.)
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Business Hours
Figure 133. Skill Level dialog box
5.
Click the desired Skill Level Index, then click OK.
Agents who are members of more than one workgroup can have a different skill level assigned in each group.
To remove extension(s) from a workgroup,
1.
Click the extension number(s) in the Member list.
2.
Click Remove to move them to the Not Member list.
Log In/Out a Group Member
An administrator can log in or log out a group member, by selecting the member in the Member List and clicking
the Login Now or Logout Now button.
Setting Login Status for System Restart
Whenever the system is restarted, the administrator can use the list at the bottom of the Group Member tab to:
• Keep Login Status – All group members retain their original login status for that group prior to restart
(default setting)
• All Login – All group members are automatically logged into the assigned group after the system is
restarted.
• All Logout – All group members are logged out of the workgroup when the system is restarted.
Setting Business Hours
Settings on the Business Hours tab in the Workgroup Configuration window define how after-hours calls are
handled for workgroups. An administrator can assign a Business Hours profile to a group, and also configure
after-hours handling for each day of the week.
To set after-hours call handling, select the workgroup you want to work with from the Group List in the
Workgroup Configuration window, then click the Business Hours tab.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
241
Chapter 22: Workgroup Configuration
Figure 134. Workgroup Configuration, Business Hours tab
Set the business schedule parameters as follows:
Parameter
Business Hour
Description
Use the list to select a Business Hours profile to apply to the
workgroup (profiles are configured in the System Configuration
window - see “Setting Business Hours” on page 33).
• For each day of the week, select a Forward To option for call
handling after hours or for non-workdays:
• To Voice Mail
• To AA – Select the auto attendant to use in the list under the
option. AAs are configured in the AA Configuration window,
available from the System menu.
• To an Extension – Select an extension from the list.
After Hours/NonWorkday Handling
• To a Group – Select a group from the list.
• To the Operator
• To an Outside Number – If you choose Outside Number,
select a trunk or route access code to use in the small list on the
left, and type in the full prefix and phone number.
• To an App Ext – When used in conjunction with a third party
notification application, the App Ext feature enables an
extension to connect to an application that can receive the
notification event; use the list to choose the log- on extension to
which the third party application is connected. Contact your
local AltiGen Partner for more information on using this feature.
Logout All Agents At
242
For each day of the week, you can select up to three time periods
for the system to automatically log out agents.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
About Skill Based Routing
About Skill Based Routing
If you want to set up skill-based routing, you can more closely match a customer’s call to an agent who has
the skills needed to handle that customer’s issue. Skill-based routing can increase customer issue resolution
on the first call, lower the abandoned call rate, and in turn increase customer satisfaction.
The Skill Based Routing tab in the Workgroup Configuration window lets you define up to nine different levels
of skill needed to handle the variety of a workgroup’s calls.
Skill
definitions
Agents who
are
assigned to
the
selected
skill number
Figure 135. Workgroup Configuration, Skill Based Routing tab
Skill number 1 could define the most basic skill and level 9 the most advanced, or vice versa. Or the skill
numbers can be used in any other way that works for the way your company does business.
After skill numbers have been defined on this tab, each agent in the workgroup should be assigned a skill
number, according to that agent’s knowledge and ability, on the Group Member tab.
Incoming calls can be set to ring agents according to skill number, thus more closely directing the caller to an
available agent qualified enough to help the caller, but ideally not over-qualified. You can determine the skill
required by the caller and set the SKLR number in several places:
• The auto attendant, depending on the caller’s responses (see “Configuring Menu Items” on page 68)
• The DNIS number the caller dialed, depending on how you have set up your DNIS numbers (see “Defining
DNIS Routing” on page 146)
• The caller ID (see “Defining Caller ID Routing” on page 144 )
• The Advanced Call Router – You can define SKLR in each rule entry in the Call Router, and if the Call
Router routes a call, SKLR will be set.
• In the SDK – A call's SKLR can be set in some modules, and now, we just support APC interface, that is
if a call is connected to an App Ext, this App Ext can set or change the call's SKLR
You can set rules on the Skill Based Routing tab to allow all calls coming into a workgroup to be handled by
agents with a lower skill number or a higher skill number than is set for a call. And you can set time-based rules
that alter the call’s SKLR to allow either less able agents or over-qualified agents to handle a call so that the
caller does not have to wait for an excessive period of time.
Note:
For the settings configured on the Skill Based Routing tab to take effect, you must select the SkillBased Routing option on the Call Handling tab of the Workgroup Configuration window (see “Setting
IntraGroup Call Distribution” on page 253).
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
243
Chapter 22: Workgroup Configuration
Defining Skills for a Workgroup
1.
Select a workgroup in the Group List.
2.
Double-click a skill number in the Skill Definition list, or select a skill number and click the Edit button.
3.
In the Skill Level Name dialog box, enter the skill name in the Description field, then click OK.
Figure 136. Skill Level Name dialog box
The description appears in the Skill Definition list for that skill number.
Setting Rules for Skill Based Routing
The Skill Coverage Rule on the Skill Based Routing tab establishes the pool of agents who can handle a
particular workgroup call, based on the SKLR setting for that call. The group may comprise:
• Only agents assigned that skill number
• Agents with a given skill number and lower
• Agents with a given skill number and higher
This setting must be configured.
To further help ensure that a workgroup is handling calls in a timely manner, you can specify how many
seconds a caller can be in queue before opening the call to agents with the next skill number up or the next
skill number down, in successive steps.
To set skill-based routing rules,
1.
In the Workgroup Configuration window, Skill Based Routing tab, select the workgroup for which you
want to set the rules.
2.
Select an Agent’s Coverage Rule
• Exact Match SKLR of Incoming Call
Only agents whose skill number matches the SKLR of the incoming call can answer the call. For example, if you have three callers with SKLR equal to 2 in the workgroup queue, and all agents with skill
level 2 are busy, and there are agents with skill level 1 and 3 who are idle, the system will keep the
callers in queue waiting for an agent with skill level 2 to be available.
• Equal or Lower than SKLR of Incoming Call
Any agent whose skill number is equal to or lower than the SKLR of the incoming call may handle this
call. Agents with the lowest skill number are rung first. With this option, that would be agents whose
skill number is 1. Set the SKLR (see About Skill Based Routing) as if you were setting a ceiling on the
resources you are willing to use for this type of call. For example, you can set a regular call's SKLR to
1 and a preferred customer's SKLR to 3. Calls from preferred customers can be answered by agents
with skill level 3, 2, and 1 while regular calls can only be answered by agents with skill level 1.
• Equal or Higher than SKLR of Incoming Call
Any agent whose skill number is equal to or higher than the SKLR of the incoming call may handle this
call. Agents with the lowest skill number are rung first. With this option, that would be agents whose
skill number matches the SKLR. Set the SKLR (see “About Skill Based Routing” on page 243) as if you
were setting a minimum skill level requirement for the call. For example, say a technical support group
244
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
About Skill Based Routing
has agents with skill level 1 (beginner), 2 (intermediate), and 3 (expert). If you select the "Equal or
Higher" option, calls with SKLR 2 will be queued for an agent with skill level 2 or 3.
3.
To increase coverage of calls, check the Enable SKLR Expansion check box. (This check box is
available if you selected the Equal or Lower option or the Equal or Higher option.)
4.
For each level, specify the number of seconds a call can be in queue before the system will include the
next level of agents in the pool of agents who may handle the call. Either use the Up/Down arrows or type
in a number from 1-999.
Skill Based Routing Examples
Example 1: Coverage rule is Equal or Lower and Enable SKLR Escalation is checked.
The above configuration means:
1.
When a caller with SKLR 1 is waiting in queue for 30 seconds, the caller's SKLR will be escalated to 2.
Agents with skill levels 1 and 2 are able to handle the call.
2.
If the caller stays in queue for more than 60 seconds, the caller's SKLR will be escalated to 3. Agents with
skill levels 1, 2, and 3 are able to handle the call.
3.
If the caller stays in queue for more than 90 seconds, the caller's SKLR will be escalated to 9 because all
other escalation wait times are set to 0 seconds. The call will be distributed any idle agent in the workgroup.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
245
Chapter 22: Workgroup Configuration
Example 2: Coverage rule is Equal or Higher and Enable SKLR Escalation is checked.
The above configuration means:
1.
When a caller with SKLR 9 waiting is in queue for 30 seconds, the caller's SKLR will be changed to 8.
Agents with skill level 8 and 9 are able to handle the call.
2.
If the caller stays in queue for more than 60 seconds, the caller's SKLR will be changed to 7. Agents with
skill level 7, 8, and 9 are able to handle the call.
3.
If the caller stays in queue for more than 90 seconds, the caller's SKLR will be escalated to 1 because all
other escalation wait times are set to 0 seconds. The call will be distributed to any idle agent in the workgroup.
Setting Workgroup Mail Management
The Mail Management settings define how voice messages are handled for a workgroup, including how
messages are announced and processed, and how much capacity is allotted to message storage.
To work with mail management settings, click the Mail Management tab, and select the workgroup number
you want to work with from the Group List.
246
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Workgroup Mail Management
Figure 137. Workgroup Configuration, Mail Management tab
Note:
You can use the Apply to option to apply mailbox settings to one, some, or all workgroup.
Disabling a Mailbox
When you disable a mailbox, the normal greeting is played but callers cannot leave messages.
Setting E-mail Options
On the Mail Management tab, you can set the e-mail options for the workgroup:
• E-mail Name – The workgroup’s e-mail name without the @domain. The default e-mail name is
ext<workgroup number>, that is, the letters “ext” followed by the workgroup number. For example, the
default e-mail name for workgroup 500 would be ext500.
• Retrieve Voice Mail by E-mail Client – When selected, this sends voice mail to the user extension as an
e-mail attachment. Deselected, voice mail is retrieved as voice mail.
• Enable Mail Forwarding – When selected, the workgroup’s e-mail will be forwarded to the e-mail address
you specify in the Forward E-mail Address box. The address should be a full address, including the domain (for example, jsmith@thecompany.com).
If you enable mail forwarding, you also specify what you want done with the original messages after they
have been forwarded. In the list you can choose to:
• Delete Messages after Forward
• Keep the Messages as New
• Keep Messages as Saved
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
247
Chapter 22: Workgroup Configuration
Setting Mailbox Playback Options
You can use the following check boxes to turn on or off options for listening to playback of recorded messages.
These options apply to both new messages and saved messages, and they can be applied to multiple
workgroups using Apply to:
Parameter
Description
Announce Message
Sender Before Playback
Selected, the user hears the name of the message sender (internal
sender only) before listening to recorded AltiGen Voice Mail System
messages.
Announce Time Stamp
Before Playback
Selected, the user hears the timestamp (time and date) of each
message before playback.
Confirm Callback Number
Selected, system confirms the accuracy of the caller’s number.
Enable Distinctive Call
Waiting Tone
Selected, the user hears three different call waiting tone cadences
to distinguish between internal, external, and operator calls (see
“Distinctive Ring” on page 28).
Play the Newest Voice
Message First
Selected, new voice mail will be retrieved first. When not selected,
the system will play voice mail based on FIFO (first in, first out).
Setting Mailbox Capacities
You can set various mailbox capacities with the following options, and you can apply the settings to multiple
workgroups using Apply to:
Parameter
Description
Max Number of
Messages
Maximum number of messages stored in the workgroup’s mailbox.
The range is 1 - 999, defaulting to 100.
Mailbox Size
Mailbox size in MBs of stored messages. The range is 1–500 MB,
with a default of 50.
Max Message Length
Maximum length of voice messages in minutes. The range is 1–30
minutes, with a default of 5 minutes.
Retention Length of
Saved
Number of days saved messages are archived by the system. The
range is 1–90 days, with a default of 60.
Press Zero Option
This option allows a caller to press “0” while listening to this workgroup’s greeting. When the caller presses “0,”
the call will forward to the specified destination. Use the list to specify a forwarding destination for the call:
Voice Mail, AA, Extension, Group, Operator (default), Outside Number, or Line Park.
If you choose to forward to an Outside Number, select a trunk or route access code to use in the small list on
the left, and type in the full prefix and phone number.
Voice Mail Access Option
To allow agents of a workgroup to access the group’s voice mail in MaxAgent (MaxAgent’s WG VM tab), select
the group and check Enable agents to access voice mailbox of workgroup.
248
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Message Notification Options
Setting Message Notification Options
To set notification options on new incoming e-mail and voice messages, click the Notification tab in the
Workgroup Configuration window, and select the workgroup number from the Group List.
Figure 138. Workgroup Configuration, Notification tab
Individual users can also configure Message Notification within the AltiGen Voice Mail System.
Note:
You can use the Apply to option to apply mailbox settings to one, some, or all workgroups.
Setting the Message Types for Notification
Select the types of messages for which the workgroup user will be notified:
• None – When selected, the user is not notified with a call regarding newly received messages. Selecting
this option does not prevent the user from getting message waiting indicators or stutter dial tone when new
messages are received.
• Urgent Voice Messages Only
• All Voice Messages
Please note that the system will start notification as soon as it enters non-business hours under the following
conditions:
• Extension is set to notify Urgent Voice Message Only
• Notification is set to Non-Business Hours
• Voice mail is received during business hours and is marked urgent
• Extension user does not check the urgent message
Setting the Type of Notification
There are several options for sending the notification or reminder message: phone, pager, extension or
custom application (Custom App).
• Extension – To use the Extension option, select the Extension radio button, then type the extension
number into the text box.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
249
Chapter 22: Workgroup Configuration
• Phone/Pager – For the Phone and Pager options, first specify the trunk or route access code using the
list next to the Phone radio button. The Any option means to locate any available trunk. Then type in the
number with all relevant dialing prefixes other than the trunk code, using a maximum of 63 digits.
• Custom App – When used in conjunction with a third-party notification application, the Custom App
feature enables an extension to connect to an application that can receive the notification event; use the
list to choose the log-on extension to which the third-party application is connected. Contact your local
AltiGen Partner for more information on using this feature.
Note: The Reminder Call will not work with this selection.
Note also the following considerations:
• For the Pager option, the system calls the specified pager number and then dials the system main number
(as set in System Configuration, General tab), which is then displayed on the user’s pager.
For the operator-assisted paging function, the operator phone number and the pager number must be entered in the <phone number>*<pager number> format. For example, if the phone number to call the pager operator is 7654321 and the pager number to page the user is 12345678, the notification outcall number that needs to be entered is 7654321*12345678. When the pager operator answers the Message Notification call, MaxCS 7.0 announces the pager number and the System Main Number (as configured
on the General tab of System Configuration), which will be displayed on the user’s pager. The operator
is also given the option to repeat these numbers by pressing ‘#’.
Outcall to Cellular or PCS Phone Numbers
When an outcall is made by the system (for One Number Access, Message Notification, Zoomerang, Call Forwarding, and so on) to a cellular or PCS phone, it may ring the phone once but not necessarily present the call
and make a connection. This will happen if the ringback tone played by the cellular service provider does not
conform to standard ringback tones. To work around this problem, append a few commas (,) to the outcall (cellular) number when entering it. Each comma provides a one second pause.
Setting Notification Timing
When notification is configured to an outside phone number, the system will announce, "This is the outcall
notification message for…" after call connection. However, there are situations when the system may not be
able to receive an answer supervision signal from the carrier. If the system plays the announcement phrase
before the notification call is answered, the phrase will be cut off. The following two options can be configured
based on answer supervision capability:
• Seconds after Dialing – If the carrier of the outside phone number cannot provide an answer supervision
signal, check this option and set a delay time. (Default 5 seconds, maximum 30 seconds.)
Note: If the delay is set too long, the notified party will hear silence before the announcement is played.
• Seconds after Answered – This field is set to 0 seconds and it is not configurable for notification to a
phone number. It means the system will play the announcement immediately after answer supervision is
received.
When notification is configured to a pager, the system will transmit DTMF digits as the return phone number
(the System Main Number as set in the System Configuration General tab) after call connection. However,
there are situations when the system may not be able to receive an answer supervision signal from the pager
system. If the system sends digits before the call is connected, some digits will be cut off. The following two
options can be configured based on answer supervision capability:
• Seconds after Dialing – If the pager carrier cannot provide an answer supervision signal, check this
option and set a delay time. (Default 5 seconds, maximum 30 seconds.)
• Seconds after Answered – If the answer supervision signal is provided by the carrier, check this option
and set the delay timer to 2 to 5 seconds. In some cases, the pager carrier cannot detect DTMF right after
the call connection. (Default is 10 seconds, maximum is 30.)
250
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Call Handling Options
Note: You may need to try a different delay setting to make sure the user return number is transmitted
properly after configuration.
Setting Notification Business Hours
You can choose one of three options for when the extension user is to be notified of new messages:
• Non-Business Hours – Notify only during non-business hours. Business hours are set in System
Configuration, Business Hours tab (see “Setting Business Hours” on page 33).
• From/To – Notify during a specified time of day. Select the hours in the From and To time scroll boxes.
• Any Time – Notify at all times (every day).
Setting Call Handling Options
Call Handling options include forwarding, handling busy calls, handling no-answers and other options.
You can use the Apply to option to apply call restriction settings to one, some, or all workgroups.
To work with workgroup call handling options, click the Call Handling tab in the Workgroup Configuration
window, and select the workgroup number from the Group List.
Figure 139. Workgroup Configuration, Call Handling tab
Handling Busy Calls
You have several options for handling calls when the workgroup extension is busy. If you do not enable busy
call handling, the caller simply hears a busy signal.
To enable the options, select the Enable Busy Call Handling check box, then select from the following
forwarding options:
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
251
Chapter 22: Workgroup Configuration
• Group Queue – The caller will stay in the workgroup queue waiting for any agent to become available. If
there is no agent logged in at this moment, the system will use Group Logout Handling to handle this call.
• Group Voice Mail
• AA – Forward caller to an auto attendant.
• Extension – Forward caller to an extension.
• Group – Forward caller to another group.
• Line Park – Forward caller to a Line Park group.
Forwarding All Calls
When you do not want the workgroup to handle any calls, check the Enable Forward To option in the Forward
All Calls section of the Call Handling tab, and select an option.
The forwarding options are as follows:
• To Voice Mail
• To an Extension – Select an extension number in the drop-down list.
• To AA – Select the AA to use in the list below the option.
• To a Group – Select a group from the list.
• To the Operator
• To an Outside Number – This option is available if it is allowed in the Other Call Restrictions option in
the Restriction tab, as discussed in “Setting Other Call Restrictions” on page 178. Also, see “Outcall to
Cellular or PCS Phone Numbers” on page 250.
If you choose Outside Number, select a trunk or route access code to use in the small list on the left,
and type in the full prefix and phone number.
• To an App Ext – When used in conjunction with a third-party notification application, the App Ext feature
enables an extension to connect to an application that can receive the notification event; use the list to
choose the log-on extension to which the third-party application is connected. Contact your local AltiGen
Partner for more information on using this feature.
• To Line Park – If configured, select a Line Park group from the list.
Handling Unanswered Calls
The Enable No Answer Handling configuration provides options for handling calls when the system rings the
first available agent and the call is not answered. If all agents in the workgroup are rung and no one answers
the call, the system will use the Group RNA/Logout Handling rule. Enable No Answer Handling is not
available if Intra Group Call Distribution is set to Ring All Available Members.
To configure this option, check the Enable No Answer Handling box.
Select one of the following forwarding options for no answer call handling:
• Next Group Member – Ring the next available agent until all available agents are rung. If all agents are
busy, caller will stay in the workgroup queue.
• Extension – Take the call out of the workgroup and forward it to an extension.
• Group – Take the call out of workgroup and forward it to another group.
• Group Voice Mail – Transfer the caller to the workgroup voice mail when the first available agent does
not answer the call.
• Member Voice Mail – Transfer the caller to the first available agent's voice mail if this agent does not
answer the call.
252
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Call Handling Options
• AA – Take the call out of the workgroup and forward it to an auto attendant.
• Line Park – Take the call out of the workgroup and forward it to a Line Park group.
Set RNA Agent Auto Logout Check Box
Select this option to have the system automatically log out an agent extension from a workgroup if RNA is
encountered.
Set RNA Agent Not Ready Check Box
Select this option to have the system automatically set an agent’s extension in a workgroup to not ready if RNA
is encountered.
Number of Rings Before Handling
If you select Ring All Available Members in the Intra Group Call Distribution section, then specify the Number
of Rings before Handling, using the scroll box beside that option. The number of rings is the total number of
times agents are rung before the call is handled by the Group RNA/Logout Handling configuration
Setting IntraGroup Call Distribution
The IntraGroup Call Distribution options let you set the handling of normal inbound calls: how to route the
incoming call to a workgroup agent, using one of the following options:
• Ring First Available Member – First available extension in a workgroup. For example, if there are three
member extensions in a workgroup, the call is always sent to the first member configured in the
workgroup. If this member is busy, the call goes to the second member configured and so forth.
• Ring Next Available Member – Around-robin method that attempts to evenly distribute calls among the
group members. This method sends the call to the next member configured in a workgroup (regardless of
whether the previous member is busy or not). In other words, if the previous call was sent to #3 in the
group, the present call is sent to #4, if #4 is not busy.
• Ring All Available Members – All extensions in a workgroup.
Note: When this option is enabled, a single workgroup can have no more than 20 members.
In addition, calls to the workgroup with this option enabled have higher priority than other workgroup
calls. Therefore, if an agent belongs to multiple workgroups, one of which has this option enabled, a call
to that workgroup will be processed first, regardless of Wait Time of calls in other workgroups which are
not set to Ring All.
If members are using IP extensions, the system will not use the IP codec channel during ringing all IP
phones. Only one codec will be used when a member of a workgroup answers the call.
• Ring Longest Idle Member – The agent who has the longest idle time, defined as follows:
• The agent needs to be in login state
• Idle time is calculated from the end of the last wrap-up event.
• If the agent does not have wrap-up time configured, the idle time is calculated from the end of last busy
state.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
253
Chapter 22: Workgroup Configuration
• Ring Average Longest Idle Member – The agent who averages being off the phone the longest:
• Average Idle Time = (Total Login Time – Total Talk Time) / Total Calls Handled
• Total Login Time = Cumulative WG login time since midnight
• Total Talk Time = Cumulative WG Inbound + Outbound call duration since midnight
• Total Calls Handled = Total number of WG calls (Inbound + Outbound) handled by the agent since
midnight
If a new agent logs into a WG that has been operating for several hours, this agent will have the highest
priority to take the call.
If multiple agents log into a WG that has been operating for several hours, the one with the longest idle
time since login will have the highest priority to take the call.
• Ring Fewest Answered Calls – The agent who has answered the fewest number of calls.
• Ring Shortest Average Talk Time – The agent who averages the shortest talk time.
Note: Average talk time is calculated as follows:
Average Talk Time (ATT) = Total Inbound Talk Time / Total Inbound Calls
Answered
The agent calculated with the lowest value for ATT is rung first.
• Skill-Based Routing – The call will be routed according to the SKLR setting and skill-based routing rules
set up on the Skill Based Routing tab in the Workgroup Configuration window (see “About Skill Based
Routing” on page 243). When Skill-Based Routing is selected, the agent with longest idle time will be
selected to take the call when multiple agents with the same skill level are idle.
Enable Single Call Handling for Agents
Check this check box to enable single call handling for workgroup agents.
Note:
If single call handling is enabled and the agent has one or more calls on hold, MaxCS 7.0 will not
distribute the call to this agent. If single call handling is disabled, MaxCS 7.0 will distribute calls to this
agent even when one or more calls are put on hold by this agent.
Handling Calls when Group Members Are RNA/Logged Out
You can set calls to forward to a specified destination when all group members either do not answer the call
(RNA) or are logged out. To do so, in the Group RNA/Logout Handling section of the Call Handling tab,
check the Enable Forward to check box, and select a destination from the list.
The forwarding options are described in “Forwarding All Calls” on page 252. An additional option,
Group Queue, forwards incoming workgroup calls to the workgroup call queue. With this setting, when agents
log back in, they can begin accepting the queued calls
Announce Agent Info
Check this check box to have the system announce the agent’s directory name before an incoming workgroup
call is transferred to an agent from the queue.
Inter Workgroup Call Distribution
In the case where an agent belongs to multiple workgroups and there are queued calls in two or more of these
workgroups, as soon as the agent becomes available, the queued call that will be distributed to this agent is
determined by the Inter Workgroup Call Distribution setting.
254
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Queue Management – Basic
This field is used to calculate the score of each call in a workgroup’s queue. Depending on the call’s assigned
priority and the skill of the agent that is available, the score will determine which workgroup’s call gets
answered first. The call with the highest score is answered first. Use the up/down arrows to increase or
decrease the weight values for Priority and Skill values.
The first box is the weight for agent skill in a workgroup. The second box is the weight for priority of a queued
call. The score is calculated as (10 – skill level) x weight for agent skill + (10 – queued call priority) x weight for
call priority. When determining which call should be dispatched to an idle agent who is assigned to multiple
workgroups, the system will consider the following factors:
• Caller's priority
• Agent's skill level
• Caller's SKLR
• Caller's wait time in queue
Configuration Guidelines:
• Assuming an agent is assigned with different skill levels for different workgroups, and call priority is the
same for all calls, you can increase the skill weight to 9 and reduce the priority weight to 1 to better match
an agent's skill.
• Assuming each call is assigned with a priority based on certain customer attributes, and an agent's skill is
the same for all workgroups, you can increase the priority weight to 9 and lower the skill weight to 1 to
have a call with higher priority answered first.
• Assuming all calls' priority is the same and agent's skill level is the same for all workgroups, you can use
this scoring system to prioritize workgroups. For example, assign priority weight 9 to the most important
group, 5 to the second most important group, and 1 to the least important group. Calls in the group with
higher priority weight will be dispatched first.
• When there are callers with the same score in different workgroups, the queue time will be used as a tie
breaker.
• If you have variable priority settings for callers, and agents belong to multiple workgroups with different
skill levels, it is recommend that you set all calls' SKLR to 1 and set call coverage rule to "Equal or Lower
than SKLR of Incoming Call". This will eliminate the complexity of matching caller's SKLR to agent's skill
level.
Queue Management – Basic
The main differences between Basic and Advanced queue control are the following:
• You can build a layer of DTMF menu selection option in the Advanced queue control mode. A caller can
press a digit to hear different prompts or options while in queue.
• You can have select FIFO (First In First Out) or LIFO (Last In First Out) for the queue overflow.
If you don't have these particular needs, the Basic queue mode is recommended.
The Queue Management tab in Workgroup Configuration allows you to set options for queue phrases and
announcements, queue overflow routing and quit queue options. Options become enabled depending on the
Queuing Control selected – Basic, Advanced and Application Extension.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
255
Chapter 22: Workgroup Configuration
Figure 140. Workgroup Configuration, Queue Management tab, Basic Queue Control
When Basic is selected in the Queuing Control field, the following queue management options are available:
Setting Queue Phrase Options
For each workgroup, you can either use the system default phrases or you can set up a custom configuration.
The default audio phrases are discussed in “Audio Peripheral Configuration” on page 44.
Queue Announcement
You can set up the system to announce a caller’s queue status – queue position and expected queue time –
when an incoming call enters a workgroup queue. To enable this option, check Enable Announcement, then
check Queue Position and/or Expected Queue Time.
Queue Position – When checked, the system will tell the caller which position the caller is at in queue. Do not
check this option if you assign different priorities to different calls based on DNIS, CID, or AA selection. Do not
check this option if you configure matching a caller’s SKLR to an agent's skill level. Queue position is not
meaningful when a higher priority caller can push a lower priority caller or if no agent is available to answer a
particular SKLR.
Expected Queue Time – when checked, the system will tell the caller how long the wait is expected to be.
When calculating this number, the system will consider the average agent call handling time and the position
of the caller in queue. Because queue position is a factor when calculating this number, do not check this option
when call priority and caller SKLR matching are configured. Please note that the Expected Queue Time is an
estimated number. Agents logging in or out of the workgroup during operation hours will affect the actual
handling time and cause deviation to the expected queue time.
When Avg time in queue is less than 1 minute, the expected wait time in queue will not be played to the caller.
Expected Queue Time (round up to minutes) = [(Average Call Handling Time x Queue
Position) + 59 sec] / 60 sec
256
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Queue Management – Basic
Expected Wait Time Sampling
To calculate Expected Queue Time, the system needs to take samples when a workgroup starts operation.
You can set the following parameters to set a sampling period and a fixed Expected Queue Time
announcement during sampling period. The expected queue time counter is reset for all workgroups daily at
midnight.
• Initial Sample Call Count [1 to 100] – How many calls you would like to use as initial samples.
• Initial Expected Wait (Queue) Time [1 to 10 minutes] – This field defines the expected queue time to be
announced during the sampling period. One minute is the minimum you can set for expected wait time in
queue.
Queue Overflow Forwarding
The Queue Overflow Forwarding options are for handling long queues or long wait times for callers. When a
queue exceeds a set number of calls, or callers are waiting beyond a set length of time, calls can be automatically forwarded to a voicemail box, AA, extension, group, operator, outside number, or application extension.
To set options for handling queue overflow,
1.
In the Queue Overflow Forwarding section, set options for:
•
Calls in queue exceed – When the number of calls in queue are greater than the defined number, new
incoming calls will be overflowed to the defined target.
•
Expected queue time longer than – When the longest queue time is greater than the specified number
of minutes, new incoming calls will be overflowed to the defined target.
•
Service level lower than – This number is not a historical service level defined in the workgroup
threshold. This number is a real-time queue service level (RTSL) calculated as follows:
RTSL% = 1 – (# of queued calls exceed SL threshold / Total calls in
queue)
2.
Check the Enable Forward to check box and from the list, select the forwarding destination list to use if
the queue length, wait time or service level settings are exceeded. If this option is not checked, calls will
go to the workgroup’s voicemail.
Quit Queue Option
The quit queue feature gives a caller the option of leaving a workgroup queue at any time by pressing # and/
or 0. To enable this feature, check either or both of the Enable Quit Queue Options, then use the appropriate
Forward to list to select the option the caller will have:
• Voice Mail
• AA – Select the auto attendant to use. AAs are configured in AA Configuration on the System menu.
• Extension – Select an extension from the list.
Note: If the forwarding extension is busy when a caller quits a queue, the call will go to this extension’s
voice mail.
• Group – Select a workgroup from the list.
• Operator
• Outside Number – This option is available if it is allowed in the Other Call Restrictions option in the
Restriction tab, as discussed in “Setting Other Call Restrictions” on page 178.
If you choose Outside Number, select a trunk or route access code to use in the small list on the left, and
type in the full prefix and phone number.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
257
Chapter 22: Workgroup Configuration
Note: Forwarding calls to a pager is possible but not recommended since callers will only hear what is
heard when calling a pager and will not know to enter a return phone number unless instructed.
• App Ext – When used in conjunction with a third-party notification application, this feature enables an extension to connect to an application that can receive the notification event; use the list to choose the logon extension to which the third-party application is connected. Contact your local AltiGen Partner for more
information on using this feature.
• Callback Interview – The System will record the caller’s callback number and will prompt the caller to
record a message into the voice mail box of the workgroup.
Note: This option is only available to external callers.
Priority Promotion
To prevent calls with lower priority staying in queue forever, causing high abandon rate, or lowering service
level, you can set priority promotion to enhance a caller's position in queue. Check the box and enter the proper
time interval in seconds.
Supervisor Queue Control
When the Allow Redirect Call/Change Priority check box is checked, this allows a workgroup supervisor to
redirect queue calls or change the call priority of queued calls, using the MaxSupervisor application.
Queue Management – Advanced
When Advanced is selected on the Queue Management tab, the Setup button becomes available.
Figure 141. Workgroup Configuration, Queue Management, Advanced Queue Control
To configure options for advanced queuing control, click the Setup button. This opens the Advanced Queue
Management (AQM) application configuration window with tabs for configuring Announcement, Menu
Selection, and Queue Overflow.
258
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Queue Management – Advanced
Announcement
The Announcement tab allows for configuration of queue announcements.
Figure 142. Workgroup Configuration, Advanced Queue Management, Announcement tab
To configure queue announcements:
1.
Select any of the following check boxes:
• Use Default System Phrases
• Queue Position
• Expected Wait Time
2.
If you are not using default system phrases, use the lists to select the Greeting Phrase and Update
Phrases that will be played to callers in queue.
3.
Select the Update Interval (0 - 180 seconds) to be inserted between queue phrases.
Note: If the interval is set to 0, the system will play phrases one after the other without music in between.
4.
Click OK or Apply.
Menu Selection
The Menu Selection tab allows for configuration of a voice menu selection that can be made available to
callers in queue. When a workgroup queue is controlled by the Advanced Queue Management application,
calls in queue will hear a menu prompt. The menu will allow callers to take certain actions based on digit input,
and callers can also hear one or more phrases associated with the actions.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
259
Chapter 22: Workgroup Configuration
Figure 143. Workgroup Configuration, Advanced Queue Management, Menu Selection tab
To set up the Menu Selection:
1.
In the Digits field, select 0 – 9, # or *.
2.
For the highlighted digit, select a Prompt from the phrase list and click Add. You can add one or more
prompts, then use the Up or Down buttons to determine the order in which the prompts are played.
3.
Use the list to select one of the following actions, then click OK or Apply.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Transfer to Extension/Other Group
Transfer to AA
Transfer to Operator
Transfer to Outside Number
Transfer to Group VM
Play prompts
No Action
Disconnect
Queue Overflow
The Queue Overflow tab allows for configuration of overflow conditions and actions.
Figure 144. Workgroup Configuration, Advanced Queue Management, Queue Overflow tab
• Overflow Conditions – Select from any of the following check boxes (if all are checked, the conditions
will be followed in order):
260
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Application Extension Queue Control
– Calls in Queue exceed – Can be between 0 and 150. This is the number of calls in queue
that will cause overflow. For example, 5 calls mean that once a queue has 5 calls in queue,
the system will forward the overflow calls according to a specified action.
– Wait time longer than – Can be between 0 and 200 minutes. This is the time that a call must
have been waiting in queue for the call to be overflowed.
– Service level lower than – Can be between 0 and 100%. This is the percentage of calls in
queue longer than service level threshold.
• Action – Select from one of the following options:
– Overflow existing call in the queue to (first in, first out)
– Overflow new incoming calls to (last in, first out)
When either is selected, use the list to select the overflow action:
•
•
•
•
Voice Mail
Extension – Select an extension from the list.
Workgroup – Select a workgroup from the list.
AA – Select the auto attendant to use in the list under the option. AAs are configured in AA
Configuration on the System menu.
• Operator
• Outside – Type in the full prefix and phone number, preceded by the trunk or route access code, for
example, 915102529712.
Application Extension Queue Control
When you select Application Extension in the Queue Control panel on the Queue Management tab (and
an Application Extension is already configured), use the list to select the desired Application Extension. For
more information on configuring an application extension, refer to “Application Extension Configuration” on
page 89.
Figure 145. Workgroup Configuration, Queue Management tab, Application Extension Queue Control
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
261
Chapter 22: Workgroup Configuration
Agent Logout Reason Codes
In a workgroup environment, logout reason codes allow agents to specify why they are signing off from the
workgroup, and the manager can view that information. If logout reasons are required, the system requests a
reason at logout from the phone set and from the Agent application.
The Agent Logout Reason Configuration window lets you require a logout reason, and it provides for
defining up to 20 reason codes. A logout history can be tracked and stored for future analysis.
To access this window, select Call Center > Agent Logout Reason Configuration.
Figure 146. Agent Logout Reason Configuration window
To require logout reasons, select the Logout reason code required check box. If you don’t want to require
reason codes, deselect the check box.
To define reason codes, type the associated reason into the text box next to the code you want to associate
with the reason.
MaxCall Configuration
The MaxCall Configuration screen is for entering Transmit CID numbers to be used when an agent uses the
MaxCall application to play a phrase to a callee. The campaign names and transmit CIDs you enter here
appear in a list on the MaxCall tab in MaxAgent, MaxCommunicator, and MaxOutlook. The agent selects a CID
by campaign name before handing a call off to MaxCS 7.0 . Then MaxCS 7.0 plays the phrase the agent
selected.
262
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
MaxCall Configuration
Figure 147. MaxCall Configuration screen
• ID – Campaign IDs are assigned sequentially by the MaxCS 7.0 system.
• Campaign Name – The name you give to a calling campaign.
• Transmitted CID – The caller ID to transmit to the callee when an agent makes a call and uses MaxCall
to play a phrase to the callee’s phone.
Adding a Transmitted CID
1.
Click the Add button. The Campaign and Transmitted Caller ID dialog box opens:
2.
Enter a campaign name and a caller ID to transmit when this campaign is chosen by the agent. Click OK.
The campaign names and caller IDs then appear in MaxAgent, MaxCommunicator, and MaxOutlook in the
MaxCall tab list:
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
263
Chapter 22: Workgroup Configuration
Editing a Transmitted CID
1.
Select a campaign and click the Edit button.
2.
Make your changes, and click OK.
Deleting a Transmitted CID
To remove a campaign, select it and click the Delete button. The entry is deleted.
264
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
23
Using MeetMe Conference
MAXCS provides two different types of conference bridges, Station and MeetMe Conference. Station
conferencing is handled from the phone or the desktop client on the fly and requires no configuration in
MaxAdmin.
The MeetMe Conference is a group conferencing feature that requires the following:
• A phone meeting needs to be scheduled first by the conferencing host through the client application, or
by the system administrator in MaxAdmin.
• All participating parties need to dial into the MeetMe conference extension number and enter the Meeting
ID (and, optionally, password) to join the conference.
Hardware requirements:
• For all OFFICE Chassis series, a 30-port Triton MeetMe conference board (ALTI-CONF-30) is required.
• Only one Triton MeetMe conference board is supported per system.
• MAX1000 server has a built-in MeetMe conference (12-port) resource in the embedded DSP. No additional hardware is required.
MeetMe Conference Features
• Multiple meetings can be held at the same time, as long as the reserved resources do not exceed 30. (For
the MAX1000 system, the reserved resources cannot exceed 12, and up to two meetings can be held at
the same time. If Gateway Expansion/HMCP are used, all the MeetMe resources should be in the HMCP
server, and no MeetMe Conference board should be in a gateway chassis.)
• Meetings can be set up and administered in MaxCommunicator/MaxAgent and MaxAdmin.
• You can set up a single meeting or a meeting that recurs at regular intervals.
• MeetMe Conference creates an invitation to a meeting, and offers the option to open Microsoft Outlook to
send the invitation to people you specify.
• Option to announce participant's name when joining or leaving the conference. This feature can be
configured by the meeting scheduler.
• Meeting host can Mute/Un-Mute, and drop meeting participants using the desktop client.
• Meeting host can surrender the meeting control to another extension.
Note:
If a conference has configured more than 30 reserve seats, the system will automatically mute all
participants to maintain voice quality. The conference host can then un-mute up to 30 participants.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
265
Chapter 23: Using MeetMe Conference
Setting the MeetMe Conference Extension
Before MeetMe Conference can be used, you must assign a MeetMe Conference extension number. This extension must be dedicated to MeetMe and is the extension that users will always call to join a scheduled meeting. To assign an extension to MeetMe, select PBX > MeetMe Conference Configuration.
1.
Enter an extension number in the MeetMe Conference Extension Number field.
2.
Individual client users can view in the client only the meetings that they have scheduled. The system
administrator can view all the meetings that have been scheduled and can manage these meetings. Also,
only the system administrator can change the invitation template.
You may want to give someone else the privileges to do these things. In the MeetMe Conference Admin
Number field, you can select the extension of a person to whom you want to give Admin privileges for
MeetMe Conference. That person will see all scheduled meetings in their client application, can manage
the meetings, and can modify the invitation template.
3.
Click OK.
MeetMe Conference Window
As system administrator, you may or may not schedule meetings. This may be left to the individual client users.
In the MeetMe Conference window, you can view and manage all the meetings that have been scheduled. You
can edit the e-mail template that meeting schedulers may use.
To open the MeetMe Conference window, do one of the following:
• Click the MeetMe Conference button
on the toolbar.
• Select PBX > MeetMe Conference Management.
This is the same application the clients use. Using this window, you can:
• Create a one-time or recurring meeting and set its parameters
• Open Microsoft Outlook to send an e-mail invitation to participate in the meeting
• Start and stop a meeting
266
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Working in the MeetMe Conference Window
• Modify or delete a meeting
• See meeting ID, subject, scheduler, time, frequency, start time, the last time the meeting started, its status,
and the resource being used.
• Display or hide outdated meetings
• Modify column display
Working in the MeetMe Conference Window
Click a button to perform a function (for example, create a meeting). The buttons at the bottom of the window
are labeled with their function; the buttons at the top of the window perform the same functions. In addition, at
the top of the window, you can choose to display outdated meetings by checking the Display Outdated Meetings check box. Deselect the check box to hide outdated meetings.
Select an existing meeting to perform a function on it (for example, to start or stop the meeting). You can select
one meeting at a time.
Functions can also be performed on an existing meeting by right-clicking the meeting and selecting from the
context menu.
Click a column head to sort by that column. An arrow is displayed that indicates the sort order, ascending or
descending. Click again to reverse the sort order.
Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the window to display additional columns, if necessary.
Change column size by clicking and dragging a column border.
Change column order in the current window by dragging a column head to where you want it.
You can open more than one MeetMe Conference window and work with different meetings and displays in
each one.
You can double-click a meeting to open the Modify Meeting dialog box.
Using the Calendar Button
The Create Meeting and Modify Meeting dialog boxes use Calendar buttons for date selection. To select a
date, click the Calendar button. When the calendar is open, use the Up/Down arrows to select the year, or you
can type in a year and then press Enter. Click the Calendar button again to close the calendar.
Creating a Meeting
To create a meeting, click one of the Create buttons.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
267
Chapter 23: Using MeetMe Conference
The options in the middle
panel change, depending on
the schedule you select.
The following parameters apply to all meetings:
Parameter
Description
ID
The conference ID is created by the system.
Scheduler
The name of the person scheduling the meeting.
Schedule Time
The time the Create Meeting dialog box was opened to create this meeting.
Subject
Identifies the subject or type of meeting. What you enter here should be easily
identifiable in the meeting list.
Reserved Seats
Use the Up/Down arrows or type in a number, up to 30, to indicate the number
of expected participants. (For the MAX1000 system, expected participants
may not exceed 12.)
If a conference has configured more than 30 reserve seats, the system will
automatically mute all participants to maintain voice quality. The conference
host can then un-mute up to 30 participants.
Host
Select the extension number of the host of this meeting. The host can start and
stop the meeting and can mute and drop meeting members.
Frequency
Select the frequency of this meeting from the list. A “weekly” or “monthly”
meeting can actually be specified as every 2nd week/month or every 3rd week/
month, and so on.
Middle panel:
Options in the middle panel vary according to the frequency of the meeting. See the sections below this table.
Require Conference
Passcode
If you check this, no one can participate who does not enter the conference
passcode that you supply.
Passcode
If you are requiring a passcode, enter it here.
Announce Participant Name
If you want participant names announced when they enter and leave the
meeting, check this check box.
Fill in the fields of the Create Meeting dialog box, and click OK. See the following sections for directions on
filling in the fields in the middle panel of this dialog box.
268
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Creating a Meeting
Note:
If other scheduled meetings have already reserved resources for the time period, and sufficient
resources are not available for the meeting you are attempting to schedule, a message indicates that
there is a resource conflict.
One Time Only Meeting
If you select One Time Only from the Frequency list, these are your options in the middle panel:
1.
Specify the duration of the meeting, using the Up/Down arrows (unless this is to be a “permanent”
meeting).
2.
If the meeting is to begin as soon as it is scheduled, select Now.
3.
If the meeting is to begin at another time, select On Date, and enter a date and start time. To select a date,
click the Calendar button. To select a start time, click the Down arrow and use the slide bar.
Weekly Meeting
If you select Weekly from the Frequency list, these are your options in the middle panel.
1.
In the Duration field, specify the duration of the meeting, using the Up/Down arrows.
2.
In the Start field, specify the start of the meeting by clicking the Down arrow and using the slide bar.
3.
In the Every field, specify how often this meeting is to occur: every week, every other week, every three
weeks, and so on.
4.
Check the day of the week on which this meeting will occur.
5.
In the Range of Recurrence panel, use the Calendar button to select a date for the first meeting.
6.
Select End after x occurrences and choose the number of times the meeting is to occur or select End
by and click the Calendar button to specify a date at which the meetings will cease.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
269
Chapter 23: Using MeetMe Conference
Monthly Meeting
If you select Monthly from the Frequency list, these are your options in the middle panel:
1.
In the Every field, specify how often this meeting is to occur: every month, every other month, every three
months, and so on.
2.
In the Duration field, specify the duration of the meeting, using the Up/Down arrows.
3.
In the Start field, specify the start of the meeting by clicking the Down arrow and using the slide bar.
4.
Select either On Date to specify a day of the month by number (for example, the 10th day of the month)
or select On to specify a day of the month by name (for example, the first Monday of the month).
If you use On Date, the specified date (for example, the 10th day of the month) may sometimes fall on a
weekend day. Check the box Hold during weekend, if the meeting will be held even on a weekend day.
5.
In the Range of Recurrence panel, use the Calendar button to select a date for the first meeting.
6.
Select End after x occurrences and choose the number of times the meeting is to occur or select End
by and click the Calendar button to specify a date by which the meetings will cease.
E-mailing a Meeting Invitation
In the MeetMe Conference window, click the
invitation. It will look similar to the following figure.
270
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
button to see an automatically generated meeting
Modifying the E-mail Template
In the Invitation window, you can then click the
button to open Microsoft Outlook. The meeting
invitation is pasted into a new message in Outlook, and the Outlook Subject field is filled in with “Conference
Call Invitation”. Choose the people to whom you want to send the invitation, make any edits you may want to
make, and click Send.
Modifying the E-mail Template
You can edit the e-mail template used by MeetMe Conference to be suitable for your situation. The same
template is used for all meeting invitations. To modify it, click the Update Email Template button.
The following variables are included in the template:
• Schedule
• Meeting ID
• Meeting subject
• Meeting passcode
When you are editing the template, you can choose these variables from the Insert menu to have the specified
information automatically inserted where you place it. Users who schedule a meeting can make further edits
to the invitation when MeetMe Conference pastes it into Outlook.
Starting and Stopping a Meeting
The meeting host and the MaxAdmin (Admin) can start and stop a meeting. To start a meeting, select the
meeting in the MeetMe Conference window and choose Start. Once the meeting is “started,” the host can log
into it (described in the following section).
To stop a meeting before its scheduled duration is over, select the meeting and choose Stop. Manually
stopping a meeting frees up resources. Otherwise, the resources will not be freed until the scheduled meeting
duration is over.
Continuing a Meeting Beyond Its Duration Time
When the scheduled meeting time is up, the meeting may continue if no other scheduled meeting needs the
resources. If another meeting is scheduled and the resources are needed for that meeting, the current meeting
is terminated.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
271
Chapter 23: Using MeetMe Conference
What the MeetMe Conference Host Can Do
In addition to starting and stopping a meeting, the host of a MeetMe conference can:
• Mute other participants
• Drop participants from the conference
• Make someone else the host
Note:
If a conference has configured more than 30 reserve seats, the system will automatically mute all
participants to maintain voice quality. The conference host can then un-mute up to 30 participants.
To do any of these, either right-click the person’s name in the MeetMe window and choose a command from
the menu, or use the buttons at the bottom of the MeetMe tab:
Mute
UnMute
Change Host
Drop from
Conference
Note:
Changing the host does not affect the Mute setting for the original host or the new host. If the new host
was muted before the transfer of hosting duties, that host will have to UnMute himself in order to be
heard. Similarly, the original host will still be unmuted if he was unmuted before transferring hosting
duties.
Joining a MeetMe Conference
Users calling from an extension can join a meeting by dialing the MeetMe Conference extension number.
Users calling through a trunk must first dial the company number, then the Conference extension number.
Users are prompted to dial the meeting number. If the meeting has not yet been started, the user hears an
appropriate message and can try again later.
If a passcode is required, the user is prompted to enter the passcode.
272
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
24
Location-Based E911 (for Roaming Users)
This feature is designed for roaming users who log into various IP phones at different locations, to use those
phones as their extension.
E911 Caller ID (CID) information is sent to PSAPs (Public Safety Answering Point) when a user calls 911 from
an IP phone. A new feature has been added to MaxCS that allows administrators to configure unique E911
Location IDs for specific locations. Each AltiGen IP phone can then be assigned an appropriate E911 Location
ID.
Configuring E911 Location IDs ensures that emergency calls placed from these IP phones:
• Will call the appropriate PSAP, based upon the phone's physical location.
• Will transmit the appropriate Caller ID information that will help emergency response teams find the right
physical address.
About E911 Location IDs
Each Location ID entry will contain the following information:
• The phone number of the local PSAP
• The E911 Caller ID (which is used by PSAPs to determine the correct street address) which is transmitted
to emergency personnel when an emergency call is placed
• A default callback phone number (optional)
E911 Location ID information is associated with the IP phone itself, rather than being tied to a specific user or
extension. This way, no matter who logs into an IP phone, the correct E911 Location ID will be transmitted
during an emergency call.
Once these E911 Location IDs are configured within MaxCS Administrator, administrators can either push the
correct information to the AltiGen IP phones or update the E911 information on each AltiGen IP phone via the
phone's menus.
Administrators can also configure whether users must enter a password in order to update an IP phone's
assigned E911 Location ID themselves.
Note:
When an IP phone is moved to a different location, the Administrator must update the phone's E911
Location ID accordingly, either by pushing it from within MaxCS Administrator or by requesting that a
user update the IP phone via the phone's menus.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
273
Chapter 24: Location-Based E911 (for Roaming Users)
Designing E911 Location IDs for Your Organization
Administrators can set up various E911 Location IDs (up to 10,000).
The strategy of how you implement E911 Location IDs will depend upon your unique business.
Some businesses may choose to set up location IDs for each building in a complex, something similar to this:
• Location ID 10 - Building 315 West
• Location ID 11 - Building 315 Warehouse
• Location ID 20 - Building 316
• Location ID 30 - Building 317
Or, if you have various branch offices, your Location ID schema may look more like this approach:
• Location ID 1 - San Jose
• Location ID 2 - Palo Alto
• Location ID 3 - Redwood City
• Location ID 4 - Sunnyvale
Another organization may choose to create different E911 Location IDs for each floor of a large office building,
similar to this approach:
• Location ID 1 - Basement/garage
• Location ID 2 - Floor 1
• Location ID 3 - Floor 2
• Location ID 4 - Floor 3
Yet another schema could be to implement E911 Location IDs by the type of use of various building sections,
by floor, similar to the following method. This convention uses the first digit as the floor and the second digit as
an area within that floor.
• Location ID 11 - Warehouse
• Location ID 12 - Floor 1 Lab 1
• Location ID 13 - Floor 1 Lab 2
• Location ID 14 - Floor 1 Shipping/Receiving
• Location ID 15 - Floor 1 Manufacturing
• Location ID 21 - Floor 2 Test Lab
• Location ID 22 - Floor 2 Imaging
What's important is to come up with a set of entries that works for you, based upon your type of organization
and your geographic specifics.
AltiGen IP Phones Supporting E911 Location IDs
The following AltiGen IP phones are supported:
• IP 705 (requires firmware version 22A6)
• IP 710 (requires firmware version 21A6)
• IP 720 (requires firmware version 23A6)
• IP 805 (requires firmware version 21, which will appear as “1121” in MaxAdministrator and on the phone
itself)
274
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
E911 Hierarchy
If an IP phone does not have the correct firmware version, then you cannot configure an E911 Location ID for
the phone until you upgrade its firmware.
New AltiGen IP phones are shipped with the default E911 Location ID entry of 0.
The following phones are not supported:
• AltiGen IP 600
• Analog phones connected to the MaxCS server
• Other 3rd party SIP phones
E911 Hierarchy
The system follows this hierarchy to retrieve E911 information when a user places a 911 call from an IP phone:
1.
The system will transmit the information in the E911 Location ID entry that is assigned to the IP phone, if
you have entered E911 Location IDs and if the IP phone has an E911 location ID assigned to it.
2.
If no E911 Location ID entry has been assigned to the IP phone, or if the assigned LID does not match
any entry in the Location ID table then the system will transmit the E911 information configured for the
extension in MaxAdministrator under PBX > Extension Configuration (see the chapter Extension
Configuration on page 159 for details)
3.
If no E911 data has been configured for the extension under PBX > Extension Configuration, then the
system will transmit the extension's DID number.
4.
If there is no DID number assigned to the extension, then the system will transmit the trunk's Transmitted
Caller ID (which is set in the Trunk Configuration window).
5.
If the Area Code and Phone Number have not been configured for the trunk, the System Main Number in
the System Configuration window will be sent.
E911 Location ID Configuration Process
Following is an overview of how to configure E911 data for IP phones:
1.
Administrators create a Location ID schema and plan various E911 Location IDs, one for each site, floor,
or building.
2.
Administrators configure password protection, so that changing the E911 information for a phone requires
a user to enter a password (optional). See Requiring a Password to Change E911 Location ID on page
277 for details.
3.
Administrators view (and update) the E911 assignments for IP phones. Administrators can either push the
updated information to the phones or have users enter the appropriate information on the phone itself. See
pages 7 and 8.
Creating the E911 Location ID Table
To configure location-based E911 information,
1.
Select PBX > Location Based E911 Configuration.
The panel shows the current E911 entries. To sort the table, click a column heading.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
275
Chapter 24: Location-Based E911 (for Roaming Users)
Figure 148. The Location Based E911 Configuration panel
The following table describes the information shown in this panel.
Parameter
Description
E911 LID (Location ID)
1-10,000. Enter a unique number for this entry.
E911 CID (Caller ID)
The local E911 Caller ID which is used as a Caller ID when the
extension places an emergency call.
This field is also unique; each E911 LID must have a different E911
CID.
PSAP (Public Safety Answering
Point) Number
When this extension makes a local E911 call, this is the PSAP number
that will be called.
This setting determines the routing for the call back from the PSAP
center.
• With Callback enabled, the DNIS number of incoming calls is used
Enable Callback
to match the E911 CID of the 911 call history to determine the
callback extension.
• With Callback disabled, call will be routed to the standard incoming
call routing of MaxCS, regardless of the E911 call history.
The default setting is Disabled.
The default call back extension; this applies only if Callback is enabled.
• If the DNIS number from the PSAP does not match the designated
Default callback extension
CID from the call history, then the response call will be routed to this
callback extension.
• If you do not enter a default callback extension, the response call
goes through the standard incoming call routing.
Description
2.
276
A brief description for this E911 LID entry.
Below the table, for the Call Back Expiration Time xx Minutes option, set the global expiration time for
E911 response calls. The default interval is 30 minutes.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Requiring a Password to Change E911 Location ID
Figure 149. The Call Back Expiration field
When Enable Callback is checked, this field sets the expiration time for the routing of response calls.
Response calls will be routed to the last extension that placed an E911 call if the response arrives within
that expiration time. After this interval has expired, response calls will be routed using the standard
incoming call routing configured in MaxCS.
3.
Click Add.
Figure 150. Add a new E911 Location entry
4.
In the dialog box, complete each field and click OK. Refer to the table on page 276 for field descriptions.
Note:
In order to support E911 LIDs across multiple servers, such that if one server fails the other will
correctly handle E911 LID calls, we recommend that each server have an identical list of E911
Location IDs.
Requiring a Password to Change E911 Location ID
Administrators can configure whether users must enter a password in order to update an AltiGen IP phone's
assigned E911 Location ID. This requirement can be enabled or disabled for each individual IP phone.
To enable password protection for a phone's E911 information,
1.
Select PBX > AltiGen IP Phone Configuration.
2.
On the General tab, select the phone in the left panel and then check the Enable Protection on E911
checkbox.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
277
Chapter 24: Location-Based E911 (for Roaming Users)
Figure 151. Enable password protection for E911 entry
3.
Once you check that checkbox, the Password field above it becomes active. Enter a password. Your
entry will be the password that the user must enter in order to change the Location ID assigned to the
phone. Click OK.
Note:
You can use the Apply To feature to apply this requirement and the password to multiple phones.
Assigning E911 Locations on AltiGen IP Phones
Administrators can either push the correct E911 Location ID to an AltiGen IP phone, or they can have users
enter the correct ID manually on the IP phone itself.
To push an E911 Location ID assignment to an AltiGen IP phone, follow these steps.
1.
Select PBX > Location Based E911 Configuration.
2.
Click View E911 Assignments.
The table lists devices that have, at some point, registered with MaxCS.
3.
Click a column to sort the table. You can also filter the data by choosing All, Active, or Inactive from the
Status Filter pull-down menu.
Figure 152. The E911 Assignment table
The following table describes the fields in this panel.
Parameter
Description
The Location ID assigned to this IP phone.
E911 LID (Location ID)
Note: A phone with a Location ID of "0 (Disabled)" either does not
have the correct firmware or does not have any E911 Location
ID assigned to it.
Number
The extension number of this IP phone.
278
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Assigning E911 Location IDs to FXS Gateways
Parameter
Description
IP Address
The IP address of this phone.
MAC Address
The MAC Address of this IP phone. Polycom phones will not display a
MAC address.
Type
The type of phone.
Last Login Time
The last time that this IP phone logged into the MaxCS system.
The current state of this IP phone. You can filter the data in this list as
needed.
• Active - The IP phone is currently registered with the MaxCS
Status
system.
• Inactive - The IP phone is not currently registered with the MaxCS
system (the phone may have been unplugged or was logged out of
the system).
4.
To change the E911 Location ID for an IP phone, select the entry and click Change LID.
Note: If you cannot click the Change LID button for that phone (in other words, if the button is disabled),
this indicates that the phone does not have the correct firmware; you must upgrade the firmware
on the phone before you can set the phone's E911 Location ID..
5.
Make your changes and click OK. The data will be pushed to the phone, and the phone will automatically
re-register to apply the updated configuration.
6.
To remove an E911 LID assignment for an extension, select the entry and click Delete. (Note that you can
delete assignments only for inactive AltiGen IP phones.)
To have a user update the E911 Location ID on an IP phone, provide the user with the appropriate Location
ID number. Instruct the user to open the phone's menu, choose System > E911 LID, and enter the Location
ID number.
Assigning E911 Location IDs to FXS Gateways
On an FXS gateway, Administrators can configure an E911 Location ID in the SIP User ID field for analog
phones. Use the following syntax:
xatgnemx(E911 LID)
For example, to assign E911 Location ID 3 to the gateway, enter the following string:
xatgnemx3
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
279
Chapter 24: Location-Based E911 (for Roaming Users)
280
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
25
Network Configuration Guidelines for VoIP
Real-time applications such as voice communications require a networking environment that meets certain
requirements to deliver and maintain good voice quality. Follow these network configuration guidelines when
using MAX Communication Server’s VoIP features.
ISP/Intranet Quality of Service (QoS)
• If you subscribe to the public IP network or use your own Intranet, make sure the maximum network delay
is less than 100 milliseconds.
• Also, the typical packet loss rate should be less than 1 percent.
Virtual LANs
MAXCS supports virtual LANs in accordance with IEEE 802.1Q. A virtual LAN (VLAN) segments an Ethernetbased network into different logical networks that provide different services such as data service and voice service. It also defines broadcast domains to reduce network traffic load. It provides a managed network environment to run voice and data together smoothly.
The IEEE 802.1Q header includes IEEE 802.1p, a standard method for assigning priority to packets traversing
a network. It works with the Ethernet MAC (Media Access Control) header at the data link layer. The managed
switches in a network are responsible for differentiating packets based on their priorities and processing them
in different orders.
Requirements:
• MAXCS Update 1 or above with two NICs for 802.1Q VLAN
• MAXCS Update 1 or above for 802.1p
• NIC support 802.1p for 802.1p
• The following IP phone firmware:
• VLAN: 2x65 or above and boot code version 12 or above
• 802.1p: 2x8x (MAXCS Update 1 firmware)
• Layer 2 managed switch
• The NetFilter driver is installed in the MAXCS server side. For the IPTalk client, the NetFilter driver will be
installed only when the QoS and 802.1p function are enabled with the IPTalk integrated setting.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
281
Chapter 25: Network Configuration Guidelines for VoIP
Ethernet II Framing Header
The Ethernet II framing header is defined as follows, with 802.1Q VLAN tag and 802.1p priority bits:
For 802.1Q VLAN-tagged Ethernet frame, the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) or Ethernet Type is set to 0x8100.
The next 16 bits defines the VLAN and QoS bits:
• Priority Code Point (PCP): a 3-bit field which refers to the IEEE 802.1p priority. It indicates the frame
priority level from 0 (lowest) to 7 (highest), which can be used to prioritize different classes of traffic (voice,
video, data, and so on).
• Canonical Format Indicator (CFI): a 1-bit field. If the value of this field is 1, the MAC address is in noncanonical format. If the value is 0, the MAC address is in canonical format. It is always set to zero for
Ethernet switches.
• VLAN Identifier (VID): a 12-bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs. A value of 0 means
that the frame doesn't belong to any VLAN; in this case the 802.1Q tag specifies only a priority and is
referred to as a priority tag. A value of hex FFF is reserved for implementation use. All other values may
be used as VLAN identifiers, allowing up to 4094 VLANs.
Only port-based VLAN is supported in MAXCS, which means the VLAN is assigned in the switch port and managed in the switch internally. The end device, like the MAXCS NIC and IP phone ARM MAC port, does not
need to tag the packet with VLAN so there is no software implementation on the end device. MAXCS can use
two NICs and connects them to the switch ports with a different VLAN assigned so the network traffic can be
separated. However inside the IP phone, the firmware programs the Ethernet switch to assign and manage
the different ports with different VLAN IDs. The IP phone user can configure the IP phone port with voice VLAN
ID and PC port with data VLAN ID. Different VLANs use a different IP network. Below is a typical VLAN setup:
The NIC in both the MAXCS server and the IPTalk client (used with MaxCommunicator/MaxAgent) must
support 802.1p. To see if the NIC supports the 802.1p feature, open the NIC’s Properties dialog box and select
the Advanced tab. See if the "QoS Packet Tagging" property is in the Property list. (Different NICs have
different properties and may display a different property name for the 802.1p feature.) If the NIC supports the
802.1p feature, the default value is Disabled and you can change this value to enable 802.1p as seen in the
following figure:
282
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Virtual LANs
Once the 802.1p property is enabled, the operating system should notify the NetFilter driver whether the NIC
supports the 802.1p feature.
For 802.1p, eight different classes of service are available, expressed through the 3-bit user priority field in an
IEEE 802.1Q header added to the frame. In MAXCS, 802.1p tagging is implemented in the NetFilter driver in
the server side applying QoS tagging to the voice packet. The IP phone tags the voice packet from the ARM
processor with a user configured value.
Specifying the Priority Value
The server side configuration is located in the HMCP board's Board Configuration settings or the VoIP
board’s Board Configuration > Advanced setting.
In MaxCommunicator/MaxAgent, the configuration is in the IPTalk configuration screen:
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
283
Chapter 25: Network Configuration Guidelines for VoIP
Enabling VLAN
VLAN can be enabled and configured in the IP phone: Network > Enable VLAN > Yes.
After enabling, set VID:Phone and VID:PCPort IDs.
It can also be configured in MaxAdmin in the IP Phone Configuration screen, General tab.
WAN Bandwidth
The following table lists bandwidth requirements for various transmission media with different codecs and
frame sizes. It assumes silence suppression is not turned on. (The same table appears on page 292.)
• The Jitter Buffer should be adjusted according to the bandwidth allocated to data traffic. For example, a
long Ethernet packet (approximately 1500 bytes) traversing through a WAN which is allocated with 256
kbps of data traffic bandwidth will take about 50 milliseconds. The Jitter Buffer value should be set to this
WAN link transmission delay plus the typical network jitter delay. To configure the Jitter Buffer, in Enterprise Manager (VoIP > Enterprise Network Management) click the Codec button.
• If you have heavier data applications running concurrently, the bandwidth reserved for data traffic should
be increased.
• If your router supports multilink or TCP fragmentation, configure your WAN router to user smaller packet
sizes, for example, 500 bytes.
284
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
WAN Router Configuration
WAN Router Configuration
• The router that connects your LAN and the WAN should support priority queuing.
• Configure the router so that the IP/UDP packets being sent to and from an IP station have higher priority
than the packets generated by other stations on the same network. Consult your router manufacturer for
more information on setting up this configuration.
Firewall Configuration
Please note the following important guidelines when working with a firewall on your network:
• If a firewall is used to protect your network access security, reconfigure the firewall to open up TCP and
UDP ports to the IP system’s IP address. The relevant ports are listed in the section Network Ports. This
allows IP’s voice and H.323 packets to pass through the firewall freely. If the firewall supports H.323 protocol, configure the firewall using H.323 instead of opening up the specific ports.
• Ensure that the rules to permit IP’s H.323 traffic are at the beginning of your access filter list. This will minimize the delay of latency-sensitive voice packets. This is especially important with long access lists and/
or slow routers.
Network Using NAT
If you plan to connect to your MAXCS system via the Internet and your router or Internet access provider is
using Network Address Translation (NAT), please note that most NAT implementations DO NOT support
H.323.
• You are probably using NAT if both of the following conditions apply:
• Your MAXCS ACM server's IP address matches any of the following numbers (where x is any number
from 0-255):
• 10.x.x.x
• 172.16.x.x to 172.32.x.x
• 192.168.x.x
• You are able to connect to the Internet directly without using a proxy server.
• Contact your router/firewall vendor to obtain a software update for your networking equipment, or obtain
routable address space from your Internet provider. If you are unsure whether or not you are using NAT,
contact your router/firewall vendor or Internet provider.
Network Configuration Guidelines for AltiGen IP Phones
The following guidelines (specific to AltiGen IP phones) should be taken into consideration before you configure your network for use with NAT.
• DHCP is recommended to reduce the risks for duplicating IP addresses. MAXCS provides seamless
support for AltiGen IP phones using dynamic IP addresses. Select Dynamic IP address for IP Extensions
in the Max Admin’s Extension Configuration window.
• A switch is required; VoIP quality can be adversely affected if a hub is used.
We recommend the following settings on the MaxCS server:
• Large Send Offload VZ (IPv4) – Disable
• Receive Side Scaling – Disable
• IP Security (IPSec) Offload – Disable
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
285
Chapter 25: Network Configuration Guidelines for VoIP
• TCP Checksum Offload IPv4 – Disable
• UDP Checksum Offload IPv4 – Disable
Configuration Guidelines for NAT
Note:
This section only applies to AltiGen IP phones or IPTalk integrated with MaxCommunicator or
MaxAgent.
The section discusses the configuration guidelines when MAXCS is behind NAT (Network Address
Translation) and communication to AltiGen IP phones, IPTalk, or another MAXCS is over WAN. AltiGen SIP
phones support NAT traversal, which does not require special settings on the NAT router at the remote site.
Due to H.323/SIP protocol, which puts the IP address information in the TCP/IP payload, the NAT router requires some H.323 protocol and SIP protocol implementation to correctly handle the H.323/SIP traffic and
translate the private IP address into a public IP address. Not all NAT routers have this kind of implementation.
If the NAT router does not support H.323/SIP, you need to check Enable SIP NAT support and Enable H323
NAT support in Enterprise Manager, IP Networks tab.
The following sections illustrate a private network configuration and a VPN configuration.
For information on setting up VoIP traffic forwarding for NAT and configuring MAXCS behind NAT, see
“Configuring MAXCS Behind NAT” on page 302.
Private Network Configuration Example
(MAXCS with private IP address and behind NAT)
Only the private IP address is used in a private network. The public router will not route the packet that has a
private IP address as its destination. (All IP addresses beginning with 192.168.x.x, 10.x.x.x, or 172.16.x.x to
172.32.x.x are private IP addresses.)
286
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuration Guidelines for NAT
Figure 153. MAXCS behind NAT
This figure shows a private network, 192.168.1.0, where MAXCS is installed and running on a host with a
private IP address 192.168.1.2.
Router 1 is a NAT router. The local IP phones – IP Phone 1 and IP Phone 2 – use the private IP addresses
192.168.1.100 and 192.168.1.101, respectively. There are two remote IP phones: IP Phone 3 with a private IP
address 192.168.2.100 connects to the Internet via Router 2. Router 2 can also sit behind a DSL/Cable Modem.
Example Setup: Corporate LAN
• MAXCS – MAXCS is installed (private IP address 192.168.1.2). The public IP address of Router 2 should
be configured as the IP address of this IP extension in MAXCS. If it is changed dynamically, then assign
a dynamic IP address configuration for that extension.
• Router 1 – Router 1 is a NAT router. You need to set up the H323/SIP port forwarding for this NAT router
from 169.254.56.169 to the private IP address of MAXCS 192.168.1.2.
Example Setup: Remote IP Phone Using NAT
• IP Phone 3 – When configuring remote IP Phone 3, you should set up the MAXCS IP address to Router
1’s public IP address — 169.254.56.169.
• Router 2 – No special configuration is needed for Router 2. Also, more than one AltiGen SIP phone can
sit behind Router 2.
Example Setup: H.323 IP Call from Another MAXCS on the Internet
Another MAXCS can make an H.323 IP call to this MAXCS by calling the MAXCS's public IP address, which
is 169.254.101.2.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
287
Chapter 25: Network Configuration Guidelines for VoIP
VPN Network Configuration Example
(Connecting to MAXCS with VPN)
Figure 154. MAXCS with VPN
In a multi-site configuration, VPN can be used to provide a secured tunnel between the remote sites and the
corporate site.
Figure 154, “MAXCS with VPN,” shows a network layout in which there are two private networks, the corporate
LAN and branch office LAN. The VPN tunnel connects the two private networks such that the two networks
access each other with a private IP address.
In the corporate network, MAXCS is installed on a host with private IP address 192.168.1.2.
Both Router 1 and Router 2 are VPN-capable and compatible with each other. (It is recommended that the
routers come from same vendor.) A VPN tunnel exists between these two routers. The local IP phones – IP
Phone 1 and IP Phone 2 – directly connect to the corporate network with private IP address 192.168.1.100 and
192.168.1.101. And the three remote IP phones – IP Phone 3, IP Phone 4 and IP Phone 5 – connect to the
branch office network with private IP addresses 192.168.2.100, 192.168.2.101 and 192.168.2.102,
respectively.
Example Setup: Branch office LAN
• IP Phone 3, IP Phone 4 and IP Phone 5
When configuring the remote IP phones – IP Phone 3, IP Phone 4, and IP Phone 5 – you should set up
the AW address to use the MAXCS IP address.
For the VPN Tunnel between the Two Private Networks:
You must set up a VPN tunnel to connect the two private networks. The VPN setup procedure may be complicated and is generally performed by a professional IT technician.
The following minimum guidelines need to be considered for setting up the VPN tunnel:
• WAN Bandwidth – Should be greater than the aggregate of maximum VoIP session bandwidth usage.
288
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuration Guidelines for NAT
• QoS – If the IP WAN network provides QoS (Quality of Service), it should be configured to honor VoIP
RTP packet transmission.
An easy example for a VPN resolution is with the Linksys EtherFast VPN router1. Router 1 and Router 2
are routers supporting VPN. When configuring these VPN routers, the following information is needed.
(Also, please refer to the Router's User Guide for more detailed information.)
Router 1's Settings
Local Secure Group:
(specifies the local network which
can access the VPN tunnel at the
corporate network)
Subnet IP:
192.168.1.0
(Corporate Network)
Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0
Remote Secure Group:
(specifies the remote network
which can access the VPN tunnel
at the branch office network)
Subnet IP:
192.168.2.0
(Branch Office Network)
Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0
Remote Security Gateway:
(specifies the public IP address of
the remote gateway which can
access the VPN tunnel at the
branch office)
63.224.32.34
(Router 2’s public IP
Address
Router 2's Setting
Router 2's public IP address should be a fixed IP address.
1
Local Secure Group:
(specifies the local private network in the
branch office, which can access the
corporate network through VPN)
Subnet IP:
192.168.2.0
(Branch Office Network)
Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0
Remote Secure Group:
(specifies the corporate network, which
can be accessed by stations in this local
private network through the VPN tunnel)
Subnet IP:
192.168.1.0
(Corporate Network)
Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0
Remote Security Gateway:
(specifies the public IP address of the
corporate VPN-enabled gateway)
169.254.56.159
(Router 1’s public IP
Address
Linksys is for reference only. AltiGen has not certified this product or any other router at this time.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
289
Chapter 25: Network Configuration Guidelines for VoIP
290
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
26
Enterprise VoIP Network Management
Note:
Enterprise Manager’s domain-related features do not apply to MaxCS Private Cloud.
The VoIP-related aspects of both single-server systems and multi-site VoIP domains are configured in
Enterprise Manager, available from the VoIP menu or the Windows Start menu.
In addition, multi-site VoIP domain management – including directory synchronization and routing – is handled
here.
Note:
A multi-site installation requires an Enterprise License.
For a single-system installation, only the following VoIP configuration elements in Enterprise Manager are
relevant and are discussed in the first part of the chapter:
• Codec Profile – Create codec profiles that use different settings for jitter buffer size and packet length.
Codec profiles can be assigned to different types of VoIP connections, as defined in the IP dialing table
and IP codec assignment table.
• VoIP Bandwidth Use – Define the maximum VoIP sessions using different codecs on a public Internet or
a private intranet data pipe.
• NAT Support – Configure VoIP NAT traversal when the server is behind NAT using a private IP address.
• IP Dialing Table – Define IP dialing digits and codec for VoIP dialing to other AltiGen systems or certified
third-party IP devices.
• IP Codec Table – Define the codec and data pipe for AltiGen IP phones and SIP trunking service.
For a multi-site installation, you can manage the above configurations for all your VoIP domain servers from
Enterprise Manager.
Along with the above configurations, the multi-site administrator will use Enterprise Manager and the VoIP
menu in MaxAdmin to do the following:
• Create the VoIP domain
• Define the VoIP domain Master
• Join servers to the VoIP domain
• Manage VoIP domain users
• Define global least cost routing
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
291
Understanding VoIP Bandwidth Requirements
Understanding VoIP Bandwidth Requirements
Before starting VoIP related configurations, it is helpful to have some understanding of VoIP bandwidth requirements, so that you can plan your VoIP deployment properly. Also see Network Configuration Guidelines for
VoIP.
The data network bandwidth required to carry VoIP depends on the following factors:
• Codec and Compression – This is the encoding of analog voice to digital form, decoding of digital form
to analog wave form, and compression of digital form to a smaller size. MAXCS supports three type of
codec: G.711, G.729AB, G.723.1.
• Packet Length (Frame Size) – The size of the voice frame data (payload) transmitted in a packet. For
G.711 and G.729, you have choice of 10, 20, and 30ms lengths. For G.723.1, the packet length is a fixed
30ms. A larger packet length decreases the transmission overhead. However, it will increase the latency
and have a negative effect on the voice quality if a packet is lost during transmission. For G.711 and
G.729, 20ms is efficient and recommended.
• IP Header – The IP/UDP/RTP header adds 40 octets per packet. With a packet length of 20ms, the IP
headers will require 16kbps of bandwidth in addition to whatever codec is being used.
• Transmission Medium – In order to travel through the IP network, the IP packet is wrapped in another
layer by the physical transmission medium. The transmission medium, such as Ethernet, will add its own
header, checksums, and spacers to the packet. With a packet length of 20ms, the transmission medium
requires additional 15.2kbps of bandwidth to carry the packets to their destination.
• Silence Suppression – You can suppress the transmission of data during periods of silence. This can
reduce the demand for bandwidth by as much as 50 percent. However, it may have a negative impact on
the voice quality. Some users may feel the conversation is not "natural" when artificial comfort noise is
generated during periods of silence.
The following table lists bandwidth requirements for various transmission media with different codecs and
frame sizes. It assumes silence suppression is not turned on. (The same table appears on page 284.)
VoIP Bandwidth requirement for WAN connection varies depending on the type of WAN. Bandwidth
requirement typically is less than Ethernet requirement.
Opening Enterprise Manager
To open Enterprise Manager, use one of the following methods:
• For a single-system installation without a Domain Master, this first method is recommended. From MaxAdmin, select VoIP > Enterprise Network Management. Enterprise Manager opens without a login dialog box.
• For multisite VoIP domain management (not applicable to MaxCS Private Cloud service), from the
Windows Start menu, select All Programs > MAXCS > Enterprise Manager. A login screen opens. (With
this method you can log in to the Domain Master from any member system or remote desktop.)
292
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Overview of Enterprise Manager
User name
Password
Login Domain Via
Server
DomainAdmin
(Logging in as DomainAdmin gives
you rights to change the entire
Enterprise Manager configuration.)
Default: 22222. You can
change the password in
Enterprise Manager.
Note: This password is not the
same as the MaxAdmin
password.
Enter the domain master’s
IP address
Admin@domain master IP address
(A Site Admin who logs into the
Domain Master in this way has the
same rights as DomainAdmin.)
Enter MaxAdmin password
Enter the domain master’s
IP address
Admin@member server IP address
(A Site Admin who logs in this way
can make changes on this member
server only.)
Enter the MaxAdmin
password for the member
server
Enter the member
server’s IP address
Warning! If your MAXCS system is using dynamic IP addressing, you will see the following warning message
when launching Enterprise Manager. Please check the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties of
your server NIC interface and assign a fixed IP address to this server.
When multiple systems are added to the VoIP domain, all member systems need to have both Route Access
Code and IP Trunk Access Code configured. If one or more member systems are not configured properly, a
message opens.
Multisite routing may fail if Route Access Code and IP TrunkAccess Code are not configured.
Overview of Enterprise Manager
After you log in, the Enterprise Manager window opens.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
293
Overview of Enterprise Manager
Change Password
Display Servers
Configure Codec Profiles
Configure Users, Departments
Configure Global Least Cost Routing
Figure 155. The Enterprise Manager window
Click a tab to view or configure settings on that tab. Information on a tab is related to the selected server. Click
buttons in the toolbar to perform configuration tasks. Click a column heading to sort by that column.
Configuration Buttons
• Servers – Displays the VoIP domain name, servers in the system, and server ID length. Lets you add/
remove servers and change the VoIP domain master. Lets you re-route outgoing calls of global extensions
and redirect AltiGen IP phones. Displays the configuration and informational tabs listed in the next section.
• Codec – button lets you configure individual codec profiles – silence suppression, codec, jitter buffer
range, RTP packet length, DTMF delivery, enable/disable SIP early media, and SIP transport.
• User – Displays information about extensions in the VoIP domain and lets you change an extension to
global or local and relocate an extension.
• Department – Lets you define departments in the VoIP domain and assign extensions to departments.
• Global LCR – Lets you add E.164 number patterns and specify source and target sites.
Tabs Displayed with the Servers Button
• Information tab displays information about the selected site and lets you configure a PSTN number for
global extension rerouting as a failover when the TCP/IP network is down. You may also assign an
alternate server to which to redirect global AltiGen IP phones when their primary server is down.
294
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting VoIP Codec Profiles
• IP Networks tab defines IP networks and the bandwidth information for an MAXCS site. Bandwidth usage
control for Internet and intranet can be set up here. If the bandwidth usage exceeds the maximum setting,
the call will not be established.
• IP Dialing Table tab defines the IP dialing table for a MAXCS site. Specified information here includes a
codec profile and a protocol (SIP or H323) for the communication from this site to the selected site.
• IP Codec tab lets you specify an inter-gateway codec and define IP device ranges to which you can assign
a codec profile.
• Number Plan tab displays the number plan information that is set up in MaxAdmin, System Configuration
window, Number Plan tab.
Changing the Enterprise Manager Password
Only a person with DomainAdmin rights can change the Enterprise Manager password. To change the
password, click the Password button at the top of the Enterprise Manager window.
Enter the old password, and the new password. Confirm the password, and click OK.
Setting VoIP Codec Profiles
The codec setting is profile-based. For different IP addresses and protocols, a different preferred codec can
be used. Each codec profile can have its own codec (G.711, G.723, G.729), packet length, and jitter buffer.
The codec profile can be assigned to connectivity with a remote server, IP phone or other VoIP device.
By default, the following IP address ranges (private IP addresses) will use G.711 codec:
• 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
• 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
To open a window where you can set or modify codec profiles, click the Codec button in the Enterprise
Manager toolbar.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
295
Setting VoIP Codec Profiles
Figure 156. Codec profile setting window in Enterprise Manager
Named codec profiles are listed on the left. To create a new profile, click the Add button.
Name the new profile and click OK. Make your changes, and then click OK.
The next table describes the Codec fields.
Parameter
296
Description
Codec Profile Table
Lists codec profiles by name. Select a profile in the table to modify its
settings, then click Apply in the panel where you made the changes.
Click the Add button to add a codec profile. Click the Remove button
to remove the selected profile. You cannot remove the Default profile.
Name
Name of the codec profile. You can modify the name, and click Apply.
The Default profile name cannot be changed.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting VoIP Codec Profiles
Parameter
Description
Codec
There are several options:
G.711 Mu-Law
Prefer G.723.1, support G.729
Prefer G.729, support G.723.1
G.711 A-Law
Prefer G.711 Mu-Law, support G.711 A-Law
Prefer G.711 A-Law, support G.711 Mu-Law
G.711 provides toll quality digital voice encoding, and G.723 and
G.729 use low rate audio encoding to provide near toll quality
performance under clean channel conditions.
G.711/G.723/G.729
Silence Suppression
When silence suppression is enabled, and silence is detected during
a call, MAXCS stops sending packets to the other side. This
decreases the bandwidth requirement, however the voice quality may
be degraded slightly. These are system-wide settings.
G.711/G.723/G.729 Jitter
Buffer Range (ms)
Indicates the delay, in milliseconds, used to buffer G.711/G.723/
G.729 voice packets received from the IP network. Voice packets
sent over the IP network may incur different delays due to network
load or congestion. The jitter buffer helps to smooth out the delay variation in the arriving voice packets and maintain voice quality at the receiving end.
The default values for the jitter buffer for G.711 is 10 min. to 100 max
milliseconds.
The default values for the jitter buffer for G.723 is 30 min. to 480 max
milliseconds.
The default values for the jitter buffer for G.729 is 10 min. to 480 max
milliseconds.
G.711 RTP Packet
Length (ms)
Lets you configure the length of the RTP packets for G.711 in milliseconds. The RTP packet length can be set to 10, 20 or 30 milliseconds.
The smaller the packet length, the larger the bandwidth required.
G.729 RTP Packet
Length (ms)
Lets you configure the length of the RTP packets for G.729 in
milliseconds. The RTP packet length can be set to 10, 20 or 30
milliseconds.
DTMF Delivery
(Applies to SIP protocol
only)
Default – If SIP INFO is used to deliver DTMF.
RFC 2833 – The DTMF pay load is embedded with RTP. Most 3rdparty SIP gateways support this standard.
In band – If DTMF tone is delivered over the voice band. It’s not
reliable over G.711 codec and will not work over G.729/G.723 codec
SIP Early Media
(Applies to SIP protocol
and SIP trunk only)
SIP Early Media allows two SIP devices to communicate before a SIP
call is actually established. It is important for interoperability with the
SIP trunk carrier’s PSTN gateway. If SIP Early Media is not checked,
the caller may not hear the exact ringback tone provided by the CO
(the caller may not hear any ringback tone at all).
Note: When using a SIP trunk as a MaxMobile trunk, you must
enable the SIP Early Media option for the SIP trunk.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
297
Assigning Codec Profiles to IP Addresses
Parameter
SIP Transport
Description
There are several SIP Transport options. Note that security options
TLS and SRTP can be configured for individual IP phone extensions
in the IP Phone Configuration screen. (For more information on security settings, see “SIP Transport” in Table .) Extension-level configuration takes precedence over a codec profile that is assigned in Enterprise Manager. See the next section.
UDP – User Datagram Protocol is a communications protocol that offers a limited amount of service when messages are exchanged between computers in a network that uses the Internet Protocol (IP).
Note: All SIP trunks must use UDP.
TCP – Transmission Control Protocol is a set of rules (protocol) used
along with the Internet Protocol (IP) to send data in the form of message units between computers over the Internet. TCP is known as a
connection-oriented protocol, which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have
been exchanged. TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is
divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the
packets back into the complete message at the other end.
Note: AltiGen phones do not use TCP.
TLS – Secures SIP signaling messages using Transport Layer
Security. (Does not work for IP devices behind NAT; UDP will be
used, instead.)
TLS/SRTP – Adds Secure RTP to Transport Layer Security to secure
SIP-associated media. (Does not work for IP devices behind NAT;
UDP will be used, instead.) (If this option is chosen, the voice stream
always goes through the server.)
Persistent TLS/SRTP – Persistent TLS/SRTP for SIP signaling
messages.
Assigning Codec Profiles to IP Addresses
You can specify what codec profile to use when connecting to the following VoIP devices:
• IP phones on the LAN
• a remote IP phone over WAN
• a remote AltiGen system over WAN
• SIP Trunk service provider over WAN
• multiple gateways on the LAN
The codec profile assigned in the IP Device Range table (shown below) supersedes the codec profile defined
in the IP dialing table if the IP address is duplicated in both tables.
The SIP transport assigned to an extension in the IP Phone Configuration screen takes precedence over a
codec profile with a different SIP transport assigned in Enterprise Manager. If the IP extension supports TLS
and the codec profile does not, then the IP extension policy holds. That way you can configure a range of IP
addresses in the IP dialing table or IP codec, and have only a few IP addresses/extensions support TLS.
If the IP extension has not configured TLS as its transport, and the codec profile supports it, then the codec
profile policy holds.
To set IP address ranges and assign codec profiles to them, in Enterprise Manager click the IP Codec tab.
298
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Assigning Codec Profiles to IP Addresses
By default, all private addresses are set to G.711 codec only. You can add individual IP addresses and address
ranges and assign a codec to each.
Add IP Addresses and Address Ranges and Assign a Codec
1.
Click the Add button in the IP Device Range panel.
2.
Enter an IP address range (for dynamic IP addressing), or enter the same address in each field if this is a
static address. You cannot use the minimum and maximum values (0.0.0.0. and 255.255.255.255).
3.
Click OK.
If you have multiple gateways controlled by a MAXCS host system, you need to configure an Inter Gateway
Codec profile.
To set the codec for a connection among gateways in the same MAXCS server
1.
Select a server in the Global Server Location list on the left side of the window.
2.
In the Codec field, select the codec to use for a connection to this server from the list.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
299
Defining IP Networks
Defining IP Networks
If your server is behind NAT or you need to regulate WAN VoIP sessions, you need to do some configuring on
the IP Networks tab in Enterprise Manager.
The tab allows you to specify the following three items for a single server or for member servers in the VoIP
domain:
• How many VoIP sessions to allow through Public Pipe
• How many VoIP sessions to allow through Intranet Pipe
• NAT support when the server is behind a NAT router
The Public Pipe is the WAN connection to the public Internet, including IP-VPN over WAN.
The Intranet Pipe is the enterprise WAN connection, for example, Frame Relay.
Note:
The VoIP connections through public or enterprise WAN will work without configuring the IP Networks
tab. However, if the total number of VoIP connections exceeds the WAN bandwidth, the voice quality
will be affected for all connections. It is recommended that you set a limit based on the WAN bandwidth
to ensure the voice quality.
To configure IP networks, click the IP Networks tab.
Defining Your Network
If you need to configure either bandwidth control or NAT support, you have to define your network first. These
are the guidelines:
300
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Defining IP Networks
• You must define your LOCAL network IP address range. When a Pipe is defined as Local, it tells the system that the configured IP address range is not subject to bandwidth control. If the AltiGen system and
this Local Network are behind the same NAT router, you need to check the Private Network check box.
This tells the system that VoIP connection to this address range does not require IP address translation,
which is replacing the system's private IP address with a public address when sending VoIP packets to
outside devices.
• If you have an intranet linking multiple locations, you must enter the IP address range and define the Pipe
as Intranet. If the AltiGen system and this intranet are behind the same NAT router, you need to check
the Private Network check box.
• If you have VPN service over public WAN, you must enter the VPN IP address range and define the Pipe
as Public. If the AltiGen system and this VPN IP addresses are behind the same NAT router, you need
to check the Private Network check box.
• All undefined IP addresses fall into the Public Pipe range and are subject to bandwidth control if the public
pipe bandwidth control is enabled.
Note:
When MAXCS is behind a NAT router, and you do not check the Private Network check box, IP
phones may not function.
Define an Address Range
1.
Click the Add button in the IP Network panel.
2.
Fill in a range of IP addresses.
3.
Select the pipe for this IP address range.
4.
If this is a private network, check the Private Network check box. Click OK.
To edit a network you’ve added, select it and click the Edit button. To remove it, select it and click the Remove
button.
Configuring a Public or Intranet Pipe
If you want to regulate how many VoIP sessions can be connected to the server through a Public or Intranet
Pipe,
1.
In the Public Pipe panel, check the Enable box.
2.
Enter the maximum WAN bandwidth you want to allocate to VoIP connections. The system will calculate
the maximum sessions for each type of codec automatically.
3.
You can change the G.711 sessions by using the Up/Down arrow button.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
301
Defining IP Networks
Notes
• When calculating the maximum sessions for each codec, the system uses the following bandwidth requirement to ensure that each session has some safety margin:
G.711 – 90 kbps
G.729 – 30 kbps
G.723 – 24 kbps
• It is recommended that you use 20ms frame size for G.711 and G.729 when configuring a Codec Profile.
• When different IP devices using various codecs connect to the server through a Public Pipe, the system
will aggregate the total bandwidth of all connections. If the total bandwidth exceeds that specified in the
Bandwidth for VoIP box, the system will reject additional connection requests.
Configuration example
Suppose your company has a T1 line configured as half voice PRI and half data service. There are 12 remote
employees using IP phones connecting to the AltiGen system. Because bandwidth is limited, you would like to
regulate the bandwidth used by VoIP. You have set up remote IP phones using G.729 with 20ms frame, and
you want to limit the number of concurrent VoIP sessions to 6. If you enter 180 in the Bandwidth for VoIP
field, the system will show that 6 G.729 sessions are allowed.
Configuring MAXCS Behind NAT
Your MAXCS system should be inside a firewall/NAT router. If your MAXCS is supporting remote IP phones,
IPTalk or AltiClients, you need to configure MAXCS and the NAT router to make MAXCS work properly behind
NAT. Port forwarding configuration on the firewall/NAT router is required. If you’re not sure how to configure
your firewall/NAT router, please consult your firewall/NAT router manual or vendor. AltiGen Technical Support
will not be able to help with this.
Important: If your firewall/NAT router supports SIP, you need to FULLY disable this feature on the firewall/
NAT router, or conflicts may occur between MAXCS and the firewall/NAT router. In this case, remote IP phones might not work or might behave strangely. Again, please consult the firewall/NAT
manual to find out how to do this.
Take the following steps:
1.
Make sure the MAXCS system uses a private static IP address, for example, 10.10.0.8. Do not use DHCP
on the MAXCS system.
2.
Define the range of the local IP addresses (see “Define an Address Range” on page 301). Make sure the
MAXCS system is included in the range. If the range is not defined correctly, all the IP phones will not
work.
302
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Defining the IP Dialing Table
3.
Set local IP network ranges to private. Multiple private networks can be added.
4.
On the IP Networks tab, in the NAT Support panel, check Enable SIP NAT support and Enable H323
NAT support. Except, if the NAT router is H.323-aware (for example, a Fortinet router) do not enable
H323 NAT support.
Do not check
Enter the Public IP address of the router in the Public IP Addresses panel. (In the example above, the
address is 209.220.14.8.) Do not check Enable Virtual IP Addresses Support.
5.
Configure the NAT/firewall to forward TCP ports 10025, 10027, 10032, 10037, 10050, 10064, 1720 and
UDP ports 69, 5060, 10060 to MAXCS.
6.
Configure the NAT router to forward to MAXCS UDP ports 49152 + gwid * 512 ~ 49152 + (gwid * 512 +
ipresno * 2) where gwid is the gateway id and ipres number is the number of the IP resource channels in
the system. (See note below for an easier way to figure the port ranges.)
For the MAX1000 system, it would be UDP ports, from 49152~49211 (30 IP resource channels).
Note: An easy way to find out the RTP/TCP port range(s) for SIP and H.323 is to look in the Current
Resource Statistics window in MaxAdmin (View > Current Resource Statistics). All the ports are
listed in the Local Ports column.
Implementation details
After you complete the NAT configurations, the system will translate the sending party's IP address with the
defined public IP address instead of the system's private IP address. When the remote IP device sends VoIP
packets to the defined public address, all packets will be routed to the system's provided IP address by the
NAT router.
Defining the IP Dialing Table
The IP Dialing Table is used for creating location-based VoIP routing in the enterprise. It supports H.323 and
SIP dual protocol.
To use a MAXCS-to-MAXCS connection for VoIP, you need to configure the routing in the IP Dialing Table for
each MAXCS system.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
303
Defining the IP Dialing Table
Notes
• The IP Dialing Table is disabled unless there is a VoIP board installed.
• You must assign an IP Trunk Access code (System Configuration > Number Plan tab)
• You must set the VoIP codec profiles.
To manage the IP dialing table, click the IP Dialing Table tab in Enterprise Manager:
Figure 157. IP Dialing Table tab in Enterprise Manager
The left side of the window displays the VoIP domain name, the server ID length, and the name, ID and
statuses of the global servers in this Domain.
To add an entry to the IP Dialing Table, click the Add button below the table.
304
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Defining the IP Dialing Table
Define the attributes for the entry:
Parameter
Description
Server ID
A unique dialing number to connect to the remote server. The server
could be MAXCS, a 3rd-party VoIP gateway, or an AltiGen-certified
3rd-party VoIP device.
Server Name
A descriptive name of up to 15 characters to identify the server. This
name may be used by Caller ID.
Server IP Address
The remote server’s address. If the server has multiple IP addresses,
enter the one that other servers will use to communicate to this system.
This IP address format is recommended over DNS names, since with
the IP address, the application does not need to resolve the name.
DNS name is also posted in this field.
Remote Ext. Length
The length of extension digits at the remote location. Valid entries are
None – 7, with “None” meaning not specified. Specifying the remote
extension length is optional but highly recommended, since this information tells the system how long to wait for another entry before
sending the digits.
Dialing Scheme
Overlapping (ATGN) allows the terminal to omit part of the digits required to complete a call while buffering the remaining digits. This results in faster response time, but it only works if the other end is also
a MAXCS system.
Enbloc allows the system to buffer all of the digits required to
complete a call.
Protocol
SIP Select if destination supports SIP protocol.
H323 Select if destination supports H.323 protocol.
Codec
Select which codec profile to use. If the selected profile is incompatible with the remote end, the call will not go through.
If you create two items that point to the same IP address, they must
also use the same codec. Specifying a different codec is an invalid
configuration. MAXCS will always use the codec defined in the first
item.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
305
The Multi-site VoIP Domain
Parameter
Description
Hop Off Allowed
Choosing Yes allows calls from this remote system to hop off to the
PSTN by using the trunks in this system. Hop-off capability can be
enabled or disabled on a per IP Dialing Table Location basis.
SIP Source Port
Used by UDP only. Choose the SIP source port.
SIP Destination Port
Used by UDP only. Is 10060, by default.
Publish as a global entry
If you are adding a system or 3rd-party VoIP device that is not part of
the VoIP domain, but you want it to be seen by all servers in the domain, check this box. (The entry will appear as “Global” in the Type
column.) You can also globalize it later by selecting the entry in the
IP Dialing Table and clicking the Publish as Global button below the
table.
The Multi-site VoIP Domain
Note:
This feature is not applicable to the MaxCS Private Cloud service.
A group of AltiGen systems can form a VoIP domain where they share the same global extension directory and
call routing rules. The VoIP domain is based on VoIP framework and uses IP tie-trunks to interconnect among
different sites.
A domain is created in MaxAdmin. Here, a system is designated as the domain Master. Other AltiGen systems
can then be added to a VoIP domain.
The VoIP domain Master maintains global configurations and propagates the configurations to all the members
belonging to this domain automatically. Any changes in the global configuration are propagated in real time to
the other members in the VoIP domain.
Note:
A multi-site installation requires an AltiGen Enterprise license.
Creating a Multi-site VoIP Domain
To create a multi-site VoIP domain and designate a system as the domain Master:
1.
306
Select VoIP > Multi-Site Domain Configuration. The Enterprise Location Manager window opens.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
The Multi-site VoIP Domain
The name of the server appears in the Location Name field, and the name of your AltiGen product
appears in the Switch Type field (MAXCS ACC or MAXCS ACM). The domain name is blank, and the
server role is currently Stand-alone.
2.
Check the Allow this server to be added to domain check box.
3.
Enter a Domain Name and a Member Key.
The Member Key will be the security password when the Domain Admin adds this location into the
domain. To reduce the complexity of administration, you can use the same key for all member systems.
The Enterprise Location Manager window will look similar to the next figure.
4.
Click Create domain and join as master.
5.
Enter the IP address of this system. If this system has multiple IP addresses, enter the one that can
communicate with other member servers.
6.
Click OK and wait for 5 to 60 seconds, depending on the size and configuration of the system. The display
in the Enterprise Location Manager window changes to show the name of the VoIP domain and this server
as Master.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
307
The Multi-site VoIP Domain
Declaring Additional Servers for the VoIP Domain
Additional servers are added to the VoIP domain in Enterprise Manager, but first you must “declare” these
servers and assign them a member key in MaxAdmin. To do so:
1.
Log on to the member server you want to declare.
2.
Select VoIP > Multi-Site Domain Configuration. The Enterprise Location Manager window opens.
The name of the server and the name of the AltiGen product appear in the top box.
3.
Check the Allow this server to be added to domain check box.
4.
Enter the name of the VoIP domain that you want this server to be a part of.
5.
Enter a member key for this server. The Member Key is the security password when the Domain Admin
adds this server into the domain. To reduce the complexity of administration, you can use the same key
for all member systems.
6.
Click Apply, then click Close.
308
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Working with Servers in the Domain
Repeat these steps for each server you want to make available to the VoIP domain. To actually add a server
to the domain using Enterprise Manager, see “Adding a Server to a VoIP Domain” on page 309.
Working with Servers in the Domain
In the Global Server Location panel in Enterprise Manager, you can add a server to the VoIP domain by using
the Add button in the panel, remove a selected server from the VoIP domain by using the Remove button, and
you can set the master server, by selecting a server and clicking the Set as Master button. Before you can
add a server to the VoIP domain, you must have declared it in MaxAdmin (see “Declaring Additional Servers
for the VoIP Domain” on page 308). These are the fields in the Global Server Location panel:
Parameter
Description
Domain Name
The name of the VoIP domain.
Server ID Length
Length is from 1-3. See “Changing the Server ID Length” on page 21
for detailed information.
Global Server Location
Displays the ID, Name, and Status (active/inactive) of the servers in
the VoIP domain.
Master – One Domain system must be assigned as Domain Master to
propagate configuration data to member MAXCS systems. The master acts as a central server to accept the connection, synchronize
change from one site to the other sites, and authenticate users.
Changing the Server ID Length
The Server ID is used for the following two purposes:
• Identifying member systems in the VoIP domain
• Mapping to a remote system's IP address in the IP dialing table for system-to-system dialing
Depending on the number of systems that will be added to the VoIP domain and the number of entries in the
IP dialing table, the Server ID Length can be set to 1, 2, or 3 digits.
Caution!
The Server ID Length can be changed. However, if this number is changed, the server IDs are all
altered. If you increase the length, the number 0 is added to the front of the server IDs. For example, if you change the length from 2 to 3, original ID 02 and 27 will become 002 and 027
respectively. If you change the length from 3 to 2, the original IDs 112 and 311 will become 12 and
11. It is advisable to keep the original length. If you are not sure about future expansion, using a
3-digit length is advised.
Adding a Server to a VoIP Domain
Important: Before you add a server to the domain, you need to make sure that the System ID (specified in
MaxAdmin, System Configuration tab) is not the same as another member server’s System ID.
Enterprise Manager will use the System ID to build a unique identifier in the multisite database.
Once a server is joined to a domain, you cannot change the System ID in MaxAdmin.
1.
Click the Add button in the Global Server Location panel.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
309
Working with Servers in the Domain
2.
Define the attributes for the server, and click OK:
Parameter
Definition
Name
Enter the name of the server.
Address
Enter the IP address of the server.
Server ID
A unique dialing number to connect to this server.
Member Key
Enter this server’s member key. (Configured in this server’s
Enterprise Location Manager: VoIP > MultiSite Domain
Configuration).
After you add a member server to the Domain, an entry is also added to the IP dialing table and propagated
to all members automatically.
In the Global Server Location panel, the status will show "Active" if the Domain master communicates to the
member successfully.
In the event that you need to shut down the Domain Master for a period of time, you can change the Master
role to another member system by selecting one of the member systems and clicking the Set as Master button.
Rejoining a Server to the VoIP Domain
If a slave server crashes, or for some other reason disconnects and never returns by itself into the domain, you
will have to manually rejoin it to the VoIP domain:
1.
Rebuild the slave, if necessary.
2.
In the VoIP > Multi-Site Domain Configuration window, make sure the slave’s Server Role is Standalone and that the domain name is correct.
3.
The System ID of this slave should be the same as it was before it became disconnected from the domain.
(This ID is set in MaxAdmin: in System Configuration > General tab.)
310
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Working with Servers in the Domain
4.
In Enterprise Manager, Global Server Location panel, select the slave and click the Rejoin button to
synchronize the slave with the domain.
A dialog box opens.
5.
Input the address and member key, and click OK.
Setting an Alternate Server for AltiGen IP Phones
In a VoIP domain, you can set an alternate server to which global AltiGen IP phones will be registered when
their own server (primary server) experiences a problem that interrupts phone service. The IP phones will register to the alternate server. This applies to a workgroup, as well. Switchover must be enabled for the individual
IP phones/groups in Enterprise Manager (User button > Resolve tab). But before you can do this, you must
set an alternate server.
Notes:
• Because of its role in the domain, the domain master cannot use this feature.
• This feature does not apply to extensions using IPTalk.
• Make sure the alternate server has enough licenses, such as agent licenses, station licenses, and so on.
To set an alternate server,
1.
Click the Servers button, and then the Information tab.
2.
In the AltiGen IP Phone Redirect panel at the bottom of the tab, check Enable Switchover to Alternate
Server.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
311
Working with Servers in the Domain
3.
Select an alternate server from the list.
4.
Click Apply.
(After you click Apply, the current active server name will appear in the Current Active Server box. This
name is not editable.)
With the alternate server assigned, you can now configure individual extensions/groups for redirection. See
“Redirecting AltiGen IP Phones When a Server Is Down” on page 319.
Note:
If the alternate server assignment is removed from the configuration above, the redirection
configuration is removed from all extensions and workgroups to which you assigned this feature (User
button > Resolve tab).
Note:
If Native VM Integration with Microsoft Exchange is also configured, then both the primary and alternate servers need to have the same dial plan configured in the Microsoft Exchange server, so that
users who have extensions flagged for redirection can access their voice messages from both the primary and alternate servers.
If the Primary or Alternate Server Is Behind NAT
When you configure the redirection feature for AltiGen IP phones, the primary server sends the IP address of
the primary and alternate servers to the IP phone. The IP phone may run on the public or local network, and
the primary server or alternate server may run behind NAT. So to support a server behind NAT, the primary
server sends the NAT IP address or local private address according to the IP phone's IP address. If the IP
phone's IP address is in a local network for the server, the primary server sends the private address, otherwise
it sends the NAT address.
To configure for NAT,
1.
In Enterprise Manager, click the Servers button > IP Networks tab.
2.
In the NAT Support panel, check Enable SIP NAT Support.
3.
Configure the NAT address.
4.
In the IP Network panel, configure the IP range of the local network or public network.
When Will Switchover Happen?
If the current active system is the primary server, switchover will happen under one of the following
conditions:
312
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Managing Domain Users
• Network error on the primary server or the primary server is down. IP phones cannot connect to the primary server. After one minute of retrying, the IP phones will register to the alternate server. At that time,
the status of the primary server is "Disconnected" or "Softswitch Offline".
• Softswitch service on the primary server is down. The status of the primary server is "Softswitch Offline".
• IP phone service on the primary server is down. IP phones cannot register to the primary server. After one
minute of retrying, the IP phones will register to the alternate server. At that time, the status of the primary
server is "Fail".
• Default gateway on the primary server is down. The status of the primary server is "Fail".
• Manual switch from Enterprise Manager. The status of the primary server is "Standby".
When the primary server is recovered, the status is "Standby".
If the current active system is the alternate server, only clicking the Switch Back to Home Server button
in Enterprise Manager can switch the control from the alternate server back to the primary server. Before
manually switching back, the status of the primary server should be "Standby". After you have manually
switched back, the status of the primary server changes to "Active".
Note:
Unlike normal relocation, redirect can be executed only on the destination site.
Managing Domain Users
Click the User button in the toolbar to:
• Display all extensions from all VoIP domain member systems: extension number, name, type, home
server, and scope. The scope of an extension is discussed in the following section.
• Resolve conflicting extensions and groups to global user or back to local user (on the Resolve tab).
• Relocate an extension from one location to another location with optional voice mail (on the Resolve tab).
The General tab displays read-only information about the selected extension.
When a global extension is added to a member system, this extension can be propagated to other networked
systems in the VoIP domain automatically. This extension is recognized as a remote extension by other systems. When a call is made to a remote extension, it is redirected to the remote system over IP automatically.
Note:
No virtual extension configuration is needed to forward the call. The Enterprise VoIP domain uses the
User directory combined with the IP dialing table to resolve multi-site routing.
An extension can call a remote extension when invoking basic features such as an extension-to-extension call,
call transfer, conference, Zoomerang, and so on. Advanced features, such as silent monitoring and barge-in,
between sites are NOT supported.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
313
Managing Domain Users
PSTN Failover When the TCP/IP Network is Down
Enterprise call routing works with a SIP-tie trunk, but at times the TCP/IP network may be down. To provide
failover for these times, you can assign a PSTN number to each MAXCS in Enterprise Manager. The default
PSTN number is the main number of each MAXCS site.
To enable global extension rerouting,
1.
In Enterprise Manager click the Servers button, and then the Information tab.
2.
In the Global Extension Re-Routing panel, check Re-route outgoing calls when SIP tie-trunks are
unavailable.
3.
Enter a PSTN number in the PSTN Number for Re-routed Incoming Calls field, if different from the main
number of the MAXCS site. If nothing is entered in this field, the main number of the MAXCS site is used.
If you enter a number, use the E.164 format.
When failover is needed, MAXCS dials the destination site number with the proper call prefix and area code
or country code. On the call destination site, the call comes into the AA. The AA receives the extension number
the call is directed to and rings the extension.
Note:
The rerouted call may hear 1 or 2 seconds of auto-attendant announcement before the call is sent to
the extension.
The Scope of an Extension in the VoIP Domain
When an extension is added to a system in MaxAdmin, Extension Configuration window, it can be defined as
Global by checking the Global extension box. If this box is not checked, the newly added extension is a local
extension.
The scope of an extension shows the relationship of the extension to other member systems. In Enterprise
Manager, a selected extension’s scope appears on the Resolve tab.
You may see any of the following in the Scope column:
314
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Managing Domain Users
• Global – The extension has been published to all member systems within the same VoIP domain. Every
extension in the domain can dial and ring this number.
• Local – The extension has not been published to the VoIP domain. Only extensions in the same system
can dial and ring this number.
• Not Found – The extension is not a Global extension and is not created in the selected system as Local.
The extension number is used by other member systems as a local extension.
• Remote – The word Remote in the Scope column shows that the selected system maintains this extension in the extension list because it is a Global extension of another member system. If you see an extension whose Type is Remote in the Extension Scope window, you can only see the extension information.
You cannot configure any tabs because it is created in another system.
• Conflict – Conflict happens when one of the following situations has occurred:
•
The same extension number exists as a Global extension in one member system and as a Local
extension in other systems.
•
The same extension number was created as a Global extension in different systems before the VoIP domain was formed.
The following example may help you conceptualize the multi-site extension scope.
Suppose you have three systems in different locations connected over the IP network. The numbering for
System A is 1xx; System B is 2xx, and System C is 3xx.
System A is configured as the VoIP domain Master. Assuming there is no conflict , the following table
shows the Scope relationship of Global vs. Remote:
System A
(Domain Master)
Ext
System B
System C
100
Global
Remote
Remote
200
Remote
Global
Remote
300
Remote
Remote
Global
In the event that multiple systems have a same extension or group number created, the following situations
may occur:
Ext
System A
System B
System C
Scope
Note
401
Local
Not Found
Not Found
Local
1
402
Local
Local
Not Found
Local
2
403
Global
Local
Local
Conflict
3
404
Global
Global
Local
Conflict
4
1.
Extension 401 is created in System A for local purposes. Users in Systems B and C cannot dial and ring
extension 401.
2.
Extension 402 is created in both Systems A and B. You may intentionally set it up this way so that System
A and B users can dial 402 for their local purposes. Ext. 402 may be used for connecting to a paging
device, for example.
3.
Extension 403 is created in all systems. It is defined as Global when created in System A and not defined
as Global when created in Systems B and C. This conflict requires resolution, or else System B and C
users cannot dial to the Global extension in System A.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
315
Managing Domain Users
4.
Extension 404 is created in Systems A and B as Global prior to the creation of the VoIP domain. This
conflict also requires resolution to determine which system will host the Global extension.
Changing an Extension’s Scope from Local to Global
If you need to resolve a conflict by making a Local extension into a Global extension, follow these steps:
1.
Select the extension in the User panel, and click the Resolve tab.
2.
Select the server name/extension where you would like the Global extension to reside.
3.
Click the Change to Global button.
Note:
You must take the voice mail box and extension configuration into consideration when you change an
extension to Global. In making this change, you will be deleting the voice mail box and extension settings on the home system of the “other” Local extension. A warning box will prompt you for confirmation.
Changing an Extension’s Scope from Global to Local
If you want to change an extension's scope from Global to Local, you can highlight the extension and click the
Change All Global to Local button. This extension's scope in other member systems will be impacted after
Global is changed to Local. Using the previous case as an example, you may encounter one of the following
situations when changing an extension's scope from Global to Local.
Situation 1: One Global and no conflict
Before you make the change, extension 100’s scope is as follows:
Ext.
100
316
System A
Global
System B
Remote
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
System C
Remote
Managing Domain Users
After you change extension 100 to Local, the scope of 100 will be:
Ext.
100
Note:
System A
Local
System B
Not Found
System C
Not Found
After you make the change, users in Systems B and C cannot dial and ring extension 100. Only System A users can call local extension 100.
Situation 2: One or more Global with conflict
Before you make the change, the scope of extensions 403 and 404 is as follows:
Ext.
System A
System B
System C
403
Global
Local
Local
404
Global
Global
Local
After you change the two extensions to Local, their scope will be:
Ext.
Note:
System A
System B
System C
403
Local
Local
Local
404
Local
Local
Local
After you make the change, extensions 403 and 404 can be dialed only by the users in their own
system.
Relocating a Global Extension
The administrator can relocate a global extension from one system to another. In addition, a user may be allowed to relocate a global extension by using the feature code #27. To allow a user to use this feature, check
the appropriate check box in the Relocation panel on the Resolve tab. The behavior of this feature differs, depending on whether an analog or IP phone is being used. (See page 319.)
Note:
The check box is available only if a global extension is selected and that extension has no conflict.
User can relocate
extension, if
checked
Admin can always
relocate extension
When a global extension (extension 1001, in this example) is moved from site A to site B, this is what happens:
• The following configurations are replicated from site A to site B:
• First Name
• Last Name
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
317
Managing Domain Users
•
•
•
•
•
Password
Extension Number
DID Number
Dial by Name
Disable Mailbox option (Extension Configuration, Mail Management tab)
• Site A marks extension 1001 as removed and adds it to a Relocated Extension List (REL). The
configuration of extension 1001 is still remembered in site A, even though it appears to be removed.
• Site B creates extension 1001. If extension 1001 is found in site B’s REL, the extension 1001 will be restored in site B. However, the fields listed above will be overwritten with the settings of site A’s extension
1001. If extension 1001 is not found in site B’s REL, a new extension 1001 will be created in site B. The
fields listed above will be set with site A’s extension 1001 settings. The remaining fields of extension 1001
in site B are set with default values.
For the administrator to relocate a global extension,
1.
Select the extension in the User list. The Relocation panel shows where the extension is located.
2.
From the To box, select a different system for the extension.
3.
To move the extension’s voice mail along with the extension, check the Relocate VM check box. Then
select either Relocate VM Now or Relocate VM after x hour(s).
Note: Because moving the voice mail requires network bandwidth, you may want it to move when system
usage is low. The first time the voice mail is moved to a specific location, it can take hours for all
the voice mails to be moved. Thereafter, only new voice mails are moved (because the old ones
are still there, backed up), so subsequent moves take a shorter time.
VM files are transferred by HTTP protocol using TCP port 10043. The administrator can configure the
firewall/router to limit the bandwidth on port 10043, so that the voice mail transferring will not impact the
voice quality over IP.
Note: If you do not move the voice mail, the VM files will be deleted and cannot be recovered. (When the
user relocates an extension using #27, the voice mail is moved also. The user cannot choose
whether or not to move the voice mail.)
4.
Click Relocate.
Notes on Relocating a Global Extension
• The phone user can start using the voice mail during VM relocation, but the voice mail count will keep
increasing until the relocation is complete.
• If extension 1001 is relocated from site A to site B, and the administrator creates a local extension 1001
in site A, the extension 1001 will be removed from the REL. Later, if the administrator removes the local
extension 1001 and relocates global extension 1001 back to site A, this extension cannot be restored to
its original settings.
• When an extension is relocated to site B for the first time, the administrator or the user should configure
the Call Restriction, Speed Dial list, and so on, for one time in site B. These configurations will be stored
on site B. Later, if the extension is relocated to site B again, no additional configuration is needed, as the
previous configuration will be restored.
• If multiple systems in the VoIP domain have a PRI interface, it’s possible that DID numbers could be
duplicated. For example, say the DID number for extension 1001 is configured as 250. In this case, the
DID number 5102520250 and 4087899250 will ring extension 1001. To ensure that this doesn’t happen,
you can do one of two things: (1) Make sure the DID numbers are not duplicated; (2) Ask the CO to send
more digits (to decrease the likelihood of identical DID numbers).
318
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Managing Domain Users
Relocating a Global Extension Using #27 on Analog Phone vs IP Phone
• Analog phone: The phone must be off hook. The user presses #27 and follows the voice prompts. User
must press # after inputting the password.
• IP phone: The IP phone must be on hook. The user presses #27, and then inputs the global extension
number and password. The global extension is then relocated to this IP phone.
If system B does not have a prior record of this extension, it will create a new extension with known
information and the following settings:
• Enable IP Extension and Dynamic IP Address settings will be selected automatically (in MaxAdmin,
Extension Configuration window).
• The newly created extension will use the default voice mail, mail forwarding, notification, call handling,
restriction, and monitor list settings (MaxAdmin, Extension Configuration window).
Note: The administrator needs to make the proper changes for this user when the global extension
is relocated by the user.
• When this Global extension user returns to his home office, all settings are stored in the REL database.
The administrator does not need to change these settings when the user presses #27 to relocate the
extension the next time.
Relocating More Than One Global Extension
When more than one global extension is being relocated at the same time, and voice mail is also being
relocated, the voice mail of the extension that was relocated first will be copied over completely to the
relocation site, before copying begins for the voice mail of the second extension, and so on.
The extension, itself, is relocated immediately.
Redirecting AltiGen IP Phones When a Server Is Down
Relocating a global extension, described in the preceding section, is intended to serve employees who are
physically relocating to another office for a time. Administrators can also configure global IP phones to register
to another server in the VoIP domain when their primary server goes down for some reason. All configured
phones switch over at the same time. When their primary server returns to service, the administrator can switch
the phones back to their primary server by clicking the Switch Back to Home Server button in the Servers >
Information tab. For more complete information, see “Setting an Alternate Server for AltiGen IP Phones” on
page 311.
Notes:
• When you redirect AltiGen IP phones, voice mail is not moved. Otherwise, the extension configuration
changes of the redirect feature are the same as they are with normal relocation.
• If Native VM Integration with Microsoft Exchange is also configured, users can access their voice
messages from both the primary and alternate servers, if both have the same dial plan configured in the
Microsoft Exchange server.
• Redirection does not work when an extension user is using IPTalk.
Before configuring individual IP phones to redirect from their primary server to an alternate server, an alternate
server must be assigned in Servers > Information tab > AltiGen IP Phone Redirect panel. The Redirect
option is not available until an alternate server is assigned. Only IP phones that are global and have no conflict
with the extensions of other sites can be configured to redirect.
To configure an IP phone to redirect,
1.
In Enterprise Manager click Users button > Resolve tab.
2.
Select a global IP phone whose server has an alternate server assigned.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
319
Configuring Departments in a Multi-site VoIP Domain
Note: The AltiGen IP extension may need to be pre-configured on the alternate server to match its configuration on the home server, so that it works as expected. (For example, the alternate server may
have a different call restriction policy. The extension on the alternate server may belong to a different workgroup. The greetings may be different even if the extension number is the same.)
3.
Check the Enable Switchover to Alternate Server check box.
Note:
If an extension configured with the redirection feature is manually relocated (by the system
administrator in Enterprise Manager or by the user pressing #27), the redirection configuration is
dropped on the new site. If the extension is manually relocated back to its original site, the feature is
recovered.
Changes to AltiGen IP Phone When Redirect Is Configured
After the redirection feature is configured, the IP phone will receive the configuration of the primary and
alternate server address, and store them in its local flash memory. Once it has been configured for redirection,
the IP phone’s “AW Server” address will be that of the primary server. The user can view the address on the
IP phone (Menu > System > AW Server) but cannot configure it. When redirect is enabled, "Primary Server"
and "Alternate Server" are added to the phone’s System menu. They are read-only.
Configuring Departments in a Multi-site VoIP Domain
In a VoIP domain, departments can be defined and added to extensions. An extension in one MAXCS system
can be assigned to only one department. However, the same extension number in different MAXCS systems
can be assigned to different departments. A department can also be assigned to a global extension and can
be seen across the Enterprise domain.
In MaxAdmin, the department field can be seen on the Extension General tab. In MaxCommunicator, the
department is displayed on the Directory and Monitor tabs. In Enterprise Manager, the department is
displayed in the User list. Departments can also be seen in CDR Search.
To define a department and assign or remove members from a department, click the Department button.
320
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring Departments in a Multi-site VoIP Domain
Figure 158. Department configuration
To define a department,
1.
Click the Add button at the bottom of the Department panel.
2.
Enter a department name and a description, if desired, and click OK.
To configure extensions for departments,
1.
Select a department in the Department list.
2.
To add non-member extensions to the department, select the extensions and click Add.
3.
To delete extensions from the Member Extensions list, select the extensions, and click Remove. To
remove all member extensions from a department, click Remove All.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
321
Configuring Global Least Cost Routing
Configuring Global Least Cost Routing
Global LCR allows you to save on toll charges by making long distance or international calls through a VoIP
domain member system. The target system will function like a PSTN gateway for other member systems to
hop-off. For example, suppose you have two systems in the U.S. and one system in the U.K. configured as
VoIP domains. When users in the U.S. dial country code 44, you want the call to be dialed though the system
in the U.K. to its PSTN network.
Global LCR has higher priority than local outcall routing. The system will check the Global LCR entries first
before the call is handled by the local system's outcall routing rules.
Before you configure Global LCR, you need to evaluate the following conditions:
• How many concurrent calls will be routed through the target system?
• Does the target system have enough PSTN trunks to support the entire VoIP domain?
• Does the target system have enough WAN bandwidth to support system-to-system and PSTN hop-off
calls?
Before you configure Global LCR, you need to make sure the following settings are properly configured in MaxAdmin:
• Both systems need to have the route access code configured on the Number Plan tab in System
Configuration. (The user has to dial the route access code + the phone number to use Global LCR.)
• The target system needs to have the hop-off restriction reference properly configured. The reference
extension is set on the Call Restriction tab in System Configuration, and then that reference extension
cannot have Internal Calls Only checked on the Restriction tab of Extension Configuration.
To configure Global Least Cost routing,
1.
Click the Global LCR Button.
2.
On the Global LCR screen, click the Add button.
322
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
When Information May Be Out of Sync
3.
Fill in the dialog box, and click OK.
Parameter
4.
Description
Enable
Check this check box to enable the configuration.
E.164 Number Pattern
E.164 is the ITU standard format for international telephone numbers.
Enter a country code and area code. For example, the number pattern
for a site in Fremont, Calif., would be 1510 (the country code 1, followed
by the Fremont area code 510).
Calling From
Select the server from which the call originates, or select All Servers.
Transit Through
Select the server that receives the call.
After adding a route, click Edit, check the Enable check box, and click OK to activate the Global LCR
route.
To edit an entry made to the Global Least Cost Routing table, select the entry you want to change, and click
the Edit button. Make your changes, and click OK.
When Information May Be Out of Sync
If a server is down for any length of time, such that changes may have been made in the VoIP domain and the
server is now out of sync with the Master, you need to update the server manually. In the server’s MaxAdmin,
select VoIP > Multi-Site Domain Configuration, and click the Replicate from Domain button. This brings
the server up-to-date with the Master.
If the server is still not seeing all the information it should (this would be rare), click VoIP > Refresh Enterprise
Configuration.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
323
When Information May Be Out of Sync
324
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
27
System Report Management
MAXCS provides a System Summary report, an IP Cumulative Traffic Statistics report, and an SNMP (Simple
Network Management Protocol) configuration screen, all available from the Report menu.
System Summary Report
The System Summary report provides summary information on extensions, trunks, and workgroups configured
in the system. To open the System Summary report window, select Report > System Summary, or click the
Summary button on the toolbar.
Figure 159. System Summary window
• Extension Summary – Configured extensions in the system, including Extension number, Last Name,
First Name, SMTP/POP3 E-mail name, Slot (Logical board ID), and Channel.
• Group Summary – Configured workgroups and hunt groups in the system. When you select a group,
agents belonging to that group are displayed in the Member window.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
325
Chapter 27: System Report Management
• Trunk Summary – Configured trunks in the system, including trunk location (Board ID : Channel Number)
and trunk access code assignment.
• Messaging Usage – Message count and storage usage for each mail box. Click the Refresh button to
update the message count and storage size information.
You can print this report by clicking the Print button.
IP Cumulative Traffic Statistics
To view a report of all cumulative IP traffic, click Reports > IP Traffic Statistics. The window shows IP trunk
traffic information for all calls:
Figure 160. IP Cumulative Traffic Statistics window
This window displays the following data:
Parameter
Description
Internet Address
The IP address of the VoIP system or device.
Packets Sent
Number of voice packets sent to other systems over the public or private IP network.
Packets Received
Number of voice packets received from other systems over the public or private IP
network.
Bytes Sent
Total size (in bytes) of all voice packets sent to other systems over the public or private
IP network.
Bytes Received
Total size (in bytes) of all voice packets received from other systems over the public or
private IP network.
Packets Lost
Number of voice packets that have been lost due to prolonged delays, network
congestion, or routing failure.
Average Jitter
Average length of delay per voice packet in milliseconds. This figure should stay under
100 milliseconds. A higher figure indicates a longer average delay. This number can
be used to measure the quality of service on the network that connects the source and
destination sites.
The difference between the Current Resource Statistics window and the IP Cumulative Traffic Statistics
window is that the former shows figures only for the active call (Current Traffic) on a particular IP trunk of the
local MAXCS system while the other window shows figures for all calls combined (cumulative traffic).
326
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Using SNMP
Resetting Cumulative Statistics
You can reset the IP Cumulative Traffic Statistics by clicking the Reset button. Also, this window
automatically resets all fields to 0 when the MAXCS system is shut down and restarted. Statistics gathered
before the reset are not saved.
Using SNMP
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used in network management systems to monitor networkattached devices for conditions that warrant administrative attention.
This MAXCS SNMP configuration, used with a third-party management console (see next section), helps you
see the MAXCS status, so you can use MAXCS more securely. Using an SNMPv3 agent, MAXCS sends
SNMP traps to the management console when alarming conditions are detected.
Note:
SNMP traps are sent by the AltiGen services SPServ (Softswitch up, Softswitch down traps), AltiKeep
(warm start trap), and AltiServ (all other traps), so those services must be started, or the traps will not
be sent.
SNMP Management Console
To use SNMP, you need an SNMP management console that is SNMPv3-supported for receiving and
collection. AltiGen recommends MG-Soft Trap Ringer Professional Edition, available from MGSoft
Corporation, at http://www.mg-soft.com/tringer.html.
You can get help about how to configure an SNMP User Account and Management Console Port in that
product’s Help system.
Note:
AltiGen’s IANA Private Enterprise Number is 13679.
Configuring MAXCS for SNMP
To configure MAXCS for SNMP, select Report > SNMP Configuration.
Configure the parameters:
• Check Enable sending SNMP traps.
• Enter the SNMPv3 server address.
• Enter the SNMPv3 server port.
• Select a security level:
– No Authentication and No Privacy
– With Authentication but No Privacy
– With Authentication and Privacy
• Select an Authentication method and enter a password
• Select a Privacy protocol and enter a password.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
327
Chapter 27: System Report Management
Configure traps:
•
Memory usage exceeds – This trap is sent when MAXCS detects that the lowest virtual memory usage
exceeds a specified percentage of physical memory configuration within a 10-minute duration. Default value is 80%. The next trap will be sent after the condition is cleared then occurs again. The minimum duration between any two consecutive traps is 30 minutes
•
Average CPU utilization exceeds – This trap is sent when MAXCS detects its average CPU utilization
exceeds a specified percentage in any 10-minute duration. Default value is 80%. The next trap will be sent
after the condition is cleared then occurs again. The minimum duration between any two consecutive traps
is 30 minutes
•
Hard disk usage exceeds – This trap is sent when hard disk usage of MAXCS transitioning from below
threshold to on or above threshold is detected. Default value is 80%. The minimum duration between any
two consecutive traps is 30 minutes.
List of Traps Sent
A trap is sent when the following conditions are detected.
• Cold Start (generic trap). When AltiServ is cold started and initialized successfully.
• Warm Start (generic trap). When AltiKeep service detects AltiServ.exe is down, re-starting AltiServ.exe,
and AltiServ is initialized successfully.
• LinkDown (generic trap). When detecting a T1/E1/PRI span state is transitioning from up to down or losing
clock source.
When a gateway is down, one trap is sent for each T1/E1/PRI interface in this Gateway. This trap is sent
when SIP trunk destination state transitioning from reachable to unreachable is detected.
Every T1/E1/PRI span and SIP trunk channel is assigned a unique "ifIndex" value as a port identifier
• LinkUp (generic trap). When a T1/E1/PRI span state transitioning from down to up is detected.
328
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Using SNMP
• Softswitch up (specific trap). When AltiServ.exe starts to respond to the keep alive packets sent by the
SNMP Agent. AltiServ should respond to the keep-alive packets after its initialization is completed.
• Softswitch down (specific trap). When AltiServ.exe stops responding to the keep-alive packets sent by the
SNMP Agent.
• Gateway/Media Server connection up (specific trap). When a gateway or HMCP Media Server connection
state transitioning from down to up is detected.
• Gateway/Media Server connection down (specific trap). When a gateway or HMCP Media Server
connection state transitioning from up to down is detected.
• Enterprise Manager Master up (specific trap). When MAXCS is in Enterprise Manager slave role and Enterprise Manager master state transitioning from down to up is detected.
• Enterprise Manager Master down (specific trap). When MAXCS is in Enterprise Manager slave role and
Enterprise Manager master state transitioning from up to down is detected.
• Enterprise Manager Slave up (specific trap). When MAXCS is in Enterprise Manager master role and
detects Enterprise Manager slave state transitioning from down to up.
• Enterprise Manager Slave down (specific trap). When MAXCS is in Enterprise Manager master role and
detects Enterprise Manager slave state transitioning from up to down.
• IP Phone service up (specific trap). When detecting IP Phone service transitioning from down to up.
• IP Phone service down (specific trap). When detecting IP Phone service transitioning from up to down.
• VM server connection up (specific trap). When detecting VM server connection transitioning from down to
up.
• VM server connection down (specific trap). When detecting VM server connection transitioning from up to
down.
• CT Proxy Service up (specific trap). When CTProxy Service connection transitioning from down to up is
detected.
• CT Proxy Service down (specific trap). When detecting CTProxy Service connection transitioning from up
to down.
• Excessive memory usage on Softswitch (specific trap). When MAXCS detects the lowest virtual memory
usage exceeds a specified percentage of physical memory configuration within a 10-minute duration. The
next trap will be sent after the condition is cleared then occurs again. The minimum duration between any
two consecutive traps is 30 minutes.
• Excessive CPU utilization on Softswitch (specific trap). When MAXCS detects its average CPU utilization
exceeds a specified percentage in any 10-minute duration. The next trap will be sent after the condition is
cleared then occurs again. The minimum duration between any two consecutive traps is 30 minutes.
• Excessive hard disk usage on Softswitch (specific trap). When hard disk usage of MAXCS transitioning
from below threshold to on or above threshold is detected. The minimum duration between any two
consecutive traps is 30 minutes.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
329
Chapter 27: System Report Management
330
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
28
Microsoft Exchange Integration
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions for configuring Microsoft Exchange and MAX Communication
Server (MAXCS) ACC/ACM Update 1 to work together.
Note:
An AltiGen Exchange Integration license is required for each extension using Exchange integration.
Three integration options are possible (see “Setting Exchange Integration Options” on page 61 for a full
description of these options):
• Synchronize with Exchange – The same Exchange integration method used in release 5.2 and prior:
synchronizes voice messages between the AltiGen voice mailbox and Exchange mailbox. Works with both
Exchange 2007, 2010, and 2013
• Bridged Access to Exchange – An option is provided in the AltiGen Voice Mail System menu to log in
to the Exchange mailbox (option 7 in the main menu). To synchronize voice mail between the AltiGen mail
box and the Exchange server, check the Enable Synchronization check box. If you don’t check this,
voice mail is not synchronized between the two message stores.
• Native VM Integration with Exchange – In this mode, the AltiGen voice mailboxes are replaced by
Exchange mailboxes. Each user in MAXCS needs to have a mailbox in the Exchange server and each
mailbox must be Unified Messaging (UM) enabled, or the user will not be able to receive any voice mail.
You can choose any of the three options while installing MAXCS, and later you can switch options from
MaxAdmin (in the Voice Mail Configuration window). If you upgraded from AltiWare 5.2 and you were using
Exchange integration, your configurations are kept and the option is set to Synchronize with Exchange.
When you switch options, service restart is required.
Note:
If Exchange integration was used in the previous version of MaxCS server, you must uninstall the
Outlook client before you install MaxCS Release Update 1.
MaxCS Private Cloud Service
Exchange integration requires MaxCS to be a member of the same domain as the CPE network. Therefore,
forwarding voicemail to email should be used instead.
Requirements
Make sure the following items are ready before Exchange integration is configured. Note that AltiGen is not
responsible for, and cannot support, installation of Microsoft Exchange Server:
To set up any kind of Exchange integration, you need the following:
• One Windows server for MAXCS, loaded with:
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
331
Chapter 28: Microsoft Exchange Integration
– Windows Server or Windows XP
– The MAX Communication Server ACC/ACM Update 1 software
• A second Windows server for Exchange, loaded with Exchange Server software. It should be installed on
64-bit system(s) with Windows 64-bit or above OS. Unified Messaging, Client Access, and Mailbox Server
roles should be installed with Exchange Server.
Important: When you install both the Exchange Server and MAXCS, you must log in as the Domain
Administrator, NOT the Local Administrator.
• The MAXCS system and the Exchange Server system must belong to the same domain, with a network
throughput rate of no less than 100Mbps and without any Web proxies in between.
• AltiGen Services must be installed and started with the user account
<Domainname>\AltiGen_<AltiServSystemName>.
This service account must have a mailbox in the Exchange Server that is different from the previous
version.
• Exchange Server Services must be started.
• Successful ping from Exchange Server to MAXCS and vice versa.
When You Install MAXCS
You may be installing MAXCS now, or you may have already installed it. To integrate with Exchange, you need
MAXCS software version Update 1 or later.
Note:
The installation program will check whether Microsoft Outlook has been installed on the server. If it
detects Outlook, you must uninstall Outlook before you can install MaxCS Update 1.
1.
If you are installing now, log in to Windows with a user account that is a member of the Domain Admin
group. If MAXCS is already installed, skip to step 4.
2.
While installing, MAXCS automatically creates a user account as a service account (see Figure 161), and
you have a chance to change the default password. Record this password for future troubleshooting.
Figure 161. In this example, the MAXCS installation program created a user account
“AltiGen_LESLIEXIA” in the domain VMDOMAIN. We changed the password to “altigen”.
3.
After installation, add this user account to the Domain Admin group via Active Directory Users and
Computers (see (see Figure 162)).
4.
If MAXCS was already installed on the system, do the following:
332
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Exchange Integration Configuration Steps
a.
Create a new domain user account, and add it to the Domain Admin group via Active
Directory Users and Computers.
b.
Move the MAXCS server to the Domain.
c.
Use the AltiPassword change utility (C:\AltiServ\Exe\AltiPwdChange.exe) to change all
AltiGen service accounts to run as this new user account.
Note: In the future, if you need to debug you must log in to the MAXCS server with this user account.
Figure 162. Add the user created by the MAXCS install program (or created by you in step 4) to the
Domain Admin group in Active Directory Users and Computers.
Exchange Integration Configuration Steps
After installation, perform the following steps.
1.
Add Exchange Integration licenses to MAXCS (see Figure 163).
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
333
Chapter 28: Microsoft Exchange Integration
Figure 163. Adding Exchange Integration licenses in MAXCS
2.
In the Exchange Management Console, create a mailbox for the service account that was created during
installation (or created by you in step 4, above) (see Figure 164).
Figure 164. Creating a mailbox for the service account created during installation
3.
334
In MaxAdmin, choose System > Voice Mail Configuration, then select the Exchange Integration mode
you want to use, and enter the name (not the IP address) of Exchange server (see Figure 165).
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Exchange Integration Configuration Steps
Select the Exchange
Integration mode you
are going to use.
Enter the NAME (not
the IP address) of the
Exchange Server
Figure 165. Choosing the Synchronize Exchange Integration mode in MAXCS
4.
Configure the names of each extension user such that the first and last names are the same as the user’s
matching mailbox on the Exchange Server.
Note: The Middle Initial field should be empty for Exchange Server mail accounts in order for Exchange
integration to work properly.
5.
MAXCS matches the mailbox on the Exchange Server via the display name, which is a combination of
“FirstName LastName”. In the example in Figure 166, the display name is “Michael Wang”, so you should
make sure the user’s display name on the Exchange Server is “Michael Wang”, or synchronization will fail.
Figure 166. First name and last name in MAXCS must match the display name in Exchange Server,
or synchronization will fail. (Also, to synchronize MAXCS voice mail with Exchange voice
mail in Bridged Access mode, you must have checked the Enable Synchronization
check box in the Voice Mail configuration screen.)
Note: Exchange Native VM integration uses the extension number and the extension’s first and last
names to link between MAXCS and Exchange.
Exchange synchronization uses only the Extension’s first and last names as the link.
6.
For users whose voice mails will be integrated with Exchange, check Assign Exchange Integration
License on the Extension Configuration screen’s Mail Management tab (see Figure 167). Make sure that
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
335
Chapter 28: Microsoft Exchange Integration
the E-mail Name field contains alphanumeric characters only and does not contain other characters such
as spaces ( ) or periods ( . ).
Figure 167. Assigning the Exchange Integration license to a user
Note:
Each user needs to access their mailbox once via an e-mail client (Outlook, Outlook Express, Outlook
Web Access) before synchronization will start working for that user.
This is all you need to do if you selected the Synchronize with Exchange option in the Voice Mail
Configuration Screen. If necessary, see “Testing for Synchronization” on page 347 and “Troubleshooting Tips”
on page 347.
Extra Steps for Bridged Access and Native VM Integration
In addition to the steps given thus far in this chapter, follow these additional steps for Bridged Access and
Native VM integrations.
1.
Create a dial plan in Exchange. In the Exchange Management Console, go to Organization
Configuration > Unified Messaging, and click New UM Dial Plan.
The digit length you
enter must match
the digit length of
extensions in
MAXCS
Figure 168. Creating a new UM dial plan. In this example, the name of the dial plan is “LeslieXiaSS”.
2.
Enter a name for the dial plan and length of extension numbers. The digit length must be the same as the
extension number length in MAXCS. Then click New.
When you create a dial plan, a default UM Mailbox Policy is created automatically and associated with the
dial plan (see Figure 169).
336
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Extra Steps for Bridged Access and Native VM Integration
Figure 169. A Default UM Mailbox Policy is created when you create a new dial plan
3.
After creating a dial plan, open its Properties dialog box, select the Settings tab, and change Audio
Codec to G.711 (see Figure 170).
4.
Click OK.
Figure 170. Changing Audio Codec to G711
5.
Add your MAXCS server as a UM Gateway: Go to Organization Configuration > Unified Messaging >
UM IP Gateways > New UM IP Gateway.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
337
Chapter 28: Microsoft Exchange Integration
Figure 171. The name of our example gateway is “LeslieXia” and the name of the dial plan we created
is “LeslieXiaSS”.
a.
Enter the name of the gateway.
b.
Enter the IP address of your MAXCS server.
c.
Browse for and select the dial plan you just created.
d.
Click New.
6.
If your system has multiple gateways, repeat step 5 to add all of your gateways as UM IP Gateways.
7.
Associate your dial plan to the Exchange Server UM. To do this, in the Exchange Management Console,
go to Server Configuration > Unified Messaging, select the server and click Properties.
338
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Extra Steps for Bridged Access and Native VM Integration
Figure 172. We added our new dial plan, named “LeslieXiaSS”, to the list of associated dial plans
8.
Click the UM Settings tab, click Add, and add your dial plan to the list of associated dial plans.
This completes all system-wide settings in Exchange Server.
Configuring UM Settings for Each User
With all system-wide settings in Exchange Server complete, configure the UM settings for each user.
1.
In Recipient Configuration > Mailbox, select the user and select Enable Unified Messaging from the
Actions pane.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
339
Chapter 28: Microsoft Exchange Integration
Figure 173. Here, Leslie Xia is an individual IP phone user with a mailbox in VMDOMAIN.
2.
Click Browse, select the policy associated with the dialing plan you created, then click OK.
Figure 174. The policy associated with the dialing plan we just created is “LeslieXiaSS Default Policy”.
3.
Enter the user’s MAXCS extension number in the Manually entered mailbox extension field (make sure
the extension number is the same in MaxAdmin and the Exchange User Mailbox).
4.
Select PIN setting(s), and click Next. (If you select Automatically Generate, the Exchange Server will
send the user an e-mail with the PIN.)
5.
Click Enable.
6.
Repeat steps 1-5 for each user you want to enable.
340
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring for Out Calling from UM
Configuring for Out Calling from UM
This section shows how to enable extensions integrated with Exchange in Native or Bridged mode, to do the
following tasks:
• Call a personal contact or a contact from the database
• Return a call from Exchange voice mail
Note: Unlike with AltiGen’s Zoomerang feature, a user calling out from voice mail cannot go back to the
Exchange voice mailbox after returning the call.
Configure the following in Microsoft Exchange.
1.
Check Allow outgoing calls through this UM IP gateway.
Figure 175. Allowing outgoing calls through the UM IP gateway
2.
Set the Dial Code in your dial plan:
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
341
Chapter 28: Microsoft Exchange Integration
Figure 176. Setting the Dial Code
Outgoing Configuration
•
Outside line access code – The trunk access code of your Softswitch
•
International access code – Toll call prefix for international calls. For the U.S., it is "011"
•
National number prefix – Toll call prefix for domestic calls, always set as "1"
•
Country/Region code – Country code. For the U.S., it is "1"
Incoming Configuration
•
In-country/region number format
• Use this field to specify how a user's telephone number should be dialed by the UM Server in a different
dial plan, but having the same country code. This is used by an auto attendant and when an Outlook
Voice Access subscriber searches and tries to call the user in the directory.
• This entry consists of a number prefix and n number of x characters (for example, 020xxxxxxx).
• To determine the telephone number, UM will append the last n-digits from the telephone number that
is specified in the directory to the prefix that is specified.
•
International number format
• Use this field to specify how a user's telephone number should be dialed by the UM Server in a different
dial plan, and having a different country code. This is used by an auto attendant and when an Outlook
Voice Access subscriber searches and tries to call the user in the directory.
• This entry consists of a number prefix and n number of x characters (for example, 4420xxxxxxx).
• To determine the telephone number, UM will append the last n-digits from the telephone number that
is specified in the directory to the prefix that is specified.
342
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring for Out Calling from UM
3.
On the Dialing Rule Groups tab, add dial rules for in-country/region and international calls that will be
placed by UM-enabled users. Each dialing rule entry that is defined on the dial rule group determines the
types of calls that users within a specific dial rule group can make.
Figure 177. Adding Dial Rule entries in the Dialing Rule Groups tab
For a Dialing Rule Entry (see (see Figure 177)), the following are required:
Name – Select a name of an existing dialing rule or, if you want to create a dialing rule, type the name of
the dialing rule (up to 32 characters, text characters only). This is the display name for the dialing rule that
will be displayed in the Exchange Management Console.
Number Mask – Define the number mask for the dialing rule. A number mask is used to define the telephone number format that a Unified Messaging server will use to determine what outgoing telephone number it will dial for a user. When an outgoing call is made to a number that is matched by the number mask
on the dialing rule, the UM server will substitute the digits that are matched into the dialed number. It will
then use the digit string from this match to make the outgoing call. An example of a valid number mask is
91425xxxxxxx. This field can contain only numbers and the letter 'x'.
Dialed Number – Define the dialed number for the dialing rule. The dialed number is used to determine
the actual dial string that is sent to the IP gateway. This number can be different from the number that is
obtained by Unified Messaging for the outgoing call. However, your PBX can also be configured to omit
the area code for local calls and can be configured for private voice numbering plans. Any wildcard (x)
characters in the dial string are substituted with the digits from the original number that were matched by
the number mask on the dialing rule. An example valid dialed number is 9xxxxxxx. This field can contain
only numbers and the character "x".
Comment – Use this text box to input a comment or description for the dialing rule that you are adding.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
343
Chapter 28: Microsoft Exchange Integration
Figure 178. Creating a dialing rule
For example, if the business number of a personal contact is 5102529712, then the number mask should
be set as "91510xxxxxxx", because UM will add "91" automatically, and the Dialed Number is "9xxxxxxx",
so that the final dialed number will be "92529712".
You can use the wild card "*" to handle any length of digits.
4.
Assign the Dial Entry to mailbox Policies: Go to UM Mailbox Policies, select the mailbox that users belong
to, open the Dialing Restrictions tab, and assign the rule group you just created.
Figure 179. Assigning dial plan to mailbox policy
After you configure the UM mailbox to use a dialing rule group, the dialing restrictions that are configured
apply to all UM-enabled users who are associated with the UM mailbox policy. For example, you can configure a dialing rule group that does not require users who are associated with the dial plan to dial an outside line access code when they place a call to an in-country/region telephone number.
Note:
344
If you need help in configuring dialing rules, see http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/
bb629580.aspx. That will put you in the general location of what you need. Much of this information
came from that Microsoft site.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Configuring for Out Calling from UM
Configuring MaxAdministrator
Complete the configuration in MaxAdministrator.
1.
Go to System > System Configuration > Number Plan tab. In the First Digit Assignment panel, assign
one of the digits (for example, digit 8) to IP Trunk Access.
2.
Go to the Trunk Configuration screen, and assign the digit selected in step 1 to all the SIP-Tie entries.
(Click the first SIP-Tie entry, and assign the digit, then use the Apply button to apply the assignment to
all the other SIP-Tie entries.) This allows calls in either bridged or native mode to access the Exchange
Server.
3.
Go to VoIP > Enterprise Network Management to open Enterprise Manager.
4.
Click Codec to create a new codec profile only for the Exchange connection.
Figure 180. Creating a codec profile specifically for Exchange UM
5.
a.
In the Name field, enter a name for the new codec profile.
b.
In the Codec field, select G.711 Mu-Law.
c.
In the DTMF Delivery field, select RFC2833
d.
In the SIP Early Media field, select Enable.
e.
In the SIP Transport field, select TCP.
Associate this new codec profile to the IP address of Exchange Server (and only Exchange Server):
a.
Click the Servers button, then click the IP Codec tab.
b.
Add a new IP Device Range for the Exchange Server:
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
345
Chapter 28: Microsoft Exchange Integration
Figure 181. Associating your “Exchange” codec profile to the IP address of Exchange Server
6.
Click the Add button in the IP Device Range panel.
7.
Select the codec profile you just created specifically for Exchange.
8.
Enter the IP address of the Exchange Server in both the From and To fields. Be sure that this IP address
does not fall into any other device range. (Check the IP Codec tab and the IP Dialing Table tab.) If it does,
reset that range into two ranges: one that ends just before the Exchange Server’s IP address, and one
that starts just after the Exchange Server’s IP address.
9.
In MaxAdmin, go to System > Voice Mail Configuration. In the Microsoft Exchange Integration panel,
select Bridged Access to Exchange or Native VM Integration with Exchange. Click OK.
10. Restart all AltiGen services.
Note:
After all AltiGen services are restarted, voice mail access may be unavailable for 1-2 minutes.
When You Create a New Mailbox User
If you are using Synchronize mode, Bridged Access mode with synchronization, or Native VM Integration
mode, and you create a new mailbox user in Exchange Server and a new extension in MAXCS, to associate
them you need to restart the AltiGen Exchange Integration Service.
346
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Testing for Synchronization
Testing for Synchronization
You can use some simple procedures to make sure that the Synchronize with Exchange integration is
working correctly.
To test the integration, set up an extension in MAXCS (for example, extension 100) and its corresponding
mailbox in Exchange Server. Also, set up a computer with Outlook configured for this user.
To Test Message Delivery to Exchange
1.
Leave a voice mail for extension 100. The message light illuminates.
2.
Log on to the Exchange Mailbox from Outlook and check for the message in the inbox. The message
should be titled Voice-mail from xxx and include the voice mail as a .wav attachment.
To Check Message State Change Notification
1.
Log in to extension 100’s voice mail from a phone. The message you left in the preceding step should be
there as a new message.
2.
Save the message by pressing 3. Within approximately a minute, the message in Outlook will become a
saved message as well – it will no longer appear in bold.
To Listen to VM in Outlook
Open the message in Outlook, and open the .wav attachment. It should be the same message.
To Check Deletion Notification
1.
Delete this message from Outlook.
2.
Wait a few minutes, and then log on to extension 100’s voice mail from a phone. The voice mail should no
longer be there.
If any of these tests fail, consult the “Troubleshooting Tips” section.
Troubleshooting Tips
To Check the profile for the service account
1.
Log on to the MAXCS system as the AltiGen service account (for example, AltiGen_telesystem). You
will need the password you set up when you installed MAXCS.
2.
Select Control Panel > Mail. (In Windows, right-click Microsoft Office on the Start menu, and select
Properties.)
3.
Click Show Profiles. In MAXCS Update 1, there is only one profile there, which is for the service account,
so that name should be AltiExch<ServerName><AccountName> (for example,
AltiExchMAILSERVERAltiGen_telesystem).
If you don’t see any such profile, make sure that \altiserv\exe folder does not contain the files
mapi32.dll or gapi32.dll. If these files exist, delete them, then stop and start the Exchange
Integration Service.
To Delete the profile for the service account
If an error occurred while MAXCS was creating the service account profile, the damaged profile would remain
there until removed manually. After the re-configuration, the new profile can't be created, because the old one
still exists.
You can remedy this in the following way:
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
347
Chapter 28: Microsoft Exchange Integration
1.
Log on as AltiGen Service Account.
2.
Shut down AltiGen Exchange Integration Service from Control Panel > Administrative Tools >
Services, then open Control Panel > Mail (or Mail and Fax) and click Show Profiles. Remove the
service profile.
3.
Start the AltiGen Exchange Integration Service from Control Panel > Administrative Tools >
Services.
If this doesn’t work, contact AltiGen Technical Support.
To gather trace files
1.
Log in to Admin.
2.
Select Turn AltiTrace On, and click Apply.
3.
Select VM and SP Log Dump.
4.
To view logs, go to AltiServ\Log\VM\ExchIntg.
To avoid “extension in use” message
When synchronizing with Exchange Server, the mailbox needs to be locked. If the extension has a lot of messages, it could take some time, but shouldn’t take as long as 2-3 minutes. In normal cases, it should take just
10-20 seconds. You may adjust a registry key to change the synchronization interval:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\AltiGen Communications, Inc.\AltiWare\ExchIntg\Polling Interval
The value is in ms. 60000 = 60 seconds. You may change it to 300000 for 5 minutes. After changing the value,
restart Exchange integration service for the change to take effect.
Exchange Integration service synchronizes voice messages on the Exchange server with those on the MAXCS
system by polling the two servers periodically. This polling interval can be adjusted by creating a DWORD
value called "Polling Interval" under the key
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\AltiGen Communications, Inc.\AltiWare\ExchIntg
This DWORD value should contain the number of milliseconds between polling. If this value is not present in
the registry, a default value of 60000 (1 minute) is used by the system. For performance reasons, you should
not set this value to below 60000.
To avoid “Access Deny” error while sending messages
If you have applied Microsoft patch ms06-029, when an AltiGen PBX phone user attempts to send a message,
the user receives an "Access Deny" error. This is because the patch changes the grant for the permission of
Send As.
After applying the patch, the Send As permission of each user needs to be granted to the account of “altigen
service” explicitly.
You may have to restart the Exchange Server and MAXCS.
Notes
• Prevent attempts by the Exchange Administrator/Manager to use the existing service account for the
AltiGen Exchange Integration Service. Using the AltiGen service account will provide you an audit trail that
is invaluable while troubleshooting.
• Depending on the number of voice mails you have on the AltiGen server, the initial mailbox
synchronization may take a long time.
For example, if you have 10GB of voice mails on the AltiGen server and are enabling Exchange integration
for all the mailboxes, it may take up to 24 hours to initialize the Exchange integration service.
348
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Notes
On the other hand, if you have less than 100MB of voice mails on the AltiGen server, the initialization will
take less than 5 minutes.
• If users experience a problem making calls to the Exchange server, make sure the MSXML 6.0 Parser
has not been deleted from the server. Without it, the speech engine services cannot play voice prompts.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
349
Chapter 28: Microsoft Exchange Integration
350
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
29
TAPI Integration
Note:
In the MaxCS 7.0 Private Cloud service, TAPI is not a supported protocol for CTI. TAPI is still a
supported protocol in the MaxCS Update 1 Enterprise version.
If your office uses Microsoft Office Outlook, ACT!, or Goldmine, you can install AltiGen’s TAPI gateway to
obtain phone numbers from those databases.
An AltiGen TAPI License is required for each extension using the TAPI feature.
MAXCS implements its TAPI service provider based on TAPI 2.1.
Note:
Only outbound dialing functions are supported in the TAPI gateway. Users can make outbound calls
from their extensions, but call control functions such as transfer, hold, and park, are not supported.
AltiGen's TAPI implementation has two components:
• TAPI Proxy Server – Installed on the MAXCS server system
• TAPI Service Provider – Installed on the client systems
Install TAPI Proxy Server and TAPI Service Provider after physically configuring your MAXCS system. The
TAPI Service Provider will automatically load the MAXCS configuration. If you change the MAXCS
configuration after installing TAPI, by physically adding, removing, or moving extensions, you will have to
uninstall and reinstall the TAPI Service Provider to reload the MAXCS configuration.
Installing the TAPI Proxy Server
Your server must have a network connection with TCP/IP enabled.
1.
On your MAXCS CD-ROM, open the TAPI Gateway folder.
2.
Open the Tapi_Server subfolder, and run SETUP.EXE.
The service is started automatically. No configuration parameters need to be set on the server.
Setting Up the Client
Setting up the client involves:
• Installing the AltiGen TAPI Service Provider on the client
• Setting up phone and modem options
• Setting up the Phone Dialer
• Testing the TAPI Service Provider on the client system
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
351
Chapter 29: TAPI Integraion
Installing the AltiGen TAPI Service Provider on the Client
The client must meet the following requirements:
• A Windows operating system specified in the client manuals
• Microsoft Outlook, Outlook Express, ACT!, or Goldmine installed on the client
• Network connection with TCP/IP enabled
To install AltiGen TAPI Service Provider on the client system,
1.
On your MAXCS CD-ROM, open the TAPI Gateway folder.
2.
Open the Tapi_Client subfolder, and run SETUP.EXE.
3.
When prompted, enter the Server IP address, the client’s Extension Number, and the client’s
Password.
Setting Up Phone and Modem Options
1.
Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel > Phone and Modem Options.
2.
If Phone and Modem Options have never been configured, enter the Area Code and the number to dial
to get an outside line (usually 9). (This number is the Route Access number configured in the System
Configuration window, Number Plan tab.) Enter this number in both To access an outside line fields.
3.
If Phone and Modem Options is already configured, click Edit to verify that the correct Route Access number is entered in both To access an outside line fields.
Figure 182. Configuring phone and modem options
4.
352
Select the Advanced Tab to configure the TAPI service provider.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Up the Client
Figure 183. Configuring the TAPI service provider
5.
Choose AltiGen (TM) Communications Service Provider and click Configure. The AltiGen TAPI
Device Detect dialog box opens.
6.
In the dialog box, click Configuration to verify that the client extension is available.
If you have any type of error, Windows will let you know what the possible causes could be. There could
be a mistake in the AltiGen server IP address, extension number, or password. You can reconfigure the
client extension in the Device Detect window. (See “Changing TAPI Configuration Parameters” on page
356.)
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
353
Chapter 29: TAPI Integraion
Note: If the client extension is not in the AltiGen TAPI Device Detect window, verify that the windows
services "Remote Access Connection Manager" and "Telephony" have a status of Started. (To
open the Windows Services window, go to Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools >
Services.)
If they are not started, right-click on each service and choose Start. Have them start automatically
in the future by right-clicking the service, choosing Properties, and selecting Automatic as the
Startup Type.
Also verify that the TAPI PROXY service is started on the AltiGen server.
If the two services are started, then remove AltiGen (TM) Communications Service Provider
from the Phone and Modem Options dialog box (see Figure 183), and then add it back. Repeat
the verification of the AltiGen server IP, extension, and password information if your extension
information is not shown properly in AltiGen TAPI Device Detect (see Figure 183).
Setting Up Phone Dialer
1.
Launch Phone Dialer: From Windows 2000, select Start > Programs > Accessories > Communication.
From Windows XP, go to Start > Run, type Dialer.exe, and click OK.
2.
In the Phone Dialer, select Edit > Options.
3.
In the Preferred line for calling section, select Phone.
4.
In the Line used for section, select the client extension in the Phone calls list, and click OK.
Testing TAPI Service Provider on the Client System
To test TAPI Service Provider on the client system,
1.
Click the Dial button in the toolbar.
2.
Enter a number to call in the Number to Dial box, and click Place Call.
354
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Setting Up the Client
The client extension should ring. When you pick up the phone, the system dials the number and connects
you (if the extension is configured to dial an outside number). If this does not work, make sure your
previous configurations are correct.
Note: Reboot the client system after any configuration changes to make sure the changes take effect
completely.
Making a Call in Microsoft Outlook
Before making a call, configure the Outlook New Call configuration.
1.
Begin by setting up at least one contact. In Microsoft Outlook, select Go > Contacts.
2.
Click the New Call button on the menu bar.
3.
In the box, click Dialing Options to configure the Dialer to use an extension.
4.
In the Connect Using Line section of the dialog box, select the client extension, and click OK. This
enables the client to call out through Outlook using the client’s extension.
5.
To verify that the call connects, click Start Call in the New Call window.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
355
Chapter 29: TAPI Integraion
Changing TAPI Configuration Parameters
To change TAPI parameters,
1.
In Windows, go to Control Panel > Phone and Modem Options.
2.
In the Phone and Modem Options dialog box, click the Advanced tab.
3.
Choose AltiGen (TM) Communications Service Provider and click Configure.
4.
In the AltiGen TAPI Device Detect dialog box, click Configure.
5.
In the AltiGen TAPI Configuration dialog box, click Extension.
6.
Enter the extension number and password of an entry you want to remove and click Remove, or enter the
extension number and password of a new entry and click Add.
356
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
CHAPTER
30
Tools and Applications
MAXCS comes with the following tools and applications for testing, diagnosing and configuring your system.
They are available from the Windows Start menu: Start > All Programs > MAXCS ACC/ACM:
Under Gateway Tools:
• AltiGen Board Test
• CT-Bus Test Tool (formerly MVIP Test Tool)
• Gateway Configuration Tool (For information on this tool, see “Gateway Configuration Tool” on page 55.)
Under Utilities:
• MAXCS Backup and Restore Utility
• MaxAdmin and Extension Security Checker
• Start and Stop All AltiGen Services
• Trace Collector
• Voice File Converter
• Read Config
In addition, on the Services > Utilities menu in MaxAdmin:
• Work/Hunt Group Converter utility
• Export and Import extensions utilities
If you installed AltiGen’s Custom Phrase Manager, it is available off the Start > All Programs menu. You can
use this tool only if you have an AltiGen SDK license.
AltiGen Board Test
This is an AltiGen hardware test tool for system hang and other hardware-related problems. It tests the
following on all AltiGen boards:
• Board memory from host or from both host and DSP
• DSP internal memory from host or from both host and DSP
• FMIC connection and data memory from host
• NVRAM from host
• PMC chip from host and DSP if T1/E1 board
You have the option of testing a single board or testing all boards at the same time.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
357
Chapter 30: Tools and Applications
CT-Bus Test Tool
The CT-Bus Test Tool is a tool that detects one-way connection, cross talk, bad MVIP cable and static noise
problems.
To run the CT-Bus test tool,
1.
Stop AltiGen Switching Services before running this utility.
2.
Launch CT-Bus Test Tool from Start > All Programs > MAXCS > Gateway Tools > CT-Bus Test Tool.
3.
Click Start to begin the test.
4.
At the end of the test, the utility provides pass or fail results.
Backup and Restore Utility
Note:
The configuration backup option is turned on by default.
To back up or restore data, select either
• From MaxAdmin: Services > Utilities > Backup and Restore, or
• From the Windows Start menu: All Programs > MAXCS > Utilities > MAXCS ACC/ACM Backup and
Restore.
Figure 184. Backup and Restore window
Note:
The Backup and Restore window can only be accessed at the primary MAXCS system; it is not
available from a remote MaxAdmin client.
Backing Up Files
Note:
358
The AltiGen backup utility does not back up internal CDR database. You must back up the internal
CDR database from \AltiDB\InternalDB\Internal.mdb manually.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Backup and Restore Utility
1.
Select the Backup icon.
Figure 185. Backup Configuration dialog box
2.
In the Components panel, select the files you want to back up.
3.
In the Backup To list, select the day of the week (each day has its own folder in C:\altibackup for backing
up files to), or select Advanced to change the drive or select a different folder.
Selecting Advanced displays a folder icon. Click the folder icon to open a browse dialog box that lets you
select the folder to back up to. When you click OK in the dialog box, the selected drive or directory is
displayed in the field below the Backup To list.
4.
Click OK to start the backup. In the Backup and Restore window, the progress of the backup appears.
Scheduling Backups
You can set up automated backup on a schedule, and you can select the days, the times, and the target drives
and folders for the backups.
To set backup schedules,
1.
In the Backup and Restore window, select the Schedule button.
Figure 186. Backup Schedules dialog box
2.
Set the options:
• Check the box for each day of the week you want run the backup.
• For each day, use the lists to specify the time. These time settings use a 24-hour clock.
• You can accept the default target directories, or you can click the Folder icon to open the Browse for
Folder dialog box to select the destination for the backup files.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
359
Chapter 30: Tools and Applications
• Under Backup Selection, select the file components you want to back up: Configuration files, Custom
Phrases, Extension Messages, SP Configuration files.
3.
Click OK.
Restoring Backed up Files
To restore backed up files,
1.
Stop the AltiGen switching services.
2.
In the Backup and Restore window, select the Restore icon.
Figure 187. Restore Configuration dialog box
3.
Under Components, select the file groups you want to restore.
4.
Using the Restore From list, select the day you want to restore from, or select Advanced to choose the
restore folder.
Clicking Advanced displays a folder icon that you can click to open a dialog box that allows you to select
the directory you want to restore from.
Select a day of the week or manually choose the restore directory. The specified directory appears in the
text box below the list.
Note: The components you select for restore must have been backed up into the directory you selected.
For example, if you didn’t back up configuration files on Thursday, you won’t be able to restore
them from the Thursday directory.
Important: Make sure the version you restore the database files from is compatible with the current MAXCS
version. If incompatible files are restored, the phone system will fail to restart!
5.
Click OK to start the restore process.
6.
When you are finished restoring backed up files, restart the AltiGen switching services.
MAXCS Admin & Extension Security Checker
MAXCS Admin & Extension Security Checker is a tool that
• Checks the security status of every extension in your MAXCS system and displays the security
characteristics of each extension. From an extension’s right-click menu, you can lock and unlock the
extension, force the user to change the password, clear an attacked record, and reset the status.
• Shows how many MaxAdmins are currently connected to the system. By clicking Disconnect All, you can
disconnect all MaxAdmins from the local MAXCS system.
Launch the MaxAdmin & Extension Security Checker from Start > All Programs > MAX Communication
Server > Utilities > MAXCS Admin & Extension Security Checker.
360
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
MAXCS Admin & Extension Security Checker
Number of Admin connections
Automatically refreshes the display
Information on the selected extension
Security characteristics to check
Figure 188. MaxAdmin & Extension Security Checker
Checking Extension Security
Generally, an extension is considered secure if its password meets the following conditions:
• Contains 4-8 digits
• Is different from the extension
• Is different from the default system password
• Does not consist of consecutive numbers
• Does not consist of a repetition of the same digit
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
361
Chapter 30: Tools and Applications
To check extension security,
1.
Select the security characteristics you want to check in the Show field group.
Status
Description
Secure Pwd + Internal Only
Has secure password and cannot make outbound trunk calls
Unsecure Pwd
Password has unsecure elements described in the Unsecure
Elements window
Outbound-capable
Can make outbound trunk calls
Unsecure Pwd + Outbound
Password has unsecure elements described in Unsecure Elements
window AND can make outbound trunk calls
Password Expired
Password is expired
Attacked
8 consecutive false password attempts have been made
Locked
Extension has been locked by system due to attack or by System
Administrator
Password Match
To detect if an extension uses a specific trivial password, such as
street address, zip code, phone number, enter that string here.
2.
Click Refresh. Extensions with the selected insecure characteristics will appear in the Extension List.
3.
Make changes to extensions from the right-click menus, or advise extension user(s) to make changes.
4.
After changes have been made (for example in MaxAdmin, MaxCommunicator, or with right-click
commands in this tool), click Reload to fetch the new settings from MAXCS.
Security characteristics for extensions you select in the Extension List display in the Unsecure Elements
panel.
5.
(Optional) Click Export to export the data in the Extension List to a text file.
Note:
You are advised to run this security check periodically and remind extension users to use secure
passwords.
Start & Stop All AltiGen Services
You can start or stop all AltiGen services from the Windows Start menu: All Programs > MAXCS > Utilities
> Start & Stop All AltiGen Services.
To shut down all AltiGen services, click the Shutdown All AltiGen Services button. Some examples of when
you might want to do this are before you upgrade, before running some utilities and tools, and to apply certain
configuration changes.
To start all AltiGen services, click the Start All AltiGen Services button.
362
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Trace Collector
Trace Collector
The Trace Collector collects trace for diagnostic purposes, and lets you upload the results to AltiGen Technical
Support directly from the Trace Collector dialog box. You can run the Trace Collector tool from the Windows
Start menu, and also from MaxAdmin’s Diagnostic menu.
Note:
Trace Collector is not available from an MaxAdmin installed in a remote machine.
The Trace Collector first examines the running status of MAXCS and the gateway, and then checks whether
each trace status is on or off. If a trace status is turned off, the AltiGen system will not produce those traces.
A message box pops up if MAXCS and the gateway are not running or an important trace status is off.
Parameters for Trace Collector
Customize traces by choosing from the following parameters:
Time Period for Extension Feature #66 – Defines how many hours you want to go back to collect trace,
starting from the time you press #66. The default value is 2 hours.
Case Number – Enter the AltiGen case number associated with this trace collection activity. The case number
will comprise the first part of the file name of the collected trace package.
Problem Description – Enter a description of the problem, including the extension number involved, the time
when the problem happened, how to reproduce the problem, and so on.
Time of Incident – The tool collects the trace between the time ranges. The range covers before and after the
defined Date and Time. The default Date and Time is one hour before the current date and time, and the default
variation is 60 minutes. This setting is not applicable when #66 is performed.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
363
Chapter 30: Tools and Applications
Trace Category – By default, all options are selected.
• Main MAXCS Trace (\AltiServ\log)
Collects the following files, and extracts the trace records that fall in the specified time range:
actrace.log
AlpErrLog.txt
SIPlog.txt
ALPxxx.txt
\atps\threadID.txtl
SIPMan.txt
altiserv.txt
\atps\cmdlog.txt
SIPPstnReg.txt
AltiBack_XXX.trc
AdvQOverflow.log
SipExtChanTbl.log
AltiKeep_XXX.trc
Ac2AppPathHdlTbl.txt
SIPKeepALive.txt
AnnouceRunLog.txt
FeatServ.txt
QESLLog.txt
AssertLog.txt
DbUpdateTrdLog.txt
Qtmlog.txt
AW_AstrCpyErrLog.txt
HGwGenLog.txt
Loggservice_Mutex.txt
CallQManLog.txt
HGwMsgLog.txt
MEMORYTRACE.txt
CDRLogDLL.txt
threadid.txt
NewCDRExt.txt
CDRLogTrace.txt
MidNightLog.txt
TritonSPLog.txt
ConfigLog.txt
\logservice\Internal.txt
pathlog.txt
MsgOCLog.txt
ConfigServiceLog.txt
rsrclog.txt
MSRunLog.txt
CDRLogTrace.txt
RtpPortRangeTbl.txt
mviperr.txt
CDRLogDLL_EXCEPTION.txt
StartupLog.txt
Postman.txt
CSH323log.txt
Swxx_xxxx.txt
ProcInfoLog.txt
ExceptionLog.txt
GWMsgLog.txt
• System Configuration Data – Collects system configuration data, including System, Extension, Trunk,
AA configurations, and Read OE files.
• Service Provider Log Dump – Runs SPDump.exe to dump the SP log into files and then collects the
trace.
• IP Phone Dump – Collects the IP Phone dump log in \AltiServ\Log\IPP.
• Stand-alone Gateway Trace – Collects the trace on the stand-alone gateway machine. If AltiServ
Services are shut down, the option is disabled. If Trace Collector is running on the stand-alone gateway
machine, this option is hidden (because Trace Collector just needs to collect the trace locally).
• Triton DSP Trace Dump – Collects the Triton DSP dump log in \AltiServ\SP\Triton\. Runs
TritionDSPDebug.exe to dump Triton DSP binary log data, runs TATraceDecode.exe to convert binary log
to text files, and then collects the text files.
• AltiConnect Trace Dump – Runs acdump.exe to dump the AltiConnect Trace, and then collects the
trace. If Trace Collector is running on the stand-alone gateway machine, this option is hidden.
• Windows Event log – Extracts the system and application event log from the Windows system.
Start Collecting – Click this button to begin the trace collection, according to the time range and trace
categories you chose. All collected files will be zipped to a single file, which will be listed in the Collected Trace
Packages list box. The progress bar will display the progress of the whole process.
Storage Folder – The collected trace package is saved in this folder. The format of the file name is
CaseNumber_Year_Month_Day_Hour_Minute_Second _ComputerName.zip. If the trace package is collected
by #66, the format of the file name is #66_Year_ Month_Day_Hour_Minute_Second _ExtensionNumber.zip.
Free Space – Displays the free space of the drive where the storage folder is located. The folder must be in a
local drive.
364
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Network Log
Change Storage Folder – Opens a folder browser window to select another storage folder. After the change,
Storage Folder, Free Space, and the package list are refreshed to reflect the status of the new storage folder.
Explore Storage Folder – Opens the storage folder in a new explorer window.
Upload Package to FTP – Opens an FTP configuration dialog box. After you complete the required
configuration, Trace Collector uploads the selected package to the AltiGen Tech Support FTP site.
Apply Configurations to #66 – Apply time period, trace category, and storage folder to feature code #66
(Trace Collecting).
Limitations
If you run Trace Collector on MAXCS installed machine, note the following limitations:
• If MAXCS is not running, Trace Collector can only collect the trace of this machine. The traces in memory,
such as "AltiConnect Trace Dump" and "Service Provide Log Dump", and "Stand-alone Gateway Trace"
will not be collected.
• If the default gateway is not running, the traces for "Triton DSP Trace Dump" will not be collected.
• If AltiServ is running, and an attached remote gateway is not running, or a remote gateway is detached,
the trace for this gateway will not be collected even if that "Stand-alone Gateway Trace" is selected. If an
attached gateway has the status of "Out of Service", the trace for this gateway will be collected.
If you run Trace Collector on a gateway MAXCS ACC/ACM-installed machine, note the following limitations:
• It can only collect the trace of this machine.
• If the stand-alone gateway is not running, the trace for "Triton DSP Trace Dump" will not be collected.
Network Log
The AltiGen Network log shows traffic between the IP phones and the server. The information in this log is
helpful when troubleshooting voice quality issues.
To view the log, from MaxAdministrator select Diagnostic > AltiGen Network Log.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
365
Chapter 30: Tools and Applications
Figure 189. AltiGen Network Log
Voice File Converter
This tool converts phrase, greeting, and music files from .wav to AltiGen format and vice versa. To open the
tool, from the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Utilities > Voice File Converter.
Note:
366
The source .wav file must be in 8k/8bit/mono/mu-law format.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Read Config
You can sort by clicking
a column head
To use the Voice File Converter,
1.
Beside the From field, click the Browse button to select the folder that contains the files you want to
convert.
2.
Beside the Convert To field, click the Browse button to select the destination folder for the converted files.
If they are prompts, they should be placed in the C:\PostOffice\phrases\LangCustom directory on the
gateway that is running MAXCS. If the files are music files, they should be placed in the
C:\PostOffice\Phrases\Music directory. A file that you want to use for music on hold must be named
MusicOnWaiting. To save the AltiGen system MusicOnWaiting file, rename it before replacing it.
3.
Check the files you want to convert.
4.
In the Format panel, select a format.
5.
Click Convert.
If a file format is incorrect, an error message pops up.
Read Config
Read Config (or Configuration Reader) is a tool that creates a subdirectory in \altiserv\EXE\AltiWareHtml\ of
HTML files showing details of your MAXCS configuration.
To use Configuration Reader,
1.
Launch Configuration Reader from Start > All Programs > MAXCS > Utilities > Read Config.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
367
Chapter 30: Tools and Applications
Open previous
ReadOE file
Create new
ReadOE file
Output all
configuration to this
folder
Output
configuration to
altigen_rc.dat
Click View to see
your latest HTML file
2.
Make selections in the dialog box. If you will be sending a configuration file to AltiGen Technical Support,
check ReadOE Data File, and select a folder for the .dat file.
3.
Click Go.
A processing bar indicates the progress of configuration reading.
4.
When the status window is complete, you can click the View button to view the HTML files showing your
configuration.
Columns across the top of the opening page let you view statistics on different components of your
configuration.
Work/Hunt Group Converter
The MAXCS Work/Hunt Group Converter allows you to convert workgroups to hunt groups or hunt groups to
workgroups.
To launch the Work/Hunt Group Converter, select Services > Utilities > Convert Work/Hunt Group.
Figure 190. Work/Hunt Group Converter
368
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Exporting and Importing Extensions
Workgroups and hunt groups are listed on the left side of the window, member agents and non-agents are
listed on the right side.
The Work/Hunt Group Converter can be used to convert:
• Agent to Non-Agent – If an agent belongs to any workgroup, it cannot be converted to a non-agent. When
an agent is converted to a non-agent, all workgroup-related parameters will be cleared, including wrap-up
time, inter-call delay, and outgoing workgroup number.
To convert, select the agent (indicated by YES in the Agent field) and click the Convert Agent button or
double-click the agent.
• Non-Agent to Agent – To convert, select the non-agent (indicated by NO in the Agent field) and click the
Convert Agent button or double-click the non-agent. Make sure you have enough agent licenses.
• Convert Workgroup to Hunt Group – When a workgroup is converted to a hunt group, its members are
not changed, but the following parameters are cleared, including:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
voice recording setting
queue time threshold
queue overflow settings
queue announcement
agent announcement
queue quit forward (returns to default value – to voice mail)
call distribution (if previously configured to Ring First Available Member, Ring Next Member
or Ring All, the setting is not changed. If configured to any other settings, the setting is
configured to Ring First Available Member.)
To convert, select the workgroup (indicated in the Type field) and click the Convert Group button or
double-click the workgroup.
• Convert Hunt group to Workgroup – A hunt group cannot be converted if it contains at least one nonagent. You must first change the extension from non-agent to agent (by selecting the agent and clicking
the Convert Agent button or by checking the Agent check box in the Extension Configuration window
before converting).
To convert, select the hunt group (indicated in the Type field) and click the Convert Group button or
double-click the hunt group.
Exporting and Importing Extensions
You can import and export extensions in a .csv file and you can import extensions from the active directory.
Importing Extensions from a .csv File
1.
First, back up your system configurations, using AltiGen’s Backup and Restore tool (Services > Utilities
> Backup and Restore).
2.
Go to Services > Utilities > Import Extensions.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
369
Chapter 30: Tools and Applications
3.
In the Import Extensions dialog box, click the Explore button to select a .csv file to import, and click OK.
All the extension records in the .csv file are added to the Import Extensions list.
4.
Check the records you want to import. Click the Select All and Clear All buttons to select or clear all the
check boxes.)
5.
Click Import.
A progress bar lets you see the progress of the import. When the import is finished, a message lets you
know how many extensions were imported, how many extensions were skipped and how many extensions failed.
6.
If an extension already exists, you are prompted whether to replace the extension:
If you overwrite an extension, fields that are not specified in the .csv file are not overwritten with default
values or blank values. For example, if the column Department is not included in the .csv file, but is
configured in the extension that you overwrote, the Department field is not reset to the default value when
the extension is overwritten.
When the import is finished, a report file opens showing detailed information for every extension you
attempted to import. If some fields are invalid, the system replaces them with a default value, except for
the extension number field.
370
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Exporting and Importing Extensions
The name of the text file is the same as the .csv file, except that the file extension is .txt.
Importing Extensions from the Active Directory
1.
First, back up your system configurations, using the Backup and Restore tool (Services > Utilities >
Backup and Restore).
2.
Go to Services > Utilities > Import Extensions from Active Directory.
3.
Enter the server path, user name and password.
4.
Click the Read Active Directory button.
All user information is displayed in the table. (A record must have either an Ext Number or First Name or
Last Name or Mail Address, otherwise it will not be not listed in the table.)
5.
Select the extensions you want to import. You can use the Select All button, but only records that have
an extension number can be selected. If an extension number is empty, a warning message pops up.
6.
You can use the Clear All button to clear all check marks.
7.
Click the Import button. A progress bar tells you the progress of importing.
8.
If an extension already exists in the destination list, a dialog box opens.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
371
Chapter 30: Tools and Applications
9.
Respond to the question in the dialog box. If you decide to overwrite the extension, other fields not in the
Active Directory are kept.
After finishing importing, a dialog box pops up to tell you how many extensions were imported successfully.
When you click OK, an error report file is opened automatically to tell you the detailed information on every
extension. If some fields are invalid, the system replaces them with a default value (except for the extension
number). (The report file's name is "ReportImportAD.txt". It is in the \altiserv\exe directory.)
Exporting the Extensions in a MAXCS System
1.
Go to Services > Utilities > Export Extensions.
2.
Click the Explore button and specify a name and location for the .csv file you’re about to create.
3.
Check the fields you want to export. Use the Select All and Clear All buttons to select or clear all the
check boxes.
Note: You must export the extension number field.
4.
Click the Export button to save the extension configurations to a .csv file.
A progress bar shows you the progress of the export. When the export is complete, a dialog box indicates
how many extensions were exported.
372
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
AltiGen Custom Phrase Manager
Editing a .csv File
If you edit a .csv file,
• All fields must be separated by a "," and all the records must be divided by pressing the Enter key.
• The first line must be a pre-defined field name, such as “First Name”. If the field name doesn’t match a
pre-defined field name, the field is skipped during an import operation.
• The sequence of the columns doesn’t matter.
AltiGen Custom Phrase Manager
The AltiGen Custom Phrase Manager is a Windows-based application that makes managing custom phrases
easy. It displays all custom phrases in a graphical user interface. You can add or delete a phrase by clicking
a button. You also can rename an existing phrase to a meaningful name, rather than pressing digits on the
telephone.
Note:
The AltiGen Custom Phrase Manager requires a Client SDK license.
To use the AltiGen Custom Phrase Manager,
1.
Open the tool from the Windows Start > All Programs menu. You’ll see the login screen:
Enter the following:
• MAXCS server address
• Manager Extension
• Manager Extension password.
If you want to save the password for this application, check the Always Save Password check box.
Note: The server address and the extension number will be written to the windows registry. If you choose
Always Save Password, the password will be encrypted and also saved in the registry. The tool
will automatically reload the server address, manager extension number and the password from
the registry when it starts next time.
2.
Click Login. The main window opens:
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
373
Chapter 30: Tools and Applications
• The list at the top left displays all the directories of custom phrases under your MAXCS system’s
PostOffice\phrases\ directory, such as LangCustom, LangCustom_Chinese, Tenant1Custom.
• The list at the top right lets you select an extension through which to record or listen to a phrase.
• The table shows all custom phrases under the selected directory, including:
• Phrase name
• Date and time the phrase was created or last modified
• Phrase length
• A column for a description of the phrase
Data can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking a column heading.
• Buttons let you play, create and edit phrases.
Creating a New Phrase
To create a new phrase,
1.
Select the extension you will be using to record the phrase.
2.
Click the New button.
3.
Enter a name for the phrase.
374
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
AltiGen Custom Phrase Manager
4.
Click Start Recording.
5.
When finished recording, press # on the phone and follow the instructions you hear. Also click OK in the
dialog box when done.
Playing a Phrase
To play a phrase,
1.
Select the extension you will be using to listen to the phrase.
2.
Click the Play button. The extension will ring.
3.
Answer the ring, and a voice announces the phrase before playing it.
4.
When you are finished listening, hang up the phone and click the OK button in the AltiGen Custom Phrase
Manager.
Editing a Phrase Name or Description
To edit the name of a phrase or its description,
1.
Select the phrase you want to edit.
2.
Click the Edit button.
3.
Make your changes to the name and description. Click OK.
Deleting Phrases
To delete a phrase,
1.
Select the phrase you want to delete.
2.
Click the Delete button. A confirmation dialog box opens.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
375
Chapter 30: Tools and Applications
3.
To delete the phrase, click Yes. The phrase is deleted from the directory and from the table in AltiGen
Custom Phrase Manager.
Re-recording Phrases
To re-record a phrase,
1.
Select the extension you will be using to re-record the phrase.
2.
Select the phrase, and click the Re-record button.
3.
Click the Re-Record button.
4.
When finished recording, press # on the phone and follow the instructions you hear. Also click OK in the
dialog box when done.
376
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
APPENDIX
A
E1-R2 and E1 ISDN PRI Installations
This section describes the configuration procedures necessary to implement E1 R2 digital signaling for
European, Pacific Rim, and other emerging markets. Please carefully follow the procedures step by step.
1.
Change the Configure Type to E1:
a.
From Boards view, double-click the board to be configured to open the Board Configuration
window.
b.
In the Board Configuration window, click the Board Configuration button.
c.
In the next Board Configuration window, select E1 as the configure type, and click OK.
Important: When changing from E1 to T1, then back to E1, trunk channel properties and channel group
properties will be reset to default values. It is important to make sure the trunk channel properties
are configured properly. Continue to follow the steps below to re-check your settings for the
physical layer, data link layer and signaling layer.
2.
In the Board Configuration window, double-click the channel group.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
377
Appendix A: E1-R2 and E1 ISDN PRI Installations
Figure 191. Physical Layer
Consult your CO for “Frame Type,” “Line Code,” or “Zero Code Suppression.” Do not check the System Clock Master check box because the CO is a clock provider, and the AltiGen system is synchronized to the CO. If all configurations are correct, the status should be shown as “OK,” as in Figure 191.
3.
Click the Protocol button in the Channel Group Configuration dialog box to open the Protocol
Configuration window.
Figure 192. Data Link Layer
4.
Select E1 CAS as the Span Type, and select the Switch Mode according to your country in the E1 R2
Setting field, and click OK.
5.
In the Trunk Configuration window, click the Trunk Properties button to open the E1 Channel
Configuration window.
378
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Figure 193. Signaling Layer
6.
In the E1 Channel Configuration dialog box, configure the following fields:
• Set Calling Party Category to – the Calling Party Category indicates the type of calling party, (for
example, operator, pay phone, priority, ordinary subscriber). Select 1, 2 or 3 (for ordinary subscribers,
refer to Table on page 380). If the subscribed line is intended for other purposes, contact your CO for
the proper value.
• Add extra digits before caller ID – consult your CO to find out if any extra digits are needed.
• Incoming sequences – select check box and configure the sequence according to Table on page
380.
• In-call signaling – configure the in-call signaling value according to Table on page 380.
The circled fields in Figure 193 represent values that depend on your country and its corresponding trunk
property.
Note:
Consult your CO to find out if caller ID digits are provided in the lines.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
379
Appendix A: E1-R2 and E1 ISDN PRI Installations
Signaling Values, By Country
Table 1.
Signaling values, by country
Country
Signaling Values
Set calling part category: 1
[Assume no caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)6
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)6
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)6
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)6
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)6
Chile/Nacional MFC-R2
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)6
[Assume caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence (same as above shown): DID/DNIS * Caller ID
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (115)*(K)36
For 4-digit DID, set to (1115)*(K)36
For 5-digit DID, set to (11115)*(K)36
For 6-digit DID, set to (111115)*(K)36
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111115)*(K)36
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111115)*(K)36
Set calling part category: 3
[Assume no caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)1
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)1
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)1
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)1
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)1
China MFC-R2
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)1
[Assume caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence (same as above shown):
DID/DNIS * Caller ID
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (116)*(K)31
For 4-digit DID, set to (1116)*(K)31
For 5-digit DID, set to (11116)*(K)31
For 6-digit DID, set to (111116)*(K)31
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111116)*(K)31
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111116)*(K)31
380
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Country
Signaling Values
Set calling part category: 2
[Assume no caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)6
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)6
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)6
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)6
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)6
Colombia MFC-R2
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)6
[Assume caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence (same as above shown):
DID/DNIS * Caller ID
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (115)*(K)36
For 4-digit DID, set to (1115)*(K)36
For 5-digit DID, set to (11115)*(K)36
For 6-digit DID, set to (111115)*(K)36
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111115)*(K)36
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111115)*(K)36
Set calling part category: 1
[Assume no caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)6
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)6
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)6
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)6
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)6
Ecuador MFC-R2
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)6
[Assume caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence (same as above shown):
DID/DNIS * Caller ID
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (115)*(K)36
For 4-digit DID, set to (1115)*(K)36
For 5-digit DID, set to (11115)*(K)36
For 6-digit DID, set to (111115)*(K)36
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111115)*(K)36
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111115)*(K)36
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
381
Appendix A: E1-R2 and E1 ISDN PRI Installations
Country
Signaling Values
Set calling part category: 2
[The switch doesn't support caller ID transmission]:
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
Ecuador MFC-LME
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)1
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)1
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)1
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)1
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)1
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)1
Set calling part category: 1
[The switch doesn't support caller ID transmission]:
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
Korea MFC-R2
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)6
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)6
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)6
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)6
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)6
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)6
Set calling part category: 2
[Assume no caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)1
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)1
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)1
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)1
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)1
Mexico / Teléfonos de
Mexico
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)1
[Assume caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence (same as above shown):
DID/DNIS * Caller ID
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (116)*(K)31
For 4-digit DID, set to (1116)*(K)31
For 5-digit DID, set to (11116)*(K)31
For 6-digit DID, set to (111116)*(K)31
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111116)*(K)31
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111116)*(K)31
382
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Country
Signaling Values
Set calling part category: 1
[Assume no caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)6
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)6
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)6
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)6
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)6
Panamá / Nacional MFCR2
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)6
[Assume caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence (same as above shown):
DID/DNIS * Caller ID
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (115)*(K)36
For 4-digit DID, set to (1115)*(K)36
For 5-digit DID, set to (11115)*(K)36
For 6-digit DID, set to (111115)*(K)36
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111115)*(K)36
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111115)*(K)36
Set calling part category: 1
[Assume no caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)6
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)6
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)6
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)6
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)6
Venezuela / Nacional
MFC-R2
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)6
[Assume caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence (same as above shown):
DID/DNIS * Caller ID
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (115)*(K)36
For 4-digit DID, set to (1115)*(K)36
For 5-digit DID, set to (11115)*(K)36
For 6-digit DID, set to (111115)*(K)36
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111115)*(K)36
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111115)*(K)36
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
383
Appendix A: E1-R2 and E1 ISDN PRI Installations
Country
Signaling Values
Set calling part category: 3
[Assume no caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)1
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)1
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)1
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)1
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)1
China MFC-R2
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)1
[Assume caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence (same as above shown):
DID/DNIS * Caller ID
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (116)*(K)31
For 4-digit DID, set to (1116)*(K)31
For 5-digit DID, set to (11116)*(K)31
For 6-digit DID, set to (111116)*(K)31
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111116)*(K)31
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111116)*(K)31
Set calling part category: 2
[Assume no caller ID provided] :
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)6
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)6
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)6
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)6
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)6
Colombia MFC-R2
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)6
[Assume caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence (same as above shown):
DID/DNIS * Caller ID
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (115)*(K)36
For 4-digit DID, set to (1115)*(K)36
For 5-digit DID, set to (11115)*(K)36
For 6-digit DID, set to (111115)*(K)36
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111115)*(K)36
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111115)*(K)36
384
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Country
Signaling Values
Set calling part category: 1
[Assume no caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)6
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)6
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)6
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)6
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)6
Ecuador MFC-R2
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)6
[Assume caller ID provided] :
Incoming sequence (same as above shown):
DID/DNIS * Caller ID
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (115)*(K)36
For 4-digit DID, set to (1115)*(K)36
For 5-digit DID, set to (11115)*(K)36
For 6-digit DID, set to (111115)*(K)36
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111115)*(K)36
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111115)*(K)36
Set calling part category: 2
[The switch doesn't support caller ID transmission]:
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
Ecuador MFC-LME
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)1
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)1
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)1
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)1
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)1
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)1
Set calling part category: 1
[The switch doesn't support caller ID transmission]:
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
Korea MFC-R2
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)6
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)6
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)6
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)6
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)6
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)6
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
385
Appendix A: E1-R2 and E1 ISDN PRI Installations
Country
Signaling Values
Set calling part category: 2
[Assume no caller ID provided] :
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)1
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)1
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)1
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)1
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)1
Mexico / Teléfonos de
Mexico
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)1
[Assume caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence (same as above shown):
DID/DNIS * Caller ID
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (116)*(K)31
For 4-digit DID, set to (1116)*(K)31
For 5-digit DID, set to (11116)*(K)31
For 6-digit DID, set to (111116)*(K)31
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111116)*(K)31
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111116)*(K)31
Set calling part category: 1
[Assume no caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits) :
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)6
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)6
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)6
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)6
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)6
Panamá / Nacional MFCR2
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)6
[Assume caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence (same as above shown):
DID/DNIS * Caller ID
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (115)*(K)36
For 4-digit DID, set to (1115)*(K)36
For 5-digit DID, set to (11115)*(K)36
For 6-digit DID, set to (111115)*(K)36
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111115)*(K)36
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111115)*(K)36
386
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Country
Signaling Values
Set calling part category: 1
[Assume no caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence: DID/DNIS
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits):
For 3-digit DID, set to (113)6
For 4-digit DID, set to (1113)6
For 5-digit DID, set to (11113)6
For 6-digit DID, set to (111113)6
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111113)6
Venezuela / Nacional
MFC-R2
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111113)6
[Assume caller ID provided]:
Incoming sequence (same as above shown):
DID/DNIS * Caller ID
In-call signaling (depend on how many DID digits) :
For 3-digit DID, set to (115)*(K)36
For 4-digit DID, set to (1115)*(K)36
For 5-digit DID, set to (11115)*(K)36
For 6-digit DID, set to (111115)*(K)36
For 7-digit DID, set to (1111115)*(K)36
For 8-digit DID, set to (11111115)*(K)36
E1 ISDN PRI Installation
This section describes the configuration procedures necessary to implement E1 ISDN PRI signaling for
European, Pacific Rim, and other emerging markets. Please carefully follow the procedures step by step.
1.
Change the Configure Type to E1:
a.
From Boards view, double-click the board to be configured to open the Board Configuration
window.
b.
In the Board Configuration window, click the Board Configuration button.
c.
In the next configuration window, select E1 as the configure type and click OK.
Important: When changing from E1 to T1, then back to E1, channel group properties will be reset to default
values. It is important to make sure the channel group properties are configured properly. Follow
the steps below to re-check your settings for the physical layer and data link layer.
2.
In the Board Configuration window, double-click the channel group.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
387
Appendix A: E1-R2 and E1 ISDN PRI Installations
Figure 194. Physical Layer
Consult your CO for “Frame Type,” “Line Code,” or “Zero Code Suppression.” Do not check the System Clock Master check box because the CO is a clock provider, and our system is synchronized to the
CO. If all configurations are correct, the status should be shown as “OK,” as in Figure 194.
3.
Click the Protocol button in the Channel Group Configuration dialog box to open the Protocol
Configuration window.
4.
Select Regular ISDN PRI as the Span Type, and select the Switch Mode according to your country in the
ISDN PRI Setting field, and click OK.
Figure 195. Data Link layer
What you should select in the B Channel Maintenance Message list depends on what country you reside in
(see Table 2 on page 389).
388
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Protocol/B Channel Maintenance Message Settings, By Country
Table 2.
Protocol & B Channel Maintenance Message Setting, by Country
Country
Protocol Supported
B Channel Maintenance
Message Setting
Argentina
ETSI
Restart
Australia
Austel TS014, ETSI
Restart
Belgium
ETSI
Restart
Brazil
ETSI
Restart
China, HK
ETSI
Restart
Czech
ETSI
Restart
France
ETSI, VN4
None
Germany
ETSI
Restart
Greece
ETSI
Restart
Italy
ETSI
Restart
Japan
NTT INS1500
Restart
Korea
ETSI
None
Macedonia
ETSI
Restart
Mexico
ETSI
Restart
Netherlands
ETSI
Restart
Nordic
ETSI
Restart
Poland
ETSI
Restart
Russia
ETSI
Restart
Saudi Arabia
ETSI
Restart
Singapore
ETSI
Restart
South Africa
ETSI
Restart
Spain
ETSI
Restart
Taiwan
Bellcore, ETSI
None
Thailand
ETSI
Restart
UK
ETSI (for DASS II/DPNSS)
Restart
UK, Ireland
ETSI, British Telecom ISDN 30
None
USA
Bellcore TR 1268
Restart and Service
USA, Canada
AT&T TR 41449/41459
Restart
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
389
Appendix A: E1-R2 and E1 ISDN PRI Installations
390
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
APPENDIX
B
Required Service Parameters
This section identifies the recommended and supported parameters for T1, PRI, and E1 service and provides
you with the information needed when you make your service request.
Service Parameters/Request Information for T1
To subscribe to T1 service, certain parameters are required to establish service. The information provided
below identifies the recommended and supported parameters for T1 service. When ordering T1 service,
provide the following service request information:
Equipment Information
• PBX Manufacturer – AltiGen Communications, Inc.
• CSU/DSU – ADTRAN T1 ACE (recommended) or other CSU/DSU
Technical Information for T1 with Voice
Signaling Protocol:
• E&M Wink Start (recommended)
• E&M Immediate Start
• Ground Start
• Loop Start (not recommended)
Trunk Type:
• DID
• 2-Way DID (recommended)
• DOD
Framing:
• Super Frame (SF)/D4
• Extended Super Frame (ESF) (recommended)
Line Coding:
• Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI)
• B8ZS (recommended)
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
391
Appendix B: Required Service Parameters
DNIS, Caller ID:
• DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency)
Physical Termination:
• RJ-48X or RJ-48C
Wire:
• 4 wires
800 Service:
• You decide
Termination Impedance:
• 100 ohms
Type of Registered Services Provided
• BN 1.544 Mbps SF without power
• DN 1.544 Mbps SF B8ZS without power
• 1KN 1.544 Mbps ANSI ESF without power
• 1SN 1.544 Mbps ANSI ESF, B8ZS without power (recommended)
Service Order Code
SOC 6.0P AS.2
T1 Channel Assignment
• Trunk Type – In, Out, or 2-Way (recommended)
• Channels Assigned – 24 (Enter partial channels if you wish to subscribe to both voice and data service.)
• Hunting – Most Idle, Least Idle, Ascend, Descend
• DNIS Digits/Signal – 3/DTMF (can be 3 to 10 digits)
• Caller ID Signal – DTMF, if available (Not every service provider provides Caller ID over T1 lines.)
CSU/DSU Requirements
The CSU (channel service unit) is a device used to connect a digital trunk line coming in from the phone
company to the PBX. A CSU can terminate signals, repeat signals and respond to loopback commands sent
from the central office.
Service Parameters/Request Information for PRI
To subscribe to PRI service, certain parameters are required to establish service. The information provided
below identifies the recommended and supported parameters for PRI service. When ordering PRI service, provide the following service request information:
Equipment Information
• PBX Manufacturer – AltiGen Communications, Inc.
• CSU/DSU – ADTRAN T1 ACE (recommended) or other CSU/DSU
392
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Technical Information for PRI with Voice
Switch Type:
• 5ESS (recommended)
• DMS (recommended)
• NI-2 (recommended)
• 4ESS
Framing:
• Super Frame (SF)/D4
• Extended Super Frame (ESF) (recommended)
Line Coding:
• Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI)
• B8ZS (recommended)
Physical Termination:
• RJ-48X or RJ-48C
Wire:
• 4 wires
PRI Channel Assignment
D Channels Assignment – 24th channel (channel ID 23)
Note: MAXCS can configure any channel in a PRI span to be the D channel. The default setting is the
last channel. Every span should select a D channel within the span. Shared D channel (NFAS) or
back up D channel is not supported.
Hunting – Most Idle, Least Idle, Ascend, Descend
DNIS Digits – can be 3 to 10 digits
CSU/DSU Requirements
The CSU (channel service unit) is a device used to connect a digital trunk line coming in from the phone
company to the PBX. A CSU can terminate signals, repeat signals, and respond to loopback commands sent
from the central office.
Service Parameters/Request Information for E1
To subscribe to E1 service, certain parameters are required to establish service. The information provided
below identifies the recommended and supported parameters for E1 service. When ordering E1 service,
provide the following service request information:
Equipment Information
• PBX Manufacturer – AltiGen Communications, Inc.
• CSU/DSU – ADTRAN T1 ACE (recommended) or other CSU/DSU
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
393
Appendix B: Required Service Parameters
Technical Information for E1 with Voice
Switch Type:
• Austel TS014
• ETSI NET5 (recommended)
• NT DMS-100
Framing:
• No CRC (recommended)
• CRC4
Line Coding:
• Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI)
• HDB3 (recommended)
Physical Termination:
• RJ-48X or RJ-48C
Wire:
• 4 wires
E1 Channel Assignment
• Data Channels Assignment – 1st channel (channel ID 0)
• Channels Assignment – 17th channel (channel ID 16)
• Hunting – Most Idle, Least Idle, Ascend, Descend
• DNIS Digits – can be 3 to 10 digits
CSU/DSU Requirements
The CSU (channel service unit) is a device used to connect a digital trunk line coming in from the phone
company to the PBX. A CSU can terminate signals, repeat signals, and respond to loopback commands sent
from the central office.
394
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
APPENDIX
C
Network Ports
If MAXCS is installed behind a firewall/NAT router, you must open TCP and UDP ports according to this table:
For external VoIP connection through a firewall
TCP
UDP
10032
Remote AltiGen IP phone/IPTalk to phone service
10064
10060
5061
Remote AltiGen IP phone firmware download (TFTP)
Extension global appearance
69
10066
VoIP RTP Port (Voice Stream) for SIP and H.323
From X to Y
(See note
below)
SIP Tie Trunk from other AltiGen systems
10060
SIP Trunking Service from carrier
5060
1720
H.323 Tie Trunk
H.245 (Media Capability)
Note:
From X to Y
(See note
below)
An easy way to find out the RTP/TCP port range(s) for SIP and H.323 is to look in MaxAdmin View >
Current Resource Statistics. All the ports are listed in the Local Ports column.
Alternatively, you can figure the port range in the following way:
When MAXCS or Softswitch is running on a non-Windows 2008 system,
BasePort = 49152
When MAXCS or Softswitch is running on a Windows 2008 system,
BasePort = 49664 (This is because Windows 2008 has some system services use ports in the 49152
range.)
For a single chassis system:
X = BasePort
Y = BasePort + Total IP codec channels x 2
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
395
Appendix C: Network Ports
For a multi-chassis system, you need to enter multiple ranges:
Gateway ID = 0
X0 = BasePort
Y0 = BasePort + Total IP codec channels in GW0 x 2
Gateway ID = 1
X1 = BasePort + 512 x 1
Y1 = X1 + Total IP codec channels in GW1 x 2
Gateway ID = 2
X2 = BasePort + 512 x 2
Y2 = X2 + Total IP codec channels in GW2 x 2
Gateway ID=n
X(n)=BasePort + 512 x n
Y(n)=X(n) + Total IP codec channels in GW(n) x 2
To connect the following applications
through a firewall
AltiConsole
TCP
10025
10025
MaxCommunicator/MaxAgent/IPTalk VM service for
MaxCommunicator/MaxAgent
10026
10028
MaxCommunicator/MaxAgent MeetMe Conference
10040
10025
10027
MaxSupervisor
10028
10029
10050
MaxMobile Communicator
10081
Client Applications Auto Update
10050
CDR Search
10025
Remote MAXCS Administrator
10068
VRManager
(VRManager may not work behind NAT)
396
10080
10040
MaxInSight
10029
Network Assessment Tool
10010
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
UDP
Remote IP Phones Behind NAT
MAXCS connects the following application through a
firewall
External CDR Logger Service
TCP
UDP
10027
Remote IP Phones Behind NAT
For remote IP phones behind NAT, you don’t need to do any configuration. However, if the remote firewall/NAT
router blocks outgoing traffic, then you will need to open the following ports on the remote firewall/NAT router:
• UDP 10060
• UDP 30,000~31,000
• TCP 10064
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
397
Appendix C: Network Ports
398
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
APPENDIX
D
Technical Support & Product Repair Services
This section describes:
• AltiGen technical support policy and procedures
• Product repair
• Technical training for administrators
Technical Support Eligibility
Eligibility: AltiGen provides technical support to Authorized AltiGen Partners and distributors only.
End user customers, please contact your Authorized AltiGen Partner for technical support.
How To Reach AltiGen Technical Support
Authorized AltiGen Partners and distributors may contact AltiGen technical support by the following
methods:
• You may request technical support on AltiGen’s Partner web site, at https://partner.altigen.com. Open a
case on this site, and a Technical Support representative will respond within one business day.
• Call 888-ALTIGEN, option 5, or 408-597-9000, option 5, and follow the prompts. Your call will be
answered by one of AltiGen’s Technical Support Representatives or routed to the Technical Support
Message Center if no one is available to answer your call.
Technical support hours are 5:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., PT, Monday through Friday, except holidays.
If all representatives are busy, your call will be returned in the order it was received, within four hours under
normal circumstances. Outside AltiGen business hours, only urgent calls will be returned on the same day
(within one hour). Non-urgent calls will be returned on the next business day.
Please be ready to supply the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Partner ID
AltiGen Certified Engineer ID
Product serial number
AltiWare or MAXCS version number
Number and types of boards in the system
Server model
The telephone number where you can be reached
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
399
Appendix D: Technical Support and Product Repair Services
• A brief description of the problem and the procedure to reproduce the problem
Having this information ready will help us to better assist you.
End users who have problems unresolved by their AltiGen Authorized Partner, and Partners who have
problems unresolved by AltiGen Technical Support may send an e-mail to AltiGen’s CEO at ceo@altigen.com.
Product Repair
You may send defective AltiGen-manufactured hardware products (in or out of warranty) to our factory for
prompt authorized repairs. For information on AltiGen repair services and return policies and the AltiGen
warranty, visit the AltiGen Partner portal at https://partner.altigen.com.
Technical Training for Administrators
AltiTraining, LLC, has created comprehensive 3- and 4-day hands-on training courses to teach AltiGen system
administrators everything from the basic skills of extension configuration to troubleshooting and multiple
location implementation of Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP).
The intensive courses were developed under the guidance of the AltiGen corporate office with the help of
Partners, installers, and customers. AltiTraining’s comprehensive curriculum is based on the same format
AltiGen uses to train their engineers and Partners. Experienced telecommunications professionals teach
AltiTraining classes and they bring a wealth of real-life experience to every course. AltiTraining classes
consistently are rated as one of the most valuable and relevant that our students have ever attended!
Who Should Attend?
Anyone responsible for the day-to-day administration of an AltiGen IP-PBX telephone system or anyone who
would like to learn about the system features and functionality will benefit from this hands-on training.
What Do the Courses Cover?
•
•
•
•
Phone line options (analog lines vs. digital T1/PRI with DID).
How to install and upgrade hardware, software, licenses and wiring options.
Server design (backplane, OS, RAID, RPS, and so on.), configuration and growth planning.
Day-to-day administration with MaxAdmin. Learn to build extensions, huntgroups and workgroups to set
up call handling and routing features, and system configuration options.
• Utility and security programs to simplify and provide security/fraud insight and set up routine system
backups for disaster recovery.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Call detail reporting (CDR) and real-time monitoring (MaxSupervisor).
MaxCommunicator, MaxAgent, MaxSupervisor, and AltiConsole client applications.
Voice over IP (VoIP) network requirements and implementation for branches or remote workers.
Unified messaging, utilizing Microsoft CRM, Outlook, Goldmine and ACT!
System troubleshooting, covering common problems/scenarios and basic troubleshooting techniques.
New product developments and future upgrades.
How Can I Register Or Get More Information?
Visit the AltiTraining web site at www.AltiTraining.com to register for a class or to get more information.
You may contact AltiTraining, LLC, with additional questions:
• E-mail: info@AltiTraining.com
• Phone: (877) ALTI-TRAIN (or 877-258-4872).
400
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
APPENDIX
E
Troubleshooting
This section describes some common problems you may encounter, and provides steps you can take to try to
resolve them.
Poor Voice Quality
When voice quality is poor, try the following:
1.
Perform a Loop-Back Test. Call yourself by dialing out and dialing back into yourself. If you don’t have
any problems performing this test, the problem is most likely in the network or at the remote site.
2.
Check Traffic Between MAXCS IP Stations. Open the Current Resource Statistics window (on the View
menu) and the IP Cumulative Traffic Statistics window (on the Report menu) in MaxAdmin to view network
traffic.
3.
Check the RTP and RTCP Settings. RTP/RTCP stands for Real-Time Transport (Control) Protocol, a
transport protocol for real-time applications used to transport packetized voice packets over the IP
network. Make sure UDP port numbers (49152 + n*512) ~ (49152 + n*512+p*2), where “n” is the gateway
ID and “p” is the number of IP resource channels, are not assigned to other applications.
Note: You can find this range displayed in the Current Resource Statistics window in the Local Ports
column.
4.
Check Network Configurations. Follow all network configuration guidelines provided under “Network
Configuration Guidelines for VoIP” on page 281. Make sure the router, WAN bandwidth, and Jitter Buffer
are configured properly.
Cannot Make a Connection
If a connection cannot be made, check the following:
1.
Check network connectivity using “ping.”
2.
Check network firewall settings. See “Network Configuration Guidelines for VoIP” on page 281 for details.
3.
Check the IP address of the destination system.
4.
Check the RTP and RTCP settings. Make sure UDP port numbers 49152-49199 are not assigned to other
applications. RTP/RTCP stands for Real-Time Transport (Control) Protocol, a transport protocol for realtime applications used to transport packetized voice packets over the IP network.
5.
Check the IP Dialing Table in Enterprise Manager for Server ID Length. Refer to “Defining the IP Dialing
Table” on page 303.
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
401
Appendix E: Troubleshooting
6.
Check if Called Extension is a Workgroup or has Multiple Call Waiting Enabled. When the called party
is a workgroup pilot number or has Multiple Call Waiting enabled, the caller is placed on hold and hears
ringback or music.
IP Resource Does Not Appear in Current Resource Statistics
When an IP resource doesn’t appear in the Current Resource Statistics window, there are two possible
causes:
• Device Driver is Not Running. Check the device driver. Make sure it’s installed and working properly.
• Triton VoIP Board is Not Installed Properly. Refer to the Quick Installation Guide for details on proper
installation of the Triton VoIP board.
402
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Index
Symbols
#12, enabling, for language setting 79
#27 to relocate global extension
319
Numerics
10 digit dialing area codes 39
A
access code 123, 126
access, system 17
account code
blocking display 163
forcing 163
activity
configuration 46
adding a huntgroup 215
adding a workgroup 237
admin defined # 200
admins, how many connected to
system 360
advanced queue management
258
menu selection 259
queue overflow 260
after hours scheduling 242
agent check box 162
agents auto logout 242
allow call redirect/priority change
258
alternate mark inversion (AMI)
101
alternate server
behind NAT 312
setting 311
switching to 312, 319
AltiGen board test tool 357
AltiGen IP phone configuration
195
AltiGen services
stop & start 362
Alti-Mobile Extension
limitations 212
AM schedule 35
AMI line coding 101
announcement
time stamp 173, 219, 248
answer options 181
answering
huntgroup call handling 224
workgroup call handling 253
application extension 180, 242
definition & uses 89
failover plan 90
setup 89
application extension configuration 89
application failover plan 90
Apply To, multiple extensions 160
area code, on trunk 124
area codes
system home 29
assigning client licenses 24
attaching a gateway 54
attributes
setting trunk 123
trunk 125
audio peripheral configuration 44
audio peripheral options
for huntgroups 224
auto attendant
adding 66
collecting digits 70
configuring 65
editing 67
making assignments 71
menu items, configuring 68
prompts, phrase management
71
push URL/Web page 68
recording custom phrases 72
setting call priority 69
setting call SKLR 69
auto logout agents 242
auto record
personal extension calls 164
auto-discovery of server IP address
configuring 201
disabling 203
two servers in network 204
B
B8ZS (Binary 8 Zero Substitution)
101
back up system data 358
backing up
files 358
Backup & Restore Utility 358
bandwidth 284
and public pipe 302
WAN 284
basic queuing control 256
binary 8 zero substitution (B8Z8)
101
BLF programmable key 200
Block Caller Name and Number
from view 185
blocking account code display 163
blocking all outgoing calls 39
blocking caller ID 185
blocking calls 38
blocking unauthorized SIP Invite
requests 4
board
H323SP, configuring 111
MAX1000/2000, configuring
117
mobile extension, configuring
206
SIPSP & H323, configuring 109
SISP, configuring 110
Triton Analog Station, configuring 96
Triton Analog Trunk LS/GS &
LS, configuring 96
Triton MeetMe 95
Triton Resource, configuring
95
Triton T1/E1, configuring 97
Triton T1/E1, setting up channels 101
Triton VoIP, configuring 97
virtual, purpose 109
board configuration 93
Boards View window 20
boards, supported 10
bridge
conference 29
business hours
24-hour business hour setup
35
business hours profile
caller ID routing 145
DNIS routing 147
business hours, setting up 33
busy call handling 179, 181, 222,
251
huntgroups 223
C
call accounting report 42
call blocking, outgoing 142
Call Center menu 18
call control 39
call handling 179, 181, 222, 251
for workgroups 251
huntgroup 222
incoming 179
Call Log View window 22
call parking 29
call priority
caller ID routing 145
DNIS routing 147
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
403
setting 69
call record programmable key
200
call recording
configuring system-wide 84
extension based recording 84
file name description 83
multiple gateways 85
personal options 163
remote shared directory 85
requirements 83
trunk based recording 84
call recording configuration 83
call reports 40
call reports, external 41
call restrictions 177
extension 178
system 38
call routing 140
call screening
enabling 183
with ONA 183
call SKLR setting 69
call waiting
distinctive 173
distinctive tones 219, 248
multiple 181
options 181
callback interview 258
callback number 173, 219, 248
caller ID
collecting 132
for E911 calls 4, 273
transmitted 162
caller ID routing 143
business hours profile 145
call priority 145
holiday profile 145
caller ID verification 184
calling numbers, PRI 107
calls, blocking all outgoing 39
card logical ID 21
CDR, setting up 40
Centrex transfer 125
changing password 17
changing scope 316
channel 22
channel group info 95, 117
channel information 121
channel mapping list 94
channel number 21
channel service unit, installing
108
client licenses 24
CO switch, and terminal device
107
code
access 123, 126
area 124
codec profile
assigning to IP addresses 298
inter-gateway, setting 299
setting 295
collecting caller ID and DID digits
132
collecting digits, in auto attendant
70
collecting trace 363
conference bridge option 29
conference calls, types 265
Configuration Reader tool 367
confirm callback number 173,
219, 248
connection difficulty 401
copy from button, IP phone configuration 200
country, for system 28
cross talk, test tool 358
CSU installation 108
CT-Bus clock 54
CT-Bus clock master, and T1/E1
Clocking 101
CT-Bus mode 54
CT-Bus test tool 358
cumulative IP traffic statistics 326
Current Resource Statistics window 23
missing IP resource 402
current traffic statistics
refresh interval 24
custom application
and message notification 221,
250
custom phrase manager 373
D
data
backup 358
restore 358
dedicated mobile trunk 210
default password for MaxAdmin
17
default routes, outcall routing 152
detaching a gateway 55
device driver 402
DHCP option 120 201
diagnosing tools 357
Diagnostic menu 18
dialed digit translator 31
dialing
en-bloc 125
overlap 125
dialing 9 twice, preventing 125
dialing delay
resolving 156
404 MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
T1 signaling 132
dialing pattern tips 154
dialing pattern tips, out call routing 154
dialing patterns 153
dialing scheme
trunk 124
DID
collecting 132
DID number
extension 162, 215, 237
display workgroup status
IP phone 200
distinctive call waiting 173
distinctive call waiting tones 219,
248
distinctive ringing 28
distribution lists, configuring 63
distribution lists, creating 63
DNIS
and language setting 80
DNIS routing 145
business hours profile 147
call priority 147
holiday profile 147
do not disturb, setting 181
domain, VoIP
adding servers 308, 309
creating multi-site 306
extension scope 314
managing users 313
master 306
rejoining a server to 310
relocating extension 317
relocating extension using #27
319
synchronizing manually 323
system ID and 309
DTMF delivery 297
E
E1
channel assignment 394
subscribing to service 393
E1 ISDN PRI installation 387
E1-R2 CAS installation 377
e911 CID for extensions 162
e911 support 4, 273
location IDs 274
on AltiGen phones 278
on FXS gateways 279
e-mail 63
name 172, 218, 247
e-mail messaging options 63
e-mail services 63
e-mail, setting notification 174
emergency dial notification 175
emergency numbers 43
en-bloc dialing 125, 305
Enterprise Manager 291
changing the password 295
default password 292
fixed IP address 293
how to log in 292
login failed 293
resetting password 292
user interface 293
error messages
installation 15
ESF (Extended Superframe Format) 101
Exchange
creating new mailbox user 346
integration
configuration 331
debugging 333
options, setting 61
requirements 331
troubleshooting tips 347
synchronization, testing for
347
Exchange server
synchronizing voice mail with
172
exporting extensions 369
Extended Superframe Format
(ESF) 101
extension
assigning groups to 168
calling options 177
changing location & type 165
DID number 162, 215, 237
e-mail name 172, 218, 247
exporting to csv file 369
general settings 159
importing from Active Directory 371
importing to csv file 369
incoming call handling 179
information only mailbox 172
length 30
mail forwarding 173
mail management 171
MeetMe Conference 266
message notification 174, 220
monitor list 184
monitoring 184
outgoing call restrictions 177
physical extension 159
relocating in domain 317
relocating in domain using #27
319
security checker 360
send notification 176, 221, 250
setting phone display options
167
setting SMTP/POP3 172
setting Triton analog line properties 165
speed dial 170
types defined 160
virtual 160
extension activity 46
extension based recording 84
extension configuration 159
extension dialed digit translator
31, 32
extension scope
changing 316
Extension Security Checker 360
Extension View window 20
external logging 41
F
failover when network is down
314
FastStart Enabled option 111
feature code programmable key
200
files
backup 358
firewall, configuration 285
firewall, opening ports 395
firewall/NAT router
configuring port forwarding
302
first digit 29
first digit translator 31
flash key (Alti-IP 600) 200
forced account code 163
forward from group greeting 248
forwarding numbers, specifying
184
G
G.711
jitter buffer range 297
RTP packet length 297
G.711/G.723 silence suppression
297
G.723
jitter buffer range 297
G.729
jitter buffer range 297
RTP packet length 297
G.729 silence suppression 297
G711 jitter buffer range 297
G711 RTP packet length 297
G723 jitter buffer range 297
gateway
attaching 54
configuring 55
detaching 55
ID & password 55
gateway management 52
global extension
rerouting 314
global least cost routing, configuring 322
greeting prompts 46
group
setup 168
group greeting, press "0" for forward 248
group paging 227
groups
assigning to extension 168
GTE 101
H
H.323, and NAT 285
H323 tie trunk properties, setting
126
hackers, detecting 175
hardware problems 357
hardware status 20
headset key 200
Help menu 18
holiday
routing rules 143
holiday profile
caller ID routing 145
DNIS routing 147
home area code 29
hop off
enabling 39
hunt group
converting to workgroup 368
huntgroup
adding a 215
answer handling 224
business hours 217
busy call handling 223
call handling 222
configuration 213
configuring basic attributes
215
mail management 217
queue management 224
setting hours 217
setting up membership 216
setup 215
single call handling 224
huntgroup hours 217
I
ID, server
changing length 309
impedance match, performing
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
405
136
importing extensions 369
in call routing 143
in call routing rules 143
incall routing
Web IP calls 141
incoming call handling 140
information only mailbox 172
installation
E1 ISDN PRI 387
E1 R2 CAS 377
error messages 15
MAXCS, preparation 12
installing
MaxAdmin 15
MAXCS 13
installing a Channel Service Unit
(CSU) 108
integrating Exchange Server 331
inter-call delay, setting 169
intercom, enabling 162
Intranet 281
intranet pipe 300
configuring 301
IP addresses
undefined 301
IP Cumulative Traffic Statistics
window 326
IP device range
adding 299
IP dialing table, configuring 303
IP extensions 160
IP Gateways
managing 52
IP network
defining address range 301
IP networks
defining 300
IP phone
display workgroup status 200
IP 805 configuration 285
registration password 192
time display 198
IP resource, missing from Current
Resource Statistics window 402
IP Trunk Access 33
ISDN PRI switch mode, setting
103
ISDN setting
TEI 107
ISP 281
J
Jam Bit 8 101
jitter
average statistic 326
jitter buffer 284, 297
G.711 297
G.723 297
G.729 297
K
keepalive message 129
L
language
DNIS routing to 80
enabling #12 79
rules MAXCS follows 81
setting in extension config 162
languages
configuring extension 78
enabling in AA 77
other, configuring 76
LCR, configuring 322
least cost routing, configuring
322
License menu 18
licenses (table) 10
licenses, clients 24
limitations
Alti-Mobile Extension 212
line loss, acceptable range 138
line park 180, 200
line park, configuration 231
live call handling, enabling 181
local network
defining 300
location format for trunks 22
log file
network log 365
log file, security alert 176
logging outbound workgroup calls
170
login 17
login failed, Enterprise Manager
293
logout 17
M
mail forwarding
setting extension for 173
mail management
for extensions 171
for workgroups 246
mailbox 171
information only 172
size 173, 219, 248
mailbox capacities 173, 219, 248
main menu 18
main number 29
making a connection
difficulty with 401
406 MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Manager Extension 28
MAX
channel group info 117
MaxAdmin
installing 15
MaxAdmin & Extension Security
Checker 360
MaxAdmin default password 17
MaxAdmins, disconnecting from
system 360
MAXCS 7.0.1, new features 4,
111, 273
MaxCS behind NAT
configuring 302
forwarding ports 303
MaxCS Private Cloud feature differences 46, 69, 89, 227, 331,
351
MaxMobile, configuring 210, 211,
297
MDMF (Multiple Data Message
Format) 166
measuring Rx level of trunk channel 138
media path, about 109
MeetMe Conference
appointing an admin 266
auto-mute feature 265
configuring 266
e-mail template 271
overview 265
menu selection
advanced queue management
259
menu, MaxAdmin main 18
message
length 173, 219, 248
maximum number of 173, 219,
248
notification 174, 220
schedule 177, 222, 251
notification for workgroup 249
notification options, setting
176
notification timing, setting 176
notification type 220, 249
playback 173, 219, 248
retention 173, 219, 248
message notification
setting 174
message playback options 173
messages
managing 61
recording options 61
setting e-mail options 63
setting notification retries 60
messaging, managing 59
Microsoft Exchange integration
331
Microsoft SQL 41
mobile extension
and MaxMobile Communicator
210, 211
limitations 212
overview 205
press any key to answer call
211
voice mail 212
mobile trunk
shared or dedicated 210
Monitor Available list 185
monitor list 184
monitoring extensions, set up 184
multilingual prompts 75
multilingual system
auto attendant 77
configuring 76
configuring #12 for extension
79
configuring DNIS routing 80
configuring extension 78
language used 81
multilink 284
multiple call waiting, enabling 181
multiple data message format
(MDMF) 166
music files
converting 366
music on hold 45
MVIP cable, test tool 358
N
N/A programmable key 200
NAT support 285, 303
MaxCS behind, configuring 302
server behind 300
network
defining 300
IP, defining address range 301
quality of service 281
Network Address Translation
(NAT) 285
network guidelines for VoIP 281
network log file 365
network management 291
network ports used by MAXCS
395
no answer handling 181, 223, 252
non-workday handling 242
notification
message 174, 220
schedule 177, 222
workgroup messages 249
notification type and timing 176,
221, 250
numbering plan 29
ISDN, configuring 105
O
ONA
call screening 183
configuring 182
enabling 182
ring duration 184
one number access
configuring 182
enabling 182
one-way connection, test tool 358
online help 18
Operator Extension 29
operator group 29
option 120, DHCP 201
out call routing
configuration 149
configuring 149
default routes 152
dialing delay 156
dialing pattern tips 154
dialing patterns 153
example configuration 154
overview 149
route definitions 150
out of sync 323
outgoing calls, blocking 142
outgoing calls, blocking all 39
overhead paging 46
overlap dialing 125, 305
P
packet length 297
pager notification 220, 249
paging
group paging 227
overhead paging 46
trunk configuration 124
paging groups 227
password
changing 17
extension 161
IP phone registration 192
PBX menu 18
personal call recording options
163
phone display options 167
phone number
trunk 124
phrase management
for auto attendant 71, 373
phrase manager, custom 373
physical extension 159
ping, to check network connectivity 401
pipe
intranet 300
intranet, configuring 301
public 300
public, configuring 301
playback message 173, 219, 248
playing music from a file 45
PM schedule 35
poor voice quality 401
POP3 service 63
port number 21
ports, network 395
Postmaster Extension 63
prefix
system prohibited 38
toll call 43
press "0" option 173, 248
press any key to answer call 211
PRI
channel assignment 393
subscribing to service 392
PRI calling numbers 107
PRI ISDN numbering plan 105
priority promotion 258
priority queuing 145
private networks 300
product repair 400
prompts
converting 366
greeting and update 46
in other languages 75
multiple languages, storing 76
PSTN failover 314
public pipe 300
configuring 301
push URL/Web page 68
Q
quality of service (QoS) 281
queue announcement 256
queue call priority score 259
queue management
advanced 258
for huntgroups 224
for workgroups 255
queue overflow 260
queue overflow routing 257
queue phrase options 256
queuing control
basic 256
quit queue 257
R
Read Config tool 367
Realtime Transport Control Protocol (RTP/RTCP)
definition 401
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
407
recorded announcements, configuration 45
recording
auto attendant phrases 72,
373
configuring call 84
configuring on trunk 126
file description 83
messages 61
multiple gateways 85
personal options 163
remote shared directory 85
requirements 83
recording options
for workgroups 239
Recording Seat license 164, 239
Recording Session license 164,
239
recording tone 164, 239
redirect IP phones when server
down 319
refresh enterprise configuration
323
refresh interval, current traffic
statistics 24
rejoining a server to VoIP domain
310
relocating domain extension 317
relocating domain extension using #27 319
remote IP phones behind NAT 397
remote locations 305
repair, product 400
replicate from domain 323
report
cumulative IP traffic statistics
326
system summary 325
Report menu 18
reports, call logs 40
reports, system 325–327
requirements
CPU, memory, HDD 9
rerouting outgoing calls 314
reset board button 95
Reset button, Extension View 21
Reset button, Trunk View window
22
resetting cumulative statistics
327
Resource board 95
Restoring files 360
restricting tie trunk calls 39
restrictions
call 178
outgoing call 177
ring all available members 224,
253
ring average longest idle member
254
ring back 29
ring fewest answered calls 254
ring first available member 224,
253
ring longest idle member 224,
253
ring shortest average talk time
254
ringing
distinctive, enabling 28
RNA Agent Auto Logout 253
RNA Agent Not Ready 253
route access 33
route access code vs trunk access
code 123, 149
route definitions
out call routing 150
router 285
routing
by caller ID 143
by caller ID & DNIS 143
by DNIS 145
incoming calls 143
routing rules, in call 143
RTP & RTCP settings 401
RTP packet length 297
RTP/RTCP
definition 401
Rx level 138
S
Salesforce Integration license 11,
25
scheduling backup 359
scope of extension
changing 316
VoIP domain 314
seat-based licenses 24
secure RTP 298
security alert log file 176
security, detecting hackers 175
send notification 176, 250
server down
redirect IP phones 319
server ID length 401
changing 309
server IP address, auto-discovery
201
server IP address, in IP dialing table 305
service
parameters 391
subscribing to 391
service level calculations options
button 238
408 MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
service level for workgroups 23
service level threshold 238
services
AltiGen, stop & start 362
SMTP/POP3 63
Services menu 18
setting 10 digit dialing area codes
39
setting huntgroup hours 217
setting trunk attributes 123
setting up
extensions 159
groups 168
huntgroup mail management
217
huntgroup membership 216
huntgroups 215
workgroups 237
SF (Superframe Format) 101
shared mobile trunk, setting 210
signal channel, about 109
signaling protocol
T1 132
silence suppression 297
single call handling 224, 254
single call waiting 181
SIP Early Media 297
SIP Options, checking if devices
are ready 129
SIP tie trunk properties 126
SIP transport options 298
SIP transport, ext assignment vs
codec profile 298
SIP trunk properties, setting 127
SIP trusted device list 111
skill-based routing 254
SMTP service 63
SMTP/POP3
setting for extension 172
speed dial
station 170
speed dialing
configuration 36
SQL 41
starting AltiGen services 362
static noise, test tool 358
station speed dialing 170
Status bar information 20
Stop Switching Service 25
stop/start
MAXCS services 25
stopping AltiGen services 362
subscribing to service 391
Superframe Format (SF) 101
switchover to alternate server
312, 319
synchronizing domain servers
manually 323
system
business hours 33
call park 29
call restrictions 38
country relevant 42
distinctive ringing 28
e-mail 63
extension length 30
home area code 29
ID 28
main number 29
messaging 59
numbering plan 29
summary report 325
work days configuration 35
system clock master 101
system data
backup 358
restore 358
system hang, test tool 357
System menu 18
system reports 325–327
system requirements 5
T
T1
channel assignment 392
subscribing to service 391
T1 signaling
dialing delay 132
protocol 132
T1/E1 clock 101
T1/PRI
troubleshooting 109
TCP fragmentation 284
TCP ports 395
Maxcs behind NAT 303
technical support 399
technical training for system admins 400
TEI (terminal endpoint identifier)
107
terminal endpoint identifier (TEI)
107
test tools 357
testing AltiGen boards 357
text tag, collecting digits 70
TFTP server 198
The 66
tie trunks 39, 125
time display 198
toll call prefixes 43
tools, AltiGen 357
Trace Collector tool 363
trace, collecting 363
traffic, VoIP statistics 23
training, technical, for system ad-
mins 400
transmitted caller ID 162
transport layer security 298
Triton Analog Station Line Properties dialog box 165
Triton analog trunk GS/LS properties, setting 134
Triton Resource board 95
Triton T1/E1 trunk properties,
setting 131
troubleshooting
cannot make connection 401
checking network configuration 401
checking traffic 401
loop-back test 401
poor voice quality 401
troubleshooting T1/PRI 109
trunk
access code 123, 126
attributes 125
Centrex 125
configuring recording 126
dialing scheme 124
direction of transmission 124
incoming call routing 140
location format 123
phone number 124
trunk access 33
trunk access code vs route access
code 123, 149
trunk based recording 84
trunk channel, measuring Rx level
138
trunk configuration 121
Trunk Monitor Enable option 185
trunk properties
H323 tie, setting 126
SIP tie, setting 126
SIP trunk, setting 127
Triton analog trunk GS/LS, setting 134
Triton T1/E1 trunk, setting 131
Trunk View window 21, 122
trunks
paging 124
setting attributes 123
Triton T1/E1 trunk properties,
setting 131
unavailable 121
using Apply To button 123
trunks, tie 39
U
UDP 285
UDP ports 395
MaxCS behind NAT 303
unanswered calls 223
handling 252
unanswered calls, handling 181
uninstalling MAXCS 15
unusual voice mail activity notification 175
update prompts 46
Use 27
user defined # 200
users, managing VoIP domain
313
V
View menu 18
View windows 20
virtual extension 160
voice
quality 401
Voice File Converter 366
voice mail
configuration 59
distribution lists 63
messaging 59
mobile extension 212
setting notification 174
synchronizing with Exchange
server 172
voice mail activity notification,
unusual 175
voice mail activity, unusual
setting parameters for notification 175
voice mail playing order 219, 248
voice quality
and WAN bandwidth 300
voicemail playing order 173
VoIP
codec profiles 295
VoIP bandwidth
about 292
requirements 284, 292
VoIP channel usage 23
VoIP configuration 281
VoIP domain
adding servers 308, 309
extension scope 314
managing users 313
master 306
multi-site, creating 306
rejoining a server to 310
relocating extension 317
relocating extension using #27
319
synchronizing manually 323
system ID and 309
VoIP menu 18
VoIP network guidelines 281
MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
409
VoIP network management 291
W
WAN
bandwidth 284
router configuration 285
WAN router, configuring 285
web IP calls 141
configuring incall routing 141
windows
view (boards, trunks, etc.) 20
work days, setting up 35
Work/Hunt Group Converter 368
Work/Hunt Group Converter tool
368
workgroup
adding a 237
answer handling 253
business hours 241
configuration 235
configuring basic attributes
237
converting to hunt group 368
incoming call handling 251
logging outbound calls 170
mail management 246
message notification 249
queue management 255
recording options 239
setup 237
single call handling 254
status display 200
workgroup queue
agent pick up call 169
Workgroup View window 22
wrap-up time, setting 169
Z
zero code suppression 101
Bell 101
GTE 101
Jam Bit 8 101
410 MaxCS 7.0 Update 1 Administration Manual
Download PDF